5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.

c om

FOREWORD

Construction of government infrastructure facilities of the highest quality

has always been the primary mandate of the Department of Public Works and
Highways (DPWH). Cognizant of the importance of providing effective standard
specifications to be used in the implementation of projects that will produce
sound, durable and economical structures, this Department has revised the 1995
edition of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports
(Volume II).
The revision was made in response to some valid comments on the use
of said specifications to suit the actual field conditions and in consonance with
the policy direction of the Department to improve the quality of infrastructure
projects. All previous amendments made as well as new specifications
developed were considered and included in this 2004 edition, for the guidance
and compliance of all concerned.

FLORANTE SORIQUEZ
Acting Secretary

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 1/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

January 24, 2005

Department Order )
)
No. 24 )
Series of 2005 )
SUBJECT : DPWH Standard Specifications for Public
Works and Highways, 2004 Edition: Volume II,
Highways, Bridges and Airports.

It is hereby directed that henceforth, the DPWH Standard Specifications for

Public Works and Highways 2004 Edition: Volume II – Highways, Bridges and Airports
shall be adopted in the implementation of all infrastructure projects of said categories;
except for projects which have already been advertised for bids and for which
specifications other than the above standards have been adopted. Where necessary, these
Standard Specifications shall be supplemented by special provisions.

For strict compliance.

All previous issuances contrary with this Order are hereby revoked.

SGD
FLORANTE SORIQUEZ
Acting Secretary

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 2/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 3/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

VOLUME II

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGHWAYS, BRIDGES AND AIRPORTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PAGE

PART A- FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER --------------------------- 1

PART B- OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS --------------------------- 5

PART C- EARTHWORK --------------------------- 6

Item 100- Clearing and Grubbing --------------- 6

Item 101- Removal of Structures and Obstructions --------------- 9
Item 102- Excavation --------------- 12
Item 103- Structure Excavation --------------- 18
Item 104- Embankment --------------- 24
Item 105- Subgrade Preparation --------------- 31
Item 106- Compaction Equipment and Density --------------- 34
Control Strips
Item 107- Overhaul --------------- 36

PART D- SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE --------------------------- 38

Item 200- Aggregate Subbase Course --------------- 38

Item
Item 201-
202- Aggregate Base Course
Crushed Aggregate Base Course ---------------
--------------- 41
44
Item 203- Lime Stabilized Road Mix Base Course --------------- 46
Item 204- Portland Cement Stabilized Road Mix --------------- 51
Base Course
Item 205- Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base --------------- 53
Course
Item 206- Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix --------------- 54
Base Course
Item 207- Aggregate Stockpile --------------- 57

PART E- SURFACE COURSES --------------------------- 59

Item 300-
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 Aggregate Surface Course --------------- 59 4/437

Item 301- Bituminous Prime Coat --------------- 61

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Item 308- Cold Asphalt Plant-Mix --------------- 95

Item 309- Bituminous Plant-Mix (Stockpile --------------- 100
Maintenance Mixture)
Item 310- Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, --------------- 102
Hot Laid
Item 311- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement --------------- 104

PART F- BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION --------------------------- 134

Item 400- Piling --------------- 134

Item 401- Railings --------------- 160
Item 402- Timber Structures --------------- 164
Item 403- Metal Structures --------------- 169
Item 404- Reinforcing Steel --------------- 207
Item 405- Structural Concrete --------------- 210
Item 406- Prestressed Concrete Structures --------------- 220
Item 407- Concrete Structures --------------- 230
Item 408- Steel Bridges --------------- 250
Item 409- Welded Structural Steel --------------- 255
Item 410- Treated and Untreated Timber --------------- 267
Item 411- Paint --------------- 269
Item 412- Elastomeric Bearing Pads --------------- 276
Item 413- Pre Molded Joint Filler for Concrete --------------- 281
Paving and Structural Construction

PART DRAINAGE AND SLOPE --------------------------- 282

G- PROTECTION STRUCTURES
Item 500- Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains --------------- 282
Item 501- Underdrains --------------- 288
Item 502- Manholes, Inlets and Catch Basins --------------- 291
Item 503- Drainage Steel Grating with Frame --------------- 294
Item 504- Cleaning and Reconditioning Existing --------------- 298
Drainage Structures
Item 505- Riprap and Grouted Riprap --------------- 300
Item 506- Stone Masonry --------------- 304
Item 507- Rubble Concrete --------------- 308
Item 508- Hand-Laid Rock Embankment --------------- 310
Item 509- Sheet Piles --------------- 312
Item 510- Concrete Slope Protection
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
--------------- 313 5/437

Item 511- Gabions and Mattresses --------------- 315

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Item 603- Guardrail --------------- 330

Item 604- Fencing --------------- 334
Item 605- Road Sign --------------- 336
Item 606- Pavement Markings --------------- 340
Item 607- Reflective Pavement Studs --------------- 344
Item 608- Topsoil --------------- 347
Item 609- Sprigging --------------- 348
Item 610- Sodding --------------- 352
Item 611- Tree Planting --------------- 355
Item 612- Reflective Thermoplastic Stripping --------------- 362
Material (Solid Form)

PART I- MATERIALS DETAILS --------------------------- 367

Item 700- Hydraulic Cement --------------- 367

Item 701- Construction Lime (Hydrated) --------------- 367
Item 702- Bituminous Materials --------------- 370
Item 703- Aggregates --------------- 376
Item 703A- Mineral Filler --------------- 385
Item 704- Masonry Units --------------- 387
Item 705- Joint Materials --------------- 387
Item 706- Concrete Clay, Plastic and Fiber Pipe --------------- 392
Item 707- Metal Pipe --------------- 394
Item 708- Chemical Admixtures For Concrete --------------- 397
Item 709- Paints --------------- 401
Item 710- Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope --------------- 404
Item 711- Fence and Guardrail --------------- 406

Item
Item 712-
713- Structural
Treated andMetal
Untreated Timber ---------------
--------------- 408
415
Item 714- Water --------------- 416
Item 715- Geotextiles --------------- 417

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 6/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

PART A
FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER

A.1 REQUIREMENTS

A.1.1 Offices and Laboratories for the Engineer

1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain field offices and testing
laboratories, including all the necessary electricity, water, drainage and
telephone services for the use of the Engineer and his staff. The offices and
laboratories shall have at least the floor area prescribed on the Plans and shall
contain the equipment, supplies and furnishings specified in the Contract.
Testing equipment supplied in accordance with the Special Provisions shall be
located in testing
laboratories shall belaboratories as required
ready for occupancy andby
usethe
by Engineer.
the EngineerAllwithin
offices
twoand
(2)
months of the commencement of the Works. Their location and final plan shall
require the approval of the Engineer prior to the start of construction. It is the
intent of this Specification to locate the field offices and laboratories in
government owned lots so that the use by the government of these facilities can
be maximized even after the completion of the project. However, if no
government lot is available, and these structures are to be erected on private
property, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make the necessary
arrangements with the landowner(s) regarding the use of the lot for the
Engineer’s office and laboratories and to remove and/or transfer, if so required
under the Contract, the improvements thereon, including all appurtenances upon
completion of the Works.

All facilities provided by the Contractor shall be near the job site, where
necessary and shall conform to the best standard for the required types. On
completion of the Contract, the facilities provided by the Contractor including
utilities and communication facilities shall revert to the Government including
office equipment, apparatus, pieces of furniture, laboratory equipment, etc,
unless otherwise specified in the Contract documents.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 7/437

The Contractor shall be responsible for raising the ground (if necessary)
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and protection of

all facilities to be provided during the duration of the Contract, including providing
adequate stock of all expendable items, such as light bulbs, light tubes,
laboratory equipment and supplies at all times to ensure proper and continuous
functioning of all the Engineer’s facilities.

The whole area of the Engineer’s compound shall be fenced with barbed
wire (or equivalent) with necessary gates as directed by the Engineer.

The Contractor shall provide suitable utilities and services, such as

potable water, electricity, sewerage and security on a 24-hour basis.
2. The Contractor shall provided qualified and experienced laboratory staff
to carry out all the materials quality control and all the tests specified in the
Contract and required by the Engineer. The person so appointed by the
Contractor to mange the laboratory shall be well experienced in the type of work
to be undertaken and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. He shall
work full time and shall be responsible to the Engineer for all works carried out.

3. The telephone service, if required in the Contract shall have a separate

connection direct to the telephone company’s telephone exchange simgle line for
the exclusive use of the Engineer and his staff.

4. The Contractor shall provide, if required in the Contract, a two-way

radio communication service.

5. Any portable offices required in the Contract shall be dismantled,

moved and erected from time to time as directed by the Engineer.

6. All offices, stores and testing laboratories shall be proficiently guarded

at all times of the day and night, regularly and properly cleaned, adequately
supplied and maintained for the duration of the Contract.

A.1.2 Vehicles for the Engineer

The Contractor shall provide within thirty (30) calendar days after notice to
commence work, the vehicles listed in the Special Provisions for the exclusive
use of the Engineer. The vehicles to be provided by the Contractor shall be to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. All vehicles shall comply in all respects with all
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 8/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The contractor shall maintain the vehicle in first class condition and shall
be supplied with appropriate fuel and lubricants al all times
He shall provide equivalent substitute vehicles during any period when the
specified vehicles are taken out of service for maintenance, repair or any other
reason. Unless otherwise specified, the vehicle shall at the end of the Contract
become the property of the Government.

A.1.3 Assistance to the Engineer

The Contractor shall at all times during the duration of the Contract
provide for the use of the Engineer all equipment, instruments and apparatus, all
information and records and qualified chainmen and laborers required by the
Engineer for inspecting and measuring the Works. Such equipment, instruments
and apparatus shall include those listed in the Special Provisions.

A.1.4 Photographs

The Contractor shall provide record photographs taken as, when and
where directed by the Engineer at intervals of not more than one month. The
photographs shall be sufficient in number and location to record the exact
progress of the Works. The Contractor shall provide one proof print of each
photograph taken, and the negative and ten copies, not less than 254 mm x 203
mm and printed on glossy paper, of any of the photographs by the Engineer. The
photographs retained by the Engineer will become the property of the
Government and the Contractor shall supply approved albums to accommodate
them. Two copies are to be signed by the Contractor, one of which will be signed
by the Engineer and returned to the Contractor.

A.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A.2.1 Measurement

1. Lump-sum items shall be provided for the provision of:

-
Office building
appliances and for the Engineer including pieces of furnitures,
equipment.
- Laboratory building for the Engineer including furnitures,
appliances and equipment.
- Survey equipment for the Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 9/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

4. The quantities for the provision of vehicles for the Engineer shall be the
number of each type of vehicle supplied. The unit of measure is “each”.
5. The quantities for the operation of vehicle for the Engineer shall be for
the time the Engineer is supplied with each vehicle prior to their finally becoming
the property of the Government. The unit of measure is “month”.

6. The quantities for progress photographs shall be the number of

photographs selected and provided as progress photographs. The unit of
measure is ‘each”.
A.2..2 Payment

The quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the

appropriate contract unit price, for each of the particular pay items shown in the
Bill of Quantities which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for
furnishing and maintaining such items.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 10/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

PART B

OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

B.1 OFFICES, SHOPS, STORES AND WORKMENS ACCOMMODATION FOR
CONTRACTOR

The contractor shall provide and maintain such offices, stores, workshops
latrines, housing and messing accommodations as are necessary. These should
be located in the Contractor’s compound, distinct and separate from the
Engineer’s compound. The location, dimensions and layout of such buildings and
places shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall not
be permitted to erect temporary buildings or structures on the site without the
specific permission in writing of the Engineer including approval of the
dimensions of such buildings or structures. Before the commencement of the
period of Warranty, the Contractor shall fence of the Contractor’s store area from
the rest of the Site. By the end of the Period of Warranty, the Contractor shall
remove this fence and all buildings shall be cleared and the area shall be graded
as required by the Engineer.

B.2 MEDICAL ROOM AND FIRST AID FACILITIES

1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain throughout the duration of

the Contract, a medical room together with all necessary supplies to be sited in
the Contractor’s main area. The medical room shall be waterproof; it could be a
building or room designated and used exclusively for the purpose and have a
floor area of at least 15 square meters and a glazed window area of at least 2
square meters.
2. The Contractor shall employ permanently on the site a fully trained
Medical Aide who shall be engaged solely from medical duties.

3. Thetolocation
made known of the medical
all employees room
by posting onand any other
prominent arrangements
locations suitableshall be
notices
in the Site.
4. The Contractor’s arrangement to comply with this Section shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer and also to the approval of any qualified
Medical Officer designated by the Government to supervise medical
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 11/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

PART C – EARTHWORK

ITEM 100 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING

100.1 Description

This item shall consist of clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing all vegetation and
debris as designated in the Contract, except those objects that are designated to remain in
place or are to be removed in consonance with other provisions of this Specification. The work
shall also include the preservation from injury or defacement of all objects designated to remain.

100.2 Construction Requirements

100.2.1 General

The Engineer will establish the limits of work and designate all trees, shrubs, plants and
other things to remain. The Contractor shall preserve all objects designated to remain. Paint
required for cut or scarred surface of trees or shrubs selected for retention shall be an approved
asphaltum base paint prepared especially for tree surgery.

Clearing shall extend one (1) meter beyond the toe of the fill slopes or beyond rounding
of cut slopes as the case maybe for the entire length of the project unless otherwise shown on
the plans or as directed by the Engineer and provided it is within the right of way limits of the
project, with the exception of trees under the jurisdiction of the Forest Management Bureau
(FMB).

100.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing

All surface objects and all trees, stumps, roots and other protruding obstructions, not
designated to remain, shall be cleared and/or grubbed, including mowing as required, except as
provided below:

(1) Removal of undisturbed stumps and roots and nonperishable solid objects with a
minimum depth of one (1) meter below subgrade or slope of embankment will not
be required.

(2) In areas outside of the grading limits of cut and embankment areas, stumps and
nonperishable solid objects shall be cut off not more than 150 mm (6 inches) above
the ground line or low water level.

(3) In areas to be rounded at the top of cut slopes, stumps shall be cut off flush with or
below the surface of the final slope line.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 12/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

designated by the Engineer, and disposed outside the clearing and grubbing limits
as indicated in the typical roadway section.

Except in areas to be excavated, stump holes and other holes from which obstructions
are removed shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted to the required density.

If perishable material is burned, it shall be burned under the constant care of component
watchmen at such times and in such a manner that the surrounding vegetation, other adjacent
property, or anything designated to remain on the right of way will not be jeopardized. If
permitted, burning shall be done in accordance with applicable laws, ordinances, and
regulation.

The Contractor shall use high intensity burning procedures, (i.e., incinerators, high
stacking or pit and ditch burning with forced air supplements) that produce intense burning with
little or no visible smoke emission during the burning process. At the conclusion of each
burning session, the fire shall be completely extinguished so that no smoldering debris remains.

In the event that the Contractor is directed by the Engineer not to start burning
operations or to suspend such operations because of hazardous weather conditions, material to

be burned to
Contractor which interferes
temporary with subsequent
locations construction
clear of construction operations
operations and shall
later, be moved by
if directed the
by the
Engineer, shall be placed on a designated spot and burned.

Materials and debris which cannot be burned and perishable materials may be disposed
off by methods and at locations approved by the Engineer, on or off the project. If disposal is
by burying, the debris shall be placed in layers with the material so disturbed to avoid nesting.
Each layer shall be covered or mixed with earth material by the land-fill method to fill all voids.
The top layer of material buried shall be covered with at least 300 mm (12 inches) of earth or
other approved material and shall be graded, shaped and compacted to present a pleasing
appearance. If the disposal location is off the project, the Contractor shall make all necessary
arrangements with property owners in writing for obtaining suitable disposal locations which are
outside the limits of view from the project. The cost involved shall be included in the unit bid
price. A copy of such agreement shall be furnished to the Engineer. The disposal areas shall
be seeded, fertilized and mulched at the Contractor’s expense.

Woody material may be disposed off by chipping. The wood chips may be used for
mulch, slope erosion control or may be uniformly spread over selected areas as directed by the
Engineer. Wood chips used as mulch for slope erosion control shall have a maximum
thickness of 12 mm (1/2 inch) and faces not exceeding 3900 mm 2 (6 square inches) on any
individual surface area. Wood chips not designated for use under other sections shall be
spread over the designated areas in layers not to exceed 75 mm (3 inches) loose thickness.
Diseased trees shall be buried or disposed off as directed by the Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 13/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

trimmed to give a clear height of 6 m (20 feet) above the roadbed surface. All trimming shall be
done by skilled workmen and in accordance with good tree surgery practices.

Timber cut inside the area staked for clearing shall be felled within the area to be
cleared.

100.2.3 Individual Removal of Trees or Stumps

Individual trees or stumps designated by the Engineer for removal and located in areas
other than those established for clearing and grubbing and roadside cleanup shall be removed
and disposed off as specified under Subsection 100.2.2 except trees removed shall be cut as
nearly flush with the ground as practicable without removing stumps.
100.3 Method of Measurement

Measurement will be by one or more of the following alternate methods:

1. Area Basis. The work to be paid for shall be the number of hectares and
fractions thereof acceptably cleared and grubbed within the limits indicated on the

Plans or and
clearing as may be adjusted
grubbing limits in field staking
shown on the by the Engineer.
Plans Areas
or not staked for not withinand
clearing the
grubbing will not be measured for payment.

2. Lump-Sum Basis. When the Bill of Quantities contains a Clearing and Grubbing
lump-sum item, no measurement of area will be made for such item.

3. Individual Unit Basis (Selective Clearing). The diameter of trees will be measured
at a height of 1.4 m (54 inches) above the ground. Trees less than 150 mm (6
inches) in diameter will not be measured for payment.

When Bill of Quantities indicates measurement of trees by individual unit basis, the units
will be designated and measured in accordance with the following schedule of sizes:

Diameter at height of 1.4 m

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
Pay Item Designation 14/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 100.3, shall be paid for at
the Contract unit price for each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of
Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

100 (1) Clearing and Grubbing Hectare

100 (2) Clearing and Grubbing Lump Sum
100 (3) Individual Removal of Each
Trees, Small
100 (4) Individual removal of Each
Trees, Large

ITEM 101 – REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

101.1 Description

This Item shall consist of the removal wholly or in part, and satisfactory disposal of all
buildings, fences, structures, old pavements, abandoned pipe lines, and any other obstructions
which are not designated or permitted to remain, except for the obstructions to be removed and
disposed off under other items in the Contract. It shall also include the salvaging of designated

materials and backfilling the resulting trenches, holes, and pits.

101.2 Construction Requirements

101.2.1 General

The Contractor shall perform the work described above, within and adjacent to the
roadway, on Government land or easement, as shown on the Plans or as directed by the
Engineer. All designated salvable material shall be removed, without unnecessary damage, in
sections or pieces which may be readily transported and shall be stored by the Contractor at
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 15/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

101.2.2 Removal of Existing Bridges, Culverts, and other Drainage Structures

All existing bridges, culverts and other drainage structures in use by traffic shall not be
removed until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate traffic. The
removal of existing culverts within embankment areas will be required only as necessary for
the installation of new structures. Abandoned culverts shall be broken down, crushed and
sealed or plugged. All retrieved culvert for future use as determined by the Engineer shall be
carefully removed and all precautions shall be employed to avoid breakage or structural
damage to any of its part. All sections of structures removed which are not designated for
stockpiling or re-laying shall become the property of the Government and be removed from the
project or disposed off in a manner approved by the Engineer.

Unless otherwise directed, the substructures of existing structures shall be removed

down to the natural stream bottom and those parts outside of the stream shall be removed
down to at least 300 mm (12 inches) below natural ground surface. Where such portions of
existing structures lie wholly or in part within the limits for a new structure, they shall be
removed as necessary to accommodate the construction of the proposed structure.

Steel bridges and wood bridges when specified to be salvaged shall be carefully

dismantled without by
marking is waived damaged. Steel members
the Engineer. shallmaterial
All salvaged be matchshallmarked unless
be stored as such match
specified in
Subsection 101.2.1.

Structures designated to become the property of the Contractor shall be removed from
the right-of-way.

Blasting or other operations necessary for the removal of an existing structure or

obstruction, which may damage new construction, shall be completed prior to placing the new
work, unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions.

101.2.3 Removal of Pipes Other than Pipe Culverts

Unless otherwise provided, all pipes shall be carefully removed and every precaution
taken to avoid breakage or damaged. Pipes to be relaid shall be removed and stored when
necessary so that there will be no loss of damage before re-laying. The Contractor shall
replace sections lost from storage or damage by negligence, at his own expense.

101.2.4 Removal of Existing Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, etc.

All concrete pavement, base course, sidewalks, curbs, gutters, etc., designated for
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 16/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

(3) Otherwise demolished and disposed off as directed by the Engineer. When
specified, ballast, gravel, bituminous materials or other surfacing or pavement
materials shall be removed and stockpiled as required in Subsection 101.2.1,
otherwise such materials shall be disposed off as directed.

There will be no separate payment for excavating for removal of structures and
obstructions or for backfilling and compacting the remaining cavity.

101.3 Method of Measurement

When the Contract stipulates that payment will be made for removal of obstructions on
lump-sum basis, the pay item will include all structures and obstructions encountered within the
roadway. Where the contract stipulates that payment will be made for the removal of specific
items on a unit basis, measurement will be made by the unit stipulated in the Contract.

Whenever the Bill of Quantities does not contain an item for any aforementioned
removals, the work will not be paid for directly, but will be considered as a subsidiary obligation
of the Contractor under other Contract Items.

101.4 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 101.3, shall be paid for at
the Contract unit price or lump sum price bid for each of the Pay Items listed below that is
included in the Bill of Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for
removing and disposing of obstructions, including materials, labor, equipments, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item. The price shall also
include backfilling, salvage of materials removed, their custody, preservation, storage on the
right-of-way and disposal as provided herein.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

101 (1) Removal of Structures Lump Sum

and Obstruction
101 (2) Removal of Each
101 (3) Removal of Square Meter
101 (4) Removal of Linear Meter

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 17/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

102.1.1 Roadway Excavation

Roadway excavation will include excavation and grading for roadways, parking areas,
intersections, approaches, slope rounding, benching, waterways and ditches; removal of
unsuitable material from the roadbed and beneath embankment areas; and excavating selected
material found in the roadway as ordered by the Engineer for specific use in the improvement.
Roadway excavation will be classified as “unclassified excavation”, “rock excavation”, “common
excavation”, or “muck excavation” as indicated in the Bill of Quantities and hereinafter
described.

(1) Unclassified Excavation. Unclassified excavation shall consist of the excavation

and disposal of all materials regardless of its nature, not classified and included in
the Bill of Quantities under other pay items.

(2) Rock Excavation. Rock excavation shall consist of igneous, sedimentary and
metamorphic rock which cannot be excavated without blasting or the use of rippers,
and all boulders or other detached stones each having a volume of 1 cubic meter or
more as determined by physical measurements or visually by the Engineer.

(3) Common Excavation. Common excavations shall consist of all excavation not
included in the Bill of Quantities under “rock excavation” or other pay items.

(4) Muck Excavation. Muck excavation shall consist of the removal and disposal of
deposits of saturated or unsaturated mixtures of soils and organic matter not
suitable for foundation material regardless of moisture content.

102.1.2 Borrow Excavation

Borrow excavation shall consist of the excavation and utilization of approved material
required for the construction of embankments or for other portions of the work, and shall be
obtained from approved sources, in accordance with Clause 61 and the following:

(1) Borrow, Case 1

Borrow Case 1 will consist of material obtained from sources designated on
the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
(2) Borrow, Case 2
Borrow Case 2 will consist of material obtained from sources provided by the
Contractor.

The material shall meet the quality requirements determined by the Engineer unless
otherwise provided in the Contract.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 18/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

undertaken by the Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as basis for the
computation of the actual volume of the excavated materials.

All excavations shall be finished to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces. No

materials shall be wasted without authority of the Engineer. Excavation operations shall be
conducted so that material outside of the limits of slopes will not be disturbed. Prior to
excavation, all necessary clearing and grubbing in that area shall have been performed in
accordance with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing.

102.2.2 Conservation of Topsoil

Where provided for on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, suitable topsoil
encountered in excavation and on areas where embankment is to be placed shall be removed
to such extent and to such depth as the Engineer may direct. The removed topsoil shall be
transported and deposited in storage piles at locations approved by the Engineer. The topsoil
shall be completely removed to the required depth from any designated area prior to the
beginning of regular excavation or embankment work in the area and shall be kept separate
from other excavated materials for later use.

102.2.3 Utilization of Excavated Materials

All suitable material removed from the excavation shall be used in the formation of the
embankment, subgrade, shoulders, slopes, bedding, and backfill for structures, and for other
purposes shown on the Plans or as directed.

The Engineer will designate as unsuitable those soils that cannot be properly compacted
in embankments. All unsuitable material shall be disposed off as shown on the Plans or as
directed without delay to the Contractor.

Only approved materials shall be used in the construction of embankments and backfills.

All excess material, including rock and boulders that cannot be used in embankments
shall be disposed off as directed.

Material encountered in the excavation and determined by the Engineer as suitable for
topping, road finishing, slope protection, or other purposes shall be conserved and utilized as
directed by the Engineer.
Borrow material shall not be placed until after the readily accessible roadway excavation
has been placed in the fill, unless otherwise permitted or directed by the Engineer. If the
Contractor places moré borrow than is required and thereby causes a waste of excavation, the
amount of such waste will be deducted from the borrow volume.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 19/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

by truck watering units, to ensure that the embankment material contains the proper moisture at
the time of compaction.

The Contractor shall provide drilling equipment capable of suitably checking the moisture
penetration to the full depth of the excavation.

102.2.5 Presplitting

Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, rock excavation which requires drilling and
shooting shall be presplit.

Presplitting to obtain faces in the rock and shale formations shall be performed by: (1)
drilling holes at uniform intervals along the slope lines, (2) loading and stemming the holes with
appropriate explosives and stemming material, and (3) detonating the holes simultaneously.

Prior to starting drilling operations for presplitting, the Contractor shall furnish the
Engineer a plan outlining the position of all drill holes, depth of drilling, type of explosives to be
used, loading pattern and sequence of firing. The drilling and blasting plan is for record
purposes only and will not absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for using proper drilling
and blasting procedures. Controlled blasting shall begin with a short test section of a length
approved by the Engineer. The test section shall be presplit, production drilled and blasted and
sufficient material excavated whereby the Engineer can determine if the Contractor’s methods
are satisfactory. The Engineer may order discontinuance of the presplitting when he
determines that the materials encountered have become unsuitable for being presplit.

The holes shall be charged with explosives of the size, kind, strength, and at the spacing
suitable for the formations being presplit, and with stemming material which passes a 9.5 mm
(3/8 inch) standard sieve and which has the qualities for proper confinement of the explosives.

The finished presplit slope shall be reasonably uniform and free of loose rock. Variance
from the true plane of the excavated backslope shall not exceed 300 mm (12 inches); however,
localized irregularities or surface variations that do not constitute a safety hazard or an
impairment to drainage courses or facilities will be permitted.

A maximum offset of 600 mm (24 inches) will be permitted for a construction working
bench at the bottom of each lift for use in drilling the next lower presplitting pattern.

102.2.6 Excavation of Ditches, Gutters, etc.

All materials excavated from side ditches and gutters, channel changes, irrigation
ditches, inlet and outlet ditches, toe ditchers, furrow ditches, and such other ditches as may be
designated on the Plans or staked by the Engineer, shall be utilized as provided in Subsection
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 20/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Furrow ditches shall be formed by plowing a continuous furrow along the line staked by
the Engineer. Methods other than plowing may be used if acceptable to the Engineer. The
ditches shall be cleaned out by hand shovel work, by ditcher, or by some other suitable method,
throwing all loose materials on the downhill side so that the bottom of the finished ditch shall be
approximately 450 mm (18 inches) below the crest of the loose material piled on the downhill
side. Hand finish will not be required, but the flow lines shall be in satisfactory shape to provide
drainage without overflow.

102.2.7 Excavation of Roadbed Level

Rock shall be excavated to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) below subgrade within the
limits of the roadbed, and the excavation backfilled with material designated on the Plans or
approved by the Engineer and compacted to the required density.

When excavation methods employed by the Contractor leave undrained pockets in the
rock surface, the Contractor shall at his own expense, properly drain such depressions or when
permitted by the Engineer fill the depressions with approved impermeable material.

Material below subgrade, other than solid rock shall be thoroughly scarified to a depth of
150 mm (6 inches) and the moisture content increased or reduced, as necessary, to bring the
material throughout this 150 mm layer to the moisture content suitable for maximum
compaction. This layer shall then be compacted in accordance with Subsection 104.3.3.

102.2.8 Borrow Areas

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of opening any borrow
areas so that cross-section elevations and measurements of the ground surface after stripping
may be taken, and the borrow material can be tested before being used. Sufficient time for
testing the borrow material shall be allowed.

All borrow areas shall be bladed and left in such shape as to permit accurate
measurements after excavation has been completed. The Contractor shall not excavate
beyond the dimensions and elevations established, and no material shall be removed prior to
the staking out and cross-sectioning of the site. The finished borrow areas shall be
approximately true to line and grade established and specified and shall be finished, as
prescribed in Clause 61, Standard Specifications for Public Works and Highways, Volume 1.
When necessary to remove fencing, the fencing shall be replaced in at least as good condition
as it was originally. The Contractor shall be responsible for the confinement of livestock when a
portion of the fence is removed.

102.2.9 Removal of Unsuitable Material

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 21/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

operations in such a way that the Engineer can take the necessary cross-sectional
measurements before the backfill is placed.

The excavation of muck shall be handled in a manner that will not permit the entrapment
of muck within the backfill. The material used for backfilling up to the ground line or water
level, whichever is higher, shall be rock or other suitable granular material selected from the
roadway excavation, if available. If not available, suitable material shall be obtained from other
approved sources. Unsuitable material removed shall be disposed off in designated areas
shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.

102.3 Method of Measurement

The cost of excavation of material which is incorporated in the Works or in other areas of
fill shall be deemed to be included in the Items of Work where the material is used.

Measurement of Unsuitable or Surplus Material shall be the net volume in its original
position.

For measurement purposes, surplus suitable material shall be calculated as the

difference between the net volume of suitable material required to be used in embankment
corrected by applying a shrinkage factor or a swell factor in case of rock excavation,
determined by laboratory tests to get its original volume measurement, and the net volume of
suitable material from excavation in the original position. Separate pay items shall be provided
for surplus common, unclassified and rock material.

The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in the contract unit prices all costs of
obtaining land for the disposal of unsuitable or surplus material.

102.4 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 102.3 shall be paid for at
the contract unit price for each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of
Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for the removal and disposal of
excavated materials including all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete
the work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

102 (1) Unsuitable Excavation Cubic Meter

102 (2) Surplus Common Excavation Cubic Meter
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 22/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

This Item shall consist of the necessary excavation for foundation of bridges, culverts,
underdrains, and other structures not otherwise provided for in the Specifications. Except as
otherwise provided for pipe culverts, the backfilling of completed structures and the disposal of
all excavated surplus materials, shall be in accordance with these Specifications and in
reasonably close conformity with the Plans or as established by the Engineer.

This Item shall include necessary diverting of live streams, bailing, pumping, draining,
sheeting, bracing, and the necessary construction of cribs and cofferdams, and furnishing the
materials therefore, and the subsequent removal of cribs and cofferdams and the placing of all
necessary backfill.

replaceItunsuitable
shall alsomaterial
include encountered
the furnishing andthe
below placing of approved
foundation foundation
elevation fill material to
of structures.

No allowance will be made for classification of different types of material encountered.

103.2 Construction Requirements

103.2.1 Clearing and Grubbing

Prior to starting excavation operations in any area, all necessary clearing and grubbing in
that area shall have been performed in accordance with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing.

103.2.2 Excavation

(1) General, all structures. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in
advance of the beginning of any excavation so that cross-sectional elevations and
measurements may be taken on the undisturbed ground. The natural ground
adjacent to the structure shall not be disturbed without permission of the Engineer.

Trenches or foundation pits for structures or structure footings shall be

excavated to the lines and grades or elevations shown on the Plans or as staked by
the Engineer. They shall be of sufficient size to permit the placing of structures or
structure footings of the full width and length shown. The elevations of the bottoms
of footings, as shown on the Plans, shall be considered as approximate only and
the Engineer may order, in writing, such changes in dimensions or elevations of
footings as may be deemed necessary, to secure a satisfactory foundation.
Boulders, logs, and other objectionable materials encountered in excavation
shall be removed.

After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer to
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 23/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

When the footing is to rest on material other than rock, excavation to final grade
shall not be made until just before the footing is to be placed. When the foundation
material is soft or mucky or otherwise unsuitable, as determined by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall remove the unsuitable material and backfill with approved
granular material. This foundation fill shall be placed and compacted in 150 mm (6
inches) layers up to the foundation elevation.

When foundation piles are used, the excavation of each pit shall be completed
before the piles are driven and any placing of foundation fill shall be done after the
piles are driven. After the driving is completed, all loose and displaced materials
shall be removed, leaving a smooth, solid bed to receive the footing.

(3) Pipe Culverts. The width of the pipe trench shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory
jointing of the pipe and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around
the pipe.

Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, it shall be

removed below the foundation grade for a depth of at least 300 mm or 4 mm for
each 100 mm of fill over the top of pipe, whichever is greater, but not to exceed
three-quarters of the vertical inside diameter of the pipe. The width of the
excavation shall be at least 300 mm (12 inches) greater than the horizontal outside
diameter of the pipe. The excavation below grade shall be backfilled with selected
fine compressible material, such as silty clay or loam, and lightly compacted in
layers not over 150 mm (6 inches) in uncompacted depth to form a uniform but
yielding foundation.

Where a firm foundation is not encountered at the grade established, due to soft,
spongy, or other unstable soil, such unstable soil under the pipe and for a width of
at least one diameter on each side of the pipe shall be removed to the depth
directed by the Engineer and replaced with approved granular foundation fill
material properly compacted to provide adequate support for the pipe, unless other
special construction methods are called for on the Plans.

The foundation surface shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density

throughout the length of the culvert and, if directed by the Engineer, shall be
cambered in the direction parallel to the pipe centerline.

Where pipe culverts are to be placed in trenches excavated in embankments,

the excavation of each trench shall be performed after the embankment has been
constructed to a plane parallel to the proposed profile grade and to such height
above the bottom of the pipe as shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 24/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Suitable and practically watertight cofferdams shall be used wherever water-bearing

strata are encountered above the elevation of the bottom of the excavation. If requested, the
Contractor shall submit drawings showing his proposed method of cofferdam construction, as
directed by the Engineer.

Cofferdams or cribs for foundation construction shall in general, be carried well below the
bottoms of the footings and shall be well braced and as nearly watertight as practicable. In
general, the interior dimensions of cofferdams shall be such as to give sufficient clearance for
the construction of forms and the inspection of their exteriors, and to permit pumping outside of
the forms. Cofferdams or cribs which are tilted or moved laterally during the process of sinking
shall be righted or enlarged so as to provide the necessary clearance.
When conditions are encountered which, as determined by the Engineer, render it
impracticable to dewater the foundation before placing the footing, the Engineer may require the
construction of a concrete foundation seal of such dimensions as he may consider necessary,
and of such thickness as to resist any possible uplift. The concrete for such seal shall be
placed as shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer. The foundation shall then be
dewatered and the footing placed. When weighted cribs are employed and the mass is
utilized to overcome partially the hydrostatic pressure acting against the bottom of the
foundation seal, special anchorage such as dowels or keys shall be provided to transfer the
entire mass of the crib to the foundation seal. When a foundation seal is placed under water,
the cofferdams shall be vented or ported at low water level as directed.

Cofferdams shall be constructed so as to protect green concrete against damage from

sudden rising of the stream and to prevent damage to the foundation by erosion. No timber or
bracing shall be left in cofferdams or cribs in such a way as to extend into substructure
masonry, without written permission from the Engineer.

Any pumping that may be permitted from the interior of any foundation enclosure shall be
done in such a manner as to preclude the possibility of any portion of the concrete material
being carried away. Any pumping required during the placing of concrete, or for a period of at
least 24 hours thereafter, shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the concrete
forms. Pumping to dewater a sealed cofferdam shall not commence until the seal has set
sufficiently to withstand the hydrostatic pressure.

Unless otherwise provided, cofferdams or cribs, with all sheeting and bracing involved
therewith, shall be removed by the Contractor after the completion of the substructure.
Removal shall be effected in such manner as not to disturb or mar finished masonry.

103.2.5 Preservation of Channel

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 25/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Excavated areas around structures shall be backfilled with free draining granular material
approved by the Engineer and placed in horizontal layers not over 150 mm (6 inches) in
thickness, to the level of the original ground surface. Each layer shall be moistened or dried as
required and thoroughly compacted with mechanical tampers.

In placing backfills or embankment, the material shall be placed simultaneously in so far

as possible to approximately the same elevation on both sides of an abutment, pier, or wall. If
conditions require placing backfill or embankment appreciably higher on one side than on the
opposite side, the additional material on the higher side shall not be placed until the masonry
has been in place for 14 days, or until tests made by the laboratory under the supervision of the

Engineer establishes
pressure created by thethat the masonry
methods used andhas attained
materials sufficient
placed withoutstrength to strain
damage or withstand anya
beyond
safe factor.

Backfill or embankment shall not be placed behind the walls of concrete culverts or
abutments or rigid frame structures until the top slab is placed and cured. Backfill and
embankment behind abutments held at the top by the superstructure, and behind the sidewalls
of culverts, shall be carried up simultaneously behind opposite abutments or sidewalls.

All embankments adjacent to structures shall be constructed in horizontal layers and

compacted as prescribed in Subsection 104.3.3 except that mechanical tampers may be used
for the required compaction. Special care shall be taken to prevent any wedging action against
the structure and slopes bounding or within the areas to be filled shall be benched or serrated to
prevent wedge action. The placing of embankment and the benching of slopes shall continue
in such a manner that at all times there will be horizontal berm of thoroughly compacted
material for a distance at least equal to the height of the abutment or wall to the backfilled
against except insofar as undisturbed material obtrudes upon the area.

Broken rock or coarse sand and gravel shall be provided for a drainage filter at
weepholes as shown on the Plans.

103.2.7 Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment for Pipe Culverts

Bedding, Backfill and Embankment for pipe culverts shall be done in accordance with
Item 500, Pipe Culverts and Storm Drains.

103.3 Method of Measurement

103.3.1 Structure Excavation

The volume of excavation to be paid for will be the number of cubic metres measured in
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 26/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

(2) The volume of excavation for culvert and sections outside the vertical plane for
culverts stipulated in (1) above.

(3) The volume outside of neat lines of underdrains as shown on the Plans, and outside
the limits of foundation fill as ordered by the Engineer.

(4) The volume included within the staked limits of the roadway excavation, contiguous
channel changes, ditches, etc., for which payment is otherwise provided in the
Specification.

(5) Volume of water or other liquid resulting from construction operations and which

can be pumped or drained away.

(6) The volume of any excavation performed prior to the taking of elevations and
measurements of the undisturbed ground.

(7) the volume of any material rehandled, except that where the Plans indicate or the
Engineer directs the excavation after embankment has been placed and except that
when installation of pipe culverts by the imperfect trench method specified in Item
500 is required, the volume of material re-excavated as directed will be included.

(8) The volume of excavation for footings ordered at a depth more than 1.5 m (60
inches) below the lowest elevation for such footings shown on the original Contract
Plans, unless the Bill of Quantities contains a pay item for excavation ordered below
the elevations shown on the Plans for individual footings.

103.3.2 Bridge Excavation

The volume of excavation, designated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions as

“Bridge Excavation” will be measured as described below and will be kept separate for pay
purposes from the excavation for all structures.

The volume of bridge excavation to be paid shall be the vertical 450 mm (18 inches)
outside of and parallel to the neat lines of the footing. The vertical planes shall constitute the
vertical faces of the volume for pay quantities regardless of excavation inside or outside of
these planes.

103.3.3 Foundation Fill

The volume of foundation fill to be paid for will be the number of cubic metres measures
in final position of the special granular material actually provided and placed below the
foundation elevation of structures as specified, complete in place and accepted.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 27/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

excavation included in the work of this Section, to a depth of 1.5 m below the lowest elevation
shown on the Plans for each separable foundation structure.

103.3.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 103.3, shall be paid for at
the contract unit price for each of the particular pay items listed below that is included in the Bill
of Quantities. The payment shall constitute full compensation for the removal and disposal of
excavated materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the work prescribed in this Item, except as follows:

(1) Any excavation

elevation shown for footings
on the ordered
original at aPlans
Contract depthwill
more thanfor
be paid 1.5asmprovided
below the lowest
in Part K,
Measurement and Payment, unless a pay item for excavation ordered below Plan
elevation appears in the Bill of Quantities.

(2) Concrete will be measured and paid for as provided under Item 405, Structural
Concrete.

(3) Any roadway or borrow excavation required in excess of the quantity excavated for
structures will be measured and paid for as provided under Item 102.

(4) Shoring, cribbing, and related work required for excavation ordered more than 1.5
m (60 inches ) below Plan elevation will be paid for in accordance with Part K.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

103 (1) Structure Excavation Cubic Meter

103 (2) Bridge Excavation Cubic Meter
103 (3) Foundation Fill Cubic Meter
103 (4) Excavation ordered below Cubic Meter
Plan elevation
103 (5) Shoring, cribbing, and
related work Lump sum
103 (6) Pipe culverts and drain Cubic Meter
excavation

ITEM 104 – EMBANKMENT

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 28/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Embankments shall be constructed of suitable materials, in consonance with the

following definitions:

1. Suitable Material – Material which is acceptable in accordance with the Contract

and which can be compacted in the manner specified in this Item. It can be
common material or rock.

Selected Borrow, for topping – soil of such gradation that all particles will pass a
sieve with 75 mm (3 inches) square openings and not more than 15 mass percent
will pass the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, as determined by AASHTO T 11. The

material
T 90 andshall have
a liquid a plasticity
limit index
of not more of30
than notasmore than 6 as
determined by determined
AASHTO T by89.ASSHTO

2. Unsuitable Material – Material other than suitable materials such as:

(a) Materials containing detrimental quantities of organic materials, such as grass,

roots and sewerage.

(b) Organic soils such as peat and muck.

(c) Soils with liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index exceeding 55.

(d) Soils with a natural water content exceeding 100%.

(e) Soils with very low natural density, 800 kg/m3 or lower.

(f) Soils that cannot be properly compacted as determined by the

Engineer.

104.3 Construction Requirements

104.3.1 General

Prior to construction of embankment, all necessary clearing and grubbing in that area
shall have been performed in conformity with Item 100, Clearing and Grubbing.

Embankment construction shall consist of constructing roadway embankments, including

preparation of the areas upon which they are to be placed; the construction of dikes within or
adjacent to the roadway; the placing and compacting of approved material within roadway areas
where unsuitable material has been removed; and the placing and compacting of embankment
material in holes, pits, and other depressions within the roadway area.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 29/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Where provided on the Plans and Bill of Quantities the top portions of the roadbed in
both cuts and embankments, as indicated, shall consist of selected borrow for topping from
excavations.
104.3.2 Methods of Construction

Where there is evidence of discrepancies on the actual elevations and that shown on the
Plans, a preconstruction survey referred to the datum plane used in the approved Plan shall be
undertaken by the Contractor under the control of the Engineer to serve as basis for the
computation of the actual volume of the embankment materials.

When is
embankment embankment is toagainst
to be compacted be placed and
existing compacted or
embankments, on when
hillsides, or whenis new
embankment built
one-half width at a time, the existing slopes that are steeper than 3:1 when measured at right
angles to the roadway shall be continuously benched over those areas as the work is brought
up in layers. Benching will be subject to the Engineer’s approval and shall be of sufficient width
to permit operation of placement and compaction equipment. Each horizontal cut shall begin at
the intersection of the original ground and the vertical sides of the previous cuts. Material thus
excavated shall be placed and compacted along with the embankment material in accordance
with the procedure described in this Section.

Unless shown otherwise on the Plans or special Provisions, where an embankment of

less than 1.2 m (4 feet) below subgrade is to be made, all sod and vegetable matter shall be
removed from the surface upon which the embankment is to be placed, and the cleared
surfaced shall be completely broken up by plowing, scarifying, or steeping to a minimum depth
of 150 mm except as provided in Subsection 102.2.2. This area shall then be compacted as
provided in Subsection 104.3.3. Sod not required to be removed shall be thoroughly disc
harrowed or scarified before construction of embankment. Wherever a compacted road
surface containing granular materials lies within 900 mm (36 inches) of the subgrade, such old
road surface shall be scarified to a depth of at least 150 mm (6 inches) whenever directed by
the Engineer. This scarified materials shall then be compacted as provided in Subsection
104.3.3.

When shoulder excavation is specified, the roadway shoulders shall be excavated to the
depth and width shown on the Plans. The shoulder material shall be removed without
disturbing the adjacent existing base course material, and all excess excavated materials shall
be disposed
before being off as provided in Subsection 102.2.3. If necessary, the areas shall be compacted
backfilled.

Roadway embankment of earth material shall be placed in horizontal layers not

exceeding 200 mm (8 inches), loose measurement, and shall be compacted as specified before
the next layer is placed. However, thicker layer maybe placed if vibratory roller with high

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 30/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Where embankment is to be constructed across low swampy ground that will not support
the mass of trucks or other hauling equipment, the lower part of the fill may be constructed by
dumping successive loads in a uniformly distributed layer of a thickness not greater than
necessary to support the hauling equipment while placing subsequent layers.

When excavated material contains more than 25 mass percent of rock larger than 150
mm in greatest diameter and cannot be placed in layers of the thickness prescribed without
crushing, pulverizing or further breaking down the pieces resulting from excavation methods,
such materials may be placed on the embankment in layers not exceeding in thickness the
approximate average size of the larger rocks, but not greater than 600 mm (24 inches).

Even though the thickness of layers is limited as provided above, the placing of individual
rocks and boulders greater than 600 mm in diameter will be permitted provided that when
placed, they do not exceed 1200 mm (48 inches) in height and provided they are carefully
distributed, with the interstices filled with finer material to form a dense and compact mass.

Each layer shall be leveled and smoothed with suitable leveling equipment and by
distribution of spalls and finer fragments of earth. Lifts of material containing more than 25
mass percent of rock larger than 150 mm in greatest dimensions shall not be constructed
above an elevation 300 mm ( 12 inches) below the finished subgrade. The balance of the
embankment shall be composed of suitable material smoothed and placed in layers not
exceeding 200 mm (8 inches) in loose thickness and compacted as specified for embankments.

Dumping and rolling areas shall be kept separate, and no lift shall be covered by another
until compaction complies with the requirements of Subsection 104.3.3.

Hauling and leveling equipment shall be so routed and distributed over each layer of the
fill in such a manner as to make use of compaction effort afforded thereby and to minimize
rutting and uneven compaction.

104.3.3 Compaction

Compaction Trials

Before commencing the formation of embankments, the Contractor shall submit in writing
to the in
used Engineer for approval
the works. The his proposals
proposals for include
shall the compaction of each type
the relationship of fill material
between to be
the types of
compaction equipment, and the number of passes required and the method of adjusting
moisture content. The Contractor shall carry out full scale compaction trials on areas not less
than 10 m wide and 50 m long as required by the Engineer and using his proposed procedures
or such amendments thereto as may be found necessary to satisfy the Engineer that all the

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 31/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Earth

The Contractor shall compact the material placed in all embankment layers and the
material scarified to the designated depth below subgrade in cut sections, until a uniform
density of not less than 95 mass percent of the maximum dry density determined by AASHTO T
99 Method C, is attained, at a moisture content determined by Engineer to be suitable for such
density. Acceptance of compaction may be based on adherence to an approved roller pattern
developed as set forth in Item 106, Compaction Equipment and Density Control Strips.

The Engineer shall during progress of the Work, make density tests of compacted

material
including inthe
accordance with AASHTO
use of properly T 191,
calibrated T 205,
nuclear or other
testing approved
devices. field density
A correction tests,
for coarse
particles may be made in accordance with AASHTO T 224. If, by such tests, the Engineer
determines that the specified density and moisture conditions have not been attained, the
Contractor shall perform additional work as may be necessary to attain the specified conditions.

At least one group of three in-situ density tests shall be carried out for each 500 m of
each layer of compacted fill.

Rock

Density requirements will not apply to portions of embankments constructed of materials

which cannot be tested in accordance with approved methods.

Embankment materials classified as rock shall be deposited, spread and leveled the full
width of the fill with sufficient earth or other fine material so deposited to fill the interstices to
produce a dense compact embankment. In addition, one of the rollers, vibrators, or
compactors meeting the requirements set forth in Subsection 106.2.1, Compaction Equipment,
shall compact the embankment full width with a minimum of three complete passes for each
layer of embankment.

104.3.4 Protection of Roadbed During Construction

During the construction of the roadway, the roadbed shall be maintained in such
condition that it will be well drained at all times. Side ditches or gutters emptying from cuts to
embankments
erosion. or otherwise shall be so constructed as to avoid damage to embankments by

104.3.5 Protection of Structure

If embankment can be deposited on one side only of abutments, wing walls, piers or

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 32/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
104.3.6 Rounding and Warping Slopes

Rounding-Except in solid rock, the tops and bottoms of all slopes, including the slopes of
drainage ditches, shall be rounded as indicated on the Plans. A layer of earth overlaying rock
shall be rounded above the rock as done in earth slopes.

Warping-adjustments in slopes shall be made to avoid injury in standing trees or marring

of weathered rock, or to harmonize with existing landscape features, and the transition to such
adjusted slopes shall be gradual. At intersections of cuts and fills, slopes shall be adjusted and
warped to flow into each other or into the natural ground surfaces without noticeable break.

104.3.7 Finishing Roadbed and Slopes

After the roadbed has been substantially completed, the full width shall be conditioned by
removing any soft or other unstable material that will not compact properly or serve the intended
purpose. The resulting areas and all other low sections, holes of depressions shall be brought
to grade with suitable selected material. Scarifying, blading, dragging, rolling, or other methods
of work shall be performed or used as necessary to provide a thoroughly compacted roadbed
shaped to the grades and cross-sections shown on the Plans or as staked by the Engineer.

All earth slopes shall be left with roughened surfaces but shall be reasonably uniform,
without any noticeable break, and in reasonably close conformity with the Plans or other
surfaces indicated on the Plans or as staked by the Engineer, with no variations therefrom
readily discernible as viewed from the road.

104.3.8 Serrated Slopes

Cut slopes in rippable material (soft rock) having slope ratios between 0.75:1 and 2:1
shall be constructed so that the final slope line shall consist of a series of small horizontal steps.
The step rise and tread dimensions shall be shown on the Plans. No scaling shall be
performed on the stepped slopes except for removal of large rocks which will obviously be a
safety hazard if they fall into the ditchline or roadway.

104.3.9 Earth Berms

When called for in the Contract, permanent earth berms shall be constructed of well
graded materials
When local with
material no rocks
is not havingacceptable
acceptable, a diameter greatershall
material thanbe0.25 the height
imported, of the by
as directed berm.
the
Engineer.

Compacted Berm

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 33/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
cross-section of the finished compacted berm shall reasonably conform to the typical cross-
section as shown on the Plans.

Uncompacted Berm
Uncompacted berm construction shall consist of drying, if necessary and placing material
in locations shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer. Material shall contain no
frozen material, roots, sod or other deleterious materials. Contractor shall take precautions to
prevent material from escaping over the embankment slope.

104.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity of embankment to be paid for shall be the volume of material compacted in
place, accepted by the Engineer and formed with material obtained from any source.

Material from excavation per Item 102 which is used in embankment and accepted by
the Engineer will be paid under Embankment and such payment will be deemed to include the
cost of excavating, hauling, stockpiling and all other costs incidental to the work.

Material for Selected Borrow topping will be measured and paid for under the same
conditions specified in the preceding paragraph.

104.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 104.4, shall be paid for at
the Contract unit price for each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of
Quantities. The payment shall continue full compensation for placing and compacting all
materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
prescribed in this Item.
Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

104 (1) Embankment Cubic Meter

104 (2) Selected,
Case 1 Borrow for topping, Cubic Meter
104 (3) Selected Borrow for topping, Cubic Meter
Case 2
104 (4) Earth Berm Meter

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 34/437

5/7/2018
This Item shall consist of the preparation of the subgrade for the support of overlying
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

structural layers. It shall extend to full width of the roadway. Unless authorized by the
Engineer, subgrade preparation shall not be done unless the Contractor is able to start
immediately the construction of the pavement structure.
105.2 Material Requirements

Unless otherwise stated in the Contract and except when the subgrade is in rock cut, all
materials below subgrade level to a depth 150 mm or to such greater depth as may be specified
shall meet the requirements of Section 104.2, Selected Borrow for Topping.

105.3 Construction Requirements

105.3.1 Prior Works

Prior to commencing preparation of the subgrade, all culverts, cross drains, ducts and
the like (including their fully compacted backfill), ditches, drains and drainage outlets shall be
completed. Any work on the preparation of the
subgrade shall not be started unless prior work herein described shall have been approved by
the Engineer.

105.3.2 Subgrade Level Tolerances

The finished compacted surface of the subgrade shall conform to the allowable
tolerances as specified hereunder:
Permitted variation from + 20 mm
design LEVEL OF SURFACE - 30 mm
Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY
MEASURED BY 3-m STRAIGHT EDGE 30 mm
Permitted variation from
design CROSSFALL OR CAMBER + 0.5 %

Permitted variation from GRADE

design LONGITUDINAL ± 0.1 %
over 25 m length

105.3.3 Subgrade in Common Excavation

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 35/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

All materials immediately below subgrade level in earth cuts to a depth of 150 mm, or to
such greater depth as may be specified, shall be compacted in accordance with the
requirements of Subsection 104.3.3.
105.3.4 Subgrade in Rock Excavation

Surface irregularities under the subgrade level remaining after trimming of the rock
excavation shall be leveled by placing specified material and compacted to the requirements of
Subsection 104.3.3.

105.3.5 Subgrade on Embankment

After the embankment has been completed, the full width shall be conditioned by
removing any soft or other unstable material that will not compacted properly. The resulting
areas and all other low sections, holes, or depressions shall be brought to grade with suitable
material. The entire roadbed shall be shaped and compacted to the requirements of
Subsections 104.3.3. Scarifying, blading, dragging, rolling, or other methods of work shall be
performed or used as necessary to provide a thoroughly compacted roadbed shaped to the
cross-sections shown on the Plans.

105.3.6 Subgrade on Existing Pavement

Where the new pavement is to be constructed immediately over an existing Portland

Cement concrete pavement and if so specified in the Contract the slab be broken into pieces
with greatest dimension of not more than 500 mm and the existing pavement material
compacted as specified in Subsection 104.3.3, as directed by the Engineer. The resulting
subgrade level shall, as part pavement construction be shaped to conform to the allowable
tolerances of Subsection 105.3.2 by placing and compacting where necessary a leveling course
comprising the material of the pavement course to be placed immediately above.

Where the new pavement is to be constructed immediately over an existing asphalt

concrete pavement or gravel surface pavement and if so specified in the Contract the pavement
shall be scarified, thoroughly loosened, reshaped and recompacted in accordance with

Subsection 104.3.3.
Subsection 105.3.2. The resulting subgrade level shall conform to the allowable tolerances of

105.3.7 Protection of Completed Work

The Contractor shall be required to protect and maintain at his own expense the entire

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 36/437

5/7/2018 The Contractor shall provide for use of the Engineer, approved templates and straight-
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

edges in sufficient number to check the accuracy of the work, as provided in this Specification.

105.4 Method of Measurement

105.4.1 Measurement of Items for payment shall be provided only for:

1. The compaction of existing ground below subgrade level in cuts of common material
as specified in Subsection 105.3.3.

2. The breaking up or scarifying, loosening, reshaping and recompacting of existing

pavement as specified in Subsection 105.3.6. The quantity to be paid for shall be
the area of the work specified to be carried out and accepted by the Engineer.

105.4.2 Payment for all work for the preparation of the subgrade, including shaping to the
required levels and tolerances, other than as specified above shall be deemed to be
included in the Pay Item for Embankment.

105.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 105.4, shall be paid for at
the appropriate contract unit price for Pay Item listed below that is included in the Bill of
Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for the placing or removal and
disposal of all materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

105 (1) Subgrade Preparation Square Meter

(Common Material)
105 (2) Subgrade Preparation Square Meter

105 (3) (Existing

SubgradePavement)
Preparation Square Meter
(Unsuitable Material)

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 37/437

5/7/2018 sand-cone method of density testing equipment to determine in-place densities obtained during
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the construction process.

106.2 Construction Requirements

106.2.1 Compaction Equipment

Compaction equipment shall be capable of obtaining compaction requirements without

detrimentally affecting the compacted material. The equipment shall be modern, efficient
compacting units approved by the Engineer. The compacting units may be of any type,
provided they are capable of compacting each lift of material as specified and meet the
minimum requirements as contained herein. Minimum requirements for rollers are as follows:

1. Sheepsfoot, tamping or grid rollers shall be capable of exerting a force of 45 Newton

per millimeter (250 pounds per inch) of length of roller drum.

2. Steel-wheel rollers other than vibratory shall be capable of exerting a force of not less
than 45 Newton per millimeter of width of the compression roll or rolls.

3. Vibratory steel-wheel rollers shall have a minimum mass of 6 tonnes. The

compactor shall be equipped with amplitude and frequency controls and specifically
designed to compact the material on which it is used.

4. Pneumatic-tire rollers shall have smooth tread tires of equal size that will provide a
uniform compacting pressure for the full width of the roller and capable of exerting a
ground pressure of at least 550 kpa (80 pounds per square inch).

5. Heavier compacting unit may be required to achieve the specified density of the
embankment.
106.2.2 Construction of Control Strips and Determination of Target Density

To determine target density, a control strip shall be constructed at the beginning of work
each course of material to be compacted. Each control strip, constructed to acceptable density
and surface tolerances shall remain in place and become a section of the completed roadway.
Unacceptable control strip shall be corrected or removed and replaced at the Contractor’s

expense.
of the sameAdepth
control strip shall
specified have
for the an area ofofapproximately
construction 335 itsquare
the course which meters and shall be
represents.

The materials used in the construction of the control strip shall conform to the
specification requirements. They shall be furnished from the same source and shall be of the
same type to be used in the remainder of the course represented by the control strip. The

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 38/437

5/7/2018
Compaction of control strips shall commence immediately after the course has been
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

placed to the specified thickness, and shall be continuous and uniform over the entire surface.
Compaction of the control strip shall be continued until no discernible increase in density can be

obtained by additional compactive effort.

Upon completion of the compaction, the mean density of the control strip will be
determined by averaging the results of ten in-place density tests taken at randomly selected
sites within the control strip. The mean density of the control strip shall be the target density for
the remainder of the course which it represents.

If the mean density of the control strip is less than 98 percent of the density of laboratory
compacted specimens as determined by testing procedures appropriate for the material being
placed, the Engineer may order the construction of another control strip.

A new control strip may also be ordered by the Engineer or requested by the Contractor
when:

1. A change in the material or job-mix formula, is made.

2. Ten days of production have been accepted without construction of a new control
strip.

3. There is reason to believe that a control strip density is not representative of the
material being placed.

106.3 Method of Measurement

No measurement for payment will be made for this Item.

106.4 Basis of Payment

Unless otherwise provided, the cost of constructing the control strip will be considered
incidental to the cost of the work item for which a control strip is required. Payment for the
work item shall be deemed to include compensation for performing the work herein specified
and the furnishing of all materials, labors, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to
construct the density control strip. No payment will be made for any material used in the

construction of unacceptable control strip.

ITEM 107 – OVERHAUL

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 39/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

In determining what constitutes authorized overhaul, it will be assumed that material

taken from excavation will be deposited in embankment after having been hauled the shortest

distance.
The overhaul distance for material obtained and placed within the roadway limits will be
measured along the centerline of the roadway. No allowance will be made for transverse or
lateral movement to or from the centerline except materials moved to or from designated areas
outside the roadway limits; such as Case 1, Borrow Pits, disposal areas, etc. In such case,
measurement shall be along the shortest route determined by the Engineer to be feasible and
satisfactory unless otherwise provided.

If the Contractor chooses to haul material over some other route, and such other route is
longer, the computation for payment shall be based on the overhaul distance measured along
the route designated by the Engineer.

The number of cubic metre-kilometres of overhaul to be paid for shall be the number of
cubic meters of overhaul material multiplied by the overhaul distance in kilometers. The unit
“cubic meter-kilometer” is the amount of hauling required to move one cubic meter a distance of
one kilometer beyond the free-haul distance.

107.3 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 107.2, shall be paid for the
contract unit price for Overhaul, for the particular Pay Item listed below that is shown on the Bill
of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for overhaul, including all
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will not be made for overhaul of Borrow, Case 2, Foundation Fill, bedding
materials and material removed in the rounding of cut slopes when rounding is a separate pay
item.

When the Bill of Quantities does not show estimated quantities for “Overhaul” from the
Pay Item listed below, overhaul will not be directly paid for, but will be considered as a
subsidiary obligation of the Contractor under other contract items.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

107 (1) Overhaul Cubic Meter-kilometer

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 40/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 41/437

 PART D – SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

ITEM 200 – AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE

200.1 Description

This item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting an aggregate

subbase course on a prepared subgrade in accordance with this Specification
and the lines, grades and cross-sections shown on the Plans, or as directed by
the Engineer.

200.2 Material Requirements

Aggregate for subbase shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments

of crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed or natural gravel and filler of natural or
crushed sand or other finely divided mineral matter. The composite material shall
be free from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay, and shall be of such
nature that it can be compacted readily to form a firm, stable subbase.

The subbase material shall conform to Table 200.1, Grading Requirements

Table 200.1 – Grading Requirements

Sieve Designation
Standard, mm Alternate US Standard Mass Percent Passing
50 2” 100
25 1” 55 – 85
9.5 3/8” 40 – 75
0.075 No. 200 0 - 12

The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater
than 0.66 (two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve.

The fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit
not greater than 35 and plasticity index not greater than 12 as determined by
AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively.

The coarse portion, retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve, shall have a
mass percent of wear not exceeding 50 by the Los Angeles Abrasion Tests as
determined by AASHTO T 96.

The material shall have a soaked CBR value of not less than 25% as
d i d b AASHTO T Th CBR l h ll b b i d h

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 42/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

200.3.2 Placing

The aggregate subbase material shall be placed at a uniform mixture on a

prepared subgrade in a quantity which will provide the required compacted
thickness. When more than one layer is required, each layer shall be shaped
and compacted before the succeeding layer is placed.

The placing of material shall begin at the point designated by the Engineer.
Placing shall be from vehicles especially equipped to distribute the material in a
continuous uniform layer or windrow. The layer or windrow shall be of such size
that when spread and compacted the finished layer be in reasonably close
conformity to the nominal thickness shown on the Plans.

When hauling is done over previously placed material, hauling equipment

shall be dispersed uniformly over the entire surface of the previously constructed
layer, to minimize rutting or uneven compaction.

200.3.3 Spreading and Compacting

When uniformly mixed, the mixture shall be spread to the plan thickness,
for compaction.

Where the required thickness is 150 mm or less, the material may be

spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required thickness is more than
150 mm, the aggregate subbase shall be spread and compacted in two or more
layers of approximately equal thickness, and the maximum compacted thickness
of any layer shall not exceed 150 mm. All subsequent layers shall be spread and
compacted in a similar manner.

The moisture content of subbase material shall, if necessary, be adjusted

prior to compaction by watering with approved sprinklers mounted on trucks or by
drying out, as required in order to obtain the required compaction.

Immediately following final spreading and smoothening, each layer shall be

compacted to the full width by means of approved compaction equipment.
Rolling shall progress gradually from the sides to the center, parallel to the
centerline of the road and shall continue until the whole surface has been rolled.
Any irregularities or depressions that develop shall be corrected by loosening the
material at these places and adding or removing material until surface is smooth
and uniform. Along curbs, headers, and walls, and at all places not accessible to
the roller the subbase material shall be compacted thoroughly with approved

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 43/437

 Compaction of each layer shall continue until a field density of at least 100
5/7/2018
percent of the maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

180, Method D has been achieved. In-place density determination shall be made
in accordance with AASHTO T 191.

200.3.4 Trial Sections

Before subbase construction is started, the Contractor shall spread and

compact trial sections as directed by the Engineer. The purpose of the trial
sections is to check the suitability of the materials and the efficiency of the
equipment and construction method which is proposed to be used by the
Contractor. Therefore, the Contractor must use the same material, equipment
and
aboutprocedures that he
500 m2 shall beproposes
made forto every
use fortype
the main work. and/or
of material One trial section of
construction
equipment/procedure proposed for use.

After final compaction of each trial section, the Contractor shall carry out
such field density tests and other tests required as directed by the Engineer.

If a trial section shows that the proposed materials, equipment or

procedures in the Engineer’s opinion are not suitable for subbase, the material
shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense, and a new trial section shall be
constructed.

If the basic conditions regarding the type of material or procedure change

during the execution of the work, new trial sections shall be constructed.

200.3.5 Tolerances

Aggregate subbase shall be spread with equipment that will provide a

uniform layer which when compacted will conform to the designed level and
transverse slopes as shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be as
specified hereunder:

Permitted variation from design ± 20 mm

THICKNESS OF LAYER

Permitted variation from design +10 mm

LEVEL OF SURFACE -20 mm

Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY

Measured by 3-m straight-edge 20 mm

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 44/437

 200.4 Method of Measurement
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Aggregate Subbase Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m3).

The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in-place as
shown on the Plans, and accepted in the completed course. No allowance will
be given for materials placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-
sections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall be included in
the quantity of subbase herein measured.

200.5 Basis of Payment

be paidThe
for accepted quantities,
at the contract measured
unit price as prescribed
for Aggregate in Section
Subbase Course 200.4, shall
which price
and payment shall be full compensation for furnishings and placing all materials,
including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

200 Aggregate Subbase Course Cubic Meter

ITEM 201 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

201.1 Description

This Item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting an aggregate

base course on a prepared subgrade/subbase in accordance with this
Specificaton and the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-sections shown on
the Plans, or as established by the Engineer.

201.2 Material Requirements

Aggregate for base course shall consist of hard, durable particles or

fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag or crushed or natural gravel and filler of
natural or crushed sand or other finely divided mineral matter. The composite
material shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay, and shall
b f h t th t it b m t d dil t f m fi m t bl b

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 45/437

 Table 201.1 – Grading Requirements
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

Standard, mm Alternate US Standard Grading A Grading B
50 2” 100
37.5 1-1/2” - 100
25.0 1” 60 – 85 -
19.0 ¾” - 60 – 85
12.5 ½” 35 – 65 -
4.75 No. 4 20 – 50 30 – 55
0.425 No. 40 5 – 20 8 – 25
0.075 No. 200 0 – 12 2 – 14

The fraction passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater
than 0.66 (two thirds) of the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve.

The fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit
not greater than 25 and plasticity index not greater than 6 as determined by
AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively.

The coarse portion, retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall have a
mass percent of wear not exceeding 50 by the Los Angeles Abrasion test
determined by AASHTO T 96.

The material passing the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve shall have a soaked CBR
value of not less than 80% as determined by AASHTO T 193. The CBR value
shall be obtained at the maximum dry density (MDD) as determined by AASHTO
T 180, Method D.
If filler, in addition to that naturally present, is necessary for meeting the
grading requirements or for satisfactory bonding, it shall be uniformly blended with
the base course material on the road or in a pugmill unless otherwise specified or
approved. Filler shall be taken from sources approved by the Engineer, shall be
free from hard lumps and shall not contain more than 15 percent of material
retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.

201.3 Construction Requirements

201.3.1 Preparation of Existing Surface

The existing surface shall be graded and finished as provided under Item

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 46/437

 201.3.3 Spreading and Compacting
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

It shall be in accordance with all the requirements of Subsection 200.3.3,

Spreading and Compacting.
201.3.4 Trial Sections

Trial sections shall conform in all respects to the requirements specified in

Subsection 200.3.4.

201.3.5 Tolerances

The aggregate base course shall be laid to the designed level and
transverse slopes shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be in
accordance with following:

Permitted variation from design ± 10 mm

THICKNESS OF LAYER

Permitted variation from design + 5 mm

LEVEL OF SURFACE -10 mm

Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY

Measured by 3-m straight-edge 5 mm

Permitted variation from design ± 0.2%

CROSSFALL OR CAMBER

Permitted variation from design ± 0.1%

LONGITUDINAL GRADE over
25 m in length

201.4 Method of Measurement

Aggregate Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter (m 3). The
quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in-place as shown
on the Plans, and accepted in the completed base course. No allowance shall
be given for materials placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-
sections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall be included in
the quantity of aggregate base course.

201 5 Basis of Payment

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 47/437

 Payment will be made under:
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

201 Aggregate Base Course Cubic Meter

ITEM 202 – CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

202.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, placing and compacting crushed
gravel, crushed stone or crushed rock on a prepared subgrade/subbase in one or
more layers in accordance with this Specification and lines, grades, thickness and
typical cross-sections shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.

202.2 Material Requirements

202.2.1 Crushed Aggregate

It shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel

crushed to the size and of the quality requirements of this Item. It shall be clean
and free from vegetable matters, lumps or balls of clay and other deleterious
substances. The material shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily
to form a firm, stable base.

The base material shall conform to the grading requirements of Table

202.1, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities.

Table 201.1 – Grading Requirements

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

Standard, mm Alternate US Standard Grading A Grading B
37.5 1-1/2” 100
25 1” - 100
19 ¾” 60 – 85 -
12.5 ½” - 60 – 90
4.75 No. 4 30 – 55 35 – 65
0.425 No. 40 8 – 25 10 – 30

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 48/437

The portion of the material passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have
 a liquid limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 6 as
5/7/2018 determined by AASHTO T 89 and T 90, respectively. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The coarse aggregate retained on a 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall have a
mass percent of wear not exceeding 45 by the Los Angeles Abrasion Test as
determined by AASHTO T 96, and not less than 50 mass percent shall have at
least one (1) fractured face.

The material passing the 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve shall have a minimum
soaked CBR-value of 80% tested according to AASHTO T 193. The CBR-value
shall be obtained at the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO

T 180, Method D.
If filler, in addition to that naturally present, is necessary for meeting the
grading requirements or for satisfactory bonding, it shall be uniformly blended with
the crushed base course material on the road or in a pugmill unless otherwise
specified or approved. Filler shall be obtained from sources approved by the
Engineer, free from hard lumps and not contain more than 15 percent of material
retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.

202.3 Construction Requirements

Same as Subsections 201.3.1 through 201.3.5.

202.4 Method of Measurement

Crushed Aggregate Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter

(m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in-place
as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the completed course. No allowance
shall be given for materials placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-
sections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall be included in
the quantity of crushed aggregate base course.

202.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 202.4, shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for Crushed Aggregate Base Course which
price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 49/437

 ITEM 203 – LIME STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

203.1 Description

This Item shall consist of a foundation for surface course composed of soil
aggregate, lime and water in proper proportions, road-mixed and constructed on a
prepared subgrade/subbase in accordance with this Specification and the lines,
grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans or established by the
Engineer.

203.2 Material Requirements

203.2.1 Soil Aggregate

It shall consist of any combination of gravel, sand, silt and clay or other
approved combination of materials free from vegetable or other objectionable
matter. It may be materials encountered in the construction site or materials
obtained from approved sources. The crushed or uncrushed granular material
shall consist of hard, durable stones and rocks, of accepted quality, free from an
excess of flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces or other objectionable
matter. It is the intent of this Specification to utilize soils existing on the roadbed
if the quality is satisfactory. If the quality and/or quantity is deficient, the soil
aggregate shall be obtained wholly or partly from approved outside sources.

The soil-aggregate shall conform to the grading requirements of Table

203. 1.

Table 203.1 – Grading Requirements

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

Standard, mm Alternate US Standard Grading A Grading B
50 2” 100 100
4.75 No. 4 45 – 100 55 – 100
2.00 No. 10 37 – 80 45 – 100
0.425 No. 40 15 – 20 25 – 80
0.075 No. 200 0 – 25 11 – 35

The materials passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve produced in the crushing
operation of either stone or gravel shall be incorporated in the base material to the
extent permitted by the gradation requirements. The plasticity index shall not be
less than 4 nor more than 10.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 50/437

 203.2.1.2 Salvaged Soil-Aggregate
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Where soil-aggregate required is already in place, the Contractor shall not

be responsible for its grading or quality except for removal of oversized materials
as directed by the Engineer. In general, salvaged soil-aggregate to be used for
lime stabilized road mix base course will consist of material meeting the
requirements given in Subsection 203.2.1, Soil Aggregate.

203.2.2 Hydrated Lime

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 701, Construction Lime.

203.2.3 Water

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 714, Water

203.2.4 Proportioning of Mixture

The amount of lime to be added to the soil-aggregate shall be from 3 to 12

mass percent of the dry soil. The exact percentage to be added shall be fixed by
the Engineer on the basis of preliminary laboratory tests and trial mixes of
materials furnished.

203.2.5 Strength Requirements

CBR Test for Gravelly Soils. The mixture passing the 19 mm (3/4 inch)
sieve shall have a minimum soaked CBR-value of 100% tested according to
AASHTO T 193. The CBR-value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density
determined according to AASHTO T 180, Method D.

Unconfined Compression Test for Finer Textured Soils. The 7-day

compressive strength of laboratory specimen molded and compacted in
accordance with ASTM D 1632 to a density of 100% of maximum dry density
determined according to AASHTO T 134, Method B, shall not be less than 2.1
MPa (300 psi) when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633.

203.3 Construction Requirements

203.3.1 Weather Limitations

Lime shall not be applied during windy, rainy or impending bad weather.
In the event rain occurs during the operations work shall be promptly stopped

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 51/437

Distributor equipment shall include a tachometer pressure gauge, accurate

 volume measuring devices or a calibrated tank. It shall be equipped with a power
5/7/2018
unit for the pump and full circulation spray bars adjustable laterally and vertically,
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

as well as agitator to prevent setting of lime solids.

These equipment shall be on the project site in good condition and shall
have been approved by the Engineer, both as to type and condition, and provided
with experienced operators before the start of construction.

203.3.3 Preparation of Soil-Aggregate

1. Case 1 (New Soil-Aggregate)

When new soil-aggregate is to be used, the existing roadbed shall

be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform grade and to the cross-
section shown on the Plans and shall then be rolled or watered and
rolled, as directed. If so ordered by the Engineer, depressions shall
first be filled and weak portions of the roadbed strengthened with new
soil-aggregate. At least one day shall then be allowed for measuring,
sampling and testing for approval of quantity and gradation before the
windrow is spread for application of hydrated lime.

If the surface moisture of the soil-aggregate is more than 2 mass

percent of the dry aggregate, the soil aggregate shall be turned by
blades or disc harrows or otherwise aerated until the moisture content
is reduced to 2 percent or less. The soil-aggregate shall then be
spread smoothly and uniformly over half the road or other convenient
width of the surface ready for the application of hydrated lime.

2. Case 2 (Salvaged Soil-Aggregate)

When material in the existing roadbed is to be used for mixing, the

surface shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform grade and to
the cross-section shown on the Plans. The reshaped surface shall
then be scarified again to the depth ordered by the Engineer and in
such manner as to leave a foundation of undisturbed material parallel,
both in profile and cross-section, the proposed finished surface. The
loosened
the road, materials shall be bladed
and the undisturbed asideroiled,
material into a or
windrow at and
watered the side of
rolled,
as directed.

203.3.4 Application of Lime

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 52/437

aggregate during the day of application. Dry application encompass either

 spotting bags of lime in equal predetermined transverse and longitudinal intervals
5/7/2018
or applying bulk lime from suitably equipped self-unloading trucks. An approved
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
spreader is preferable for uniform distribution.

If lime slurry is employed, the preparation facilities should be approved by

the Engineer. A typical slurry ratio is 1 tonne lime to 2 cubic metre water. The
actual mixing proportion depends upon the percent of lime, specified type of soil
and its moisture condition.

The slurry is distributed by one or more passes over a measured area until
the specified percentage (based on lime solids content) is obtained. To prevent

run-off and consequent

immediately non-uniformity
after each spreading pass. of lime distribution, the slurry is mixed in

203.3.5 Mixing

After the last lime application and partial mixing, the entire mass of the
mixture shall be windrowed on the road surface and then mixed by blading the
mixture from side to side of the road, or by manipulation producing equivalent
results, until the whole mass has a uniform color and the mixture is free from fat
or lean spots or balls of unmixed particles. During the mixing operations, care
shall be taken to avoid cutting into the underlying course. When directed, the
mixing process shall be confined to part of the width or area of the road so as to
allow traffic to pass.

Should the mixture show an excess, deficiency or uneven distribution of

lime, the condition shall be corrected by the addition of soil-aggregate or lime as
required and then remix. If the mixture contains excessive amounts of moisture
or volatile matter, as may be encountered in slurry application method, it shall be
bladed, aerated or otherwise manipulated until the moisture and volatile content
are satisfactory. The spreading of the mix shall not be done when the surface to
be covered is in an unsatisfactory condition. At the end of each day’s work, or
when the work is interrupted by weather conditions or otherwise, all loose
materials, shall be bladed into a windrow, whether mixing is completed or not, and
shall be retained in a windrow until operations are resumed.

mixtureWhen theformed
shall be mixing
intooperations have
a windrow of beencross-section.
uniform satisfactorily completed, the

203.3.6 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing

The material shall be spread by a self propelled pneumatic tire blade

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 53/437

Each pass shall terminate at least 910 mm (3 ft) in advance or to the rear of the
 end of the preceding pass. During compaction, the surface shall be dragged or
bladed as necessary to fill ruts and to remove incipient corrugation or other
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
irregularities. Rolling shall continue until the surface is of uniform texture and
satisfactory compaction is obtained. Initial rolling shall be performed with a
pneumatic tire roller and final rolling with a 3-wheel or tandem-type steel wheel
roller. Rolling shall be discontinued whenever it begins to produce excessive
pulverizing of the aggregate or displacement of the mixture.

When the compacted thickness of the road mix lime stabilized base course
is to be more than 150 mm, the mixture shall be spread from the windrow and
compacted in two (2) approximately equal layers, the first layer to be bladed and

rolled before the second layer is spread.

Compaction shall continue until a field density of not less than 100% of the
compacted maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180,
Method D has been attained. Field Density test shall be in accordance with
AASHTO T 191.

203.3.7 Protection, Curing and Maintenance

After the lime-stabilized base course has been finished as specified herein,
the surface shall be protected against rapid drying for a period of at least five (5)
days by either of the following curing methods:

1. Maintain in a thorough and continuously moist condition by sprinkling

with water.

2. Cover the completed surface with a 50 mm layer of earth or sand and

maintain in moist condition.
3. Apply on the surface an asphalt membrane of the type and quantity
approved by the Engineer.

4. Apply on the surface a liquid membrane curing compound of the type

and quantity approved by the Engineer.

The Contractor
work within the limits ofshall be required
his Contract to maintain
in good at satisfactory
condition his own expense
to the the entire
Engineer
from the time he first started work until all work shall have been completed.
Maintenance shall include immediate repairs of any defects that may occur before
and after the lime-stabilized base course has been compacted and finished, which
work shall be done by the Contractor at his own expense and repeated as may be

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 54/437

203.3.9 Tolerances
 The stabilized base course shall be laid to the designed level and
5/7/2018
transverse slopes shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be in
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

accordance with Subsection 201.3.5, Tolerance.

203.3.10 Traffic

The Contractor will not be permitted to drive heavy equipment over

completed portions prior to the end of five (5) days curing period except
pneumatic-tired equipment required for constructing adjoining sections. Turning
areas on completed portions of the base shall be protected by a layer of stable

granular materials of not less than 50 mm of compacted depth.

203.4 Method of Measurement

Lime Stabilized Road Mix base Course will be measured by the cubic
meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in
place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the completed course. No
allowance shall be given for materials placed outside the design limits shown on
the cross-sections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall be
included in the quantity of lime stabilized road mix base course.

203.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 203.4, shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for Lime Stabilized Road Mix Base Course
which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the work prescribed in this Item.
Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

203 Lime Stabilized Road Mix Cubic Meter

Base Course,
(New or Salvaged)
Soil-Aggregate

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 55/437

Specification and the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans
 or as established by the Engineer.

5/7/2018
204.2 Material Requirements DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

204.2.1 Soil Aggregate

It shall conform to the grading and quality requirements of Subsection

203.2.1.

204.2.2 Portland Cement

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.

204.2.3 Water

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 714, Water.

204.2.4 Proportioning of Mixture

The amount of cement to be added to the soil-aggregate shall be from 6 to

10 mass percent of the dry soil. The exact percentage to be added shall be fixed
by the Engineer on the basis of preliminary laboratory tests and trial mixes of the
materials furnished by the Contractor.

204.2.5 Strength Requirements

Strength requirements shall conform in all respects to those specified in

Subsection 203.2.5.

204.3 Construction Requirements

Construction requirements and procedures shall be as prescribed under

Subsections 203.3.1 through 203.3.10. In all cases, the word ”lime” shall be
deleted and replaced with “Portland Cement”.

204.4 Method of Measurement

Portland Cement Stabilized Road Mix Base Course will be measured by

the cubic meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume
compacted in-place as shown on the Plans, and accepted in the completed
course. No allowance shall be given for materials placed outside the design
limits shown on the cross sections Trial sections shall not be measured

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 56/437

and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
5/7/2018 Payment will be made under: DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

204 Portland Cement Stabilized

Road Mix Base Course,

(New or Salvaged) Cubic meter

Soil-Aggregate

Item 205 – ASPHALT STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE

205.1 Description

This Item shall consist of a foundation for surface course, composed of

soil-aggregate and asphaltic material in proper proportions, road mixed and
constructed on a prepared subgrade/subbase in accordance with this
Specification and the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans
or established by the Engineer.

205.2 Material Requirements

205.2.1 Soil-Aggregates

It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 703, Aggregates,

Gradation A or B shall be used.

205.2.2 Asphaltic Material

Asphaltic material shall be Anionic or Cationic Emulsified Asphalt of the

slow setting type meeting the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials,
Emulsified Asphalt.
205.2.3 Proportioning of Mixture

The amount of asphaltic material to be added to the soil-aggregate shall be

f m 4t 7m t f th d il t Th t t t b

205.3 Construction Requirements

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 57/437
 Construction requirements and procedures shall be as prescribed under
5/7/2018 Subsections 306.3.1 through 306.3.7. In all cases, the word “aggregate” shall be
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

deleted and replaced by “soil-aggregate”.

Trial Sections shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection
200.3.4.

The allowable tolerances shall be in accordance with Subsection 201.3.5.

205.4 Method of Measurement

Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course will be measured by the cubic
meter (m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in
place as shown on the Plans, accepted in the completed course. No allowance
shall be given for materials placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-
sections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall be included in
the quantity of Asphalt stabilized Road Mix Base Course.

205.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 205.4, shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course
which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the prescribed work in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

205 Asphalt Stabilized Road

Mix Base Course, Cubic Meter

(New or Salvaged)
Soil-Aggregate

ITEM 206 PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED PLANT MIX BASE COURSE

and the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans or
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 58/437

as established by the Engineer.

5/7/2018 206.2 Material Requirements DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Same as Subsections 204.2.1 through 204.2.5

206.3 Construction Requirements

206.3.1 Weather Limitations

Portland Cement shall not be applied during windy, rainy or impending bad
weather. In the event rain occurs, work shall be promptly stopped and the entire
section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this Specification.

206.3.2 Travel Plant Method

The salvaged or new soil-aggregate shall be pulverized until at least 80

mass percent of all material other than stone or gravel will pass a 4.75 mm (No. 4)
sieve.

Any material retained on a 50 mm (2 inches) sieve and other unsuitable

material shall be removed. If additional material is specified, it shall be blended
with the existing material. All butt joints at existing pavements or other structures
shall be cleaned prior to mixing.

The subgrade/subbase shall support all equipment required in the

construction of the base course. Soft or yielding areas shall be corrected prior to
mixing.

The soil-aggregate to be treated shall be placed in a uniform windrow and

spread to a uniform thickness to the required width. The specified quantity of
Portland Cement shall be applied uniformly in a trench on top of the windrows or
spread uniformly over the soil-aggregate. Spread cement that has been lost shall
be replaced, without additional compensation, before mixing is started.

Mixing shall be accomplished by means of a mixer that will thoroughly

blend the cement

water metering with that
device the will
soil-aggregate. The mixer
introduce the required shall be
quantity equipped
of water withthe
during a
mixing cycle. The cement soil-aggregate mixture shall be sufficiently blended to
prevent the formation of cement balls when water is applied.

A maximum time of 2 hours shall be permitted for wet mixing laydown and

in the quantities specified. Mixing shall continue until a uniform mixture has been
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 59/437

obtained.
5/7/2018
206.3.4 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The mixture shall be spread on a prepared and moistened

subgrade/subbase in a uniform layer by an approved equipment. Not more than
60 minutes shall elapse between the start of mixing and the time of starting
compaction of the spread mixture.

After spreading, the mixture shall be compacted and finished conforming to

the procedures/requirements specified under Subsection 203.3.6, Spreading,
Compacting and Finishing.

The compaction and finishing shall be completed within 2 hours of the time
water is added to the mixture.

206.3.5 Protection, Curing and Maintenance

The completed cement treated base shall be cured with a bituminous

curing seal applied as soon as possible after the completion of final rolling. The
surface shall be kept moist until the seal is applied.

The rate of application shall be between 0.5 L/m 2 to 1.00 L/m2 of surface.
The exact rate will be determined by the Engineer. Curing seal will be applied in
sufficient quantity to provide a continuous film over the base. The film shall be
maintained at least 5 days unless the treated base is protected by a subsequent
course.

The Contractor shall be responsible for adequate maintenance of the base

at all times as specified under Subsection 203.3.7, Protection, Curing and
Maintenance.

206.3.6 Trial Sections

Same as Subsection 203.3.8.

206.3.7 Tolerances
Same as Subsection 203.3.9.

206.3.8 Traffic

on the cross-sections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 60/437

be included in the quantity of Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base Course.
5/7/2018
206.5 Basis of Payment DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 206.4, shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base
Course which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

206 Portland Cement treated

Plant Mix Course, Cubic Meter

(New or Salvaged)
Soil-Aggregate

ITEM 207 – AGGREGATE STOCKPILE

207.1 Description

This Item shall consist of furnishing and placing aggregate in stockpiles at

locations shown on the Plans or as directed and approved by the Engineer.
207.2 Material Requirements

The aggregate shall conform to all requirements of the specified Item No.
of the Specifications.

It shall be tested for acceptance at the source.

207.3 Construction Requirements

The stockpile area, as staked by the Engineer, shall be graded, shaped

and compacted to a uniform cross-section that will drain satisfactorily. The entire
h ll b m t d ith mi im m f th m l t d f th

207.4 Method of Measurement

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 61/437
 The quantity of aggregate to be paid for will be the number of cubic meters
as ordered and placed in authorized stockpiles. The stockpiles shall be
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

measured and computed

made for settlement by the average end-area method. No allowance will be
or shrinkage.

207.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 207.4, shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for Aggregate Stockpile, which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and stockpiling the aggregate,
including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

207 Aggregate Stockpile Cubic Meter

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281

PART E – SURFACE COURSES 62/437
 ITEM 300 – AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

300.1 Description

This item shall consist of a wearing or top course composed of gravel or

crushed aggregate and binder material, whichever is called for in the Bill of
Quantities, constructed on a prepared base in accordance with this Specification
and in conformity with the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the
Plans.

300.2 Material Requirements

The aggregate shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone
or gravel and sand or other fine mineral particles free from vegetable matter and
lumps or balls of clay and of such nature that it can be compacted readily to form
a firm, stable layer. It shall conform to the grading requirements shown in table
300.1 when tested by AASHTO T 11 and T 27.

Table 300.1 – Grading Requirements

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing
Standard Alternate Grading Grading Grading Grading
Mm U. S. A B C D
Standard
25 1” 100 100 100 100
9.5 3/8 50-85 60-100 - -
4.75 No.4 35-65 50-85 55-100 70-100
2.00 No. 10 25-50 40-70 40-100 55-100
0.425 No.40 15-30 25-45 20-50 30-70
0.075 No. 200 5-20 5-20 6-20 8-25

The coarse aggregate material retained on the 2.00 mm (No.10) sieve shall
have a mass percent of wear by the Los Angeles Test (AASHTO T 96) of not
more than 45.

When crushed aggregate is called for in the Bill of Quantities, not less than
fifty (50) mass percent of the particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall
have at least one (1) fractured face.

Materials for gravel surface course and crushed aggregate surface course
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 63/437

shall have a soaked CBR Value of not less than 25% and 80% respectively as
 determined by AASHTO T 193. The CBR Value shall be obtained at the maximum
5/7/2018
dry density and determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

300.3 Construction Requirements

300.3.1 Placing

Aggregate surface course shall be placed in accordance with the

requirements of Item 201, Aggregate Base Course.

300.3.2 Compacting Requirements

Aggregate surface course shall be compacted in accordance with the
requirements of Item 201, Aggregate Base Course.

300.3.3 Trial Sections

Trial sections shall be carried out for aggregate surface course in

accordance with the requirements of Item 201, Aggregate Base Course.

300.3.4 Surface Course Thickness and Tolerances

The aggregate surface course shall be laid to the designed level and
transverse slopes shown on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be as
specified hereunder:

Permitted variation from +15 mm

design THICKNESS OF LAYER - 5 mm

Permitted variation from +15 mm

design LEVEL OF SURFACE - 5 mm

Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY

Measured by 3-m straight-edge 5 mm

Permitted variation from design

CROSSFALL OR CAMBER +0.2%

Permitted variation from design

LONGITUDINAL GRADE over

will be given for material placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 64/437

sections. Trial sections shall not be measured separately but shall be included in
 the quantities as measured above.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

300.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 300.4 shall be

paid for at the contract unit price for Aggregate Surface Course which price and
payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, handling, placing,
watering, and rolling all materials, including all labor and equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

300 Aggregate Surface Course Cubic Meter

300 (1) Gravel Surface Course compacted in place

300 (2) Crushed Aggregate

Surface Course

ITEM 301 – BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT

301.1 Description

This Item shall consist of preparing and treating an aggregate base course
with material in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, preparatory to the
construction of a bituminous surface course.

301.2 Material Requirements

Bituminous material shall be either Rapid Curing (RC) or Medium Curing

(MC) Cut-back Asphalt, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities. It shall
conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials. The type and
grade shall be specified in the Special Provisions.

301.3.2 Equipment
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 65/437
 The liquid bituminous material shall be sprayed by means of a pressure
distributor of not less than 1000 liters capacity, mounted on pneumatic tires of
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

such width and number that the load produced on the road surface will not exceed
1 kN(100 kgf) per cm width of tire.

The tank shall have a heating device able to heat a complete charge of
bituminous liquid to 1800C. The heating device shall be such that overheating will
not occur. Consequently, the flames must not directly touch the casing of the
tank containing the bituminous liquid. The liquid shall be insulated in such a way
that the drop in temperature when the tank is filled with bituminous liquid at 1800C
0
and not heated will be less than 2 C per hour. A thermometer shall be fixed to
the tank in order to be able to measure continuously the temperature of the liquid.
The thermometer shall be placed in such a way that the highest temperature in
tank is measured. The tank shall be furnished with a calibrated dipstick to
indicate the contents. The pipes for filling the tank shall be furnished with an
easily changeable filter.

The distributor shall be able to vary the spray width of the bituminous liquid

in maximum
nozzles fromsteps
whichofthe
100liquid
mm tois asprayed
total width of 4 m. on
fan-shaped Thethe
spraying bar shall
road surface have
equally
distributed over the total spraying width.

For adding the liquid bituminous material, the distributor shall have a pump
either driven by a separate motor, or with a device to synchronize its speed with
the speed of the distributor. The pump shall be furnished with an indicator
showing the rate of flow. The suction side of the pump shall have an easily
changeable filter. A thermometer shall be fixed, such that it indicates the
temperature of the liquid immediately before it leaves the spraying bar.

The distributor shall be furnished with a tachometer, indicating its forward

speed, which shall be visible from the driver’s seat. The distributor shall be
designed so that the deviation from the prescribed rate of application does not
exceed 10% and shall be equipped with a device for hand spraying of the
bituminous liquid.

301.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material

Immediately before applying the prime coat, the full width of surface to be
treated shall be swept with a power broom and if necessary, scraped to remove all
dirt and other objectionable materials. When required by the Engineer,

that it will not be picked up by the wheels of passing vehicles. The Contractor
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 66/437

shall maintain the prime coat until the next course is applied. Care shall be taken
 that the application of bituminous material is not in excess of the specified
amount, any excess shall be blotted with sand or removed as directed by the
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Engineer. All areas inaccessible to the distributor shall be sprayed manually

using the device for hand spraying. The surface of structures and trees adjacent
to the areas being treated shall be protected in such a manner as to prevent their
being spattered or marred.

301.4 Method of Measurement

Bituminous Prime Coat shall be measured by the tonne (t). The quantity to
be paid for shall be the number of tonnes of bituminous material applied and
accepted in the completed work.

301.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 301.4, shall be

paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Prime Coat which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials,

including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this
Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

301 Bituminous Prime Coat

301(1) MC – Cut-back Asphalt tonne
301 (2) RC – Cut-back Asphalt tonne

ITEM 302 – BITUMINOUS TACK COAT

302.1 Description

This Item shall consist of preparing and treating an existing bituminous or

cement concrete surface with bituminous material in accordance with the Plans
and Specifications, preparatory to the construction of a bituminous surface course.

302.3 Construction Requirements

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 67/437
 302.3.1 Surface Condition
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Tack coat shall be applied only to surfaces which are dry or slightly moist.
No tack coat shall be applied when the weather is foggy or rainy.

302.3.2 Equipment

Equipment shall conform in all respects to Subsection 301.3.2. .

302.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material

Immediately before applying the tack coat, the full width of the surface to be
treated shall be cleaned of loose and foreign materials by means of a power
broom or power blower, supplemented as necessary by hand sweeping. Where
required by the Engineer, immediately prior to the application of the tack coat, the
surface shall be lightly sprayed with water but not saturated. Bituminous material
shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor at the temperature given in
Item 702, Bituminous Materials, of the particular material being used. The rate of
application of either the Rapid Curing Cut-back or the Emulsified Asphalt shall be
within the range of 0.2 to 0.7 litre/m2, the exact rate as determined by the
Engineer.

Care shall be taken that the application of bituminous material is not in

excess of the specified amount; any excess shall be blotted by sand or removed
as directed by the Engineer. All areas inaccessible to the distributor shall be
treated manually using the device for hand spraying. The surfaces of structures
and trees adjacent to the areas being treated shall be protected in such a manner
so as to prevent their being spattered or marred.

Traffic shall be kept off the tack coat at all times. The tack coat shall be
sprayed only so far in advance on the surface course as will permit it to dry to a
“tacky” condition. The Contractor shall maintain the tack coat until the next
course has been applied. Any area that has become fouled by traffic or
otherwise, shall be cleaned and resprayed at the Contractor’s expense before the
next course is applied.

302.4 Method of Measurement

The bituminous tack coat shall be measured by the tonne (t), completed
and accepted in-place.

Payment will be made under:

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 68/437
 Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

302 Bituminous Tack Coat

302(1) RC – Cut-back Asphalt Tonne
302 (2) Emulsified Asphalt Tonne

ITEM 303 – BITUMINOUS SEAL COAT

303.1 Description

This Item shall consist of an application of bituminous material with or

without an application of aggregate on an existing bituminous surface course in
accordance with the Plans and Specifications.

303.2 Material Requirements

303.2.1 Quantities of Materials

The approximate amounts of materials per square metre for seal coats of
the several types shall be as provided in Table 303.1. The exact amounts to be
used shall be set by the Engineer.

Table 303.1 – Quantities of Materials for Seal Coats

Type 1 Type 2 Type 3

Bituminous material L/m2 0.20 – 0.50 0.50 – 1.00 0.85 – 1.50

Cover Aggregate, kg/m2 none 5.00 – 10.00 8.00 – 14.00

303.2.2 Bituminous Materials

Bituminous material shall be Asphalt Cement, Penetration Grade 120-150,

Rapid Curing (RC) or Medium Curing (MC) Cut-back Asphalt. It shall conform to
the requirements of Item 702 Bituminous Materials whichever is called for in the

Aggregate for Type 3 seal coat shall be crushed stone, crushed slag or
crushed gravel. Only one type of aggregate shall be used in a project unless
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 69/437

alternative types are approved.

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Aggregate gradation shall conform with Table 303.2 when tested by
AASHTO T 27.

Table 303.2 – Grading Requirements

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

Standard Alternate Type 2 Type 3
mm U.S. Standard Grading A Grading B
12.50 ½ in. - - 100
9.50 3/8 in. 100 100 85 – 100
4.75 No. 4 85 – 100 85 – 100 10 – 30
2.36 No. 8 60 – 100 10 – 40 0 – 10
1.18 No. 16 - 0 – 10 0–5
0.300 No. 50 - 0–5 -
0.150 No. 100 0 – 10 - -

The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when
tested by AASHTO T 96.

When crushed slag is used, it shall be of uniform density and quality and
shall have a density of not less than 960 kg/m 3 (60 lb/cu. ft.) as determined by
AASHTO T 19.

303.3 Construction Requirements

303.3.1 Weather and Moisture Conditions

Seal coating shall not be undertaken during foggy or rainy weather or when
the surface to be treated is wet. Wet cover coat material shall not be used on the
work. No seal coating work shall be continued at night unless provided with
sufficient lighting. The Engineer shall always be consulted before the
commencement of the work and all work shall be terminated at once in the event
of rain.

303.3.2 Preparation of Surface

Seal coating operations shall not be started until the bituminous surface is

methods are authorized by the Engineer. Dried mud or other foreign material
which cannot be removed otherwise shall be removed by hand methods.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 70/437
 303.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Bituminous material shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor at

the rate of approximately 0.9 to 1.8 litres for asphalt cement and 1.5 to 3.0 litres
for cut-back asphalt, per square metre of surface, in a uniform, unbroken spread
over the section to be treated. The pressure distributor used for applying
asphaltic materials shall be equipped with pneumatic tires and shall be designed
and operated so as to distribute the asphaltic material at the specified rate. It
shall be equipped with a fifth wheel tachometer registering the speed and so
located as to be
with a gauge visible tolitres
registering the truck driver.passing
per minute The distributor
throughpump shall be
the nozzles equipped
and readily
visible to the operator. Other suitable measuring devices approved by the
Engineer may be used. The exact quantity to be applied shall be determined by
the Engineer. The temperature at the time of application shall be within the range
of temperature specified under Item 702, Bituminous Materials. Care shall be
taken that the application of bituminous material at the junction of spreads is not in
excess of the specified quantities. Any excess shall be removed from the surface
by a squeegee. If necessary, to obtain proper junction of spreads, a strip of
manila paper approximately 1 metre wide and at least as long as the spray bar
shall be used at the beginning and end of each spread. The paper shall be
removed after use.

Any skipped areas or recognized deficiencies shall be corrected

immediately by hand application and hand operated pressure devices or by other
equally suitable means.

In the event that any structure becomes discolored with bituminous

material, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove the discoloration to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

303.3.4 Application of the Cover Aggregate

Immediately after the application of asphalt, the cover aggregate shall be

evenly spread over the surface at the rate of approximately 0.004 to 0.007 cubic
metre per square metre. The exact quantity shall be as directed by the Engineer.
Spreading shall be accomplished by aggregate spreader only so that an even and
accurate distribution is obtained. The use of spreader boards attached to tail
gates of trucks shall not be permitted. The tires of the aggregate trucks shall at
no time come in contact with the uncovered and newly applied asphalt.

303.3.5 Maintenance
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 71/437

The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until
 the work is accepted by the Engineer. The maintenance work shall consist of
5/7/2018
keeping any excess aggregate evenly spread over the asphalt surface by
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

approved sweeping devices. It shall also consist of keeping all potholes or

failures which may occur, repaired by use of additional asphalt and necessary
aggregate. All fat or bleeding surfaces shall be covered with approved cover
aggregate so that the asphalt will not adhere to, or be picked up by the wheels of
vehicles.

303.4 Method of Measurement

The quantities of bituminous material and cover aggregate shall be

measured by the tonne (t), calculated by the actual rate of application approved by
the Engineer.

303.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 303.4, shall be

paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Seal Coat, which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials,
including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this
Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

303 Bituminous Seal Coat

303 (1) Cover Aggregate, Type ___ Tonne
303 (2) MC ___ Cut-back Asphalt Tonne
303 (3) RC ___ Cut-back Asphalt Tonne
303 (4) Asphalt Cement Pen. Gr. Tonne

ITEM 304 – BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

304 1 D i ti

304.2 Material Requirements

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 72/437

304.2.1 Quantities of Materials

5/7/2018 The approximate amounts of materials per square metre and sequence of
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

operations for single and double surface treatment shall be as provided in Table
304.1 and Table 304.2, whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities.

The quantities given in the Tables are those of aggregates having a bulk
specific gravity of 2.65 as determined by AASHTO T 84 and T 85. Proportionate
corrections will be made when the aggregate furnished on the job has a bulk
specific gravity above 2.75 or below 2.55. In such case, the corrected amount
will be the
specific product
gravity of the quantity
of aggregate to 2.65.shown in the tables and the ratio of the bulk

The amounts given in the Tables are approximate and the exact amounts
will be set by the Engineer. Total amount of bituminous material per square
metre may be varied by the Engineer as necessary to fit conditions, but the total
amount of aggregate per square metre, after adjusting for specific gravity will not
be changed.

Tabel 304.1 – Quantities of Materials and Sequence of Operations Using Cut-

Back Asphalt or Asphalt Cement

Aggregate Grading and Sequence of Single Double

Operations S.T. S.T.

First Course:
Apply bituminous material, L/m 0.7 – 1.1 AC 1.6 – 2.0 AC
0.9 – 1.5 MC 1.8 – 2.3 MC
Spread Aggregate:
Grading A, kg/m2 22.0 – 27.0
Grading B, kg/m2 11.0 – 14.0
Second Course:
Apply bituminous material, L/m2 2.3 – 2.7 AC
2.8 – 3.5 MC
Spread Aggregate:2
Grading C, kg/m 11.0 – 14.0

Tabel 304.2 – Quantities of Materials and Sequence of Operations

Using Emulsified Asphalt
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 73/437
 Aggregate Grading and Sequence of Single Double
5/7/2018 Operations S.T. S.T.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

First Course:
Apply bituminous material, L/m2 0.9 – 1.6 1.4 – 2.0

Spread Aggregate:
Grading A, kg/m2 14.0 – 19.0
Grading B, kg/m2 11.0 – 14.0

Second Course:
Apply bituminous material, L/m2 2.1 – 3.0

Spread Aggregate:
Grading C, kg/m2 5.0 – 8.0

304.2.2 Bituminous Materials

Bituminous materials shall be either CRS-1 (Cationic Rapid Setting), CRS-

2 (Cationic Rapid Setting), RS-1 (Rapid Setting), RS-2 (Rapid Setting), AC 120-
150 (Asphalt cement), MC 250-800 (Medium Curing), whichever is called for in the
Bill of Quantities. It shall conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous
Materials, Penetration Grade No. of asphalt cement, the type and grade of cut-
back and emulsified asphalt will be specified in the Special Provisions.

304.2.3 Aggregates

The aggregates shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed gravel.

Only one type of aggregate shall be used in a project unless alternative types are
approved. The gradation shall conform to Table 304.3.

Table 304.3 – Aggregate Grading Requirements

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

Standard Alternative Grading A Grading B Grading C
mm U.S. Standard
25 0 1” 100 - -

The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when
tested by AASHTO T 96.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 74/437
 When crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass percent of the
5/7/2018 particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least one fractured
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
face.

When crushed slag is used, it must be of uniform density and quality and
shall have a density not less than 960 kg/m3 (60 lb/cu.ft.) as determined by
AASHTO T 19.

304.3 Construction Requirements

304.3.1 Rates of Application/Spreading of Asphalt and Aggregate

The rates of application/spreading of asphalt and aggregate shall be within

the range in Table 304.1 and 304.2 respectively. These quantities are given as
guide only and will vary considerably according to the type and condition of the
surface, the grading, type, shape and absorbency of the aggregate, the weather
condition and the traffic. The actual quantities to be used for surface treatment
shall be determined by the Contractor in accordance with the design methods for
one-size aggregate given in the Asphalt Institute Manual (MS-13), Asphalt Surface
Treatment. The proposed design shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a certified vendor’s certificate in

duplicate immediately upon delivery of asphaltic material to the Site.

The Contractor shall provide weighing equipment on the Site to control the
application of aggregates. The weighing equipment shall have an approved
multiple beam type scale with indicator and other necessary dials for accurately
weighing the aggregate. The scale shall be protected by a weather-proof house
with a floor area not less than 10 m 2. The Contractor shall at his own expense
have the scale tested and approved by the Department of Public Works and
Highways.

304.3.2 Equipment

Equipment for applying the bituminous material shall conform to the

requirements of Subsection 301.3.2, Equipment of Item 301, Bituminous Prime
Coat. A mechanical spreader shall be used for spreading the aggregates. It shall
be capable of spreading the aggregate uniformly over the full width of the area
being treated and shall have controls to regulate the feed gates, the feed roll, the

The required asphaltic material shall be applied to the surface at least

twenty four (24) hours after it has been prime coated.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 75/437
 Prior to applying the aphaltic material, dirt and other objectionable material
5/7/2018
shall be removed from the surface. If so directed by the Engineer, the surface
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
shall be cleaned by power broom until all dust and loose materials are removed.
Asphaltic material shall be applied on a dry surface whenever cut-back or asphalt
cement is used; moist surface when emulsified asphalt is used.

Spraying shall not be done unless the road temperature has been above
200C for at least one hour prior to the commencement of spraying operations, and
the temperature shall not be less than 200C during the spraying.

The application temperature for asphalt cement shall be within the range
that produces a viscosity of 10 to 60 second Saybolt Furol and for cut-back
asphalt shall be within the range given in Item 702, Bituminous Material. The
temperature shall be such that no fogging occurs.

304.3.4 Spreading of Aggregate

Immediately after applying the asphaltic material, dry aggregate shall be

uniformly and evenly distributed over the treated surface from an approved
mechanical aggregate spreader. The truck carrying the aggregate shall move
backward as it spreads the aggregate so as to prevent the tires of the truck and
the mechanical aggregate spreader from driving directly on the newly sprayed
asphalt.

No portion of the sprayed surface shall remain uncovered for a period in

excess of 2 minutes. Immediately after spreading the aggregate, the treated
surface shall be rolled with an approved pneumatic-tire roller.

Where asphaltic material is exposed during rolling, the area shall be

covered with additional aggregate and further rolled until an even surface results.

304.3.5 Control of Traffic

The Contractor shall take all steps necessary to control traffic over newly-
laid bituminous surface treatment so that the surface is not damaged in any way.
Traffic shall be prohibited from traveling at speeds in excess of 40 km/h until the
asphaltic material has set. The Contractor shall ensure that no vehicles,
including those delivering aggregates, shall be permitted to turn around on newly-
laid material.

304.5 Basis of Payment

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 76/437
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 304.4, shall be
 paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Surface Treatment, which price
and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials
5/7/2018
and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

304
304 (1) Bituminous Surface Treatment
Aggregate Grading Tonne
Tonne
304 (2) Asphalt Cement Pen. Grade Tonne
304 (3) RC ___ Cut-back Asphalt Tonne
304 (4) MC ___ Cut-back Asphalt Tonne
304 (5) Emulsified Asphalt Tonne

ITEM 305 – BITUMINOUS PENETRATION MACADAM PAVEMENT

305.1 Description

This Item shall consist of furnishing and placing one or more courses of
graded aggregate and one or more application of bituminous material, followed by
a seal coat with cover aggregate constructed on a prepared base in accordance
with this Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades and typical cross-
sections shown on the Plans.

305.2 Material Requirements

305.2.1 Quantities of Materials

The approximate amounts of materials per square metre and sequence of

operations shall be provided in Table 305.1, whichever is called for in the Bill of
quantities.

The weights given in the Table are those of aggregates having a bulk
specific gravity of 2.65 as determined by AASHTO T 84 and T 85. Proportionate
corrections will be made when the aggregates furnished on the job have a bulk

aggregate per square metre, after adjusting for specific gravity will not be
changed.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 77/437

Table 305.1 – Quantities of Materials and Sequence of Operations

5/7/2018 Type of Bituminous Material
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Type of Aggregate and Asphalt Cement Emulsified

Sequence of Operations or Rapid Curing Asphalt
(RC)
First Layer:
Spread Aggregates:
Coarse Aggregate, kg/m2 90 90
2
Choker Aggregate, kg/m - 10
Apply bituminous material, L/m2 4.0 5.5

Second Layer:
Spread Aggregate:
Key Aggregate, kg/m2 13 10
Apply bituminous material, L/m2 1.8 3.5

Third Layer:
Spread Aggregate:
Key Aggregate, kg/m2 11 8
Apply bituminous material, L/m2 1.4 2

Fourth Layer:
Spread Aggregate:
Cover Aggregate, kg/m2 8 8
Total Quantities:
Bituminous Material, L/m2 7.2 11
Aggregate, kg/m2 122 126

305.2.2 Bituminous Material

The bituminous material shall be either Asphalt Cement, Rapid Curing

(RC), Cut-back Asphalt or Emulsified Asphalt, whichever is called for in the Bill of

Quantities.
Materials. The It Penetration
shall conform to the
Grade requirements
Number of asphaltofcement
Item 702, Bituminous
and type and/or
grade of cut-back or emulsified asphalt will be specified in the Special Provisions.

305.2.3 Aggregate

Table 305.2 – Aggregate Grading Requirements

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 78/437

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

 Standard Alternate Coarse Choker Key Cover
5/7/2018 Mm U.S. Standard Aggregate Aggregate Aggregate Aggregate
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

63 2 – 1/2” 100 - - -
50 2” 90 – 100 - - -
37.5 1 – 1/2” 35 – 70 - - -
25 1” 0 – 15 - 100 -
19 ¾” - 100 90 – 100 -
12.5 ½” 0–5 90 – 100 20 – 55 100
9.5 3/8” - 40 – 70 0 – 15 85 – 100
4.75 No. 4 - 0 – 15 0–5 10 – 30
2.36 No. 8 - 0–5 - 0 – 10
1.18 No. 16 - - - 0–5

The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when
tested by AASHTO T 96.

When the crushed gravel is subjected to five cycles of the sodium sulfate
soundness test (AASHTO T 104), the weighted loss shall not exceed 12 mass
percent.

When crushed slag is used, it must be of uniform density and quality and
shall have a density not less than 1120 kg/m3 (70 lb/cu. ft.) as determined by
AASHTO T 19.

305.3 Construction Requirements

305.3.1 Weather Limitations

Application of bituminous material shall be made only when the aggregate

is dry and the atmospheric temperature in the shade is 15 0C or above and when
the weather is not foggy or rainy.

305.3.2 Equipment

The equipment to be used shall include hand or power operated brooms,

shovels, rakes, self-powered bituminous material distributors or hand or power-
operated spray pumps, broom dragging equipment and self-powered rollers. A
sufficient number of stiff fiber or steel bristle push brooms shall be included

The rollers shall be self-propelled steel wheel, vibratory or pneumatic type.

The number and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the layer to the
required condition.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 79/437
 305.3.3 Conditioning of Existing Base
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Before spreading the aggregate, the base shall be cleaned of all loose
foreign materials. The existing base shall be swept until the embedded large
aggregate is exposed, or in the case of a previously constructed asphalt surface,
until the surface is free of mud or other covering.

If shown on the Plans and called for in the Bill of Quantities, a prime coat

shall be applied
Bituminous Primeto Coat,
the prepared untreated
or in case base in constructed
of previously accordance asphalt
with theor
Item 301,
cement
surface tack coat shall be applied in accordance with Item 302, Bituminous Tack
Coat.

305.3.4 Spreading and Compacting of Aggregate Layers

The number of layers in which the macadam pavement is to be constructed

and the order and rates the bituminous material and mineral aggregates are to be
spread shall be as indicated in Table 305.1.

The type of aggregate required in the order of spreading shall be placed in

the required amount of approved aggregate spreaders, or by other approved
mechanical methods. All areas with non-uniformly graded aggregate shall be
removed and replaced with suitable materials before the rolling begins. These
corrections shall be made by hand picking whenever necessary and shall be
continued after initial rolling until the appearance and texture of the aggregate are
uniform and all irregularities are corrected.
The aggregate shall be dry-rolled until it is compacted and keyed. Rolling
shall progress gradually from the sides to the center, parallel with the center line
of the road and overlapping uniformly each preceding rear wheel track by one-half
the width of such track and shall continue until the aggregate does not creep or
displace ahead of the rollers.

Materials
segregated which
in such are crushed
a manner excessively
as to prevent under
free and the roller
uniform or becomes
penetration of the
bituminous material shall be removed and replaced with suitable aggregate. The
compacted aggregate shall have a firm and even surface.

Aggregate in any layer that becomes coated or mixed with dirt or clay prior
to the application of the bituminous material shall be removed and replace with
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 80/437

clean aggregates and the area shall be rerolled.

5/7/2018
Prior to application of the bituminous material, the surface of the aggregate
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

layer will be tested by the Engineer using a 3-m straight-edge at selected

locations. The variation of the surface from the testing edge of the straight-edge
between any two contacts with the surface shall at no point exceed 10 mm. All
humps or depressions exceeding the specified tolerances shall be corrected by
removing defective work and replacing it with new materials as specified.

Each
covered layer
before of aggregate
wheels or tracksshall
passbe spread
over it. so that the bituminous material is

305.3.5 Application of Bituminous Material

The bituminous material shall be uniformly applied at the rate specified in

Table 305.1. Building paper shall be placed over the end of the previous
application and the joining application shall start on the building paper. Building
paper so used shall be removed and disposed off in a satisfactory manner.
During the application of the bituminous material, care shall be taken to prevent
spattering of adjacent pavements, structures and trees.

The distributors shall not be cleaned or discharged into ditches, borrow pits
or shoulders along the right-of-way.

305.4 Method of Measurement

Bituminous Materials, and Aggregate for Bituminous Penetration Macadam

Pavement will be measured by the tonne (t). The quantity to be paid for shall be
the number of tonnes of bituminous material and aggregate used and accepted in
the completed work.

305.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 305.4, shall be

paid
whichforprice
at the contract
and paymentunitshall
pricebeforfull
Bituminous Penetration
compensation Macadam
for furnishing andPavement,
placing all
materials and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.

Payment will be made under:

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 81/437
 Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

305 Bituminous Penetration

Macadam Pavement
305 (1) Aggregates Tonne
305 (2) Asphalt Cement Tonne
305 (3) RC ___ Cut-back Asphalt Tonne
305 (4) Emulsified Asphalt Tonne

ITEM 306 – BITUMINOUS ROAD MIX SURFACE COURSE

306.1 Description

This Item shall consist of constructing a bituminous road-mix surface

course on a prepared base in accordance with these Specification and in
conformity with the lines, grades and typical cross-sections shown on the Plans,
or as established by the Engineer.

306.2 Material Requirements

306.2.1 Bituminous Material

The bituminous material shall be either Rapid Curing (RC) Cut-back,

Medium Curing (MC) Cut-back or Emulsified Asphalt, whichever is called for in the
Bill of Quantities. It shall conform to the requirements of Item 702, Bituminous
Material. The type and grade will be specified in the Special Provisions.

306.2.2 Aggregate

The aggregate shall conform to applicable requirements of Item 703,

Aggregates. It will be tested for acceptance immediately preceding addition of
bituminous material to the mix. This Acceptance will be based on periodic
samples from the windrowed materials after all aggregates have been blended for
each layer

2. Salvaged Aggregate

Where aggregate required for the road mix surface course is

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 82/437

already in place, the Contractor shall not be responsible for its grading
 or quality except
aggregate to be for removal
used of oversize
for road pieces.course
mix surface In general, salvaged
will consist of
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
materials meeting the requirements given in Item 703, Aggregates, for
new aggregate or may consist of selected granular material for other
gradings. Any particles of salvaged aggregate appearing in the
surface at the time of lay-down and finishing that will not pass 37.5
mm (1-1/2 inch) sieve shall be removed by the Contractor as directed
by the Engineer.

306.2.3 Proportioning of Mixture

The proportion of bituminous material on the basis of total dry aggregate,

shall be from 4.5 to 7.0 mass percent when cut-back asphalt is used and from 6.0
to 10.0 mass percent when emulsified asphalt is used. The exact percentage to
be used shall be fixed by the Engineer in accordance with the job-mix formula and
the other quality control requirements.

During the mixing operation, one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass percent of
hydrated lime, dry aggregate basis, shall be added to the mixture. The lower
percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which are predominantly calcareous.

306.3 Construction Requirements

306.3.1 Weather Limitations

The construction of road mix bituminous pavement shall be carried on only

when the surface on which the material is to be placed is dry and when the
weather is not foggy or rainy.

306.3.2 Construction Equipment

The equipment used by the Contractor shall include scarifying, mixing,

spreading, finishing and compacting equipment; a bituminous distributor; and the

equipment for heating bituminous material.

The distributor shall be so designed, equipped, maintained and operated
that bituminous material at even heat may be applied uniformly on variable widths
of surface up to 4.5 m at readily determined and controlled rates from 0.2 to 10

Travelling or stationary mixing plants or other equipment of proven

performance may be used by the Contractor in lieu of the specified equipment, if
approved by the Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 83/437
 Rollers
weighing shallthan
not less be 8self-propelled steel-wheel
tonnes each and tandem
pneumatic or 3-wheel
tire rollers having arollers
total
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
compacting width of not less than 1,520 mm (60 inches) and the gross mass
adjustable within the range of 3,640 to 6,360 kilograms per metre (200 t0 350
pounds per inch) of compaction width. The operating mass shall be directed.
Tire pressure or contact pressure may be specified for pneumatic-tire rollers. All
tires on pneumatic rollers shall be equally inflated, exerting equal unit pressure,
with a means of varying the contact pressure to suit project conditions.

306.3.3 Preparation of Base

1. Case 1 (New Aggregate)

When new aggregate is to be used for the road mix surface course,
the existing base shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform grade
and to the cross-section shown on the Plans and shall then be rolled or
watered and rolled, as directed. If so ordered by the Engineer,
depressions shall first be filled and weak portions of the base
strengthened with new aggregate.

2. Case 2 (Salvaged Aggregate)

When material in the existing road surface is to be used for mixing,

the surface shall be scarified lightly and bladed to uniform grade and to
the cross-section shown on the Plans. The reshaped surface shall
then be scarified again to the depth ordered by the Engineer and in
such manner as to leave a foundation of undisturbed material parallel,
both in profile and cross-section, to the proposed finished surface.
The loosened materials shall be bladed aside into a windrow at the side
of the road and the undisturbed material rolled or watered and rolled, as
directed.

306.3.4 Placing Aggregates

New aggregates, where required, shall be uniformly spread on the

prepared surface by the use of spreader boxes, or other approved mechanical
spreading devices. When two or more sizes of aggregates are used, each size of
aggregate shall be placed in the proper amount to provide for surfacing of the

asphalt, the aggregate shall be turned by blades or disc harrows or otherwise

aerated until the moisture content is reduced to 2 percent or less. The aggregate
shall then be spread smoothly and uniformly over half the road or other
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 84/437
convenient width of the surface ready for the application of bituminous material,
 except that when
into a uniform a traveling mixing plant is used, the aggregate shall be formed
cross-section.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

In lieu of aerating and drying the aggregate, the Contractor may use an
approved additive, except where emulsified asphalt is used, which shall be
satisfactorily blended with the bituminous material. The additive shall permit
suitable coating of the wet aggregate and shall prevent the bituminous coating
from stripping in the presence of water.

306.3.5 Application of Bituminous Material

The bituminous material shall be uniformly distributed in successive

application, in such amounts and at such intervals as directed. The mixing
equipment shall follow immediately behind the distributor, after each application of
bituminous material, to partially mix the aggregate and the bituminous material.

306.3.6 Mixing

After the last application of bituminous material and partial mixing, the
entire mass of bituminous material and aggregate shall be windrowed on the road
surface and then mixed, by blading the mixture from side to side of the road, or by
manipulation producing equivalent results, until all aggregate particles are coated
with bituminous material and the whole mass has a uniform color and the mixture
is free from fat or lean spots, or balls of uncoated particles. During the mixing
operations, care shall be taken to avoid cutting into the underlying course or
contaminating the mixture with earth or other extraneous matter. When directed,
the mixing process shall be confined to part of the width or area of the road so as
to allow traffic to pass.

Should the mixture show an excess, deficiency or uneven distribution of

bituminous material, the condition shall be corrected by the addition of aggregate
or bituminous material as required and re-mixing. If the mixture contains
excessive amounts of moisture or volatile matter, it shall be bladed, aerated or

otherwise manipulated
The spreading of the mixuntil thenotmoisture
shall be doneand volatile
when content
the surface to are satisfactory.
be covered is in
an unsatisfactory condition. At the end of each day’s work, or when the work is
interrupted by weather conditions or otherwise, all loose materials shall be bladed
into a windrow, whether mixing is completed or not, and shall be retained in a

306.3.7 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 85/437
The material shall be spread by a self-propelled pneumatic-tire blade
 grader orcare
windrow, a mechanical spreader
shall be taken to avoidofcutting
approved type.
into the In spreading
underlying base. from the
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

After the material is spread, the surface shall be rolled. Rolling shall be
parallel to the road center line and shall commence at the outer edges of the road,
overlapping the shoulders and progressing towards the center, overlapping on
successive passes by at least one-half the width of the roller, except that on
superelevated curves, rolling shall progress from the lower to the upper edge.

Each pass shall terminate at least 910 mm (3 ft) in advance or to the rear of
the end of the preceding pass. During compaction, the surface shall be dragged
or bladed as necessary to fill ruts and to remove incipient corrugations or other
irregularities. Rolling shall continue until the surfacing is of uniform texture and
satisfactory compaction is obtained. Initial rolling shall be performed with a
pneumatic-tire roller and final rolling with a 3-wheel or tandem type steel wheel
roller. Rolling shall be discontinued whenever it begins to produce excessive
pulverizing of the aggregate or displacement of the mixture.

When the compacted thickness of the road mix surface is to be more than
50 mm (2 inches), the mixture shall be spread from the windrow and compacted in
two layers, the first layer to be bladed and rolled before the second layer is
spread.

While the surface is being compacted and finished, the Contractor shall
trim the edges neatly to line.

306.3.8 Surface Requirements

Surface requirements shall be as specified in Subsection 307.3.11 except

that the permissible surface variance will be 10 mm in 3 m (3.8 inch in 10 ft.).

306.4 Method of Measurement

CourseBituminous material
will be measured andtonne
by the aggregate forquantity
(t). The Bituminous RoadforMix
to be paid shallSurface
be the
number of tonnes of bituminous material and aggregate used and accepted in the
completed work. The weight of all moisture in the aggregate will be deducted
from the pay quantity.

306.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 306.4 shall be

paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Road Mix Surface Course, which
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 86/437
 price andhauling,
mixing, paymentplacing,
shall be rolling,
full compensation
compacting,for labor,
furnishing materials,tools
equipment, handling,
and
5/7/2018 incidentals necessary to complete this Item. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

306 Bituminous Road Mix Surface

Course
306 (1) Aggregate for Bituminous
Road Mix Surface Course Tonne
306 (2) Bituminous Material for
Bituminous Road Mix Surface
Course Tonne

ITEM 307 – BITUMINOUS PLANT-MIX SURFACE COURSE - GENERAL

307.1 Description

This item includes general requirements that are applicable to all types of
bituminous plant mix surface courses irrespective of gradation of aggregate or
kind and amount of bituminous material. Derivations from these general
requirements will be indicated in the specific requirements for each type.

This work shall consist of constructing one or more bituminous bound

layers on a prepared foundation in accordance with the Specifications and the
specific requirements of the type under contract, and in reasonably close
conformity with the lines, grades, thickness, and typical cross-sections shown on
the Plans within the tolerances specified or established by the Engineer.

307.2 Material Requirements

307.2.1 Composition and Quality of Bituminous Mixture

Each job-mix formula submitted shall propose definite single values for:

1. The percentage of aggregate passing each specified sieve size.

2. The percentage of bituminous material to be added.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 87/437
 3.
4. The
The temperature of the mixture
kind and percentage delivered
of additive to beon the road.
used.
5/7/2018 5. The kind and percentage of mineral filler to be used.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

After the job-mix is established, all mixture furnished for the project shall
conform thereto within the following ranges of tolerances:

Passing No. 4 and larger sieves ± 7 percent

Passing No. 8 to No. 100 sieves (inclusive) ± 4 percent
Passing No. 200 sieve ± 2 percent
Bituminous Material ± 0.4 percent
Temperature of Mixture ± 100C

Should a change in source of material be proposed or should a job-mix

formula prove unsatisfactory, a new job-mix formula shall be submitted by the
Contractor in writing and be approved by the Engineer prior to production.

Approval of a new jobmix formula may require laboratory testing and

verification.

The mixture shall have a minimum compressive strength of 1.4 MPa (200
psi).

The mixture shall have a mass percent air voids with the range of 3 to 5.

The mixture shall also have an index of retained strength of not less than
70 when tested by AASHTO T 165. For aggregates having maximum sizes
over 25 mm (1 inch), AASHTO T 165 will be modified to use 150 mm x 150 mm (
6 x 6 inches) cylindrical specimens. The 150 mm (6 inches cylinders will be
compacted by the procedures outlined in AASHTO T 167 modified to employ 10
repetitions of a molding load of 9.6 MPa (1400 psi), with no appreciable holding
time after each application of the full load.

307.2.2 Bituminous Material

The kind of bituminous material to be used will be as called for in the Bill of
Quantities, while the type and grade will be specified in the Special Provisions.
The grade may be changed one step by the Engineer at no change in unit price.

307.2.4 Mineral Filler

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 703 A, Mineral Filler.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 88/437
 307.2.5 Hydrated Lime
5/7/2018
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 701, Construction Lime.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

307.2.6 Proportioning of Mixture

The proportion of bituminous material, on the basis of total dry aggregate,

shall be from 5.0 to 8.0 mass percent. The exact percentage to be used shall be
fixed by the Engineer in accordance with job-mix formula and other quality control
requirements.

Hydrated lime shall be added to the mixture during the mixing operation in
the amount of one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass percent, dry aggregate basis.
The lower percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which are predominantly
calcareous.

307.3 Construction Requirements

307.3.1 Weather Limitations

Bituminous Plant mix shall not be placed on any wet surface, or when
weather conditions would prevent the proper handling or finishing of the
bituminous mixtures.

307.3.2 Construction Equipment

1. Bituminous Mixing Plant

Sufficient storage space shall be provided for each size of aggregate. The
different aggregate sizes shall be kept separated until they have been delivered to
the cold elevator feeding the drier. The storage yard shall be maintained neat
and orderly and the separate stockpiles shall be readily accessible for sampling.

Plants used for the preparation of bituminous mixtures shall conform to the
requirements for all plants under (a) below except that scale requirements shall
apply only where weight proportioning is used. In addition, batch mixing plants
and continuous mixing plants shall conform to the respective requirements which
follow this Subsection.

locked in any position to prevent unauthorized change of position. In

lieu of plant and truck scales, the Contractor may provide an approved
automatic printer system which will print the weights of the material
delivered, provided the system is used in conjunction with an
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 89/437
 approved automatic
weights shall batching
be evidenced by a and mixing
weight ticket control
for eachsystem.
load. Such
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Scales shall be inspected and sealed as often as the Engineer may

deem necessary to assure their continued accuracy. The Contractor
shall have on hand not less than ten 20-kg weights for testing the
scales.

2. Equipment for Preparation of Bituminous Material. Tanks for the

storage of bituminous material shall be equipped with the proper
devices to heat and hold the material at the required temperatures.
The heating shall be accomplished by steam coils, electricity, or other
approved means so that no flame shall be in contact with the tank.
The circulating system for the bituminous material shall be designed
to assure proper and continuous circulation during the operating
period. Provision shall be made for measuring and sampling storage
tanks.

3. Feeder for Drier. The plant shall be provided with accurate

mechanical means for uniformly feeding the aggregate into the drier
so that uniform production and temperature will be obtained.

4. Drier. The plant shall include a drier or driers which continuously

agitate during the heating and drying process. For cold-type
bituminous mix, equipment for mechanical cooling of the dried
aggregate to shall
provided and the temperature
be capable of prescribed
supplyingforprepared
cold mixtures shall
material be
for the
mixer to operate at full capacity.

5. Screens. Plant screens, capable of screening all aggregate to the

specified sizes and proportions and having normal capacities in
excess of the full capacity of the mixer, shall be provided.

6. Bins. The plant shall include storage bins of sufficient capacity to

supply the mixer when it is operating at full capacity. Bins shall be
arranged to assure separate and adequate storage of appropriate
fractions of the mineral aggregates. Separate dry storage shall be
provided for filler or hydrated lime when used and the plant shall be

tale devices to indicate the position of the aggregates in the bins at

the lower quarter points.

7. Bituminous Control Gate.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
Satisfactory means, either by weighing or 90/437
 metering,
material inshall
the be
mixprovided to obtain
within the the proper
tolerance amount
specified. of bituminous
Means shall be
provided for checking the quantity or rate of flow of bituminous
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
material into the mixer.

8. Thermometric Equipment. An armored thermometric of adequate

range in temperature reading shall be fixed in the bituminous feed line
at a suitable location near the charging valve at the mixer unit.

The plant shall also be equipped with either an approved dial-

scale, mercury-actuated thermometer, an electric pyrometer, or other
approved thermometric instrument so placed at the discharge chute of
the drier as to register automatically or indicate the temperature of the
heated aggregates.

The Engineer may require replacement of any thermometer by an

approved temperature-recording apparatus for better regulation of the
temperature of aggregates.

9. Dust Collector. The plant shall be equipped with a dust collector

constructed to waste or return uniformly all or any part of the material
to the hot elevator collected as directed.

10. Truck Scales. The bituminous mixture shall be weighed on approved

scales furnished by the Contractor or on public scales at the
Contractor’s
often as theexpense.
Engineer Such
deemsscales shall be
necessary toinspected and accuracy.
assure their sealed as
(See paragraph I).

11. Safety Requirements. Adequate and safe stairways to the mixer

platform and sampling points shall be provided, and guarded ladders
to other plant units shall be placed at all points where accessibility to
plant operations is required. Accessibility to the top of truck bodies
shall be provided by a platform or other suitable device to enable the
Engineer to obtain sampling and mixture temperature data. A hoist or
pulley system shall be provided to raise scale calibration equipment,
sampling equipment and other similar equipment from ground to the
mixer platform and return. All gears, pulleys, chains, sprockets, and

b. Requirements for Batching Plants

1. Weigh box or hopper. The equipment shall include a means for

accurately weighing each size of aggregate in a weight box or hopper
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 91/437
 suspended
hand rakingon
or scales
runningand of ample
over. size shall
The gate to hold a full
close batch
tightly so without
that no
material is allowed to leak into the mixer while a batch is being
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
weighed.

2. Bituminous Control. The equipment used to measure the bituminous

material shall be accurate to plus or minus 0.5 percent. The
bituminous material bucket shall be a nontilting type with a loose
sheet metal cover. The length of the discharge opening or spray bar
shall be less than ¾ the length of the mixer and it shall discharge
directly into the mixer. The bituminous material bucket, its discharge
valve or valves and spray bar shall be adequately heated. Steam
jackets, if used, shall be efficiently drained and all connections shall
be so constructed that they will not interfere with the efficient
operation of the bituminous scales. The capacity of the bituminous
material bucket shall be at least 15 percent in excess of the weight of
bituminous material required in any batch. The plant shall have an
adequately heated quick-acting, non-drip, charging valve located
directly over the bituminous material bucket.

The indicator dial shall have a capacity of at least 15 percent in

excess of the quantity of bituminous material used in a batch. The
controls shall be constructed so that they may be locked at any dial
setting and will automatically reset to that reading after the addition of
bituminous material to each batch. The dial shall be in full view of the
mixer operator.
automatically controlledThe flowit will
so that of begin
bituminous material
when the shall
dry mixing be
period
is over. All of the bituminous material required for one batch shall be
discharged in not more than 15 seconds after the flow has started.
The size and spacing of the spray bar openings shall provide a
uniform application of bituminous material the full length of the mixer.
The section of the bituminous line between the charging valve and the
spray bar shall be provided with a valve and outlet for checking the
meter when a metering device is substituted for a bituminous material
bucket.

3. Mixer. The batch mixer shall be an approved type capable of

producing a uniform mixture with the job-mix tolerances. If not

4. Control of Mixing Time. The mixer shall be equipped with an

accurate time lock to control the operation of a complete mixing cycle.
It shall lock the weigh box gate after the charging of the mixer until the
closing of the mixer gate at the completion of the cycle. It shall lock
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 92/437

the bituminous material bucket throughout the dry and wet mixing
 periods. The dry mixing period is defined as the interval of time
between the opening of the weigh box gate and the start of
5/7/2018
introduction of bituminous material. The wet mixing period is the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

interval of time between the start of introduction of bituminous material

and the opening of the mixer gate.

The control of the timing shall be flexible and capable of being set
at intervals of 5 seconds or less throughout a total cycle of up to 3
minutes. A mechanical batch counter shall be installed as a part of
the timing device and shall be so designed as to register only
completely mixed batches.

The setting of time interval shall be performed in the presence and

at the direction of the Engineer who shall then lock the case covering
the timing device until such time as a change is to be made in the
timing periods.

c. Requirement for Continuous Mixing Plants

1. Aggregate Proportioning. The plant shall include means for

accurately proportioning each size of aggregate.

The plant shall have a feeder mounted under each compartment

bin. Each compartment bin shall have an accurately controlled
individual gate from
material drawn to form
eachancompartment.
orifice for volumetrically measuring
The feeding orifice shall the
be
rectangular with one dimension adjustable by positive mechanical
means provided with a lock.

Indicators shall be provided for each gate to show the respective

gate opening in millimeter.

2. Weight Calibration of Aggregate Feed. The plant shall include a

means for calibration of gate openings by weighing test samples.
Provision shall be made so that materials fed out of individual orifice
may be by passed to individual test boxes. The plant shall be
equipped to conveniently handle individual test samples weighing not

This control shall be accomplished by interlocking mechanical means

or by any other positive method satisfactory to the Engineer.

4. Mixer. The plants shall include a continuous mixer of an approved

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 93/437

type, adequately
within the job-mixheated and capable
tolerances. It shallofbeproducing
equippeda with
uniform mixture
a discharge
 within the job mix tolerances. It shall be equipped with a discharge
hopper with dump gates which will permit rapid and complete
5/7/2018
discharge of the mixture. The paddles shall be adjustable for angular
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

position on the shafts and reversible to retard the flow of the mix.
The mixer shall have a manufacturer’s plate giving the net volumetric
contents of the mixer of the several heights inscribed on a permanent
gauge. Charts shall be provided showing the rate of feed or
aggregate per minute for the aggregate being used.

2. Hauling Equipment

Trucks used for hauling bituminous mixtures shall have tight, clean, smooth
metal beds which have been thinly coated with approved material to prevent the
mixture from adhering to the beds. Each truck shall have a cover of canvass or
other suitable material of such size as to protect the mixture from the weather.
When necessary, such that the mixture will be delivered on the road at the
specified temperature, truck beds shall be insulated and covers shall be securely
fastened.

Truck beds shall be drained prior to loading.

3. Bituminous Pavers

The equipment shall be self-contained, power-propelled units, provided

with an adjustable
and capable activated
of spreading andscreed orcourses
finishing strike-offof assembly,
bituminousheated if necessary,
plant mix material in
lane widths applicable to the specified typical section and thickness shown on the
Plans.

Pavers shall be equipped with a control system capable of automatically

maintaining the screen elevation as specified herein. The control system shall be
automatically actuated from either a reference line or surface through a system of
mechanical sensors or sensor directed mechanisms or devices which will maintain
the paver screed at a predetermined transverse slope and at the proper elevation
to obtain the required surface. When directed, the transverse slope control
system shall be made inoperative and the screed shall be controlled by sensor
directed automatic mechanisms which will independently control the elevation of

c. Short ski or shoe

The Contractor shall furnish the long ski, the short ski or shoe and furnish
and install all required stakes and wire for a taut stringline.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 94/437

Should the automatic control systems become inoperative during the day’s
 work, the Contractor will be permitted to finish the day’s work using manual
5/7/2018 controls, however, work shall not be resumed thereafter until the automatic control
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

system has been made operative.

The Contractor shall provide and have ready for use at all times enough
covers, as may be necessary, for use in any emergency such as rain, chilling
wind, on unavoidable delay, for the purpose of covering or protecting any material
that may have been dumped and not spread.

4. Rollers

The equipment shall be of the steel and/or pneumatic tire type and shall be
in good condition, capable of reversing without backlash, and shall be operated at
speeds slow enough to avoid displacement of the bituminous mixture. The
number and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the
required density while it is still in a workable condition. The use of equipment
which results in excessive crushing of the aggregate will not be permitted.

307.3.3 Conditioning of Existing Surface

Immediately before placing the bituminous mixture, the existing surface

shall be cleaned of loose or deleterious material by brooming or other approved
means.

Contract surface or curb, gutters, manholes and other structures shall be

painted with a thin, uniform coating of bituminous material prior to the bituminous
mixture being placed against them.

307.3.4 Preparation of Bituminous Material

The bituminous material shall be heated so as to avoid local overheating

and provide a continuous supply of the bituminous material to the mixer at a
uniform temperature. The temperature of asphalt cement delivered to the mixer
shall be as required to achieve a kinematic viscosity in the range of 150-300
mm2 /s, as determined by AASHTO T 201. Asphalt cement shall not be used
while it is foaming nor shall be heated above 1590C (3200F) at any time after

properly adjusted to avoid damage to the aggregate and to avoid soot on the
aggregate. Moisture content of the mixture from drum dryer plants shall not
exceed three (3) percent of the output, as determined by AASHTO T 110.

307.3.6 Mixing
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 95/437
 The dried aggregates and the bituminous material shall be measured or
5/7/2018 gauged and introduced into the mixer in the amount specified by the job mix
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

formula.

After the required amounts of aggregate and bituminous material have

been introduced into the mixer, the material shall be mixed until a complete and
uniform coating of the particles and a thorough distribution of the bituminous
material throughout the aggregate is secured.

307.3.7 Spreading and Finishing

The mixture shall be spread and struck off to the grade and elevation
established. Bituminous pavers shall be used to distribute the mixture either over
the entire width or over such partial width as may be practicable.

The longitudinal joint in one layer shall offset that in the layer immediately
below approximately 15 cm (6 inches); however, the joint in the top layer shall be
at the center line of the pavement if the roadway comprises two (2) lanes, or at
lane lines if the roadway is more than two (2) lanes, unless otherwise directed.

On areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacle makes the use of

mechanical spreading and finishing equipment impracticable, the mixture may be
placed and finished by hand tools.

The mixture shall be placed at a temperature not less than 1070C (2250F)
as measured in the truck just prior to dumping into the spreader.

When tar is used, the mixture shall be placed at between 660C and 1070C
(150 F and 2250F).
0

When production of the mixture can be maintained and when practical,

pavers shall be used in echelon to place the wearing course in adjacent lanes.

307.3.8 Compaction

Immediately after the mixture has been spread, struck off and surface

lane, the longitudinal joint should be rolled first followed by the regular rolling
procedure. On superelevated curves, the rolling shall begin at the low side and
progress to the high side overlapping of longitudinal trips parallel to the center
line.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 96/437

Rollers shall move at a slow but uniform speed with the drive roll or wheels
 nearest the paver.. Rolling shall be continued until roller marks are eliminated
5/7/2018 and a minimum of 97 mass percent of the density of the laboratory compacted
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

specimens prepared in accordance with AASHTO T 166 has been obtained.

Any displacement occurring as a result of the reversing of the direction of a

roller, or from other causes, shall be corrected at once by the use of rakes and
addition of fresh mixture when required. Care shall be exercised in rolling not to
displace the line and grade of the edges of the bituminous mixture.

To prevent adhesion of the mixture to the rollers, the wheels shall be kept
properly moistened with water or water mixed with very small quantities of
detergent or other approved material. Excess liquid will not be permitted.

Along forms, curbs, headers, walls and other places not accessible to the
rollers, the mixture shall be thoroughly compacted with hot hand tampers,
smoothing irons or with mechanical tampers.
307.3.9 Joints

Placing of the bituminous paving shall be continuous as possible. Rollers

shall not pass over the unprotected end of a freshly laid mixture unless authorized
by the Engineer. Transverse joints shall be formed by cutting back on the
previous run to expose the full depth of the course. When directed by the

Engineer,
transverseajoints
brushbefore
coat ofadditional
bituminous material
mixture shall beagainst
is placed used onthe
contact surfaces
previously of
rolled
material.

307.3.10 Acceptance, Sampling and Testing

The contractor shall cut full depth samples as directed, from the finished
pavement, for testing. Samples shall be neatly cut by saw or core drill. Each
sample shall be at least 150 mm x 150 mm or 100 mm diameter full depth. At
least one, but not more than three samples shall be taken for each full day’s
operation. If no core samples were taken during the day’s operation, core samples
shall be taken from the completed pavement for every 100 L. M. per lane. The
contractor shall supply and furnish new material to backfill boreholes left by the

The samples obtained will be used to measure the thickness of the

pavement. The same samples will be used to test the density of the compacted
pavement by AASHTO T 166.

The compacted pavement shall have a density equal to, or greater than 97
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 97/437

mass percent of the density of a laboratory specimen. The asphalt pavement

 represented by the cores shall not be accepted if the deficiency in density is more
5/7/2018
than 2%. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The compacted pavement shall have a thickness tolerances of -5 mm.

Thickness in excess of the specified thickness shall not be considered in the
payment of asphalt pavement. The asphalt pavement represented by the
individual core shall not be accepted if the deficiency in the core thickness as
obtained in accordance with ASTM D 3549 is more than 5 mm. Averaging of the
density and thickness of asphalt cores is not permitted.

If the deficiency in the core thickness is more than 5 mm, additional layer
may be permitted in order to meet the designed thickness, however, the minimum
additional asphalt overlay thickness should be dependent on the minimum
thickness capacity of asphalt paver but it should not be less than 50 mm (2
inches) and that proper construction procedures are followed.

307.3.11 Surface Tolerances

The surface will be checked by the use of a 3-m straight-edge at sites

selected by the Engineer. The straight-edge will be applied at right angles, as
well as, parallel to the centerline of the roadbed.

The variation of the surface from the testing edge of the straight-edge

between any two contacts with the surface shall not exceed 6 mm.
Tests will be made immediately after initial compaction and any variations
detected shall be corrected by removing or adding materials, as may be
necessary. Rolling shall then be continued as specified. After final rolling, the
smoothness of the course shall be checked again and any area defective in
texture or composition shall be corrected, including removal and replacement of
unsatisfactory material at the Contractor’s expense as directed by the Engineer.

307.4 Method of Measurement

The area to be paid for under this item shall be the number of square
meters (m2) of asphalt pavement placed, compacted and accepted based on the

ITEM 308 – COLD ASPHALT PLANT- MIX

308.1 Description

This item shall consist of constructing Bituminous Surface Course (Asphalt

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 98/437

Cold Mix) prepared in central mixing plant, laid cold, on the prepared base in
 accordance with this Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades and
5/7/2018
typical cross-section shown on the Plans. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

308.2 Material Requirements

308.2.1 Composition and Quality of Asphalt Cold Mix (Job-Mix Formula)

The asphalt cold mix shall be composed of coarse mineral aggregates, fine
mineral aggregates, mineral fillers and chemically bonding bitumen.

At least three weeks prior to production, the Contractor shall submit in

writing a job-mix formula for each mixture supported by laboratory test data along
with samples and sources of the components and viscosity-temperature
relationships information to the Engineer for testing and approval.

Each job-mix formula submitted shall propose definite single value for:
1. The percentage of coarse mineral aggregates passing each specified sieve
size.

2. The percentage of fine mineral aggregates passing each specified sieve

size.

3. The percentage of chemically bonding bitumen material to be added.

4. The temperature of the mixture delivered on the prepared base of the road.

5. The kind and percentage of chemical additive to be used.

6. The kind and percentage of mineral filler to be incorporated.

Stability Requirements:

The mixture shall conform to the following:

Test Property Minimum Maximum

308.2.2 Bituminous Material

It shall be either Liquid Cut-back Asphalt or Emulsified Asphalt, whichever

is called for in the Bill of Quantities. The type and grade of asphalt material will be
specified by the Engineer and shall comply to the requirements of AASHTO
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 99/437

Specification M82, M140 or M208 (ASTM Designation D 2397).

 308.2.3 Coarse Aggregates
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Coarse Aggregates shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item

703 or AASHTO Specification M 79.

308.2.4 Fine Aggregates

Fine Aggregates shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 703,

AASHTO Specification M 29 or ASTM D 1073.

308.2.5 Mineral Fillers

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 703A, Mineral Filler or ASTM

Designation D 242.

308.2.6 Proportioning of Mixture

The proportioning of Bituminous Material on the basis of total dry aggregate

shall be from 4.5 to 7.0 mass percent when cut back asphalt is used and from 6.0
to 10.0 mass percent when emulsified asphalt is used. The exact percentage to
be used shall be fixed by the Engineer in accordance with the job-mix formula and
the other quality control requirements.

308.3 Construction Requirements

308.3.1 Weather Limitations

Cold Asphalt Plant Mix shall be placed only when the specified density can
be obtained. The mixture shall not be placed on any wet surface or when weather
condition will prevent its proper handling or finishing. Asphalt surface mixture
shall not be placed when the surface temperature of the base course is below
100C (500F).

308.3.2 Preparing Area To Be Paved

should be entirely absorbed by the base course and the prime should be
fully set and cured before placing the surface.

3. Holes and depressions in existing surfaces shall be repaired by removing

all loose and defective material to sound pavement and replacing with an
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 100/437

approved asphalt-aggregate patching material. The patching mixture shall

 be compacted to produce a tight surface conforming to the adjacent
pavement area.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

4. Excess asphalt in patches and joints shall be removed only through

methods approved by the engineer.

5. Immediately prior to application of the asphalt tack coat all loose and
foreign material shall be removed by sweeping or by blowing, or both.

6. Surfaces of curbs, gutters, vertical faces of existing pavements, and all

structures to be in actual contact with the asphalt-aggregate mixture shall
be given a thin, even coating of asphalt material, type and grade. Care shall
be taken to prevent spattering of the asphalt on surfaces that will not be in
contact with the asphalt-aggregate mixture.

308.3.3 Preparing The Mixture

1. The asphalt shall be warmed, if necessary, at the paving plant to a
temperature at which it can be applied uniformly to the aggregate.

2. When it is necessary to blend aggregates from one or more sources to

produce the combined gradation, each source or size of aggregate shall
stockpiled individually. Aggregate from the individual stockpiles shall fed

through separate bins to cold elevator feeders. They shall not be blended in
the stockpile.

3. Cold aggregates shall be fed carefully to the plant so that surpluses and
shortages will not occur and cause breaks in the continuous operation.

4. Mixing time shall be the shortest time that will produce a satisfactory
mixture.

308.3.4 Placing The Mix

The base course mixture shall be placed in one or more lifts with an asphalt
paver or spreader to provide a nominal compacted thickness of the base course.

308.3.5 Compacting The Mixture

The mix shall be compacted immediately after placing. Initial rolling with a
steel-wheeled tandem or three wheeled roller, vibratory roller, or a pneumatic-tired
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 101/437
roller shall follow the paver as closely as possible. If needed, intermediate rolling
 with a pneumatic tired roller shall be done immediately behind the initial rolling. An
application of choke aggregate may be necessary to prevent mix pick-up by the
5/7/2018
pneumatic-tired roller. Final rolling shall eliminate marks from previous rolling. In
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

areas too small for the roller a vibrating plate compactor or a hand-tamper shall be
used to achieve thorough compaction.

308.3.6 Safety

Safety precautions shall be used at all times during the progress of the
work. As appropriate, workmen shall be furnished with hard hats, safety shoes,
respirators, and any other safety apparel that will reduce the possibility of injury
from accidents. All Occupational Safety and Health Act requirements shall be
observed.

308.3.7 Acceptance Requirement

Divide asphalt mixture production into lots, each lot equal to the mix
produced during one day. Determine the target density for each lot by measuring
the average density of six laboratory prepared specimens representing two
randomly chosen subsamples from trucks delivering mixture to the jobsite. The
target density should be reported as dry density.

Determine the compacted density in the field from five randomly located
positions in each lot of the compacted mixture. The density of freshly compacted
material can be determined using a properly calibrated nuclear density device or
other procedure. Density determinations made after a period of curing may be
determined on samples obtained from compacted material by a suitable core
drilling technique. All compacted densities should be converted to dry densities. It
is recommended that the average of five field density determinations made in
each lot be equal to or greater than 97 percent of the average density of the six
laboratory prepared specimens, and that no individual determination be lower than
95 percent.

The compacted base and surface shall have an average thicknesses no

less than those specified on the plans. Any deficiency in thickness shall be made
up with surface mixture when the surface course is placed.

308.4 Construction Equipment

308.4.1 Equipment

The equipment shall include:

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 102/437

1. Asphalt mixing plants designed to produce a uniform mix within the job-mix
 tolerances.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

2. Self-powered pavers that are capable of spreading the mix to the

thickness and width specified, true to the line, grade and crown shown on
the Plans.

3. Enough smooth metal-bedded haul trucks, with covers when required

ensure orderly and continuous paving operations.

4. A pressure distributor that is capable of applying tack coat and prime

material uniformly without atomization.

5. Steel-wheeled, pneumatic-tired, or vibratory rollers capacity of attaining

the required density and smoothness.

6. A power broom or a power blower or both.

7. Hand tools necessary to complete the job.

Other equipment can be used in addition to the specified equipment when

approved by the Engineer.

308.5 Sampling

Sampling of asphalt materials shall be in accordance with the latest

revision of AASHTO Designation T40 (ASTM Designation D140). Sampling of
mineral aggregate shall be in accordance with the latest revision of AASHTO
designation (ASTM Designation D 75). Sampling of the asphalt mixture, as
required by the Engineer, shall be in accordance with the latest revision of
AASHTO Designation 168 (ASTM Designation D 979).

308.6 Testing

Methods of Testing shall be in accordance with the applicable AASHTO or

ASTM Methods.

Batch weights will not be permitted as a method of measurement.

308.8 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 308.8, shall be

paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface Course, Cold-
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 103/437

Laid, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all
 materials, handling, placing, rolling, compacting, labor, equipment, tools and
5/7/2018 incidentals necessary to complete this Item. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Payment will be made under:

Pay item No. Description Unit of Measurement

308 Bituminous Plant-Mix Square Meter

Surface Course,
Cold-Laid

ITEM 309 – BITUMINOUS PLANT-MIX (STOCKPILE MAINTENANCE

MIXTURE)

309.1 Description

This Item shall consist of a bituminous stockpile maintenance mixture

composed of aggregate, mineral filler, hydrated lime and bituminous material

mixed in a central
maintenance needs. plant. The mixture is stockpiled for immediate or future

309.2 Material Requirements

309.2.1 Composition and Quality of Bituminous Mixture

Same as Subsection 307.2.1

309.2.2 Bituminous Material

The type and grade of bituminous material shall be in accordance with the
following guidelines:

309.2.3 Aggregate

It shall be crushed stone, crushed or natural gravel, slag, sand, stone or

slag screenings, mineral dust, or a combination of these materials. The
several aggregate fractions shall be combined in such proportions that the
gradation of the composite aggregate shall conform to the grading requirements of
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 104/437

Table 309.1.
5/7/2018 The combined aggregate after going through the drier, shall have a sand
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

equivalent value of not less than 40.

The coarse aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40
when tested by AASHTO T 96.

Slag, if used, shall weigh not less than 1120 kg/m3 (70 lb/cu. ft.).

Table 309.1 – Grading Requirements

Sieve Designation
Standard, mm Alternate U.S. Standard Mass Percent Passing
19.0 ¾ in 100
12.5 ½ in 80 – 100
9.5 3/8 in 70 – 90
4.75 No. 4 50 – 70
2.36 No. 8 35 – 50
0.60 No. 30 18 – 30
0.30 No. 50 15 – 25
0.15 No. 100 8 – 15
0.075 No. 200 4 - 10

309.2.4 Mineral Filler

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant Mix

Surface Course – General.

309.2.5 Hydrated Lime

SurfaceIt Course
shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant Mix
– General.

309.2.6 Proportioning of Mixture

309.3 Construction Requirements

309.3.1 Preparation of Mixture

The aggregate, mineral filler, and hydrated lime shall be fed into the plant in
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 105/437

the proportions required to provide a composite aggregate meeting the grading

 requirements. The aggregate shall be free from visible moisture at the time of
5/7/2018
mixing. The bituminous material shall be applied at the rate and temperature
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

specified by the Engineer. Mixing shall be thorough and shall continue until all
aggregate particles are well coated.

309.3.2 Stockpiling

The finished mixture shall be stockpiled on a platform level storage space.

309.4 Method of Measurement

The area to be paid for under this item shall be the number of square
meters (m2) of asphalt pavement placed, compacted and accepted based on the
thickness and density of the cores taken in accordance with subsection 307.3.10
(Acceptance, Sampling and Testing).
309.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 309.4, will be

paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Plant-Mix (Stockpile Maintenance
Mixture) which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and
stockpiling the material including incidentals necessary to complete the work
prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

309 Bituminous Plant-Mix

(Stockpile Maintenance Square Meter
Mixture)

this Specification and in conformity with lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-
section shown on the Plans.

310.2 Material Requirements

310.2.1 Composition and Quality of Bituminous Mixture (Job-Mix Formula)

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 106/437
 Same as Subsection 307.2.1
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

310.2.2 Bituminous Material

It shall be either Medium Curing (MC) Cut-back Asphalt or Asphalt Cement,

whichever is called for in the Bill of Quantities. It shall conform to the
requirements of Item 702, Bituminous Materials. The penetration grade, type and
grade of bituminous material shall be specified in the Special Provisions.

310.2.3 Aggregates

Aggregates shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous

Plant Mix Surface Course-General.

310.2.4 Mineral Filler

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant Mix
Surface Course-General.

310.2.5 Hydrated Lime

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant-Mix

Surface Course-General.

310.2.6 Proportioning of Mixtures

The proportion of bituminous material on the basis of total dry aggregate

shall be from 5.0 to 8.0 mass percent. The exact percentage to be used shall be
fixed by the Engineer in accordance with the job-mix formula and the other quality
control requirements.

During the mixing operation, one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass percent of
hydrated lime, dry aggregate basis, shall be added to the mixture. The lower
percentage limit is applicable to aggregates which are predominantly calcareous.

310.4 Method of Measurement

The area to be paid for under this item shall be the number of square
meters (m2) of asphalt pavement placed, compacted and accepted based on the
thickness and density of the cores taken in accordance with subsection 307.3.10
(Acceptance, Sampling and Testing).
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 107/437
 310.5 Basis of Payment
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 310.4, shall be
paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, Hot-
Laid, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all
materials, handling, mixing, hauling, placing, rolling, compacting, labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

310 Bituminous Concrete

Surface
Hot-LaidCourse, Square Meter

ITEM 311 – PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

311.1 Description

This Item shall consist of pavement of Portland Cement Concrete, with or

without reinforcement, constructed on the prepared base in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-
section shown on the Plans.

311.2 Material Requirements

311.2.1 Portland Cement

It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic

Cement. Only Type I Portland Cement shall be used unless otherwise provided
for in the Special Provisions. Different brands or the same brands from different

Cement which for any reason, has become partially set or which contains
lumps of caked cement will be rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded or
used bags shall not be used.

Samples of Cement shall be obtained in accordance with AASHTO T 127.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 108/437

311.2.2 Fine Aggregate

 It shall consist of natural sand, stone screenings or other inert materials
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
with similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong and
durable particles. Fine aggregate from different sources of supply shall not be
mixed or stored in the same pile nor used alternately in the same class of
concrete without the approval of the Engineer.

It shall not contain more than three (3) mass percent of material passing
the 0.075 mm (No. 200 sieve) by washing nor more than one (1) mass percent
each of clay lumps or shale. The use of beach sand will not be allowed without
the approval of the Engineer.

If the fine aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate
soundness test, the weighted loss shall not exceed 10 mass percent.

The fine aggregate shall be free from injurious amounts of organic

impurities. If subjected to the colorimatic test for organic impurities and a color
darker than the standard is produced, it shall be rejected. However, when tested
for the effect of organic impurities of strength of mortar by AASHTO T 71, the
fine aggregate may be used if the relative strength at 7 and 28 days is not less
than 95 mass percent.

The fine aggregate shall be well-graded from coarse to fine and shall
conform to Table 311.1

Table 311.1 – Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregate

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

9.5 mm (3/8 in) 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 95 – 100
2.36 mm (No. 8) -
1.18 mm (No. 16) 45 – 80
0.600 mm (No. 30) -
0.300 mm (No. 50) 5 – 30
0 150 mm (No 100) 0 – 10

It shall contain not more than one (1) mass percent of material passing the
0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve, not more than 0.25 mass percent of clay lumps, nor
more than 3.5 mass percent of soft fragments.

If the coarse aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate
soundness test, the weighted loss shall not exceed 12 mass percent.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 109/437
 It shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when tested by
AASHTO T 96.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

If the slag is used, its density shall not be less than 1120 kg/m3 (70 lb./cu.
ft.). The gradation of the coarse aggregate shall conform to Table 311.2.

Only one grading specification shall be used from any one source.
Table 311.2 – Grading Requirement for Coarse Aggregate

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

Standard Alternate Grading Grading Grading
Mm U. S. A B C

75.00 Standard
3 in. 100 - -
63.00 2-1/2 in. 90-100 100 100
50.00 2 in. - 90-100 95-100
37.5 1-1/2 in. 25-60 35-70 -
25.0 1 in. - 0-15 35-70
19.0 ¾ in. 0-10 - -
12.5 ½ in. 0-5 0-5 10-30
4.75 No. 4 - - 0-5
311.2.4 Water

Water used in mixing, curing or other designated application shall be

reasonably clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, grass or other substances
injurious to the finished product. Water will be tested in accordance with and shall
meet the requirements of Item 714, Water. Water which is drinkable may be used
without test. Where the source of water is shallow, the intake shall be so enclosed
as to exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials.

311.2.5 Reinforcing Steel

The sleeves for dowel bars shall be metal of approved design to cover 50
mm ( 2 inches), plus or minus 5 mm (1/4 inch) of the dowel, with a closed end,
and with a suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeve at least 25 mm (1 inch) from
the end of the dowel. Sleeves shall be of such design that they do not collapse
during construction.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 110/437
311.2.6 Joint Fillers
 Poured joint fillers shall be mixed asphalt and mineral or rubber filler
5/7/2018
conforming to the applicable requirements of Item 705, Joint Materials.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Preformed joint filler shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item

705. It shall be punched to admit the dowels where called for in the Plans. The
filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and width
required for the joint.

311.2.7 Admixtures

Air-entraining admixture shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M

154.

Chemical
requirements admixtures,
of AASHTO if specified or permitted, shall conform to the
M 194.

Fly Ash, if specified or permitted as a mineral admixture and as 20% partial

replacement of Portland Cement in concrete mix shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 618.

Admixture should be added only to the concrete mix to produce some

desired modifications to the properties of concrete where necessary, but not as
partial replacement of cement.

311.2.8 Curing Materials

Curing materials shall conform to the following requirements as specified;

a) Burlap cloth - AASHTO M 182

b) Liquid membrane forming compounds - AASHTO M 148
c) Sheeting (film) materials - AASHTO M 171

Cotton mats and water-proof paper can be used.

311.2.10 Storage of Cement and Aggregate

All cement shall be stored, immediately upon delivery at the Site, in

weatherproof building which will protect the cement from dampness. The floor
shall be raised from the ground. The buildings shall be placed in locations
approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage shall be ample, and the
shipments of cement as received shall be separately stored in such a manner as
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 111/437

to allow the earliest deliveries to be used first and to provide easy access for
 identification and inspection of each shipment. Storage buildings shall have
5/7/2018 capacity for storage of a sufficient quantity of cement to allow sampling at least
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

twelve (12) days before the cement is to be used. Bulk cement, if used, shall be
transferred to elevated air tight and weatherproof bins. Stored cement shall meet
the test requirements at any time after storage when retest is ordered by the
Engineer. At the time of use, all cement shall be free-flowing and free of lumps.
The handling and storing of concrete aggregates shall be such as to
prevent segregation or the inclusion of foreign materials. The Engineer may
require that aggregates be stored on separate platforms at satisfactory locations.
In order to secure greater uniformity of concrete mix, the Engineer may
require that the coarse aggregate be separated into two or more sizes. Different
sizes of aggregate shall be stored in separate bins or in separate stockpiles

sufficiently
piles removed intermixed.
from becoming from each other to prevent the material at the edges of the

311.2.11 Proportioning, Consistency and Strength of Concrete

The Contractor shall prepare the design mix based on the absolute volume
method as outlined in the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1,
“Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavyweight
Concrete”.

It is the intent of this Specification to require at least 364 kg of cement per

cubic meter of concrete to meet the minimum strength requirements. The
Engineer shall determine from laboratory tests of the materials to be used, the
cement content and the proportions of aggregate and water that will produce
workable concrete having a slump of between 40 and 75 mm (1-1/2 and 3 inches)
if not vibrated or between 10 and 40 mm (1/2 and 1-1/2 inches) if vibrated, and a
flexural strength of not less than 3.8 MPa (550 psi) when tested by the third-point
method or 4.5 MPa (650 psi) when tested by the mid-point method at fourteen
(14) days in accordance with AASHTO T97 and T177, respectively; or a
compressive strength of 24.1 MPa (3500 psi) for cores taken at fourteen (14) days
and tested in accordance with AASHTO T24.

The mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be
accompanied with certified test data from an approved laboratory demonstrating
the adequacy of the mix design. A change in the source of materials during the
progress of work may necessitate a new design mix.

311.3 Construction Requirements

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 112/437

311.3.1 Quality Control of Concrete

5/7/2018 1. General DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality control of all

materials during the handling, blending, and mixing and placement
operations.
2. Quality Control Plan

The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a Quality Control Plan

detailing his production control procedures and the type and
frequency of sampling and testing to insure that the concrete
produces complies with the Specifications. The Engineer shall be

provided
requested,free access tocopies
informational recent plantdesign,
of mix production records,
materials and if
certifications
and sampling and testing reports.

3. Qualification of Workmen

Experienced and qualified personnel shall perform all batching or

mixing operation for the concrete mix, and shall be present at the
plant and job site to control the concrete productions whenever the
plant is in operation. They shall be identified and duties defined as
follows:

a. Concrete Batcher. The person performing the batching or

mixing operation shall be capable of accurately conducting
aggregate surface moisture determination and establishing
correct scale weights for concrete materials. He shall be
capable of assuring that the proportioned batch weights of
materials are in accordance with the mix design.
b. Concrete Technician. The person responsible for concrete
production control and sampling and testing for quality control

4. Quality Control Testing

The Contractor shall perform all sampling, testing and inspection

necessary to assure quality control of the component materials and
the concrete.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 113/437

The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the gradation

 of fine and coarse aggregates and for testing the concrete mixture for
5/7/2018
slump, air content, water-cement ratio and temperature. He shall
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

conduct his operations so as to produce a mix conforming to the

approved mix design.

5. Documentation
The Contractor shall maintain adequate records of all inspections
and tests. The records shall indicate the nature and number of
observations made, the number and type of deficiencies found, the
quantities approved and rejected, and nature of any corrective action
taken.

The location
random Engineerfor may take independent
acceptance assurance
purposes as he samples at
deems necessary.

311.3.2 Equipment

Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing all
parts of the work shall be approved by the Engineer as to design, capacity and
mechanical condition. The equipment shall be at the jobsite sufficiently ahead of
the start of construction operations to be examined thoroughly and approved.

1. Batching Plant and Equipment

a. General. The batching shall include bins, weighing hoppers,

and scales for the fine aggregate and for each size of coarse
aggregate. If cement is used in bulk, a bin, a hopper, and
separate scale for cement shall be included. The weighing
hopper shall be properly sealed and vented to preclude dusting
operation. The batch plant shall be equipped with a suitable
non-resettable batch counter which will correctly indicate the
number of batches proportioned.

use. Poises shall be designed to be locked in any position and

to prevent unauthorized change.

Scales shall be inspected and sealed as often as the Engineer

may deem necessary to assure their continued accuracy.

d. Automatic Weighing Devices. Unless otherwise allowed on the

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 114/437

Contract, batching plants shall be equipped with automatic

 weighing devices of an approved type to proportion aggregates
5/7/2018
and bulk cement. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

2. Mixers.

a. General. Concrete may be mixed at the Site of construction or at

a central plant, or wholly or in part in truck mixers. Each mixer
shall have a manufacturer’s plate attached in a prominent place
showing the capacity of the drum in terms of volume of mixed
concrete and the speed of rotation of the mixing drum or blades.

b. Mixers at Site of Construction. Mixing shall be done in an

approved mixer capable of combining the aggregates, cement

and water mixing

specified into a thoroughly
period andmixed and uniform
discharging and mass within the
distributing the
mixture without segregation on the prepared grade. The mixer
shall be equipped with an approved timing device which will
automatically lock the discharge lever when the drum has been
charged and released it at the end of the mixing period. In case
of failure of the timing device, the mixer may be used for the
balance of the day while it is being repaired, provided that each
batch is mixed 90 seconds. The mixer shall be equipped with a
suitable nonresettable batch counter which shall correctly
indicate the number of the batches mixed.

c. Truck Mixer and Truck Agitators. Truck mixers used for mixing
and hauling concrete, and truck agitators used for hauling
central-mixed concrete, shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 157.

d. Non-Agitator Truck. Bodies of non-agitating hauling equipment

for concrete shall be smooth, mortar-tight metal containers and
shall be capable of discharging the concrete at a satisfactory
controlled rate without segregation.

homogeneous pavement in conformance with the Plans and

Specifications.

The finishing machine shall be equipped with at least two (2)

oscillating type transverse screed.

Vibrators shall operate at a frequency of 8,300 to 9,600 impulses

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 115/437

per minute under load at a maximum spacing of 60 cm.

5/7/2018
4. Concrete Saw DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The Contractor shall provide sawing equipment in adequate

number of units and power to complete the sawing with a water-
cooled diamond edge saw blade or an abrasive wheel to the required
dimensions and at the required rate. He shall provide at least one (1)
stand-by saw in good working condition and with an ample supply of
saw blades.

5. Forms

Forms shall be of steel, of an approved section, and of depth equal

to the thickness of the pavement at the edge. The base of the forms
shall be of sufficient width to provide necessary stability in all
directions. The flange braces must extend outward on the base to
not less than 2/3 the height of the form.

All forms shall be rigidly supported on bed of thoroughly

compacted material during the entire operation of placing and finishing
the concrete. Forms shall be provided with adequate devices for
secure setting so that when in place, they will withstand, without
visible spring or settlement, the impact and vibration of the
consolidation and finishing or paving equipment.

311.3.3 Preparation of Grade

After the subgrade of base has been placed and compacted to the required
density, the areas which will support the paving machine and the grade on which
the pavement is to be constructed shall be trimmed to the proper elevation by
means of a properly designed machine extending the prepared work areas
compacted at least 60 cm beyond each edge of the proposed concrete pavement.
If loss of density results from the trimming operations, it shall be restored by
additional compaction before concrete is placed. If any traffic is allowed to use

311.3.4 Setting Forms

1. Base Support.

The foundation under the forms shall be hard and true to grade so
that the form when set will be firmly in contact for its whole length and
at the specified grade. (Any roadbed, which at the form line is found
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 116/437

below established grade, shall be filled with approved granular

 materials to grade in lifts of three (3) cm or less, and thoroughly
rerolled or tamped.) Imperfections or variations above grade shall be
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
corrected by tamping or by cutting as necessary.

2. Form Setting

Forms shall be set sufficiently in advance of the point where

concrete is being placed. After the forms have been set to correct
grade, the grade shall be thoroughly tamped, mechanically or by
hand, at both the inside and outside edges of the base of the forms.
The forms shall not deviate from true line bv more than one (1) cm at
any point.

3. Grade and Alignment

The alignment and grade elevations of the forms shall be checked

and corrections made by the Contractor immediately before placing
the concrete. Testing as to crown and elevation, prior to placing of
concrete can be made by means of holding an approved template in a
vertical position and moved backward and forward on the forms.

When any form has been disturbed or any grade has become
unstable, the form shall be reset and rechecked.

311.3.5 Conditioning of Subgrade or Base Course

When side forms have been securely set to grade, the subgrade or base
course shall be brought to proper cross-section. High areas shall be trimmed to
proper elevation. Low areas shall be filled and compacted to a condition similar
to that of surrounding grade. The finished grade shall be maintained in a smooth
and compacted condition until the pavement is placed.
Unless waterproof subgrade or base course cover material is specified, the
subgrade or base course shall be uniformly moist when the concrete is placed. If

Stockpiles shall be built up in layers of not more than one (1) meter in thickness.
Each layer shall be completely in place before beginning the next which shall not
be allowed to “cone” down over the next lower layer. Aggregates from different
sources and of different grading shall not be stockpiled together.

All washed aggregates and aggregates produced or handled by hydraulic

methods, shall be stockpiled or binned for draining at least twelve (12) hours
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 117/437
before being batched.
 When mixing is done at the side of the work. aggregates shall be
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
transported from the batching plant to the mixer in batch boxes, vehicle bodies, or
other containers of adequate capacity and construction to properly carry the
volume required. Partitions separating batches shall be adequate and effective to
prevent
dumped. spilling
When from one compartment
bulk cement to another shall
is used, the Contractor whileuse
in atransit
suitableormethod
being
of handling the cement from weighing hopper to transporting container or into the
batch itself for transportation to the mixer, with chute, boot or other approved
device, to prevent loss of cement, and to provide positive assurance of the actual
presence in each batch of the entire cement content specified.

Bulk cement shall be transported to the mixer in tight compartments

carrying the full amount of cement required for the batch. However, if allowed in
the Special Provisions, it may be transported between the fine and coarse
aggregate. When cement is placed in contact with the aggregates, batches may
be rejected unless mixed within 1-1/2 hours of such contact. Cement in original
shipping packages may be transported on top of the aggregates, each batch
containing the number of sacks required by the job mix.

The mixer shall be charged without loss of cement. Batching shall be so

conducted as to result in the weight to each material required within a tolerance of
one (1) percent for the cement and two (2) percent for aggregates.

Water may be measured either by volume or by weight. The accuracy of

measuring the water shall be within a range of error of not over than one (1)
percent. Unless the water is to be weighed, the water-measuring equipment shall
include an auxiliary tank from which the measuring tank shall be equipped with an
outside tap and valve to provide checking the setting, unless other means are
provided for readily and accurately determining the amount of water in the tank.
The volume of the auxiliary tank shall be at least equal to that of the measuring
tank.

311.3.7 Mixing Concrete

recommended by the mixer manufacturer shall be indicated on the manufacturer’s

serial plate attached to the mixer. The Contractor shall furnish test data
acceptable to the Engineer verifying that the make and model of the mixer will
produce uniform concrete conforming to the provision of AASHTO M 157 at the
reduced number of revolutions shown on the serial plate.

When mixed at the site or in a central mixing plant, the mixing time shall not
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 118/437
be less than fifty (50) seconds nor more than ninety (90) seconds, unless mixer
 performance tests prove adequate mixing of the concrete is a shorter time period.

5/7/2018
Four (4) seconds shall be added to the specified mixing time if timing starts
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

at the instant the skip reaches its maximum raised positions. Mixing time ends
when the discharge chute opens. Transfer time in multiple drum mixers is
included in mixing
removed before time. The
a succeeding contents
batch of an
is emptied individual mixer drum shall be
therein.

The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the

manufacturer’s name plate attached on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than
the specified time shall be discarded and disposed off by the Contractor at his
expense. The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall not exceed the mixer’s
nominal capacity in cubic metre, as shown on the manufacturer’s standard rating
plate on the mixer, except that an overload up to ten (10) percent above the
mixer’s nominal capacity may be permitted provided concrete test data for
strength, segregation, and uniform consistency are satisfactory, and provided no
spillage of concrete takes place.

The batches shall be so charged into the drum that a portion of the mixing
water shall be entered in advance of the cement and aggregates. The flow of
water shall be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the first
fifteen (15) seconds of the mixing period. The throat of the drum shall be kept
free of such accumulations as may restrict the free flow of materials into the drum.

Mixed concrete from the central mixing plant shall be transported in truck
mixers, truck agitators or non-agitating truck specified in Subsection 311.3.2,
Equipment. The time elapsed from the time water is added to the mix until the
concrete is deposited in place at the Site shall not exceed forty five (45) minutes
when the concrete is hauled in non-agitating trucks, nor ninety (90) minutes when
hauled in truck mixers or truck agitators, except that in hot weather or under other
conditions contributing to quick hardening of the concrete, the maximum allowable
time may be reduced by the Engineer.

In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements are authorized

Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means shall not be

permitted, except that when concrete is delivered in truck mixers, additional water
may be added to the batch materials and additional mixing performed to increase
the slump to meet the specified requirements, if permitted by the Engineer,
provided all these operations are performed within forty-five (45) minutes after the
initial mixing operation and the water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Concrete
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 119/437
that is not within the specified slump limits at the time of placement shall not be
used. Admixtures for increasing the workability or for accelerating the setting of
 the concrete will be permitted only when specifically approved by the Engineer.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

311.3.8 Limitation of Mixing

No concrete
insufficient, unless shall be mixed,
an adequate placed
and or finished
approved artificialwhen natural
lighting light is
system is
operated.

During hot weather, the Engineer shall require that steps be taken to
prevent the temperature of mixed concrete from exceeding a maximum
temperature of 900F ( 320C)

Concrete not in place within ninety (90) minutes from the time the
ingredients were charged into the mixing drum or that has developed initial set
shall not be used. Retempering of concrete or mortar which has partially
hardened, that is remixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water,
shall not be permitted.

In order that the concrete may be properly protected against the effects of
rain before the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the Contractor will be required to
have available at all times materials for the protection of the edges and surface of
the unhardened concrete.

311.3.9 Placing Concrete

Concrete shall be deposited in such a manner to require minimal

rehandling. Unless truck mixers or non-agitating hauling equipment are equipped
with means to discharge concrete without segregation of the materials, the
concrete shall be unloaded into an approved spreading device and mechanically
spread on the grade in such a manner as to prevent segregation. Placing shall be
continuous between transverse joints without the use of intermediate bulkheads.
Necessary hand spreading shall be done with shovels, not rakes. Workmen shall
not be allowed to walk in the freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoes coated

Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the faces of

all forms and along the full length and on both sides of all joint assemblies, by
means of vibrators inserted in the concrete. Vibrators shall not be permitted to
come in contact with a joint assembly, the grade, or a side form. In no case shall
the vibrator be operated longer than fifteen (15) seconds in any one location.

Concrete shall be deposited as near as possible to the expansion and

contraction joints without disturbing them, but shall not be dumped from the
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 120/437

discharge bucket or hopper into a joint assembly unless the hopper is well
 centered on the joint assembly. Should any concrete material fall on or be
5/7/2018 worked into the surface of a complete slab, it shall be removed immediately.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

311.3.10 Test Specimens

As work progresses, at least one (1) set consisting of three (3) concrete
beam test specimens, 150 mm x 150 mm x 525 mm or 900 mm shall be taken
from each 330 m2 of pavement, 230 mm depth, or fraction thereof placed each
day. Test specimens shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer, and
the Contractor shall provide all concrete and other facilities necessary in making
the test specimens and shall protect them from damage by construction
operations. Cylinder samples shall not be used as substitute for determining the
adequacy of the strength of concrete.

The beams shall be made, cured, and tested in accordance with AASHTO
T 23 and T 97.

311.3.11 Strike-off of Concrete and Placement of Reinforcement

Following the placing of the concrete, it shall be struck off to conform to the
cross-section shown on the Plans and to an elevation such that when the concrete
is properly consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement will be at the
elevation shown on the Plans. When reinforced concrete pavement is placed in
two (2) layers, the bottom layer shall be struck off and consolidated to such length
and depth that the sheet of fabric or bar mat may be laid full length on the
concrete in its final position without further manipulation. The reinforcement shall
then be placed directly upon the concrete, after which the top layer of the concrete
shall be placed, struck off and screeded. Any portion of the bottom layer of
concrete which has been placed more then 30 minutes without being covered with
the top layer shall be removed and replaced with freshly mixed concrete at the
Contractor’s expense. When reinforced concrete is placed in one layer, the
reinforcement may be firmly positioned in advance of concrete placement or it
may be placed at the depth shown on the Plans in plastic concrete, after

311.3.12 Joints

Joints shall be constructed of the type and dimensions, and at the locations
required by the Plans or Special Provisions. All joints shall be protected from the
intrusion of injurious foreign material until sealed.

1. Longitudinal Joint
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 121/437

Deformed steel tie bars of specified length, size, spacing and

 materials shall be placed perpendicular to the longitudinal joints, they
5/7/2018 shall be placed by approved mechanical equipment or rigidly secured
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

by chair or other approved supports to prevent displacement. Tie

bars shall not be painted or coated with asphalt or other materials or

enclosed in tubes
adjacent lanes of or sleeves. are
pavement When shown on
constructed the Plans steel
separately, and when
side
forms shall be used which will form a keyway along the construction
joint. Tie bars, except those made of rail steel, may be bent at right
angles against the form of the first lane constructed and straightened
into final position before the concrete of the adjacent lane is placed, or
in lieu of bent tie bars, approved two-piece connectors may be used.

Longitudinal formed joints shall consist of a groove or cleft,

extending downward from and normal to, the surface of the pavement.
These joints shall be effected or formed by an approved mechanically
or manually operated device to the dimensions and line indicated on
the Plans and while the concrete is in a plastic state. The groove or
cleft shall be filled with either a premolded strip or poured material as
required.

The longitudinal joints shall be continuous, there shall be no gaps

in either transverse or longitudinal joints at the intersection of the
joints.

Longitudinal sawed joints shall be cut by means of approved

concrete saws to the depth, width and line shown on the Plans.
Suitable guide lines or devices shall be used to assure cutting the
longitudinal joint on the true line. The longitudinal joint shall be
sawed before the end of the curing period or shortly thereafter and
before any equipment or vehicles are allowed on the pavement. The
sawed area shall be thoroughly cleaned and, if required, the joint shall
immediately be filled with sealer.

joint filler shall be furnished in lengths equal to the pavement width or

equal to the width of one lane. Damaged or repaired joint filler shall
not be used.

The expansion joint filler shall be held in a vertical position. An

approved installing bar, or other device, shall be used if required to
secure preformed expansion joint filler at the proper grade and
alignment during placing and finishing of the concrete. Finished joint
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 122/437

shall not deviate more than 6 mm from a straight line. If joint fillers
 are assembled in sections, there shall be no offsets between adjacent
5/7/2018
units. No plugs of concrete shall be permitted anywhere within the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

expansion space.

3. Transverse Contraction Joint/Weakened Joint

When shown on the Plans, it shall consist of planes of weakness
created by forming or cutting grooves in the surface of the pavement
and shall include load transfer assemblies. The depth of the
weakened plane joint should at all times not be less than 50 mm,
while the width should not be more than 6 mm.

a. Transverse Strip Contraction Joint. It shall be formed by

installing a parting strip to be left in place as shown on the Plans.

b. Formed Groove. It shall be made by depressing an approved

tool or device into the plastic concrete. The tool or device shall
remain in place at least until the concrete has attained its initial
set and shall then be removed without disturbing the adjacent
concrete, unless the device is designed to remain in the joint.

c. Sawed Contraction Joint. It shall be created by sawing grooves

in the surface of the pavement of the width not more than 6 mm,
depth should at all times not be less than 50 mm, and at the
spacing and lines shown on the Plans, with an approved
concrete saw. After each joint is sawed, it shall be thoroughly
cleaned including the adjacent concrete surface.

Sawing of the joint shall commence as soon as the concrete

has hardened sufficiently to permit sawing without excessive
ravelling, usually 4 to 24 hours. All joints shall be sawed before
uncontrolled shrinkage cracking takes place. If necessary, the
sawing operations shall be carried on during the day or night,

4. Transverse Construction Joint

It shall be constructed when there is an interruption of more than

30 minutes in the concreting operations. No transverse joint shall be
constructed within 1.50 m of an expansion joint, contraction joint, or
plane of weakness. If sufficient concrete has been mixed at the time
of interruption to form a slab of at least 1.5 m long, the excess
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 123/437

concrete from the last preceding joint shall be removed and disposed
 off as directed.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

5. Load Transfer Device

andDowel,
centerwhen
line used,
of theshall
slabbebyheld in position
a metal parallel
device that to
is the
left surface
in the
pavement.

The portion of each dowel painted with one coat of lead or tar, in
conformance with the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing Steel,
shall be thoroughly coated with approved bituminous materials, e.g.,
MC-70, or an approved lubricant, to prevent the concrete from binding
to that portion of the dowel. The sleeves for dowels shall be metal
designed to cover 50 mm plus or minus 5 mm (1/4 inch), of the dowel,
with a watertight closed end and with a suitable stop to hold the end of
the sleeves at least 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the dowel.

In lieu of using dowel assemblies at contraction joints, dowel may

be placed in the full thickness of pavement by a mechanical device
approved by the Engineer.

311.3.13 Final Strike-off (Consolidation and Finishing)

1. Sequence

The sequence of operations shall be the strike-off and

consolidation, floating and removal of laitance, straight-edging and
final surface finish. Work bridges or other devices necessary to
provide access to the pavement surface for the purpose of finishing
straight-edging, and make corrections as hereinafter specified, shall
be provided by the Contractor.

In general, the addition of water to the surface of the concrete to

under and around all load transfer devices, joint assembly units, and
other features designed to extend into the pavement. Concrete
adjacent to joints shall be mechanically vibrated as required in
Subsection 311.3.9, Placing Concrete.

After the concrete has been placed and vibrated adjacent to the
joints as required in Subsection 311.3.9, the finishing machine shall
be brought forward, operating in a manner to avoid damage or
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 124/437

misalignment of joints. If uninterrupted operation of the finishing

 machine, to over and beyond the joints causes segregation of
concrete, damage to, or misalignment of the joints, the finishing
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
machine shall be stopped when the front screed is approximately 20
cm (8 inches) from the joint. Segregated concrete shall be removed

fromdirectly
set in frontonoftop
andofoff
thethejoint
joint.
and The front screed
the forward shall
motion of be
the lifted and
finishing
machine resumed. When the second screed is close enough to permit
the excess mortar in front of it to flow over the joint, it shall be lifted
and carried over the joint. Thereafter, the finishing machine may be
run over the joint without lifting the screeds, provided there is no
segregated concrete immediately between the joint and the screed or
on top of the joint.

3. Machine Finishing

a. Non-vibratory Method. The concrete shall be distributed or

spread as soon as placed. As soon as the concrete has been
placed, it shall be struck off and screeded by an approved
finishing machine. The machine shall go over each area of
pavement as many times and at such intervals as necessary to
give the proper compaction and leave a surface of uniform
texture. Excessive operation over a given area shall be avoided.
The tops of the forms shall be kept clean by an effective device
attached to the machine and the travel of the machine on the
forms shall be maintained true without wobbling or other variation
tending to affect the precision finish.

During the first pass of the finishing machine, a uniform ridge

of concrete shall be maintained ahead of the front screed in its
entire length.
b. Vibratory Method. When vibration is specified, vibrators for full
width vibration of concrete paving slabs, shall meet the

4. Hand Finishing

Hand finishing methods may only be used under the following

conditions:

a. In the event of breakdown of the mechanical equipment, hand

methods may be used to finish the concrete already deposited on
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 125/437

the grade.
 b. In narrow widths or areas of irregular dimensions where
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
operations of the mechanical equipment is impractical, hand
methods may be used.

Concrete, as soon as placed, shall be struck off and screeded. An

approved portable screed shall be used. A second screed shall be
provided for striking off the bottom layer of concrete if reinforcement is
used.

The screed for the surface shall be at least 60 cm (2 feet) longer

than the maximum width of the slab to be struck off. It shall be of
approved design, sufficiently rigid to retain its shape, and constructed
either of metal or other suitable material shod with metal.

Consolidation shall be attained by the use of suitable vibrator or

other approved equipment.

In operation, the screed shall be moved forward on the forms with

a combined longitudinal and transverse shearing motion, moving
always in the direction in which the work is progressing and so
manipulated that neither end is raised from the side forms during the
striking off process. If necessary, this shall be repeated until the
surface is of uniform texture, true to grade and cross-section, and free
from porous areas.

5. Floating

After the concrete has been struck off and consolidated, it shall be
further smoothed,
float, either trued,
by hand and consolidated
or mechanical method. by means of a longitudinal

a. Hand Method. The hand-operated longitudinal float shall be not

not more than one-half the length of the float. Any excess water
or soupy material shall be wasted over the side forms on each
pass.

b. Mechanical Method. The mechanical longitudinal float shall be

of a design approved by the Engineer, and shall be in good
working condition. The tracks from which the float operates
shall be accurately adjusted to the required crown. The float
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 126/437
shall be accurately adjusted and coordinated with the adjustment
 of the transverse finishing machine so that a small amount of
mortar is carried ahead of the float at all times. The forward
5/7/2018
screed shall be adjusted so that the float will lap the distance
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

specified by the Engineer on each transverse trip. The float

shall pass operation

excessive over eachover
areas of pavement
a given area will at
notleast two times, Any
be permitted. but
excess water or soupy material shall be wasted over the side
forms on each pass.

c. Alternative Mechanical Method. As an alternative, the Contractor

may use a machine composed of a cutting and smoothing float
or floats suspended from and guided by a rigid frame. The frame
shall be carried by four or more visible wheels riding on, and
constantly in contact with the side forms. If necessary, following
one of the preceding method of floating, long handled floats
having blades not less than 150 cm (5 feet) in length and 15 cm
(6 inches) in width may be used to smooth and fill in open-
textured areas in the pavement. Long-handled floats shall not
be used to float the entire surface of the pavement in lieu of, or
supplementing, one of the preceding methods of floating. When
strike off and consolidation are done by the hand method and the
crown of the pavement will not permit the use of the longitudinal
float, the surface shall be floated transversely by means of the
long-handled float. Care shall be taken not to work the crown
out of the pavement during the operation. After floating, any
excess water and laitance shall be removed from the surface of
the pavement by a 3-m straight-edge or more in length.
Successive drags shall be lapped one-half the length of the
blade.

6. Straight-edge Testing and Surface Correction

After the floating has been completed and the excess water

successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the straight-
edge. Any depressions found shall be immediately filled with freshly
mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated and refinished. High areas
shall be cut down and refinished. Special attention shall be given to
assure that the surface across joints meets the requirements for
smoothness. Straight-edge testing and surface corrections shall
continue until the entire surface is found to be free from observable
departures from the straight-edge and the slab conforms to the
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 127/437
required grade and cross-section.
 7. Final Finish
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

If the surface texture is broom finished, it shall applied when the

waterthe
from sheen hastopractically
center the edgedisappeared. The broom
of the pavement shall bestrokes
with adjacent drawn
slightly overlapping. The brooming operation should be so executed
that the corrugations produced in the surface shall be uniform in
appearance and not more than 1.5 mm in depth. Brooming shall be
completed before the concrete is in such condition that the surface will
be unduly roughened by the operation. The surface thus finished shall
be free from rough and porous areas, irregularities, and depressions
resulting from improper handling of the broom. Brooms shall be of the
quality size and construction and be operated so as to produce a
surface finish meeting the approval of the Engineer. Subject to
satisfactory results being obtained and approval of the Engineer, the
Contractor will be permitted to substitute mechanical brooming in lieu
of the manual brooming herein described.

If the surface texture is belt finished, when straight-edging is

complete and water sheen has practically disappeared and just before
the concrete becomes non-plastic, the surface shall be belted with 2-
ply canvass belt not less than 20 cm wide and at least 100 cm longer
than the pavement width. Hand belts shall have suitable handles to
permit controlled, uniform manipulation. The belt shall be operated
with short strokes transverse to the center line and with a rapid
advances parallel to the center line.

If the surface texture is drag finished, a drag shall be used which

consists of a a
shall produce seamless strip
uniform of of texture
gritty damp burlap or cottonit fabric,
after dragging which
longitudinally
along the full width of pavement. For pavement 5 m or more in width,
the drag shall be mounted on a bridge which travels on the forms. The

encrusted mortar. Drags that cannot be cleaned shall be discarded

and new drags be substituted.

Regardless of the method used for final finish, the hardened

surface of pavement shall have a coefficient of friction of 0.25 or more.
Completed pavement that is found to have a coefficient of friction less
than 0.25 shall be grounded or scored by the Contractor at his
expense to provide the required coefficient of friction.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 128/437

8. Edging at Forms and Joints

5/7/2018 After the final finish, but before the concrete has taken its initial set,
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the edges of the pavement along each side of each slab, and on each
side of transverse expansion joints, formed joints, transverse
construction joints, and emergency construction joints, shall be
worked with an approved tool and rounded to the radius required by
the Plans. A well – defined and continuous radius shall be produced
and a smooth, dense mortar finish obtained. The surface of the slab
shall not be unduly disturbed by tilting the tool during the use.

At all joints, any tool marks appearing on the slab adjacent to the
joints shall be eliminated by brooming the surface. In doing this, the
rounding of the corner of the slab shall not be disturbed. All concrete
on top of the joint filler shall be completely removed.

All joints shall be tested with a straight-edge before the concrete

has set and correction made if one edge of the joint is higher than the
other.

311.3.14 Surface Test

As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the pavement surface

shall be tested with a 3-m straight-edge or other specified device. Areas showing
high spots of more than 3 mm but not exceeding 12 mm in 3 m shall be marked
and immediately ground down with an approved grinding tool to an elevation
where the area or spot will not show surface deviations in excess of 3 mm when
tested with 3 m straight-edge. Where the departure from correct cross-section
exceeds 12 mm, the pavement shall be removed and replaced by and at the

expense of the Contractor.

Any area or section so removed shall be not less than 1.5 m in length and
not less than the full width of the lane involved. When it is necessary to remove

to provide sufficient cover material of whatever kind the Contractor may elect to
use, or the lack of water to adequately take care of both curing and other
requirements, shall be a cause for immediate suspension of concreting
operations. The concrete shall not be left exposed for more than ½ hour between
stages of curing or during the curing period.

In all congested places, concrete works should be designed so that the

designed strength is attained.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 129/437

1. Cotton of Burlap Mats

5/7/2018 The surface of the pavement shall be entirely covered with mats.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The mats used shall be of such length (or width) that as laid they will
extend at least twice the thickness of the pavement beyond the edges
of the slab. The mat shall be placed so that the entire surface and the
edges of the slab are completely covered. Prior to being placed, the
mats shall be saturated thoroughly with water. The mat shall be so
placed and weighted down so as to cause them to remain in intimate
contact with the covered surface. The mat shall be maintained fully
wetted and in position for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed
unless otherwise specified.

2. Waterproof Paper

The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be entirely

covered with waterproof paper, the units shall be lapped at least 45
cm. The paper shall be so placed and weighted down so as to
cause it to remain in intimate contact with the surface covered. The
paper shall have such dimension but each unit as laid will extend
beyond the edges of the slab at least twice the thickness of the
pavement, or at pavement width and 60 cm strips of paper for the
edges. If laid longitudinally, paper not manufactured in sizes which will
provide this width shall be securely sewed or cemented together, the
joints being securely sealed in such a manner that they do not open
up or separate during the curing period. Unless otherwise specified,
the covering shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after the
concrete has been placed. The surface of the pavement shall be
thoroughly wetted prior to the placing of the paper.

3. Straw Curing

When this type of curing is used, the pavement shall be cured

down during the morning of the fourth day, and the cover shall remain
in place until the concrete has attained the required strength.

4. Impervious Membrane Method

Thepigmented
white entire surface of the
curing pavement
compound shall be sprayed
immediately uniformly
after the with
finishing of
the surface and before the set of the concrete has taken place, or if
the pavement is cured initially with jute or cotton mats, it may be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 130/437

applied upon removal of the mass. The curing compound shall not
 be applied during rain.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Curing compound shall be applied under pressure at the rate 4 L to

not more than 14 m 2 by mechanical sprayers. The spraying
equipment shall be equipped with a wind guard. At the time of use,
the compound shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition with the
pigment uniformly dispersed throughout the vehicle. During
application, the compound shall be stirred continuously by effective
mechanical means. Hand spraying of odd widths or shapes and
concrete surface exposed by the removal of forms will be permitted.
Curing compound shall not be applied to the inside faces of joints to
be sealed, but approved means shall be used to insure proper curing
at least 72 hours and to prevent the intrusion of foreign material into
the joint before sealing has been completed. The curing compound
shall be of such character that the film will harden within 30 minutes
after application. Should the film be damaged from any cause within
the 72 hour curing period, the damaged portions shall be repaired
immediately with additional compound.

5. White Polyethylene Sheet

The top surface and sides of the pavement shall be entirely

covered with polyethylene sheeting. The units used shall be lapped
at least 45 cm. The sheeting shall be so placed and weighted down
so as to cause it to remain intimate contact with the surface covered.
The sheeting as prepared for use shall have such dimension that each
unit as laid will extend beyond the edges of the slab at least twice the
thickness of the pavement. Unless otherwise specified, the covering

shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after the concrete has been
placed.

311.3.16 Removal of Forms

expense of the Contractor. Any area or section so removed shall not be less than
the distance between weakened plane joint nor less than the full width of the lane
involved.

311.3.17 Sealing Joints

Joints shall be sealed with asphalt sealant soon after completion of the
curing period and before the pavement is opened to traffic, including the
Contractor’s equipment. Just prior to sealing, each joint shall be thoroughly
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 131/437

cleaned of all foreign materials including membrane curing compound and the
 joint faces shall be clean and surface dry when the seal is applied.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The sealing material shall be applied to each joint opening to conform to

the details shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Material for seal
applied hot shall be stirred during heating so that localized overheating does not
occur. The pouring shall be done in such a manner that the material will not be
spilled on the exposed surfaces of the concrete. The use of sand or similar
material as a cover for the seal will not be permitted.

Preformed elastomeric gaskets for sealing joints shall be of the cross-

sectional dimensions shown on the Plans. Seals shall be installed by suitable
tools, without elongation and secured in placed with an approved lubricant
adhesive which shall cover both sides of the concrete joints. The seals shall be
installed in a compressive condition and shall at time of placement be below the
level of the pavement surface by approximately 6 mm.

The seals shall be in one piece for the full width of each transverse joint.

311.3.18 Protection of Pavement

The Contractor shall protect the pavement and its appurtenances against
both public traffic and traffic caused by his own employees and agents. This shall
include watchmen to direct traffic and the erection of and maintenance of warning
signs, lights, pavement bridges or cross-overs, etc. The Plans or Special
Provisions will indicate the location and type of device or facility required to protect
the work and provide adequately for traffic.

All boreholes after thickness and/or strength determinations of newly

constructed asphaltconcrete/asphalt
with the prescribed and concrete pavements shall be immediately
mix after completion filled/restored
of the drilling works.

Any damage to the pavement, occurring prior to final acceptance, shall be

1. Grade

After the grade or base has been placed and compacted to the
required density, the areas which will support the paving machine
shall be cut to the proper elevation by means of a properly designed
machine. Thebrought
shall then be grade on which
to the the pavement
proper profile byismeans
to be constructed
of properly
designed machine. If the density of the base is disturbed by the
grading operation, it shall be corrected by additional compaction
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 132/437

before concrete is placed. The grade should be constructed

 sufficiently in advance of the placing of the concrete. If any traffic is
allowed to use the prepared grade, the grade shall be checked and
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
corrected immediately before the placing of concrete.

2. Placing Concrete

The concrete shall be placed with an approved slip-form paver

designed to spread, consolidate, screed and float-finish the freshly
placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine in such a
manner that a minimum of hand finish will be necessary to provide a
dense and homogenous pavement in conformance with the Plans and
Specifications. The machine shall vibrate the concrete for the full
width and depth of the strip of pavement being placed. Such
vibration shall be accompanied with vibrating tubes or arms working in
the concrete or with a vibrating screed or pan operating on the surface
of the concrete. The sliding forms shall be rigidly held together
laterally to prevent spreading of the forms. The forms shall trail
behind the paver for such a distance that no appreciable slumping of
the concrete will occur, and that necessary final finishing can be
accomplished while the concrete is still within the forms. Any edge
slump of the pavement, exclusive of edge rounding, in excess of 6
mm shall be corrected before the concrete has hardened.

The concrete shall be held at a uniform consistency, having a

slump of not more than 40 mm (1-12/ inches). The slip form paver
shall be operated with as nearly as possible a continuous forward
movement and that all operations of mixing, delivering and spreading
concrete shall be coordinated so as to provide uniform progress with

stopping
reason, it and starting of
is necessary to the
stoppaver held tomovement
the forward a minimum.
of the If, for any
paver the
vibratory and tamping elements shall also be stopped immediately.
No tractive force shall be applied to the machine, except that which is

4. Curing

Unless otherwise specified, curing shall be done in accordance

with one of the methods included in Subsection 311.3.15. The curing
media shall be applied at the appropriate time and shall be applied
uniformly and completely to all surfaces and edges of the pavement.
5. Joints
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 133/437

All joints shall be constructed in accordance with Subsection

 311.3.12.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
6. Protection Against Rain

In order that the concrete may be properly protected against rain

before the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the Contractor will be
required to have available at all times, materials for the protection of
the edges and surface of the unhardened concrete. Such protective
materials shall consist of standard metal forms or wood planks having
a nominal thickness of not less than 50 mm (2 inches) and a nominal
width of not less than the thickness of the pavement at its edge for the
protection of the pavement edges, and covering material such as
burlap or cotton mats, curing paper or plastic sheeting materials for
the protection of the surface of the pavement. When rain appears
imminent, all paving operations shall stop and all available personnel
shall begin placing forms against the sides of the pavement and
covering the surface of the unhardened concrete with the protective
covering.

311.3.22 Acceptance of Concrete

The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the

averages of all sets of three (3) consecutive strength test results equal or exceed
the specified strength, fc’ and no individual strength test result is deficient by more
than 15% of the specified strength, f c’.

Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be

rejected unless the Contractor can provide evidence, by means of core tests, that

the
leastquality
three of
(3)concrete represented
representative coresby failed
shall betest results
taken fromiseach
acceptable
member in or
place.
area At
of
concrete in place that is considered deficient. The location of cores shall be
determined by the Engineer so that there will be at least impairment of strength of

If the strength of control specimens does not meet the requirements of this
Subsection, and it is not feasible or not advisable to obtain cores from the
structure due to structural considerations, payment of the concrete will be made at
an adjusted price due to strength deficiency of concrete specimens as specified
hereunder:

Deficiency in Strength of Percent (%) of Contract

Concrete Specimens, Price Allowed
Percent (%)
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 134/437
 Less than 5 100
5 to less than 10 80
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
10 to less than 15 70

15
20 to
to less
less than
than 20
25 60
50
25 or more 0

311.3.23 Opening to Traffic

The Engineer will decide when the pavement may be opened to traffic.
The road will not be opened to traffic until test specimens molded and cured in
accordance with AASHTO T 23 have attained the minimum strength
requirements in Subsection 311.2.11. If such tests are not conducted prior to the
specified age the pavement shall not be operated to traffic until 14 days after the
concrete was placed. Before opening to traffic, the pavement shall be cleaned
and joint sealing completed.

311.3.24 Tolerance and Pavement thickness

1. General

The thickness of the pavement will be determined by measurement

of cores from the completed pavement in accordance with AASHTO
T 148.

The completed pavement shall be accepted on a lot basis. A lot

shall be considered as 1000 linear meters of pavement when a single
traffic lane is poured or 500 linear meters when two lanes are poured
concurrently. The last unit in each slab constitutes a lot in itself when
its length is at least ½ of the normal lot length. If the length of the last
unit is shorter than ½ of the normal lot length, it shall be included in
the previous lot

2. Pavement Thickness

It is the intent of this Specification that the pavement has a uniform

thickness as called for on the Plans for the average of each lot as
defined. After the pavement has met all surface smoothness

requirements, cores for thickness measurements will be taken.

In calculating the average thickness of the pavement, individual
measurements which are in excess of the specified thickness by more
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 135/437
than 5 mm will be considered as the specified thickness plus 5 mm
and measurement which are less than the specified thickness by more
 and measurement which are less than the specified thickness by more
than 25 mm shall not be included in the average. When the average
5/7/2018
thickness for the lot is deficient, the contract unit price will be adjusted
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

for thickness in accordance with paragraph (3 below).

Individual areas within a segment found deficient in thickness by

more than 25 mm shall be evaluated by the Engineer, and if in his
judgment, the deficient areas warrant removal, they shall be removed
and replaced by the Contractor with pavement of the specified
thickness at his entire expense. However, if the evaluation of the
Engineer is that the deficient area should not be removed and
replaced, such area will not be paid.

When the measurement of any core is less than the specified

thickness by more than 25 mm, the actual thickness of the pavement
in this area will be determined by taking additional cores at no less
than 5 m intervals parallel to the center line in each direction from the
affected location until a core is found in each direction, which is not
deficient in thickness by more than 25 mm. The area of slab for
which no payment will be made shall be the product of the paving
width multiplied by the distance along the center line of the road
between transverse sections found not deficient in thickness by more
than 25 mm. The thickness of the remainder of the segment to be
used to get the average thickness of each lot shall be determined by
taking the average thickness of additional cores which are not
deficient by more than 25 mm.

3. Adjustment for Thickness

When the average thickness of the pavement per lot is deficient,

payment for the lot shall be adjusted as follows:

No acceptance and final payment shall be made on completed

pavement unless core test for thickness determination is conducted,
except for Barangay Roads where the implementing office is allowed
to waive such test.

311.4 Method of Measurement

The area to be paid for under this Item shall be the number of square
meters (m2) of concrete pavement placed and accepted in the completed
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 136/437

pavement. The width for measurements will be the width from outside edge to
 outside edge of completed pavement as placed in accordance with the Plans or
5/7/2018 as otherwise required by the Engineer in writing. The length will be measured
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

horizontally along the center line of each roadway or ramp. Any curb and gutter
placed shall not be included in the area of concrete pavement measured.

311.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 311.4, shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement,
which price and payment shall be full compensation for preparation of roadbed
and finishing of shoulders, unless otherwise provided by the Special Provisions,
furnishing all materials, for mixing, placing, finishing and curing all concrete, for
furnishing and placing all joint materials, for sawing weakened plane joints, for
fitting the prefabricated center metal joint, for facilitating and controlling traffic, and
for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

311 (1) PCC Pavement (Plain) Square meter

311 (2) PCC Pavement (Reinforced) Square meter

PART F – BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

ITEM 400 – PILING

400.1 Description

400.1.1 Scope

This Item shall consist of piling, furnished, driven or placed, cut and spliced
in accordance with this Specification and in reasonably close conformity with the
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 137/437

Plans.
5/7/2018 The Contractor shall furnish the piles in accordance with an itemized list,
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

which will be provided by the Engineer, showing the number and lengths of all
piles. When cast-in-place concrete piles are specified on the Plans, the Engineer
will not furnish the Contractor an itemized list showing the number and length of
piles. When test piles and load tests are required in conformance with Sub-
section 400.1.2 and 400.1.3, respectively, the data obtained from driving test piles
and making test loads will be used in conjunction with other available sub-soil
information to determine the number and lengths of piles to be furnished. The
Engineer will not prepare the itemized list of piles for any portion of the foundation
area until all specified loading tests in the Contract representative of the portion
have been completed.

In determining lengths of piles for ordering and to be included for payment,

the lengths given in the order list will be based on the lengths which are assumed
to remain in the completed structure. The Contractor, shall, without added
compensation, increase the lengths to provide for the fresh heading and for such
additional length as maybe necessary to suit the Contractor’s method of
operation.

400.1.2 Test Piles

For his own information, the Contractor may drive at the location of the
regular piles indicated on the Plans such test piles as he may consider necessary
in addition to the test piles specified in the Contract and shall be considered as
regular piles. When called for in the Bill of Quantities, a pile if required to be
subjected to load test shall conform to the provision as provided in Subsection
400.1.3, Load Tests. The Contractor shall furnish and drive test piles of the
dimensions and at the locations designated by the Engineer. They shall be of the
material shown in the Bill of Quantities and shall be driven to refusal or to such tip
elevation or approximate bearing value as the Engineer may request. Test piles

prior test loads and foundation data. The ground at each test pile shall be
excavated to the elevation of the bottom of the footing before the pile is driven.

400.1.3 Load Tests

Load
Dynamic tests High-Strain
Method, for files shall be either
Dynamic Static
Method andorCross-Hole
Pile Testing by Logging.
Sonic Low-Strain

When load tests are specified, the number and location of piles to be tested
will be designated by the Engineer. Load tests shall be done by methods
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 138/437

approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for
 approval detailed plans of the loading apparatus he intends to use. The
5/7/2018 apparatus shall be so constructed as to allow the various increments of the load to
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

be placed gradually without causing vibration to the test piles. If the approved
method requires the use of tension (anchor) piles, such tension piles shall be of
the same type and diameter as the permanent piles and shall be driven in the
location of permanent piles when feasible. Piling not a part of the structure shall
be removed or cut off at least 300mm below the bottom of the footing or finished
elevation of the ground upon completion of the test load. Permanent piling used
as anchor piling which is raised during the test load shall be redriven to original
grade and bearing.

400.1.3.1 Static Testing

Suitable approved apparatus for determining accurately the load on pile
and the settlement of the pile under increment of load shall be supplied by the
Contractor.

Test loading shall consist of the application of incremental static loads to a

pile and measuring the resultant settlement. The loads shall be applied by a
hydraulic
the pile, orjack acting
other against
methods suitable by
designated anchorage,
the Plans transmitting
or approved the load
by the directly to
Engineer.

The load shall be applied in increments of 5 or 10 tonnes as directed by the

Engineer. Gross settlement readings, loads and other data shall be recorded by
the Engineer immediately before and after the applications of each load
increment.

Each load increment shall be held for an interval of two and one-half
minutes. Each succeeding increment shall be as directed by the Engineer or as
shown on the Plans and shall be applied immediately after the two and one-half
minute interval readings have been made.

have been removed and at each interval of two and one-half minutes for a total
period of five (5) minutes.

All load tests shall be carried to failure or to the capacity of the equipment,
unless otherwise noted on the Plans.

After the completion of loading tests, the load used shall be removed and
the piles including tension piles, shall be utilized in the structure if found by the
Engineer to be satisfactory for such use. Test piles not loaded shall be utilized
similarly. If any pile, after serving its purpose as a test or tension pile, is found
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 139/437

unsatisfactory for utilization in the structure, it shall be removed if so ordered by

 the Engineer or shall be cut off below the ground line of footings, whichever is
5/7/2018
applicable. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

When diesel or other types of hammers requiring calibration are to be used,

the Contractor shall make load tests even though no load tests are called for in
the Bill of Quantities, except that load tests will not be required when the hammer
is to be used only for driving piles to refusal, rock or a fixed tip elevation or the
hammer is of a type and model that has been previously calibrated for similar
type, size and length of pile, and foundation material. Calibration data must have
been obtained from sources acceptable to the Engineer.

400.1.3.2 Pile Testing

Pile testing shall be done by Low-Strain Dynamic Method, High-Strain
Dynamic Method or Cross-Hole Sonic Logging Method as required in the plans or
as directed by the Engineer.

400.1.3.2.1 Low-Strain dynamic Method

Pile integrity
D-5882-96. testing by
It is a so-called Low-Strain
Low Dynamic
Strain Method, Method
since shall conform
it requires to of
the impact ASTM
only
a small hand-held hammer, and also referred to as a Non-Destructive Method.

400.1.3.2.2 High-Strain Dynamic Testing

Pile Integrity testing by High-Strain Dynamic Method shall conform to

ASTM D4945-97. High-Strain Dynamic Method shall be applied to confirm the
design parameters and capacities assumed for the piles as well as to confirm the
normal integrity of testing of the piles. It is considered supplemental to the low-
strain and sonic-type integrity testing of the cast-in-place piles. It is a non-
destructive relatively quick test and it is intended that the test shaft be left in a

inspects the drilled shaft structural integrity, and extent and location of defects, if
any. At the receiver probe, pulse arrival time and signal the concrete affects
strength. For equidistant tubes, uniform concrete yields consistent arrival times
with reasonable pulse wave speed and signal strengths. Non – uniformities such
as contamination, soft concrete, honeycombing, voids, or intrusions of foreign

objects exhibit delayed arrival time with reduced signal strength.

400.1.4 Timber Pile Bearing Value by Formula
`
When load tests are called for in the Bill of Quantities and when diesel or
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 140/437

other hammers to be calibrated are used, the minimum number of hammer blows
 per unit of pile penetration needed to obtain the specified bearing value of piles
5/7/2018
shall be determined by load tests, as provided in Subsections 400.1.2 and
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
400.1.3. In the absence of load tests, the safe bearing value of each timber pile
shall be determined by whichever of the following approximate formulas is
applicable:
1000 WH
For gravity hammer, P = ------------- x ---------------
6 S+25.4

For single-action steam or air hammers, and for diesel hammers

having unrestricted rebound of ram,

1000 WH
P = ----------- x -----------------
6 S+2.54

For double-action steam or air hammers, and diesel hammers

having enclosed ram,

1000 x -----------------
P = ------------ E
6 S+2.54

For diesel or steam hammers on very heavy piles,

1000 E
P = ---------- x ------------------------
6 S+2.54 (Wp/W)
Where:

P = Safe load per pile in Newton or kg

The above formula are applicable only when:

1. The hammer has a free fall.

2. The head of the pile is free from broomed or crushed wood fiber

or other
3. The serious impairment.
penetration is reasonably quick and uniform.
4. There is no measurable bounce after the blow.
5. A follower is not used.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 141/437

If there is a measurable bounce, twice the height of bounce shall be

 deducted from H to determine its value in the formula.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
The bearing power as determined by the appropriate formula listed
in this Subsection, will be considered effective only when it is less than
the crushing strength of the pile. Other recognized formulas may be used
if fully detailed in the Special Provisions.

When bearing power is determined by a formula, timber piles shall

be driven until a computed safe bearing power of each is not less than 18
tonnes.

400.1.5 Concrete and Steel Pile Bearing Values

The bearing values for concrete and steel pile will be determined by the
Engineer using the following formulas:

a. Modified Hiley’s Formula or any formula from brochures of the

equipment used, shall be used when the ratio of weight of ram or hammer
to weight of pile is greater than one fourth (1/4).

2WH (W)
Ru = ----------------------------
(S+K) (W+Wp)

Ru
Ra = ---------------
FS

Where:

Ru = ultimate capacity of piles (KN)

b. Hiley’s Formula shall be used when the ratio of the weight of ram
or hammer to weight of pile is less than one fourth (1/4).

efWH (W) (W + n2 Wp)

Ru = ------------------------------ x ---------------------------
S+1/2 (C1+C2+C3) (W + Wp)

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281

Ru 142/437
Ra = --------------
 FS
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
where:

Ru = ultimate capacity of pile (KN)

Ra = capacity of pile (KN)
ef = efficiency of hammer (refer to table)
W = weight of ram (KN)
Wp = weight of pile (KN)
H = height of fall of ram (mm)
S = average penetration for last ten blows (mm)
C1 = temporary compression allowance for pile head and
cap (refer to table)
C2 = RuL/AEp
C3 = range from 2.54mm to 5.08mm (0.1” to 0.2”) for
resilient soil to 0 for hard pan (rock, very dense sand
and gravel)
L = length of pile
A = cross-sectional area of pile

Ep
n =
= modulus
coefficientofofelasticity of pile
restitution (refer to table)
FS = factor of safety (min. = 3)

Required minimum penetration of all piles shall be six (6)

meters. However, for exposed piles, the embedded length shall be
equal or greater than the exposed length but not less than 6.0m .

Note:
Formula for other pile hammers with suggested factor of safety
should be as provided/recommended by their respective

Values of C1 for Hiley Formula

Temporary Compression Allowance C1 for Pile Head and Cap

Materials to which Easy Driving: Medium Driving: Hard Driving: Very Hard
blow is applied P1 = 3.45 MPa P1 = 6.90 MPa P1 = 10.34 MPa Driving:
(500 psi) (1000 psi) (1500 psi) P1 = 13.88 MPa
on Pile Butt If on Head or Cap. on Head or Cap. (2000 psi)
no cushion, mm (in.) mm (in.) on Head or Cap.
mm (in.) mm (in.)

Head of timber pile 1.27 (0.05) 2.54 (0.10) 3.81 (0.15) 5.08 (0.20)
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 143/437

76–100mm (3-4 in.)

 packing inside cap
b b b b
on head of precast 1.27 + 1.778 2.54 + 3.81 3.81 + 5.588 5.08 + 7.62
b b b b
5/7/2018 concrete piles (0.05 + 0.07) (0.10 + 0.15) (0.015
DPW+ 0.22)
H Blue (0.20 + 0.30)
Book - slide pdf.c om

Concrete Pile 0.635 (0.025) 1.27 (0.05) 1.905 (0.075) 2.54 (0.10)

Steel-covered cap.
containing wood
packing but steel
piling at pipe 1.016 (0.04) 2.032 (0.08) 3.048 (0.12) 4.064 (0.16)

4.76mm (3/16 in.)

red electrical tuber
disk between two
10mm (3/8”) steel
plates, for use with
severe driving on
Monotube pile 0.508 (0.02) 1.016 (0.04) 1.524 (0.06) 2.032 (0.08)

Head of steel piling

of pipe 0 0 0 0

b
The first figure represent the compression of the cap and wood dolly or
packing above
compression thewood
of the cap,packing
whereas the second
between figure
the cap and the represent
pile head. the

P1 = Ru/A
Values of Efficiency of Hammer, ef

Hammer Type ef

Drop Hammer
Drop Hammer actuated
released by
by rope
trigger
and friction winch 1.00
0.75
McKiernan-Terry Single-acting hammers 0.85
Warrington-Vulcan Single –acting hammers 0.75

Values of Coefficient of Restitution, n

Pile Type Head Condition Drop, Single Double
Acting or Acting
Diesel Hammers
Hammer

Reinforced
Concrete Helmet with dolly
green heart composite
on topplastic
of pile or 0.40 0.50

Helmet with Timber dolly, and

packing on top of pile 0.25 0.40
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 144/437
 Hammer direct on pile with pad 0.50
only
5/7/2018
Steel Driving cap with Standard plastic DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

or greenheart dolly 0.50 0.50

Driving cap with Timber dolly 0.30 0.30

Hammer direct on pile - 0.50

Timber Hammer direct on pile 0.25 0.40

The formulas specified in the preceding Subsection for timber piling may be
used in determining a rough approximation for the bearing power of precast and
cast-in-place concrete piles and of steel piles.

In all cases when the bearing power of concrete and steel piles is
determined by formula, the piles shall be driven until the safe bearing power of
each is computed to be not less than 27 tonnes.

400.1.6 Safe Loads

When the safe bearing power of any pile is found by test or computation to
be less than the design load, longer piles or additional piles shall be driven as
ordered in writing by the Engineer.

400.1.7 Jetted Piles

The safe bearing power of jetted piles shall be determined by actual tests

or
Noby
jet the
shallappropriate methods
be used during andblows.
the test formulas given in the preceding Subsections.

400.2 Material Requirements

noted on the Plans or Special Provisions, only the best grade shall be used. It
shall be free from loose knots, splits, wormholes, decay, warp, ring separation or
any defect which will impair its strength or render it unfit for its intended use. Any
specie specified on the Plans may be used for untreated timber and if the specie
is not available, a specie of equivalent strength and durability may be used if
authorized by the Engineer.

Round piles shall be cut above the ground swell and shall taper from butt to
tip. A line drawn from the center of the tip to the center of the butt shall not fall
outside of the cross-section of the pile at any point more than one percent of the
length of the pile.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 145/437
 In short bends, the distance from the center of the pile to a line stretched
5/7/2018 from the center of the pile above the bend to the center of the pile below the bend
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

shall not exceed four percent of the length of the bend or a maximum of 65mm.

Unless otherwise specified, all piles shall be peeled removing all rough
bark and at least 80 percent of the inner bark. Not less than 80 percent of the
surface on any circumference shall be clean wood. No strip of inner bark
remaining on the pile shall be more than 20mm wide and 200mm long. All knots
shall be trimmed close to the body of the pile.

The pile sizes shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table 400.1.
Table 400.1 – Dimension of Piles

Length of Pile Diameter (1 metre from the Butt) Minimum Tip

Diameter, mm
Minimum Maximum
mm mm

Less
12 to than 12 metres
18 metres 300
320 450
450 200
180
More than 18 metres 350 500 150

The diameter of the piles shall be measured in their peeled condition.

When the pile is not exactly round, the average of three measurements may be
used. For any structure, the butt diameters for the same lengths of pile shall be
as uniform as possible.

Square piles shall have the dimensions shown on the Plans.

400.2.2 Treated Timber Piles

treatment of structural timbers sawn from woods native to the Philippines. The
treatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not induce excessive
checking. The minimum penetration of the preservative into the surface of the
timber shall be 20 mm. All piles shall retain the minimum amount of preservative
specified in Table 400.2.

Table 400.2 – Minimum Preservative Per Cubic Metre of Wood

Type of Processing
Use
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
Empty Cell Process Full Cell Process 146/437

General Use 195 kg

 Marine Use 320 kg
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The Engineer shall inspect the timber prior to the treatment to determine
conformance with the Specifications and suitability of conditions for treatment. He
shall be permitted free access to the plant in order that temperatures, pressures
and quantities and type of treatment materials used may be observed. Samples of
the creosote or creosote petroleum mixtures shall be furnished as required for
test.
The timber shall be checked to determine penetration of treatment, quantity
of free preservative remaining on the timber and any visual evidence that the
treatment has been performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of
treatment shall be determined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed
holes to determine the average penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with
plugs approximately 2 mm larger in diameter than the bit used in boring the holes.

If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the

entire charge, or such parts thereof shall be retreated. If after treatment the
penetration is still insufficient, the treated pieces shall be rejected.

400.2.3 Concrete Piles

Concrete shall conform to the requirements of Item 405, Structural

Concrete. Concrete shall be Class “C” unless otherwise specified in the Plans.

Concrete shall be proportioned to achieve a range of 6”-8” (150 mm to 200

mm) slump, self-compacting mix.

The use of appropriate plasticizer/additives to assure mix fluidity and

consistency shall be allowed and with the Engineer’s approval. A retardant of
proven adequacy and approved by the Engineer may be used to ensure that early

400.2.4 Steel Shells

1. Shells Driven Without a Mandrel

Unless otherwise called for on the Plans or Special Provisions, shells for
cast-in-place concrete piles shall have a minimum 305mm diameter at cut off and
a minimum 203mm diameter at tip: made from not less than 4.55mm in thickness
plate stock conforming to AASHTO M 183. Shells may either be spirally welded
or longitudinally welded and may either be tapered or constant in section. Tips
shall be sealed as shown on the Plans.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 147/437

2. Shells Driven With a Mandrel

5/7/2018
The shell shall be of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand driving
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

without injury and to resist harmful distortion and/or buckling due to soil pressure
after driven and the mandrel removed. Butt and tip dimension shall be as called
for on the Plans or Special Provisions.

400.2.5 Steel Pipes

Filled Steel Pipes (filled with concrete) shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM A 252, Grade 2, Welded and Seamless Pipe Piles. Closure Plates for
closed piles shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183.
Unfilled Tubular Steel Piles shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A
252, Grade 2, with chemical requirements meeting ASTM Designation A 53,
Grade B. The wall thickness shall not be less than 4.76mm.

400.2.6 Steel H-Piles

for on Steel H-Piles They

the Plans. shall be rolled
shall be steel sections
structural steelof meeting
the weight
theand shape called
requirements of
AASHTO M 183 provided that, where the Special Provisions called for copper-
bearing structural steel, the steel shall not contain less than one-fifth percent nor
more than zero point thirty five percent (0.35%) of copper, except that steel
manufactured by the acid-bessemer process shall not be used.

400.2.7 Sheet Piles

Steel sheet piles shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 202 (ASTM A
328), or AASHTO M 223. All other sheet piles shall meet the requirements
prescribed above the particular material specified. The joints shall be practically

400.2.9 Splices

Material for pile splices, when splicing is allowed, shall be of the same
quality as the material used for the pile itself and shall follow the requirements
given on the Plans.

400.2.10 Paint

It shall conform to Item 709, Paints.

400.3 Construction Requirements

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 148/437
 400.3.1 Location and Site Preparation
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Piles shall be driven where indicated on the Plans or as directed by the

Engineer.

All excavations for the foundation on which the piles are to be driven shall
be completed before the pile driving, unless otherwise specified or approved by
the Engineer. After driving is completed, all loose and displaced materials shall
be removed from around the piles by hand excavation, leaving clean solid surface
to receive the concrete of the foundation. Any requirement for granular fill and
lean concrete shall be indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
400.3.2 Determination of Pile Length

Pile length and bearing capacity shall be determined by the Engineer from
the results of the test piling and load tests.

The criterion for pile length may be one of the following:

1. Piles in sand and gravel shall be driven to a bearing power determined

by the use of the pile driving formula or as decided by the Engineer.
2. Piles in clay shall be driven to the depth ordered by the Engineer.
However, the bearing power shall be controlled by the pile driving
formula if called for by the Engineer.
3. Piles shall be driven to refusal on rock or hard layer when so ordered by
the Engineer.

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the correct pile length and
bearing capacity according to the criteria given by the Engineer.

cap or underneath the superstructure in case of pile bents. All piles pushed up by
the driving of adjacent piles or any other cause shall be redriven.

Piles shall be used only in places where the minimum penetration of 3m in

firm materials, or 5m in soft materials can be obtained. Whereas soft upper
stratum overlies a hard stratum, the piles shall penetrate the hard materials at
sufficient depths to fix the ends rigidly.

All pile driving equipment is subject to the Engineer’s approval. The

Contractor is responsible for sufficient weight and efficiency of the hammers to
drive the piles down to the required depth and bearing capacity. Hammers shall
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 149/437

be gravity hammers, single and double acting steam or pneumatic hammers or

 diesel hammers. Gravity hammers shall not weigh less than 60 percent of the
combined weight of the pile and driving head but not less than 2,000 kg. The fall
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

shall be regulated so as to avoid injury to the pile and shall in no case exceed
4.50m for timber and steel piles and 2.50m for concrete piles unless otherwise
specified or approved by the Engineer.

The plant and equipment furnished for steam hammers shall have sufficient
capacity to maintain, under working condition, the pressure at the hammer
specified by the manufacturer. The boiler or pressure tank shall be equipped with
an accurate pressure gauge and another gauge shall be supplied at the hammer
intake to determine the drop in pressure between the gauges. When diesel
hammers or any other types requiring calibration are used, they shall be calibrated
with test piling and/or test loads in accordance with Subsection 400.1.2, Test
Piles.

Water jets shall be used only when permitted in writing by the Engineer.
When water jets are used, the number of jets and the nozzle volume and pressure
shall be sufficient to erode freely the material adjacent to the pile. The plant shall
have sufficient capacity to deliver at all time a pressure equivalent to at least 690
KPa at two 19 mm (3/4 inch) jet nozzles. The jets shall be shut off before the
required penetration is reached and the piles shall be driven solely by hammers to
final penetration as required by the Engineer.

Piles shall be supported in line and position with leads while being driven.
Pile driving leads shall be constructed in such a manner as to afford freedom of
movement of the hammer, and shall be held in position by guys or steel braces to
insure rigid lateral support to the pile during driving. The leads shall be of
sufficient length to make the use of a follower unnecessary and shall be so
designed as to permit proper placing of batter piles. The driving of the piles with
followers shall be avoided if practicable and shall be done only under written

The pile tops shall be protected by driving heads, caps or cushions in

accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer of the pile hammer and
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The driving head shall be provided to maintain
the axis of the pile with the axis of the hammer and provide a driving surface
normal to the pile.

Full length piles shall be used where practicable. Splicing of piles when
permitted, shall be in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 400.3.7 and
400.3.8. All piles shall be continuously driven unless otherwise allowed by the
Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 150/437

Piles shall not be driven within 7 m of concrete less than 7 days old.
 400.3.4 Timber Piles
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Piles shall be strapped with three metal straps: one about 450mm from the
butt, one about 600mm from the butt, and the third, about 300mm from the tip.
Additional straps shall be provided at about 4.5m on centers between tip and butt.
Strapping should encircle the pile once and be tensioned as tightly as possible.
Straps shall be 38mm wide, 0.8mm thick, cold rolled, fully heat treated, high
tensile strapping, painted and waxed.

Treated piles shall be strapped after treatment.

Point protection shall be considered for all timber piles. Where timber piles
must penetrate dump fill, or may encounter obstructions or be driven to hard
strata, point protection shall be used. A boot that encompasses and utilizes the
entire end area of the pile is preferred.

400.3.5 Timber Pile Bents

Piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size, to avoid undue
bending or distortion of the sway bracing. Care shall be exercised in the
distribution of piles of various sizes to obtain uniform strength and rigidity in the
bents of any given structure.

Cut offs shall be made accurately to insure full being between caps and
piles of bents.

400.3.6 Precast Concrete Piles

Precast concrete piles shall be of the design shown on the Plans.

Piles shall be cured and finished in accordance with Items 405, Structural
Concrete and 406, Prestressed Concrete Structures.

Cylinder specimens shall be made and tested in accordance with Item 405.
Piles shall not be moved until the tests indicate that the concrete has attained a
compressive strength of at least 80 percent (80%) of the design 28-day
compressive strength and they shall not be transported or driven until the design
28-day compressive strength has been attained.

If testing equipment is not available, as in isolated areas, piles shall not be

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 151/437
moved until after fourteen (14) days after casting and shall not be transported or
 driven prior to 28 days after casting. If high early strength cement is used, piles
shall not be moved, transported or driven prior to 7 days after casting.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

When concrete piles are lifted or moved, they shall be supported at the
points shown on the Plans; if not shown, they shall be supported at the quarter
points.

400.3.7 Cast-in-place Concrete Piles

1. Drilled Holes

All holes for concrete piles cast in drilled holes shall be drilled dry to tip
elevation shown on the Plans. All holes will be examined for straightness and any
hole which on visual inspection from the top shows less than one-half the
diameter of the hole at the bottom of the hole will be rejected. Suitable casings
shall be furnished and placed when required to prevent caving of the hole before
concrete is placed.

All loose material existing at the bottom of the hole after drilling operations
have been completed shall be removed before placing concrete.

The use of water for drilling operations or for any other purpose where it
may enter the hole will not be permitted. All necessary action shall be taken to
prevent surface water from entering the hole and all water which may have
infiltrated into the hole shall be removed before placing concrete.

Concrete shall be placed by means of suitable tubes. Prior to the initial

concrete set, the top 3m of the concrete filled pile or the depth of any reinforcing
cage, whichever is greater, shall be consolidated by acceptable vibratory
equipment,

2. Steel Shells and Pipes

The inside of shells and pipes shall be cleaned and all loose materials
removed before concrete is placed. The concrete shall be placed in one
continuous operation from tip to cut-off elevation and shall be carried on in such a
manner as to avoid segregation.

The top 3m of concrete filled shells, or to the depth of any reinforcing cage,
whichever is greater, shall be consolidated by acceptable vibratory equipment.

Pipes shall be of the diameter shown on the Plans. The pipe wall thickness
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 152/437
shall not be less than that shown on the Plans but in no case less than 5mm. The
pipe, including end closures, shall be of sufficient strength to be driven by the
 pipe, including end closures, shall be of sufficient strength to be driven by the
specified methods without distortion.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Closure plates and connecting welds shall not project more than 12.5mm
beyond the perimeter of the pile tips.

No shell or pipe shall be filled with concrete until all adjacent shells, pipes,
or piles within a radius of 1.5m or 4 ½ times the average pile diameter, whichever
is greater, have been driven to the required resistance.

After
be driven a shell
within 6mor pipe has
thereof untilbeen filled
at least 7 with
daysconcrete, no shell, pipe or pile shall
have elapsed.

3. Drilled Shafts

Drilled shafts are deep foundations formed by boring a cylindrical hole into
soil and/or rock and filling the hole with concrete. Drilled shafts are also
commonly referred to as caissons, bored piles or drilled piers.

Drilled shafts, like driven piles, transfer structural loads to bearing stratum
well below the base of the structure by passing soils having insufficient strength to
carry the design loads.

Drilled shafts are classified according to their primary mechanism for

deriving load resistance either as floating shafts (i.e., shafts transferring load
primarily by side resistance), or end-bearing shafts (i.e., shafts transferring load
primarily by tip resistance). Occasionally, the bases of shafts are enlarged (i.e.,
belled or underreamed) to improved the load capacity of end bearing shafts on
less than desirable soils, or to increase the uplift resistance of floating shafts.

in shaft capacity and an increase in shaft displacement. Therefore, evaluation of

the effects of shaft construction procedure on load capacity must be considered
an inherent aspect of the design.

Drilled shafts are normally sized in 15.24cm (6-inch diameter increments

with a minimum diameter of 45.72cm (18”). The diameter of a shaft socketed into
rock should be a minimum of 15.24cm (6”) larger than the socket diameter. If a
shaft must be inspected by the entry of a person, the shaft diameter shall not be
less than 76.20cm (30”).

Drilled shafts constructed in dry, noncaving soils can usually be excavated

without lateral support of the hole. Other ground conditions where caving,
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 153/437

squeezing or sloughing soils are present require installation of a steel casing or

 use of a slurry for support of the hole. Such conditions and techniques may result
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
in loosening of soil around the shaft, or altering of frictional resistance between the
concrete shaft and surrounding soil.

The center-to-center spacing between shafts is normally restricted to a

minimum of 3B to minimize the effects of interaction between adjacent shafts
during construction or in service. However, larger spacings may be required
where drilling operations are difficult or where construction must be completed in
very short time frames.

Particular attention should be given to the potential for deposition of loose

or wet material in the bottom of the hole, or the buildup of a cake of soft material
around the shaft perimeter prior to concrete placement. Adequate cleaning and
inspection of rock sockets should always be performed to assure good contact
between the rock and shaft concrete. If good contact along the shaft cannot be
confirmed, it may be necessary to assume that all load is transferred to the tip. If
the deposition of soft or loose material in the bottom of the hole is expected, the
shaft may have to be designed to carry the entire design load through side
resistance.

A number of methods can be used to prevent caving during the drilling of

holes and the placement of concrete. It is preferred that drilled shafts be
constructed in stable non-sloughing soil without excessive ground water. If
impossible, consider the following three different construction methods:

a. The construction of the pile or shaft in a wet condition while the walls of
the excavation are stabilized by hydrostatic pressure of water or a mineral slurry
until the concrete is placed by tremie methods for the full length of the pile.

The mineral slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clean fresh water and
adequate time allotted for hydration prior to introduction into the shaft excavation.
Adequate slurry tanks will be required when specified. No excavated slurry pits
will be allowed when slurry tanks are required on the project without written
permission of the Engineer. Adequate desanding equipment will be required
when specified. Steps shall be taken as necessary to prevent the slurry from
“setting up” in the shaft excavation, such as agitation, circulation, and adjusting
the properties of the slurry.

Control tests using suitable apparatus shall be carried out by the Contractor
on the mineral slurry to determine density, viscosity, and pH. An acceptable
range of values for those physical properties is shown in the following table.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 154/437
 Range of Values (At 20o [68oF])
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Property Time of Slurry Time of Concreting Test

(Units) Introduction (In Hole) Method

Density 10.10 to 10.86 10.10 to 11.79 Density

(KN/m3) 64.3 to 69.1 64.3 to 75.0 Balance
(pcf)

Viscosity 28 to 45 28 to 45 Marsh
(sec. per quart) Cone

pH 8 to 11 8 to 11 pH Paper
or Meter

Note:
a) Increase density values by 0.314 KN/m3 (2 pcf) in salt water.

b) If desanding is required; sand content shall not exceed 4 percent

(by volume) at any point in the shaft excavation as determined by
the American Petroleum Institute sand content test.

Tests to determine density, viscosity and pH values shall be done during

the shaft excavation to establish a consistent working pattern.

Prior to placing shaft concrete, slurry samples shall be taken from the
bottom and at intervals not exceeding 3.05m (10 feet) for the full height of slurry.
Any heavily contaminated slurry that has accumulated at the bottom of the shaft
shall be eliminated. The mineral slurry shall be within specification requirements

The base of the shaft excavation may be cleaned using a cleaning bucket
followed by airlifting. Reverse circulation techniques may also be used to clean
the base of the shaft.

The shaft excavation shall be cleaned so that a minimum of 50 percent of

the base will have less than 12.5mm of sediment and at no place on the base
more than 37.5mm of sediment. The Engineer will determine shaft cleanliness.

b. The use of steel casing which is installed during drilling operations to

hold the hole open and usually withdrawn during concrete placement.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 155/437

Casing, if used in operation, shall be metal, smooth, clean, watertight, and

 of ample strength to withstand both handling and driving stresses and the
5/7/2018
pressure of both concrete and the surrounding earth materials. The outside
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

diameter of casing shall not be less than the specified size of the shaft. It shall
conform to AASHTO M 270 (ASTM A 709) Grade 36 unless otherwise specified.

Temporary casings shall be removed while the concrete remains workable.

Generally the removal of temporary casing shall not be started until concrete
placement in the shaft is at or above ground surface. Movement of casing by
rotating, exerting downward pressure and tapping to facilitate extraction or

extraction with arate

a slow, uniform vibratory hammer
with the will with
pull in line be permitted. Casing extraction shall be at
the shaft axis.

A sufficient head of concrete shall be maintained above the bottom of the

casing to overcome the hydrostatic pressure of water or drilling fluid outside of the
casing.

c. The use of a permanent casing which is left in place within the portion of
the pile which is in unstable material.

A permanent casing is applied as protection from the presence of surface

water during drilling and as support later for the installation of the rebar cage and
as a concrete form in drilling under water.

Reinforcing Steel Cage Construction and Placement

The reinforcing steel cage consisting of the steel shown on the Plans plus
cage stiffener bars, spacers, centralizers and any other necessary appurtenances
shall be completely assembled and placed as a unit immediately after the shaft
excavation is inspected and accepted and prior to shaft concrete placement.

support the reinforcing steel. When concrete is placed by suitable tubes,

temporary hold-down devices shall be used to prevent uplifting of the steel cage
during concrete placement. Concrete spacers or other approved noncorrosive
spacing devices shall be used at sufficient intervals not exceeding 1.50 meters
along the shaft to insure concentric location of the cage within the shaft
excavation. When the size of the longitudinal reinforcing steel exceeds 25mm,
such spacing shall not exceed 3.0 meters.

Concrete Placement, Curing and Protection

Concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after reinforcing steel cage

placement. Concrete placement shall be continuous in the shaft to the top
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 156/437

elevation of the shaft. Placement shall continue after the shaft is full until good
 quality concrete is evident at the top of the shaft. Concrete shall be placed
5/7/2018 through a suitable tube. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

For piles less than 2.5 meters in diameter, the elapsed time from the
beginning of concrete placement in the shaft to the completion of placement shall
not exceed 2 hours. For piles 2.50 meters and greater in diameter, the concrete
placing rate shall not be less than 9.0 meters of pile height per each 2-hour
period. The concrete mix shall be of such design that the concrete remains in a
workable plastic state throughout the 2-hour placement limit.

When the top of pile elevation is above ground, the portion of the pile
above ground shall be formed with a removable form or permanent casing when
specified.

The upper 1.5 meters of concrete shall be vibrated or rodded to a depth of

1.5 meter below the ground surface except where soft uncased soil or slurry
remaining in the excavation will possibly mix with the concrete.

After placement, the temporarily exposed surfaces of the shaft concrete

shall be cured in accordance with the provision in Sub-section 407.3.8 – Curing
Concrete.

For at least 48 hours after pile concrete has been placed, no construction
operations that would cause soil movement adjacent to the shaft, other than mild
vibration, shall be conducted.

Construction Tolerances:

The following tolerances shall be maintained in constructing drilled shaft.

c. After all the shaft concrete is placed, the top of the reinforcing steel
cage shall be no more than 15.24 cm (6”) above and no more than 7.62
cm (3”) below plan position.

d. When casing is used, its outside diameter shall not be less than the
shaft diameter shown on the plans. When casing is not used, the
minimum diameter of the drilled shaft shall be the diameter shown on
the plans for diameters 60.96 cm (24”) or less, and not more than 2.54
cm (1 inch) less than the diameter shown on the plans for diameters
greater than 60.96 cm (24”).

e. The bearing area of bells shall be excavated to the plan bearing area as
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 157/437

a minimum. All other plan dimensions shown for the bells may be
 varied, when approved, to accommodate the equipment used.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
f. The top elevation of the shaft shall be within 2.54 cm (1 inch) of the plan
top of shaft elevation.

g. The bottom of the shaft excavation shall be normal to the axis of the
shaft within 62.5 mm/m (3/4 inch per foot) of shaft diameter.

Drilled shaft excavations constructed in such a manner that the concrete

shaft cannot be completed within the required tolerances are unacceptable.

400.3.8 Steel H-Pile

Steel H-Pile shall consist of structural steel shapes of the sections indicated
on the Plans.

When placed in the leads, the pile shall not exceed the camber and sweep
permitted by allowable mill tolerance. Piles bent or otherwise damaged will be
rejected.

The loading, transporting, unloading, storing and handling of steel H-pile

shall be conducted so that the metal will be kept clean and free from damage.

400.3.9 Unfilled Tubular Steel Piles

The tubular steel piles should be or as specified by the Engineer.

The minimum wall thickness shall be as indicated in the following table:

400.3.10 Splicing

Splicing when permitted shall be made as shown on the Plans and in

accordance with this Subsection.

1. Precast Concrete Piles

a. By using prefabricated joints mounted in the forms and cast together

with the piles sections and joined together as specified by the manufac-
turer and approved by the Engineer. The joints shall be of the design
and type as specified or shown on the Plans.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 158/437

b. By cutting away the concrete at the end of the pile, leaving the
 reinforcing steel exposed for a length of 40 bar diameters for corrugated
5/7/2018 or deformed bars and 60 bar diameters for plain bars. The final cut of
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
the concrete shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pile.
Reinforcement of the same size as that used in the pile shall be spliced
to the projecting steel in accordance with Item 404, Reinforcing Steel,
and the necessary formwork shall be placed, care being taken to
prevent leakage along the pile. The concrete shall be of the same
quality as that used in the pile. Just prior to placing concrete, the top of
the pile shall be wetted thoroughly and covered with a thin coating of

neat cement, retempered

the satisfaction mortar, or
of the Engineer. Theother suitable
forms bondinginmaterial
shall remain to
place not
less than seven (7) days. The pile shall not be driven until the safe
design has been reached.

c. By any other method shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.

Curing and finishing of extensions shall be the same as in the original
pile.

2. Prestressed Piles

Splicing of prestressed precast piles will generally not be permitted, but

when permitted, it shall be made in accordance with (1) above, but only
after driving has been completed. Reinforcement bars shall be included in
the pile head for splicing to the extension bars. No additional driving will be
permitted. The Contractor, at his option, may submit alternative plans of
splicing for consideration by the Engineer.

3. Steel Piles, Shells or Pipes

400.3.11 Cutting Off and Capping Piles

The top of foundation piles shall be embedded in the concrete footing as

shown on the Plans.

Concrete piles shall, when approved by the Engineer, be cut off at such a
level that at least 300mm of undamaged pile can be embedded in the structure
above. If a pile is damaged below this level, the Contractor shall repair the pile to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. The longitudinal reinforcement of the piles shall
be embedded in the structure above to a length equal to at least 40 times the
diameter of the main reinforcing corrugated bars (60 diameters for plain bars).
The distance from the side of any pile to the nearest edge of the cap shall not be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 159/437
less than 200mm.
 When the cut off elevation for a precast pile or for the steel shell or pile for
5/7/2018
a cast in place concrete pile is below the elevation of the bottom of the pile cap,
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the pile may be built-up from the butt of the pile to the elevation of the bottom of
the cap by means of reinforced concrete extension constructed in accordance with
Subsection 400.3.10 or as approved by the Engineer.

Cut-offs of structural steel piles shall be made at right angles to the axis of
the pile. The cuts shall be made in clear, straight lines and any irregularity due to

cutting or
bearing burning shall be leveled-off with deposits of weld metal prior to placing
caps.

400.3.12 Defective Piles

Any pile delivered with defects, or damaged in driving due to internal

defects or by improper driving, or driven out of its proper location, or driven below
the elevation fixed by the Plans or by the Engineer, shall be corrected at the
Contractor’s expense by one of the following methods approved by the Engineer
for the pile in question:

1. Any pile delivered with defects shall be replaced by a new pile.

2. Additional pile shall be driven/casted at the location as directed by the

Engineer.

3. The pile shall be spliced or built-up as otherwise provided herein on the

underside of the footing lowered to properly embed the pile.

A precast concrete pile shall be considered defective if it has a visible

400.3.13 Protecting Untreated Timber Trestle Piles

The heads of untreated piles shall be treated as follows:

The sawed surface shall be thoroughly brush-coated with two (2)

applications of hot creosote oil or other approved preservative.

400.3.14 Protecting Treated Timber Trestle Piles

All cuts and abrasions in treated timber piles shall be protected by a

preservative approved by the Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 160/437
400.3.15 Painting Steel Piles
 Unless otherwise provided, when required steel piles extend above the
5/7/2018
ground surface or water surface, they shall be protected by paint as specified for
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

cleaning and painting metal surfaces in accordance with Item 403, Metal
Structures. This protection shall extend from the elevation shown on the Plans to
the top of the exposed steel.

400.3.16 Pile Records

The Contractor
the record shall be givenshalltokeep
the records
Engineerofwithin
all piles driven
two or installed.
(2) days A copy
after each of
pile is
driven. The record form to be used shall be approved by the Engineer. The pile
records shall give full information on the following:

Driven Piles Cast-in-Place Piles

1. Pile type and dimension 1. Date of boring or driving (For

steel shell) & casting

2. Date of casting and concrete 2. Pile type and nominal

quality (for concrete piles) dimension

3. Date of driving 3. Length of finished pile and tip

elevation

4. Driving equipment: type, 4. Details of penetration during

weight & efficiency of hammer, boring or driving of steel shell
etc. (driving records as for driven

7. Final set for the last 20 blows 7. Volume of concrete placed in

(for every 10 piles and when concrete
the Engineer so requires the
penetration along the whole
depth driven shall be recorded)

8. For gravity and single-acting

hammers: the height of drop

9. For double acting-hammers ---

the frequency of blows
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 161/437
10. Details of any interruption in
driving
5/7/2018 11. Level of pile top immediately DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

after driving and the level

when all piles in the group are
driven

12. Details of re-driving

400.4 Method of Measurement

400.4.1 Timber, Steel and Precast Concrete Piles

1. Piles Furnished

The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of the lengths in metres of
the piles of the several types and lengths ordered in writing by the
Engineer, furnished in compliance with these Specifications and stockpiles
in good condition at the project site by the Contractor and accepted by the
Engineer. The length to be paid for will include test and tension piles
ordered by the Engineer, but not those furnished by the Contractor at his
option. No allowance will be made for piles, including test piles, furnished
by the Contractor to replace piles previously accepted by the Engineer that
are subsequently lost or damaged while in stockpile, or during handling or
driving, and are ordered by the Engineer to be removed from the site of
work.

In case extensions of piles are necessary, the extension length will be

included in the length of pile furnished, except for cut off lengths used for

piles driven that may be necessary to suit the Contractor’s method of

construction and were driven at his option.

Unless otherwise provided for, preboring, jetting or other methods used

for facilitating pile driving operations will not be measured directly but will
be considered subsidiary to pay items.

400.4.2 Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles

The quantity to be paid for will be the sum of actual lengths in meters of
the piles cast and left in-place in the completed and accepted work.
Measurements will be from the pile tip to the bottom of cap or footing. Portions of
piles cast deeper than the required length through over-drilling will not be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 162/437

measured for payment.

5/7/2018 400.4.3 Pile Shoes DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The quantity to be paid for, including test pile shoes, will be the number of
pile shoes driven shown on the Plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer,
furnished by the Contractor in accordance with these Specifications and accepted
by the Engineer. Pile shoes furnished by the Contractor at his option or to replace
those that are lost or damaged in stockpile or handling will not be measured for

payment.
400.4.4 Load Tests

The quantity of the load tests to be paid for will be the number of tests
completed and accepted except that load tests made to calibrate different types of
hammers, if not included in the Bill of Quantities, will not be measured for
payment.

Anchor and test piling which are not part of the completed structure, will be
included in the unit bid price for each “Load Test”. Anchor and test piling or
anchor and test shafts which are a part of the permanent structure will be paid for
under the appropriate Item.

400.4.5 Splices

The quantity to be paid for will be the number of splices which may be
required to drive the pile in excess of the estimated length shown on the Plans for
cast-in-place steel pipes or shells or in excess of the order length furnished by the
Engineer for all other types of piling. Splices made for the convenience of the

and incidentals as well as temporary works, staging areas or craneway necessary

to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Description Unit of

Number Measurement

400 (1) Untreated Timber Piles, furnished Meter

400 (2) Treated Timber Piles, preservative, furnished Meter
400 (3) Steel H-Piles, furnished Meter
400 (4) Precast Concrete Piles, furnished Meter
400 (5) Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, furnished
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
Meter 163/437

400 (6) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished Meter

 400 (7) Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, furnished Meter
5/7/2018 400 (8) Untreated Timber Piles, driven Meter
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

400 (9) Treated Timber Piles, driven Meter

400 (10) Steel H-Piles, driven Meter
400 (11) Steel Pipes Piles Meter
400 (12) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, driven Meter
400 (13) Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, driven Meter
400 (14) Precast Concrete Piles, driven Meter

400
400 (15)
(16) Precast, Prestresssed
Test Piles, Concrete
furnished and driven Piles, driven Meter
Meter
400 (17) Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes Meter
400 (18) Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells Meter
400 (19) Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes Meter
400 (20) Pile Shoes Each
400 (21) Splices Each
400 (22) Load Tests Each
400 (23) Bored Piles (dia. __m) Meter
400 (24) Permanent Casing (dia. ___m) Meter

ITEM 401 – RAILINGS

401.1 Description

401.2 Material Requirements

401.2.1 Concrete

It shall conform to the applicable requirements prescribed in Item 405,

Structural Concrete.

401.2.2 Reinforcing Steel

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire
Rope.

401.2.3 Steel
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 164/437
 Structural
and castings shallsteel consisting
conform of steel and iron
to the requirements plates,
of Item 403, shapes, pipes, fittings
Metal Structures.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

401.2.4 Aluminum

It shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 193, ASTM B 221 or

ASTM B 308 or as called for on the Plans.

401.2.5 Timber

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated

Timber.

401.2.6 Stones and Bricks

These shall conform to the requirements of Item 505, Stone Masonry and
Item 704, Masonry Units.

401.2.7 Paint

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 709, Paints.

401.3 Construction Requirements

401.3.1 General

Railings shall be constructed to the lines and grades shown on the Plans
and shall not reflect any unevenness in the structure. All railing posts shall be set

Rail elements shall be erected according to Plans and in a manner

resulting in a smooth, continuous installation with laps in the direction of traffic
flow. All bolts except adjustment bolts shall be drawn tight. Bolts shall be of
sufficient length to extend beyond the nuts by more than 25 mm.

Where painting of railing component is specified, any damage to the shop

coat of paint shall be corrected by an application of an approved rust-inhibitive
primer prior to painting. Ungalvanized surfaces inaccessible to painting after
erection shall be field painted before erection. The railing components shall be
given the specified number of coats of paint uniformly applied by thorough
brushing or by approved pressure spray.

Galvanized surfaces which have been abraded so that the base metal is
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 165/437

exposed, threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts shall
 be painted with two (2) coats of zinc-dust and zinc oxide paint.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
401.3.2 Metal Railing

Fabrication and erection shall be done in accordance with the requirements

of Item 403, Metal Structures. In the case of welded railings, all exposed joints
shall be finished by grinding or filing after welding to give a neat appearance.

Metal railing shall be carefully adjusted prior to fixing in-place to insure

proper matching of abutting joints, correct alignment and camber throughout their
length. Holes for field connection shall be drilled with the railing in-place in the
structure at proper grade and alignment. Welding may be substituted for rivets or
bolts in field connections with the approval of the Engineer.

401.3.3 Concrete Railing

1. Railing Cast-In-Place

The portion of the railing or parapet which is to be cast-in-place shall be

constructed in accordance with the requirements of Item 405, Structural
Concrete. Special care shall be exercised to secure smooth and tight fitting
forms which can be rigidly held in line and grade and removed without
injury to the concrete.

Forms shall either be of single width boards or shall be lined with

suitable material to have a smooth surface which shall meet the approval of
the Engineer or as shown on the Plans.

2. Precast Railings

Moist tamped mortar precast members shall be removed from the

molds as soon as practicable and shall be kept damp for a period of at
least ten (10) days. Any member that shows checking of soft corners of
surfaces shall be rejected.

Expansion joints shall be constructed as to permit freedom of

movement. After all work is completed, all loose or thin shells of mortar
likely to spall under movement shall be carefully removed from all
expansion joints by means of a sharp chisel.

401.3.4 Wooden Railing

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 166/437
 Wooden
Item 402, railing
Timber shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of
Structures.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

401.3.5 Stone and Brick Railing

The materials used in masonry brick railing and parapet and the work to be
done shall conform to the requirements of this Specification. The workmanship
shall be first class and the finished construction shall be neat in appearance and
true to line and grade.

401.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meters of specified
railing actually completed and accepted measured from center to center of end
posts.

401.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quality, measured as prescribed in Section 401.4, shall be

paid for at the contract unit price for Railing, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement

Number

ITEM 402 – TIMBER STRUCTURES

402.1 Description

This Item shall consist of the construction of timber structures to the

dimensions, lines and grades as shown on the Plans or as ordered by the
Engineer in accordance with these Specifications. The timber shall be treated or
untreated as called for on the Plans or Special Provisions.

402.2 Material Requirements

402.2.1 Timber
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 167/437
 Timber.It shall conform to the requirements of Item 713, Treated and Untreated
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

402.2.2 Hardware

All hardware shall be of the kind and size specified on the Plans. All bolts,
including drift bolts, shall be either wrought iron or medium steel. Washers shall
be either ogee gray iron casting or malleable cast iron unless cut washers are
specified on the Plans.

Bolts shall have square heads and nuts, unless otherwise specified. Nails
shall be cut or round wire of standard form. Spikes shall be cut wire or spikes, or
boat spikes, as specified. All hardware shall be galvanized in conformity with
AASHTO M 232 or cadmium plated per ASTM M 165 Type OS, unless otherwise
specified on the Plans or Special Provisions.

402.2.3 Paint

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 709, Paints or Item 411, Paint.

402.2.4 Structural Steel

It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 712, Structural

Metal.

402.2.5 Preservatives
The preservative shall be creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil blend as

402.3 Construction Requirements

402.3.1 Storage of Materials

All timber which is to be stored on the job for any length of time prior to its
use in the structure shall be neatly stacked in piles to prevent warping or
distortion. Untreated timber shall be open-stacked at least 300mm above the
ground and the stack shall be sloped so as to shed water. Creosote-treated
timber shall be close-stacked and piled to prevent warping. The ground under-
neath and in the vicinity of all material piles shall be cleared of all weeds and
rubbish.

402.3.2 Treated Timber

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 168/437
 All treated
in handling timbertimber
all treated shall be
so framed prior
as not to to treating.
break Care the
or penetrate shalltreatment
be exercised
with
5/7/2018
any tool or handling equipment. Any piece of timber that has been damaged by
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the Contractor shall be replaced by him without extra compensation.

Any cut made or hole bored in treated timber that shall expose untreated
wood shall be given three coats of hot creosote or carbolineum before the
exposed part is assembled.

402.3.3 Timber Treatment

Treatment shall consist of the forcing of either creosote oil or a creosote-

petroleum oil mixture into the outer fibers of the timber by a heat and pressure
process. The treatment shall be so regulated that the curing process will not
induce excessive checking.

The minimum penetration of the preservative with the surface of the timber
shall be 20mm. The minimum retention of preservative per cubic metre of timber
shall be as follows:

For general use, 195 kg by empty cell process

For marine use, 320 kg by full cell process

The Engineer shall be notified at least ten (10) days in advance of the date
that the treating process will be performed in order that the untreated timber, the
treatment process, and the finished treated timber may all be inspected. The
Engineer will inspect the timber prior to treatment to determine conformance with

performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of treatment shall be

determined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed holes to determine the
average penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with plugs approximately
2mm larger in diameter than the bit used in boring the holes.

If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the

entire charge, or such parts thereof as are determined by the Engineer or his
authorized representative to be unsatisfactory, may be retreated. If after
retreatment, the penetration is still insufficient, the retreatment pieces shall be
rejected.

Any excessive checking caused by the treating process shall be cause for
rejection of the pieces in which the excessive checking occurs.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 169/437
 The
pressure treating
gages plant
so that the shall be can
process equipped with adequate
be accurately controlledthermometers and
and a continuous
5/7/2018 record made of stages of the treating process. If requested by the Engineer,
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

records shall be furnished showing the duration, maximum and minimum

temperatures and pressures used during all stages of the process.

402.3.4 Untreated Timber

In structures of untreated timber, all of the following surfaces shall be

coated thoroughly with two (2) coats of hot creosote oil or carbolineum before the
timber are assembled: ends, tops and all contact surfaces of posts, sills, caps,
floor beams and stringers, all ends, joints and contact surfaces of bracing. The
back surface of all bulkheads and any other timber in direct contact with earth
shall be similarly treated.

402.3.5 Bolts and Washers

Washers of the size and type specified shall be used under all bolt heads
and nuts that would otherwise be in contact with wood. Cast iron washers shall
have a thickness equal to one fourth the diameter of the bolt and the diameter of
the washer shall be four times its thickness. For malleable or plate washers, the
diameter or side size of the square shall be equal to four times the diameter of the
bolt. Cap washers shall be used when the timber is in contact with earth. All nuts
shall be checked effectively after being finally tightened.

402.3.6 Pile Bents

The pile shall be driven as indicated on the Plans, with a variation of the

The piles for any one bent shall be carefully selected as to size and quality
to avoid undue bending or distortion of the sway bracing. However, care shall be
exercised in the distribution of piles of various sizes to secure uniform strength
and rigidity in the bents of any given structure. Cut offs shall be accurately made
to insure perfect hearing between caps and piles.

402.3.7 Frame Bents

Concrete pedestal for the support of framed bents shall be finished
carefully so that sills or posts will take even bearing on them. Dowels for
anchoring sills or posts shall be set the concrete is cast and shall project at least
150mm above the tops of the pedestals.

Sills shall have true and even bearing on piles or pedestals. They shall be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 170/437
 drift-bolted
possible, allwith
earthbolts extending
shall into from
be removed the piles or pedestals
contact at that
with sills so leastthere
150mm. When
will be free
5/7/2018 circulation of air around the sills. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

402.3.8 Caps

Timber caps shall be placed to obtain even and uniform bearing over the
tops of the supporting posts or piles with their ends in alignment. All caps shall be
secured by driftbolts, set approximately at the center extending at least 230mm
into the post or piles.

402.3.9 Bracing

Bracing shall be bolted through at intersections to the pile, posts, caps or

sills.

402.3.10 Stringers

Stringers shall be sized at bearings and shall be placed in position so that

knots near the edges will be in the top portions of the stringers. Outside stringers
may have butt joints but interior stringers shall be lapped to take bearing over the
full width of the floor beam or cap at each end. The lapped ends of untreated
stringers shall be securely fastened to caps by driftbolts. When stringers are two
panels in length, the joints shall be staggered. Cross-bridging between stringers
shall be neatly and accurately framed and securely toe-nailed with at least two
nails at each end. All cross-bridging members shall have full bearing at each end
against the sides of stringers. Unless otherwise specified, cross bridging shall be
placed at the center of each span.

supporting member. The planks shall be graded carefully as to thickness, and so

laid that no two adjacent planks shall vary in thickness by more than 1.6mm.

402.3.12 Laminated or Strip Floors

Planks for laminated or strip floors shall have a nominal thickness of 50mm
and shall be surfaced to a uniform width (SIE), and when so specified, to a
uniform thickness (SIS). Unless otherwise stipulated, no splicing of planks will be
allowed.

Planks shall be laid with the surfaced edge down and each plank shall be
toe-nailed to each alternative stringer. The nailing of successive planks shall be
staggered so that the spacing of nails along each stringer shall not be less than
100mm. In addition, each piece shall be nailed horizontally to adjacent pieces at
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 171/437
 450mm
adjacent centers,
pieces. and staggered
All floors both
shall be cuthorizontally
to a straightand
linevertically
along thewith nails
sides in
of the
5/7/2018 roadway. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

402.3.13 Railing and Rail Posts

Railing and rail posts shall be built as shown on the Plans and shall be
constructed in a workmanlike and substantial manner. All railing and rail post
materials shall be surfaced on four sides (S4S). All rails shall be continuous and
squarely butt-joined at the post.

402.3.14 Wheel Guards

Wheel guards shall be accurately constructed true to line and grade in

accordance with the Plans.

Unless otherwise specified, wheel guards shall be surfaced on one side

and one edge (SISIE). Wheel guards shall be laid in sections not less than
3.60mm long.

402.4 Method of Measurement

Timber structures shall be measured by the completed span and shall

include all materials, equipment and labor used to finish the structure as called for
in the Bid, Plans and Specifications.

402.5 Basis of Payment

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

402 (1) Timber Structure Span

ITEM 403 – METAL STRUCTURES

403.1 Description

This work shall consist of steel structures and the steel structure portions of
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 172/437
 composite
grades andstructures,
dimensionsconstructed in Plans
shown on the reasonably close conformity
or established with the lines,
by the Engineer.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The work will include the furnishing, fabricating, hauling, erecting, welding
and painting of structural metals called for in the Special Provision or shown on
the Plans. Structural metals will include structural steel, rivet, welding, special
and alloy steels, steel forgings and castings and iron castings. This work will also
include any incidental metal construction not otherwise provided for, all in
accordance with these Specifications, Plans and Special Provisions.

403.2 Material Requirements

Materials shall meet the requirements of Item 712, Structural Metal; Item
409, Welded Structural Steel, and Item 409, Welded Structural Steel; and Item
709, Paints.

403.3 Construction Requirements

403.3.1 Inspection

The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least fifteen (15) days notice prior
to the beginning of work at the mill or shop, so that the required inspection may be
made. The term “mill” means any rolling mill, shop or foundry where material for
the work is to be manufactured or fabricated. No material shall be rolled or
fabricated until said inspection has been provided.

The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with copies of the certified mill
reports of the structural steel, preferably before but not later than the delivery of

Inspection at the mill or shop is intended as a means of facilitating the work

and avoiding errors and it is expressly understood that it will not relieve the
Contractor from any responsibility for imperfect material or workmanship and the
necessity for replacing same. The acceptance of any material or finished
member at the mill or shop by the Engineer shall not preclude their subsequent
rejection if found defective before final acceptance of the work. Inspection of
welding will be in accordance with the provision of Section 5 of the “Standard
Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction” of the American Welding
Society.

403.3.2 Stock Material Control

When so specified in the Contract, stock material shall be segregated into

classes designated as “identified” or “unidentified” . Identified material is material
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 173/437
 which can be positively
which certified identified
mill test can as havingUnidentified
be produced. been rolledmaterial
from ashall
giveninclude
heat for
all
5/7/2018
other general stock materials. When it is proposed to use unidentified material,
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the Engineer shall be notified of such intention at least fifteen (15) days in
advance of commencing fabrication to permit sampling and testing. When so
indicated or directed, the Contractor shall select such material as he wishes to use
from stock, and place it in such position that it will be accessible for inspection and
sampling. The Contractor shall select identified material from as few heat
numbers as possible, and furnish the certified mill test reports on each of such
heat numbers. Two samples shall be taken from each heat number as directed,
one for a tension test and one for a bend test.

In the case of unidentified stock, the Engineer may, at his discretion, select
any number of random test specimens.

Each bin from which rivets or bolts are taken shall subject to random test.
Five rivets or bolts may be selected by the Engineer from each bin for test
purposes.
Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the
ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports. It shall be kept free from dirt,
grease, or other foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practicable from
corrosion.

403.3.3 Fabrication

These Specifications apply to riveted, bolted and welded construction.

The Contractor may, however, with approval of the Engineer, substitute high

Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the

ground upon platforms, skids or other supports. It shall be kept free from dirt,
grease or other foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practicable from
corrosion.

Rolled material before being laid off or worked must be straight. If

straightening is necessary, it shall be done by methods that will not injure the
metal. Sharp kinks and bends will be cause for rejection of the material.

Preparation of material shall be in accordance with AWS (American

Welding Society) D 1.1, paragraph 3.2 as modified by AASHTO Standard
Specification for Welding of Structural Steel Highway Bridges.

403.3.4 Finishing and Shaping

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 174/437
 Finished members shall be true to line and free from twists, bends and
open joints.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

1. Edge Planing

Sheared edges of plates more than 15.9 mm in thickness and

carrying calculated stresses shall be planed to a depth of 6.3 mm.
Re-entrant cuts shall be filleted before cutting.

2. Facing of Bearing Surfaces

The surface finish of bearing and based plates and other bearing
surfaces that are to come in contact with each other or with concrete
shall meet the American National Standards Institute surface
roughness requirements as defined in ANSI B-46.1-47, Surface
Roughness Waviness and Lay, Part I:

Steel slabs ANSI 2,000

Heavy plates in contact in shoes to
Be welded ANSI 1,000
Milled ends of compression
members, ANSI 500
stiffeners and fillers
Bridge rollers and rockers ANSI 250
Pins and pin holes ANSI 125
Sliding bearings ANSI 125

4. End Connection Angles

Floor beams, stringers and girders having end connection angles

shall be built to plan length back to back of connection angles with a
permissible tolerance of 0 mm to minus 1.6 mm. If end connections
are faced, the finished thickness of the angles shall not be less than
that shown on the detail drawings, but in no case less than 9.5 mm.
5. Lacing Bars

The ends of lacing bars shall be neatly rounded unless another

form is required.

6. Fabrication of Members
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 175/437
 Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, steel plates for main
members and splice plates for flanges and main tension members, not
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
secondary members, shall be cut and fabricated so that the primary
direction of rolling is parallel to the direction of the main tensile and/or
compressive stresses.

Fabricated members shall be true to line and free from twists,

bends and open joints.

7. Web Plates (Riveted or Bolted)

In girders having no cover plates and not to be encased in

concrete, the top edges of the web shall not extend above the backs
of the flange angles and shall not be more than 3.2 mm below at any
point. Any portion of the plate projection beyond the angles shall be
chipped flush with the backs of the angles. Web plates of girders
having cover plates may not be more than 12.7 mm less in width than
the distance back to back of flange angles.

Splices in webs of girders without cover plates shall be sealed on

top with red lead paste prior to painting.

At web splices, the clearance between the ends of the plates shall
not exceed 9.5 mm. The clearance at the top and bottom ends of the
web slice plates shall not exceed 6.3 mm.
8. Bent Plates

b. The radius of bends shall be such that no cracking of the plate

occurs. Minimum bend radii, measured to the concave face of the
metal, are shown in the following table:

ASTM THICKNESS, t in mm
DESIG- Up to Over 6.3 Over 12.7 Over 25.4 Over 38.1
ATION 6.3 To 12.7 To 25.4 to 38.1 to 50.08
A36 1.5t 1.5t 2t 3t 4t
A242 2t 3t 5t a--- a---
A440 2.5t 3.5t 6t a--- a---
A441 2t 3t 5t a--- a---
A529 2t 2t ---- ---- ----
Gr.42
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 2t 2t 3t 4t 5t 176/437

Gr.45 2t 2t 3t 4t ----
 Gr.50 2.5t 2.5t 4t a--- ----
5/7/2018 Gr.55 3t 3t 5t a--- ----
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Gr.60 3.5t 3.5t 6t ---- ----

Gr.65 4t 4t ---- ---- ----
A572
A588 2t 3t 5t a--- a---
b

A514 2t 2t 3t 3t

a
It is recommended that steel in this thickness range be bent hot. Hot
bending however, may result in a slight decrease in the as-rolled mechanical
properties.
b
The mechanical properties
temper-operation. of ASTMmay
Hot bending A 514 steel results
adversely affectfrom a quench-and-
these mechanical
properties. If necessary to hotbend, fabricator should discuss procedure
with steel supplier.

c. Before bending, the corners of the plate be rounded to a radius of

1.6 mm throughout that portion of the plate where the bending is to
occur.

9. Fit of Stiffeners

E d iff f id d iff i d d f

tension flanges shall be cut back as shown on the Plans. Fillers

under stiffeners shall fit within 6.3 mm at each end.

Welding will be permitted in lieu of milling or grinding if noted on

the Plans or in the Special Provisions. Brackets, clips, gussets,
stiffeners, and other detail material shall not be welded to members or
parts subjected to tensile stress unless approved by the Engineer.
10. Eyebars

Pin holes may be flame cut at least 50.8 mm smaller in diameter

than the finished pin diameter. All eyebars that are to be placed side
by side in the structure shall be securely fastened together in the
order that they will be placed on the pin and bored at both ends while
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 177/437
so clamped. Eyebars shall be packed and matchmarked for
shipment and erection. All identifying marks shall be stamped with
 shipment and erection. All identifying marks shall be stamped with
steel stencils on the edge of one head of each member after
5/7/2018
fabrication is completed so as to be visible when the bars are nested
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

in place on the structure. The eyebars shall be straight and free from
twists and the pin holes shall be accurately located on the centerline
of the bar. The inclination of any bar to the plane of the truss shall
not exceed 1.6 mm to 305 mm.

The edges of eyebars that lie between the transverse centerline of

their pin holes shall be cut simultaneously with two mechanically
operated torches abreast of each other, guided by a substantial
template, in such a manner as to prevent distortion of the plates.

11. Annealing and Stress Relieving

Structural members which are indicated in the Contract to be

annealed or normalized shall have finished machining, boring and
straightening done subsequent to heat treatment. Normalizing and
annealing (full annealing) shall be in accordance with ASTM E 44.
The temperatures shall be maintained uniformly throughout the
furnace during heating and cooling so that the temperature at no two
points on the member will differ by more than 37.8 0C at any one time.

Members of A514/A517 steels shall not be annealed or normalized

and shall be stress relieved only with the approval of the Engineer.
A record of each furnace charge shall identify the pieces in the

in accordance with the provisions of Subsection 403.3.11 when

required by the Plans, Specifications or Special Provisions governing
the Contract.

12. Tests

areWhen full by
required size
thetests of fabricated
Contract, the Plansstructural memberswill
or Specifications or state
eyebars
the
number and nature of the tests, the results to be attained and the
measurements of strength, deformation or other performances that
are to be made. The Contractor will provide suitable facilities,
material, supervision and labor necessary for making and recording
the tests. The members tested in accordance with the Contract will
be paid for in accordance with Subsection 403.3.5.1. The cost of
testing, including equipment handling, supervision labor and
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 178/437

incidentals for making the test shall be included in the contract price
 for the fabrication or fabrication and erection of structural steel,
5/7/2018 whichever is the applicable item in the Contract, unless otherwise
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

specified.

403.3.5 Pins and Rollers

Pins and rollers shall be accurately turned to the dimensions shown on the
Plans and shall be straight, smooth, and free from flaws. Pins and rollers more
228.6 mm or less in diameter may either be forged and annealed. Pins and
rollers 228.6 mm or less in diameter may either be forged and annealed or cold-
finished carbon-steel shafting.

In pins larger than 228.6 mm in diameter, a hole not less than 50.8 mm in
diameter shall be bored full length along the axis after the forging has been
allowed to cool to a temperature below the critical range under suitable conditions
to prevent injury by too rapid cooling and before being annealed.
Pin holes shall be bored true to the specified diameter, smooth and
straight, at right angles with the axis of the member and parallel with each other
unless otherwise specified. The final surface shall be produced by a finishing cut.

The distance outside to outside of holes in tension members and inside to

inside of holes in compression members shall not vary from that specified more

than 0.8 mm. Boring of holes in built-up members shall be done after the riveting
is completed.

403.3.6 Fastener Holes (Rivets and Bolts)

All holes for rivets or bolts shall be either punched or drilled. Material
forming parts or a member composed of not more than five thickness of metal
may be punched 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the rivets or bolts
whenever the thickness of the material is not greater than 19 mm for structural
steel, 15.9 unless
alloy steel, mm forsubpunching
high-strength steel
and or 12.7
reaming mm for for
is required quenched and tempered
field connections.

When there are more than five thicknesses or when any of the main
material is thicker than 19 mm for structural steel, 15.9 mm for high-strength steel,
or 12.7 mm for quenched and tempered alloy steel, all holes shall either be
subdrilled or drilled full size.

When required for field connections, all holes shall either be subpunched or
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 179/437

subdrilled (subdrilled if thickness limitation governs) 4.8 mm smaller and, after

 assembling, reamed 1.6 mm larger or drilled full size 1.6 mm larger than the
5/7/2018 nominal diameter of the rivets or bolts. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

When permitted by design criteria, enlarged or slotted holes are allowed

with high-strength bolts. For punched holes, the diameter of the die shall not
exceed the diameter of the punch by more than 1.6 mm. If any holes must be
enlarged to admit the fasteners, they shall be reamed. Holes shall be clean cut,
without torn or ragged edges. Poor matching of holes will be cause for rejection.

Reamed holes shall be cylindrical, perpendicular to the member, and not

more than 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the fasteners. Where
practicable, reamers shall be directed by mechanical means. Drilled holes shall
be 1.6 mm larger than the nominal diameter of the fasteners. Burrs on the
outside surfaces shall be removed. Poor matching of holes will be cause for
rejection. Reaming and drilling shall be done with twist drills. If required by the
Engineer, assembled parts shall be taken apart for removal of burrs caused by
drilling. Connecting parts requiring reamed or drilled holes shall be assembled
and securely held while being reamed or drilled and shall be matchmarked before
disassembling.

Unless otherwise specified, holes for all field connections and field splices
of main truss or arch members, continuous beams, towers (each face), bents,
plate girders and rigid frames shall be subpunched (or subdrilled if subdrilling is

required)
with and subsequently
Subsection 403.3.7. reamed while assembled in the shop in accordance

Templates for connections which duplicate shall be so accurately located that like
members are duplicates and require no matchmarking.

If additional subpunching and reaming is required, it will be specified in the

Special Provisions or on the Plans.

Alternately,
sub-sized holes andfor reaming
any field while
connection or splice
assembled, or designated
drilling holesabove in lieu
full-size of
while
assembled, the Contractor shall have the option to drill bolt holes full-size in
unassembled pieces and/or connections including templates for use with matching
sub-sized and reamed holes means of suitable numerically-controlled (N/C)
drilling equipment subject to the specific provisions contained in this Subsection.

If N/C drilling equipment is used, the Engineer, unless otherwise stated in

the Special Provisions or on the Plans, may require the Contractor, by means if
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 180/437

check assemblies to demonstrate that this drilling procedure consistently

 produces holes and connections meeting the requirements of conventional
5/7/2018
procedures. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a detailed outline
of the procedures that he proposes to follow in accomplishing the work from initial
drilling through check assembly, if required, to include the specific members of the
structure that may be N/C drilled, the sizes of the holes, the location of common
index and other reference points, composition of check assemblies and all other
pertinent information.

Holes drilled by N/C drilling equipment shall be drilled to appropriate size

either through individual pieces, or any combination of pieces held tightly together.

All holes punched full size, subpunched or subdrilled shall be so accurately

punched that after assembling (before any reaming is done), a cylindrical pin 3.2
mm smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the punched hole may be entered
perpendicular to the face of the member, without drifting, in at least 75 percent of
the contiguous holes in the same plane. If the requirement is not fulfilled, the
badly punched pieces will be rejected. If any hole will not pass a pin 4.8 mm
smaller in diameter than the nominal size of the punched holes, this will cause for
rejection.

When holes are reamed or drilled, 85 percent of the holes in any

continuous
mm between group shall,thickness
adjacent after reaming or drilling, show no offset greater than 0.8
of metal.

403.3.7 Shop Assembly

1. Fitting for Riveting and Bolting

Surfaces of metal in contact shall be cleaned before assembling.
The parts of a member shall be assembled, well pinned and firmly
drawn together with bolts before reaming or riveting is commenced.
Assembled
of burrs and pieces shall produced
shavings be taken apart, if necessary,
by the for the removal
reaming operation. The
member shall be free from twists, bends and other deformation.
Preparatory to the shop riveting of full-sized punched material, the
rivet holes, if necessary, shall be spear-reamed for the admission of
the rivets. The reamed holes shall not be more than 1.6 mm larger
than the nominal diameter of the rivets.

End connection angles, and similar parts shall be carefully

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 181/437

adjusted to correct positions and bolted, clamped, or otherwise firmly

 in place until riveted.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Parts not completely riveted in the shop shall be secured by

bolts, in so far as practicable, to prevent damage in shipment and
handling.

2. Shop Assembling

The field connections of main members of trusses, arches,

continuous beam spans, bents, towers (each face), plate girders and
rigid frames shall be assembled in the shop with milled ends of
compression members in full bearing, and then shall have their sub-
size holes reamed to specified size while the connections are
assembled. Assembly shall be “Full Truss or Girders Assembly”
unless “Progressive Chord Assembly” or “Special Complete
Structure Assembly” is specified in the Special Provisions or on the
Plans.

Check assemblies with Numerically-Controlled Drilled Fields

Connections shall be in accordance with the provision of 2 (f) of this
Subsection.

Each assembly, including camber, alignment, accuracy of holes

and fit ofis milled

reaming joints, shall
commenced be approved
or before by the
an N/C drilled Engineer
check before
assembly is
dismantled.

measured in assembly. When any of the other methods of shop

assembly is used, the camber diagram shall show calculated
camber.

Methods of assembly shall be described below:

a. Full of Truss orofGirders

all members each Assembly shall
truss, arch consist
rib, bent,oftower
assembling
face,
continuous beam line, plate girder or rigid frame at one time.

b. Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly shall consist of

assembling initially for each truss, arch rib, bent, tower face,
continuous beam line, plate girder, or rigid frame all members
in at least three continuous shop sections or panels but not
less than the number of panels associated with three
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 182/437

continuous chord lengths (i.e., length between field splices)

 and not less than 45.72 m in case of structures longer than
5/7/2018
45.72 m. At least one shop section or panel or as many
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
panels as are associated with a chord length shall be added
at the advancing end of the assembly before any member is
removed from the rearward end so that the assembled portion
of the structure is never less than that specified above.

c. Full Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling with

geometric angles at the joints, the full length of each chord or
each truss or open spandrel arch, or each leg of each bent or
tower, than reaming their field connection holes while the
members are assembled; and reaming the web member
connections to steel templates set at geometric (not
cambered) angular relation to the chord lines. Field
connection holes in web members shall be reamed to steel
templates. At least one end of each web member shall be
milled or shall be scribed normal to the longitudinal axis of the
member and the templates of both ends of the member shall
be accurately located from one of the milled ends or scribed
line.

d. Progressive Chord Assembly shall consist of assembling

contiguous chord members in the manner specified for Full

Chord Assembly,
Progressive Truss and in theAssembly.
or Girder number and length specified for

A Contractor shall furnished the Engineer a camber

diagram showing the camber at each panel point of each
truss, arch rib, continuous beam line, plate girder or rigid
frame. When shop assembly is Full Truss or Girder
Assembly or Special Complete Structure Assembly, the

camber
assembly.diagram shall
When any show
of the otherthe camber
methods measured
of shop in
assembly
is used, the camber diagram shall show calculated camber.

f. Check Assemblies with Numerically-Controlled Drilled Field

Connections. A check assembly shall be required for each
major structural type of each project, unless otherwise
designated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, and
shall consist of at least three contiguous shop sections or, in
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 183/437

a truss, all members in at least three contiguous panels but

 not less than the number of panels associated with three
contiguous chord lengths (i.e., length between field splices).
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Check assemblies should be based on the proposed order
erection, joints in bearings, special complex points, and
similar considerations. Such special points could be the
portals of skewed trusses, etc.

Use of either geometric angles (giving theoretically zero secondary

stresses under deadload conditions after erection) or cambered angles
(giving theoretically zero secondary stresses under no-load conditions)
should be designated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.

The check assemblies shall be preferably be the first such sections

of each major structural type to be fabricated.

No matchmaking and no shop assemblies other than the check

assemblies shall be required.

If the check assembly fails in some specific manner to demonstrate

that the required accuracy is being obtained, further check assemblies
may be required by the Engineer for which there shall be no additional
cost to the contracting authority.

403.3.8 Rivets and Riveting

The size of rivets called for on the Plans shall be the size before heating.

not be driven. When a rivet is ready for driving, it shall be free from slag, scale
and other adhering matter. Any rivet which is sealed excessively, will be
rejected.

All rivets that are loose, burned, badly formed, or otherwise defective shall
be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Any rivet whose head is

defective
and in size
shall be or whose
removed. head
Stitch is driven
rivets offloosened
that are center will
by be considered
driving defective
of adjacent rivets
shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory rivets. Caulking, recapping, or
double gunning of rivets heads will not be permitted.

Shop rivets shall be driven by direct-acting rivet machines when

practicable. Approved bevelled rivet sets shall be used for forming rivet heads on
sloping surfaces. When the use of a direct-acting rivet machine is not
practicable, pneumatic hammers of approved size shall be used.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
Pneumatic 184/437
bucking tools will be required when the size and length of the rivets warrant their
 use.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Rivets may be driven cold provided their diameter is not over 9.5 mm.

403.3.9 Bolted Connections, Unfurnished, Turned and Ribbed Bolts

1. General

Bolts under this Subsection shall conform to “Specifications for

Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Standard
Fasteners”, ASTM A 307. Specifications for high strength bolts
are covered under Subsection 403.3.10.

Bolts shall be unfinished, turned or an approved form of ribbed

bolts with hexagonal nuts and heads except that ribbed bolts shall
have button heads. Bolted connections shall be used only as
indicated by the Plans or Special Provisions. Bolts not tightened to
the proof loads shall have single self locking nuts or double nuts.
Bevel washers shall be used where bearing faces have a slope or
more than 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Bolts
shall be of such length that will extend entirely through their nuts but
not more than 6.3 mm beyond them.

Bolts shall be driven accurately into the holes without damage to

the threads. A snap shall be used to prevent damage to the heads.
The heads and nuts shall be drawn tight against the work with the

2. Unfinished Bolts

Unfinished bolts shall be furnished unless other types are

specified. The number of bolts furnished shall be 5 percent more
than the actual number shown on the Plans for each size and length.

3. Turned Bolts
The surface of the body of turned bolts shall meet the ANSI
roughness rating value of 125. Heads and nuts shall be hexagonal
with standard dimensions for bolts of the nominal size specified or
the next larger nominal size. Diameter of threads shall be equal to
the body of the bolt or the nominal diameter of the bolt specified.
Holes for turned bolts shall be carefully reamed with bolts furnished
to provide for a light driving fit. Threads shall be entirely outside of
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 185/437
the holes. A washer shall be provided under the nut.
 4. Ribbed Bolts
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The body of ribbed shall be of an approved form with continuous

longitudinal ribs. The diameter of the body measured on a circle
through the points of the ribs shall be 1.98 mm greater than the
nominal diameter specified for the bolts.

Ribbed bolts shall be furnished with round heads conforming to

ANSI B 18.5 unless otherwise specified. Nuts shall be hexagonal,
either recessed or with a washer of suitable thickness. Ribbed bolts
shall make a driving fit with the holes. The hardness of the ribs
shall be such that the ribs do not mash down enough to permit the
bolts to turn in the holes during tightening. If for any reason the bolt
twists before drawing tight, the holes shall be carefully reamed and
an oversized bolt used as a replacement. The Contractor shall
provide and supply himself with oversize bolts and nuts for this
replacement in an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the
number of ribbed bolts specified.

403.3.10 Bolted Connections (High Tensile-Strength Bolts)

1. Bolts

Bolts shall be AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325 or AASHTO M

253) tensioned to a high tension. Other fasteners which meet the

Bolts lengths shall be determined by adding the grip-length

values given in Table 403.1 to the total thickness of connected
material. The values of Table 403.1 compensate for manufacturer’s
tolerance, the use of heavy semi-finished hexagon nut and a positive
“stick-through” at the end of the bolt. For each hardened flat
washer that is used and 4 mm to the tabular value and for each

bevelled washer
adjusted to add
the next 7.9 6.3
longer mm.mm.The length determined shall be

Table 403.1 – Grip-Length Values

Bolts Size (mm) To determine required

bolt length, add grip
(mm) *
9.5 17.5
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 186/437
12.7 22.2
 19.0 25.4
22.2 28.6
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
25.4 31.7
28.6 38.1
31.7 41.3
34.9 44.4
38.1 47.6

* Does not include allowance for washer thickness

2. Bolted Parts

The slope of surface of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head
and nut shall not exceed 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the
bolt axis. Bolted parts shall fit solidly together when assembled and
shall not be separated by gaskets or any other interposed
compressible material. When assembled, all joint surfaces,
including those adjacent to the bolt head, nuts or washers, shall be
free of scale, except tight mill scale, and shall also be free of burrs,
dirt and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the
parts. Paint is permitted unconditionally in bearing-type
connections.

In friction-type connections, the Class, as defined below,

indicating the condition of the contact surfaces shall be specified on
the Plans Where no Class is specified all joint surfaces shall be

shall be a light application of manual or power brushing that

marks or scores the surface but remove relatively little of the zinc
coating. The blasting treatment shall be a light “brush-off”
treatment which will produce a dull gray appearance. However,
neither treatment should be severed enough to produce any
break or discontinuity in the zinc surface.

c. Classes E and F (blast-cleaned, zinc rich paint). Contact

surfaces shall be coated with organic or inorganic zinc rich paint
as defined in the Steel Structures Painting Council Specification
SSPC 12.00.

d. Classes G and H (blast-cleaned, metallized zinc or aluminum).

Contact surfaces shall be coated in accordance with AWS C2.2,
Recommended Practice for Metallizing with Aluminum and Zinc
for Protection of Iron and Steel, except that subsequent sealing
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 187/437

treatments, described in Section IV therein shall not be used.

5/7/2018 e. Class I (vinyl wash). Contact surfaces shall be coated in
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

accordance with the provisions of the Steel Structure Painting

Council Pretreatment Specifications SSPC PT3.

AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) Type 2 and AASHTO M

253 bolts shall not be galvanized nor shall they be used to
connect galvanized material.

3. Installation

a. Bolt Tension. Each fastener shall be tightened to provide, when

all fasteners in the joints are tight at least the minimum bolt
tension shown in Table 403.2 for the size of fastener used.

Threaded bolts shall be tightened with properly calibrated

wrenches or by the turn-of-nut method. If required, because of
bolt entering and wrench operation clearances, tightening by
either procedure may be done by turning the bolt while the nut is
prevented from rotating. Impact wrenches, if used, shall be of
adequate capacity and sufficiently supplied with air to perform
the required tightening of each bolt in approximately ten seconds.

AASHTO M 253 and galvanized AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A

325) bolts shall not be reused. Other AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A

nut method in holes which are not oversized or slotted may have
the washer omitted. Hardened washers shall be used under
both the head and nut regardless of the element turned in the
case of AASHTO M 253 bolts if the material against which it
bears has a specified yield strength less than 275.76 MPa.

Table 403.2 – Bolt Tension

Minimum Bolt Tension1, kg.
AASHTO M AASHTO M
Bolt Size, 164 253
mm (ASTM A (ASTM A
325) 420)
Bolts Bolts
12.7 5 466 6 758
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
15.9 8 709 10 569 188/437

19.0 12 882 15 821

 22.2 13 268 21 999
5/7/2018 25.4 23 360 24 312
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

28.6 25 605 36 786

31.7 32 522 45 858
34.9 38 760 55 111
38.1 47 174 66 905
1
Equals to 70 percent of specified minimum tensile strength bolts.
Where an outer face of the bolted parts has a slope of more than 1:20
with respect to a Plane normal to the bolt axis, a smooth bevelled
washer shall be used to compensate for the lack of parallel line.

c. Calibrated Wrench Tightening. When Calibrated wrenches are

used to provide the bolt tension as specified above, their setting
shall be such as to induce a bolt tension 5 to 10 percent in
excess of this value. These wrenches shall be calibrated at
least once each working day by tightening, in a device capable of
indicating actual bolt tension, not less than three typical bolts of
each diameter from the bolts to be installed. Power wrenches
shall be adjusted to installed or cut-out at the selected tension.
If manual torque wrenches are used, the torque indication
corresponding to the calibrating tension shall be noted and used
in the installation of all the tested lot. Nuts shall be turned in the
tightening direction when torque is measured. When using
calibrated wrenches to install several bolts in a single joint, the

Snug tight is defined as the tightness attained by a few impacts

of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using an ordinary
spud wrench. Following this initial operation, bolts shall be
placed in any remaining holes in the connection and brought to
snug tightness.

All bolts in the joints shall then be tightened additionally, by

the applicable amount of nut rotation specified in Table 403.3
with tightening progressing systematically from the most rigid
part of the joint to its free edges. During this operation, there
shall be no rotation of the part not turned by the wrench.

e. Lock Pin and Collar Fasteners. The installation of lock pin and
collar fasteners shall be by methods approved by the Engineer.

Table 403.3 – Nut Rotation From Snug Tight Condition 1

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 189/437
 Disposition of Outer Faces of
5/7/2018
Bolted Parts
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Bolt Length Both faces One face Both faces

measured from normal to normal to bolt sloped not
underside of faces normal to axis and other more than 1:20
head to bolt axis face sloped from normal to
extreme end of not more 1:20 bolt axis (bevel
point (bevel washer washers not
not used) used)
Up to and
including 4 0.33 turn 0.5 turn 0.66 turn
diameters
Over 4
diameters but 0.5 turn 0.66 turn 0.625 turn
not exceeding
8 diameters
Over 8
diameters but 0.66 turn 0.83 turn 1 turn
not exceeding
12 diameters2
1
Nut rotation is relative to bolt, regardless of the element (nut or bolt) being
turned. For bolts installed by ½ turn and less the tolerance should be plus
or minus 300, for bolts installed by 2/3 turn and more, the tolerance should
0
be plus or minus 45 .

4. Inspection

The Engineer will determine that the requirements of these

Specifications are not in the work. When the calibrated wrench
method of tightening is used, the Engineer shall have full opportunity
to witness the calibration tests.

The Engineer will observe the installation and tightening of the

bolts to determine that the selected tightening procedure is properly
used and will determine that all bolts are tightened.

The following inspection shall be used unless a more extensive

or different procedure is specified:

a. The Contractor shall use an inspecting wrench which may either

be a torque wrench or a power wrench that can be accurately
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 190/437

adjusted in accordance with the requirements of Subsection

 403.3.10(3) (c) above, in the presence of the Engineer.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

b. Three bolts of the same grade, size and condition as those under
inspection shall be placed individually in a calibration device
capable of indicating bolt tension. Length may be any length
representative of bolts used in the structure. There shall be a
washer under the part turned in tightening each bolt.
c. When the inspecting wrench is a torque wrench, each of the
three bolts specified above shall be tightened in the calibration
device by any convenient means to the minimum tension
specified for its size in Table 403.2. The inspecting wrench shall
then be applied to the tightened bolt and the torque necessary to
run the nut or head 5 degrees (approximately 25.4 mm at 304.8

mm radius)
average in themeasured
torque tighteningindirection shall
the tests of be determined.
three bolts shallThe
be
taken as the job inspection torque to be used in the manner
specified below.

d. When the inspecting wrench is a power wrench, it shall be

adjusted so that it will tighten each of the three bolts specified to
a tension at least 5 but not more than 10 percent greater than the
minimum tension specified for its size in Table 403.2. This
setting of wrench shall be taken as the job inspecting torque to
be used in the manner specified below.

If any nut or bolt head is turned by the application of the job

inspecting torque, this torque shall be applied to all bolts in the
connection, and all bolts whose nut or head is turned by the job
inspecting torque shall be tightened and re-inspected, or
alternatively, the fabricator or erector, at his option may re-tighten
all the bolts in the connection and then resubmit the connection
for the specified inspection.

403.3.11 Welding

Welding shall be done in accordance with the best modern practice and the
applicable requirements at AWS D1.1 except as modified by AASHTO “Standard
Specifications for Welding of Structural Steel Highway Bridges”.

403.3.12 Erection
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 191/437

1. General
 The Contractor shall provide the falsework and all tools, machinery and
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
appliances, including driftpins and fitting-up bolts, necessary for the expeditious
handling of the work and shall erect the metal work, remove the temporary
construction, and do all work necessary to complete the structure as required by
the Contract and in accordance with the Plans and these Specifications.

If shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall

dismantle the old structure on the bridge site in accordance with Item 101,
Removal of Structures and Obstructions.

403.3.13 Handling and Storing Materials

Materials to be stored shall be placed on skids above the ground. It shall

be
andkept clean Long
shored. and properly
members, drained.
such as Girders
columnsand
andbeams
chords,shall
shallbe
beplaced upright
supported on
skids placed near enough together to prevent injury from deflection. If the
Contract is for erection only, the Contractor shall check the material turned over to
him against the shipping lists and report promptly in writing any shortage or
damage discovered. He shall be responsible for the loss of any material while in
his care, or for any damage caused to it after being received by him.

403.3.14 Falsework

The false work shall be properly designed and substantially constructed

403.3.15 Method and Equipment

Before starting the work of erection, the Contractor shall inform the
Engineer fully as to the method of erection he proposes to follow, and the amount
and character of equipment he proposes to use, which shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. The approval of the Engineer shall not be considered
as relieving the Contractor of the responsibility for the safety of his method or
equipment or from carrying out the work in full accordance with the Plans and
Specifications. No work shall be done until such approval by the Engineer has
been obtained.

403.3.16 Straightening Bent Materials

The strengthening of plates, angles, other shapes and built-up members,

when permitted by the Engineer, shall be done by methods that will not produce
fracture or other injury. Distorted members shall be straightened by mechanical
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 192/437

means or, if approved by the Engineer, by the carefully planned and supervised
 application of a limited amount of localized heat, except that heat straightening of
AASHTO M 244 (ASTM A 514) or ASTM A 517 steel members shall be done only
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
under rigidly controlled procedures, each application subject to the approval of the
Engineer. In no case shall the maximum temperature of the AASHTO M 244
(ASTM A 514) or ASTM A 517 steels exceed 607.2 0C, nor shall the temperature
exceed 5100C at the weld metal or within 152.4 mm of weld metal. Heat shall not
be applied directly on weld metal. In all other steels, the temperature of the heated
area shall not exceed 648.9 0C (a dull red) as controlled by temperature indicating
crayons, liquids or bimetal thermometers.

Parts to be heat-straightened shall be substantially free of stress and from

external forces, except stresses resulting from mechanical means used in
conjunction with the application of heat.

shall beFollowing
carefully the straightening
inspected of a bend
for evidence or buckle, the surface of the metal
of fracture.

403.3.17 Assembling Steel

The parts shall be accurately assembled as shown on the working

drawings and any matchmarks shall be followed. The material shall be carefully
handled so that no parts will be bent, broken or otherwise damaged. Hammering
which will injure or distort the members shall not be done. Bearing surfaces and
surfaces to be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are
assembled. Unless erected by the cantilever methods, truss spans shall be

have one-half of the holes filled with erection bolts and cylindrical erection pins
(half bolts and half pins) before placing permanent fasteners. Splices and
connections carrying traffic during erection shall have three-fourths of the holes so
filled, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

Fitting-up bolts shall be of the same nominal diameter as the permanent

fasteners and cylindrical erection pins will be 1.6 mm larger.

403.3.18 Riveting

Pneumatic hammers shall be used for field riveting except when the use of
hand tools is permitted by the Engineer. Rivets larger than 15.9 mm in diameter
shall not be driven by hand. Cup-faced dollies, fitting the head closely to insure
good bearing, shall be used. Connections shall be accurately and securely fitted
up before the rivets are driven.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 193/437
Drifting shall be only such as to draw the parts into position and not
 sufficient to enlarge the holes or distort the metal. Unfair holes shall be reamed
or drilled. Rivets shall be heated uniformly to a “light cherry red” color and shall
5/7/2018
be driven while hot. They shall not be overheated or burned. Rivet heads shall
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

be full and symmetrical, concentric with the shank, and shall have full bearing all
around. They shall not be smaller than the heads of the shop rivets. Rivets shall
be tight and shall grip the connected parts securely together. Caulking or
recupping will not be permitted. In removing rivets, the surrounding metal shall
not be injured. If necessary, they shall be drilled out.

403.3.19 Pin Connections

Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. They shall be furnished
by the Contractor without charge. Pins shall be so driven that the members will
take full bearing on them. Pin nuts shall be screwed up tight and the threads

burred at the face of the nut with a pointed tool.

403.3.20 Setting Shoes and Bearings

Shoes and bearing shall not be placed on bridge seat bearing areas that
are improperly finished, deformed, or irregular. They shall be set level in exact
position and shall have full and even bearing. The shoes and bearing plates may
be set by either of the following methods:

1. Method 1

As alternatives to canvas and red lead, and when so noted on the

Plans or upon written permission by the Engineer, the following may
be used:

a. Sheet lead of the designated thickness

b. Preformed fabric pad composed of multiple layers of 270 g/m2

duck impregnated and bound with high quality natural rubber or
of equivalent and equally suitable materials compressed into
resilient pads of uniform thickness. The number of plies shall be
such as to produce the specified thickness, after compression
and vulcanizing. The finished pads shall withstand compression
loads perpendicular to the plane of the laminations of not less
than 7 kg/mm2 without detrimental reduction in thickness or
extension.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 194/437
c. Elastomeric bearing pads
 2. Method 2
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The shoes and bearing plates shall be properly supported and

fixed with grout. No load shall be placed on them until the grout has
set for at least 96 hours, adequate provision being made to keep the
grout well moistened during this period. The grout shall consist of
one part Portland Cement to one part of fine-grained sand.

The location of the anchor bolts in relation to the slotted holes in

expansion shoes shall correspond with the temperature at the time
of erection. The nuts on anchor bolts at the expansion ends shall
be adjusted to permit the free movement of the span.

403.3.21 Preparing Metal Surfaces for Painting

All surfaces of new structural steel which are to be painted shall be blast
cleaned unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved in
writing by the Engineer.

In repainting existing structures where partial cleaning is required, the

method of cleaning will be specified in the Special Provision.

The steel surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as outlined in the “Steel

Structures Painting Council Specifications” (SSPC) meeting one of the following

Blast cleaning shall leave all surfaces with a dense and uniform anchor
pattern of not less than one and one-half mills as measured with an approved
surface profile comparator.

Blast cleaned surfaces shall be primed or treated the same day blast
cleaning is done. If cleaned surface rust or are contaminated with foreign
material before painting is accomplished, they shall be recleaned by the
Contractor at his expense.

When paint systems No. 1 or 3 are specified, the steel surfaces shall be
blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC – SP – 10. When paint systems No. 2, 4
or 5 are specified, the steel surface shall be blast cleaned in accordance with
SSPC – SP – 6.

403.3.22 System of Paint

The paint system to be applied shall consist of one as set forth in Table
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 195/437

403.4 and as modified in the Special Provisions.

5/7/2018 403.3.23 Painting Metal Surfaces DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

1. Time of Application

The prime coat of paint or pretreatment when specified, shall be

applied as soon as possible after the surface has been cleaned and
before deterioration of the surface occurs. Any oil, grease, soil,
dust or foreign matter deposited on the surface after the surface
preparation is completed shall be removed prior to painting. In the
event the rusting occurs after completion of the surface preparation,
the surfaces shall be again cleaned.

Particular
cleaned care shall
surfaces with be taken
salts, to prevent
acids, alkali, the
or contamination of
other corrosive
chemicals before the prime coat is applied and between applications
of the remaining coats of paint. Such contaminants shall be
removed from the surface. Under these circumstances, the
pretreatments or, in the absence of a pretreatment, the prime coat of
paint shall be applied immediately after the surface has been
cleaned.

2. Storage of Paint and Thinner

Paint which has livered, gelled, or otherwise deteriorated during

storage shall not be used. Thixotropic materials which may be
stirred to attain normal consistency are satisfactory.

3. Mixing and Thinning

All ingredients in any container of paint shall be thoroughly mixed

before use and shall be agitated often enough during application to
keep the pigment in suspension.

Paint mixed in the original container shall not be transferred until

all settled pigment is incorporated into the vehicle. This does not
imply that part of the vehicle cannot be poured off temporarily to
simplify the mixing.

Mixing shall be by mechanical methods, except that hard mixing

will be permitted for container up to 19 litres in size.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 196/437
 Mixing in open containers shall be done in a well ventilated area
5/7/2018 away from sparks or flames. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Paint shall not be mixed or kept in suspension by means of an air

stream bubbling under the paint surface.

When a skin has formed in the container, the skin shall be cut
loose from the sides of the container, removed, and discarded. If
such skins are thick enough to have a practical effect on the
composition and quality of the paint, the paint shall not be used.

The paint shall be mixed in manner which will insure breaking up

of all lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and a uniform

composition.
poured off into Ifamixing is done by hand,
clean container. most of in
The pigment thethe
vehicle
paint shall be
shall be
lifted from the bottom of the container with a broad, flat paddle,
lumps shall be broken up, and the pigment thoroughly mixed with
the vehicle. The poured off vehicle shall be returned to the paint
with simultaneous stirring, or pouring repeatedly from one container
to another until the composition is uniform. The bottom of the
container shall be inspected for unmixed pigment. Tinting pastes or
colors shall be wetted with a small amount of thinner, vehicle, or
paint and thoroughly mixed. The thinned mixture shall be added to
the large container of paint and mixed until the color is uniform.

No thinner shall be added to the paint unless necessary for

proper application. In no case shall more than 0.5 litres of thinner
be added per 3.8 litres unless the paint is intentionally formulated for
greater thinning.

The type of thinner shall comply with the paint specification.

When the use of thinner is permissible, thinner shall be added to

paint during the mixing process. Painters shall not add thinner to
paint after it has been thinned to the correct consistency.

All thinning shall be done under supervision of one acquainted

with the correct amount and type of thinner to be added to the paint.

Table 403.4 – Paint System

Paint System
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 197/437
1 2 3 4 5
High Pollution or Coastal x x x
 High Pollution or Coastal x x x
Mild Climate x X
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Note:
1. Paint system shown for severe areas are satisfactorily in less
severe areas.
2. Coastal - within 304.8 m of ocean or tidal water.
High pollution-air pollution environment such as industrial areas.
Mild-other than coastal areas not in air pollution environment.

All structural steel shall be painted by one of the following

systems. The required system or choice of systems will be shown
in the Contract.

System 4 is intended for use in mild climates or to repaint existing

structures where the other systems are not compatible.

Coating Thickness Specifications Min. Dry Film

System 1 – Vinyl Paint System
Wash Prime 708.03 (b) 12.7
Intermediate Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80
3rd Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80
th
4 Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80
Finish Coat 708.03 (b) 38.10 – 50.80
T l hi k 2 2

Coating Thickness Specifications Min. Dry Film

System 3 – Inorganic Zinc-Rich Coating System
Prime Coat 708.03(d) 88.90 – 127
Epoxy Intermediate Coat 708.03 (d) 40.80 – 76.20
Finish Coat 708.03 (d) 38.10 – 50.80

Total thickness
Alternate System 177.80 – 254
Prime Coat 708.03 (d) 88.90 – 127
Wash Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (d) 12.70
Finish Coat 708.03 (d) 38.10 – 50.80
Total thickness 139.70 – 190.50
System 4 – Alkyd-Oil-Basic Lead-Chromate System
Prime Coat 708.03 (e) 38.10 – 50.80

Intermediate
Finish Coat Coat 708.03
708.03 (e)
(e) 38.10
38.10 –
– 50.80
50.80
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 198/437
Total thickness 114.30 – 152.40
 The paint system may be specified as four coats for new
structure steel in mild climate, with a minimum thickness of
5/7/2018
152.40 mm. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

System 5 – Organic Zinc-Rich Paint System

Prime Coat 708.03 (f) 38.10 – 50.80
Intermediate Coat 708.03 (f) 50.80 – 63.50
Wash Primer Tie Coat 708.03 (f) 12.70
Finish Coat 708.03 (f) 38.10 – 50.80
Total thickness 139.70 – 177.80

4. Application of Paint

a. General

The oldest of each kind of paint shall be used first. Paint shall
be applied by brushing or spraying or a combination of these
methods. Daubers or sheepskins may be used when no other
method is practicable for proper application in places of difficult
access. Dipping, roller coating, or flow coating shall be used only
when specifically authorized. All paints shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Open seams at contact surfaces of built up members which would

retain moisture shall be caulked with red lead paste, or other

cause blistering or porosity or otherwise will be detrimental to the life

of the paint.

Paint shall not be applied in fog or mist, or when it is raining or

when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. Paint shall not be
applied to wet or damp surfaces.

When paint must be applied in damp or cold weather, the steel

shall be painted under cover, or protected, or sheltered or the
surrounding air and the steel heated to a satisfactory temperature.
In such cases, the above temperature and humidity conditions shall
be met. Such steel shall remain under cover or be protected until
dry or until weather conditions permit its exposure.

Any applied paint exposed to excess humidity, rain or

condensation shall first be permitted to dry. Then damaged areas
of paint shall be removed, the surface again prepared and then
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 199/437

repainted with the same number of coats of paint of the same kind
 as the undamaged areas.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
If stripe painting is stipulated in the Special Provisions or if the
Contractor chooses to do so at his option, all edges, corners,
crevices, rivets, bolts, weld and sharp edges shall be painted with
the
coatpriming
of paint.paint by brush
Such stripingbefore the steel
shall extend forreceives first full
at least 25.4 mmprime
from
the edge. When practicable, this stripe coat shall be permitted to
dry before the prime coat is applied, otherwise the stripe coat shall
set to touch before the full prime coat is applied. However, the
stripe coat shall not be permitted to dry for a period of long enough
to allow rusting of the unprimed steel. When desired, the stripe coat
may be applied after a complete prime coat.

To the maximum extent practicable, each coat of paint shall be

applied as continuous film of uniform thickness free of pores. Any
thin spots or areas missed in the application shall be repainted and
permitted to dry before the next coat of paint is applied. Film
thickness is included in the description of paint systems. Each coat
of paint shall be in a proper state of cure or dryness before
application of the succeeding coat.

b. Brush Application

c. Spray Application of Paint

The equipment used for spray application of paint shall be

suitable for the intended purpose, shall be capable of properly
atomizing the paint to be applied and shall be equipped with suitable
pressure regulators and gages. The air caps, nozzles, and needles
shall be those recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment
for the material being sprayed. The equipment shall be kept in
satisfactory condition to permit proper paint application. In closed
or recirculating paint spray system, where gas under pressure is
used over the liquid, the gas shall be an inert, one such as nitrogen.
Traps or separators shall be provided to remove oil and water from
the compressed air. These traps or separators shall be adequate
size and shall be drained periodically during operations. The air
from the spray gun impinging against the surface shall show no
water or oil.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 200/437

Paint ingredients shall be kept properly mixed in the spray pots or

 containers during paint applications either by continuous mechanical
agitation or by intermittent agitation as frequently as necessary.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The pressure on the material in the pot and of the air at the guns
shall be adjusted for optimum spraying effectiveness. The pressure
on the material
changes in the
in elevation of pot
the shall be adjusted
gun above the pot.when
Thenecessary
atomizing for
air
pressure at the gun shall be high enough to atomize the paint
properly but not so high as to cause excessive fogging of paint,
excessive evaporation of solvent or loss by overspray.

Spray equipment shall be kept sufficiently clean so that dirt, dried

paint and other foreign material are not deposited in the paint film.
Any solvents left in the equipment shall be completely removed
before applying paint to the surface being painted.

Paint shall be applied in uniform layer, with overlapping at the

edge of the spray pattern. The spray shall be adjusted so that the
paint is deposited uniformly. During application, the gun shall be
held perpendicular to the surface and at a distance which will insure
that a wet layer of paint is deposited on the surface. The trigger of
the gun should be released at the end of each stroke.

All rums and sags shall be brushed out immediately or the paint

d. Shop Painting

Shop painting shall be done after fabrication and before any

damage to the surface occurs from weather or other exposure.
Shop contact surfaces shall not be painted unless specified.

Surfaces not to be in contact but which will be inaccessible after

assembly shall receive the full paint system specified or three shop
coats of the specified before assembly.

The areas of steel surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall

not be painted, unless otherwise shown on the Plans, the areas of
steel surfaces to be in contact with wood shall receive either the full
paint coats specified or three shop coats of the specified primer.

If paint would be harmful to a welding operator or would be

detrimental to the welding operation or the finished welds, the steel
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 201/437
shall not be painted within a suitable distance from the edges to be
 welded. Welding through inorganic zinc paint systems will not be
permitted unless approved by the Engineer.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Antiweld spatter coatings shall be removed before painting. Weld

slag and flux shall be removed by methods at least as effective as
those specified for the cleaning.
Machine-finished or similar surfaces that are not to be painted,
but do not require protections, shall be protected with a coating of
rust inhibitive petroleum, other coating which may be more suitable,
for special conditions.

Erection marks and weight marks shall be copied on area that

have been previously painted with the shop coat.

e. Field Painting

Steel structures shall be painted as soon as practicable after

erection.

Metal which has been shop coated shall be touched up with the
same type of paints as the shop coat. This touch-up shall include
cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets and all
damaged or defective paint and rusted areas. The Contractor may,

any paint, the surfaces shall be cleaned and repainted. All cement
or concrete spatter and dripping shall be removed before any paint
is applied.

Wet paint shall be protected against damage from dust or other

detrimental foreign matter to the extent practicable.

f. Drying of Painted Metal

The maximum practicable time shall be allowed for paint to dry

before recoating or exposure. No drier shall be added to paint on
the job unless specifically called for in the Specifications for the
paint. No painted metal shall be subjected to immersion before the
paint is dried through. Paint shall be protected from rain,
condensation, contamination, and freezing until dry, to the fullest
extent practicable.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 202/437
g. Handling of Painted Steel
 Painted steel shall not be handled until the paint has dried,
5/7/2018
except for necessary handling in turning for painting or stacking for
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

drying.

Paint which
touched-up with is
thedamaged in handling
same number shall and
of the coats be scraped off and
kinds of paint as
were previously applied to the steel.

Painted steel shall not be loaded for shipment or shipped until it

is dry.

Precautions shall be taken to minimize damage to paint films

resulting from stocking members.

5. Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Paints

a. Instrumentation

Dry paint film thickness shall be measured using Pull-Off (Type 1)

or Fixed Probe (Type 2) Magnetic Gages. Type 1 gages include
Tinsley, Elcometer, Microtest and Inspector models. Type 2 gage
include Elcometric, Minitector, General Electric, Verimeter and
Accuderm models.

required at each standard thickness. To guard against gage

drift during use, re-check occasionally with one or more of the
standards.

When the gage adjustment has drifted so far that large

corrections are needed, it is advisable to re-adjust closer to the
standard values and re-calibrate.

For Type 1 gages, the preferred basic standards are small,

chromeplated steel panels that may be available from the
National Bureau of Standards in coating thickness from 12.70
mm to 203.20 mm.

Plastic shims of certified thickness in the appropriate ranges

may also be used to calibrate the gages. The gage is held
firmly enough to press the shim tightly against the steel
surface. Record the calibration correction as above.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 203/437

2. Type 2 (Fixed Probe) Magnetic Gages

5/7/2018 Shims of plastic or non-magnetic metals laid on the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

appropriate steel base (at least 76.2 x 76.2 x 3.2 mm) are
suitable working standards. These gages are held firmly

enough to press
One should avoidthe shim tightly
excessive against
pressure thatthe steel
might surface.
indent the
plastic or, on a blast cleaned surface, might impress the steel
peaks into the undersurface of the plastic.

The National Bureau of Standards – standards panels shall

not be used to calibrate Type 2 gages.

c. Measurement Procedures

To determine the effect of the substrate surface condition on the

gage readings, access is required to some unpainted areas.

Repeated gage readings, even at points close together, may

differ considerably due to small surface irregularities. Three gage
readings should therefore be made for each spot measurement of
either the substrate or the paint. Move the probe a short distance
for each new gage reading. Discard any unusually high of flow
gage reading that cannot be repeated consistently. Take the

Correct the (A) and (B) gage readings or averages as

determined by calibration of the gage. Subtract the corrected
readings (A) from (B) to obtain the thickness of the paint above
the peaks of the surface.

2. Measurement with Type 2 (Fixed Probe) Gage

Place a standard shim of the expected paint thickness on

the bare substrate that is to be painted. Adjust the gage in
place on the shim so that it indicates the known thickness of
the shim.

Conform the gage setting by measuring the shim at several

other area of the bare substrate. Re-adjust the gage as
needed to obtain an average setting representative of the
substrate.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
With the gage adjustment as above, measure the dry paint 204/437

film at three points. The gage readings indicate the paint film
 thickness at the three points. The gage readings indicate the
5/7/2018 paint thickness above the peaks of the surface profile.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Re-check the gage setting at frequent intervals during a long

series of measurements.
measurements spaced evenly overMake each
five section
separateof spot
the
structure 9.29 square metres in area, or of other area as may
be specified. The average of five spot measurements for each
such section shall not be less than the specified thickness. No
single spot measurement (average of three readings) in any
section shall be less than 80% of the specified thickness.

Since paint thickness is usually specified (or implied) as a

minimum, greater thickness that does not cause defects of
appearance or functions such as mud cracking, wrinkling, etc.,
is permitted unless otherwise specified.

d. Special Notes

All of the above magnetic, if properly adjusted and in good

condition, are inherently accurate to within +15% of the true
thickness of the coating.

contact of the probe with the paint and also to avoid adhesion of the
magnet. The accuracy of the measurement will be affected if the
coating is tacky or excessively soft.

The magnetic gages are sensitive to geometrical discontinuities

of the steel, as at holes, corners or edges. The sensitivity to edge
effects and discontinuities varies from gage to gage.
Measurements closer than 25.4 mm from the discontinuity may not
be valid unless the gage is calibrated specifically for that location.

Magnetic gage readings also may be affected by proximity to

another mass of steel close to the body of the gage, by surface
curvature and presence of other magnetic fields.

All of the magnets or probe must be held perpendicular to the

painted surface to produce valid measurements.
403.3.24 Clean-up
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 205/437
 Upon completion and before final acceptance, the Contractor shall remove
5/7/2018 all falsework, falsework piling down to at least 609.6 mm below the finished
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

ground line, excavated or unused materials, rubbish and temporary buildings. He

shall replace or renew any fences damaged and restored in an acceptable

manner
during theall prosecution
property, both public
of the workand private,
and which the
shall leave maywork
have been
site and damaged
adjacent
highway in a neat and presentable condition, satisfactory to the Engineer. All
excavated material or falsework placed in the stream channel during construction
shall be removed by the Contractor before final acceptance.

403.4 Method of Measurement

403.4.1 Unit Basis

The quantity of structural steel to be paid for shall be the number of kilos
complete in place and accepted. For the purpose of measurement for payment
components fabricated from metals listed in (1) below, such as casting, alloy
steels, steel plates, anchor bolts and nuts, shoes, rockers, rollers, pins and nuts,
expansion dams, roadway drains and souppers, welds metal, bolts embedded in
concrete, cradles and brackets, posts, conduits and ducts, and structural shapes
for expansion joints and pier protection will be considered as structural steel.

Unless otherwise provided, the mass of metal paid for shall be computed

Iron, malleable 7528.7

Lead, sheet 11229
Steel, cast or rolled, including alloy
copper bearing and stainless 7849
Zinc 7208.3

2. Shapes, Plates Railing and Flooring

The mass of steel shapes and plates shall be computed on the basis of
their nominal mass and dimensions as shown on the approved shop
drawings, deducting for copes, cuts and open holes, exclusive of rivets
holes. The mass of all plates shall be computed on the basis of nominal
dimensions with no additional for overrun.

The mass of railing shall be included as structural steel unless the Bill of
Quantities contains as pay item for bridge railing under Item 401, Railings.

The mass of steel grid flooring shall be computed separately.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 206/437
 3. Casting
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The mass of casting shall be computed from the dimensions shown on

the approved drawings, deducting for open holes. To this mass will be
added 5 percent allowable for fillets and overruns. Scale mass may be
substituted for computed mass in the case of castings of small complex
parts for which accurate computations of mass would be difficult.

4. Miscellaneous

The mass of erection bolts, shop and field paint, galvanizing the boxes,
crates and other containers used for shipping, together with sills, struts,
and rods used for supporting members during the transportation, bridge
hardware as defined in Subsection 402.2.2 excluding steel plates and
bearings, connectors used for joining timber members, nails, spikes and
bolts, except anchor bolts will be excluded.

5. Rivets Heads

The mass of all rivet heads, both files and shop, will be assumed as
follows:

Diameter of rivet kg per 100 heads

6. High-Strength Bolts

High-strength steel bolts shall be considered for purpose of payment,

the same as rivets of the same diameter, with the mass of the bolt heads
and nuts the same as the corresponding rivet heads.

7. Welds

The mass of shop and field fillet welds shall be assumed as follows:

Size of Weld kg per linear metre

(mm)
6.3 0.984
7.9 1.213
9.5 1.771
12.7 2.690
5.9
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 3.936 207/437

19.0 5.379
 22.2 7.314
5/7/2018 25.4 9.774
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The mass of other welds will be computed on the basis of the theoretical
volume from dimensions of the welds, with an addition of 50 mass percent
as an allowance for overrun.

8. Other Items

The quantities of other Contract Items which enter into the completed
and accepted structure shall be measured for payment in the manner
prescribed for the Items involved.

403.4.2 Lump Sum Basis

Lump sum will be the basis of payment unless noted otherwise in the
bidding documents. No measurements of quantities will be made except as
provided in Subsection 403.5.1 (4).

403.5 Basis of Payment

403.5.1 Structural Steel

and incidentals necessary to complete the work, except as provided in

Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4.

2. Furnished and Fabricated

When a quantity and unit price for “Structural Steel, furnished and
fabricated” are shown in the Bill of Quantities, the quantity, determined
as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per kilogram
which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing,
galvanizing, fabricating, radiographing, magnet particle inspection, shop
painting and delivering the structural steel and other metal free of
charges at the place designated in the Special Provisions and for all
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work,
save erection and except as provided in Subsection 403.5.2, 403.5.3
and 403.5.4.

3. Erected
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 208/437

When a quantity and unit price for “Structural Steel Erected” are
 shown in the Bill of Quantities, the quantity, determined as provided
above, will be paid for at the said contract unit price per kilogram which
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
price and payment shall be full compensation for unloading all the
structural steel and other metal, payment of any demurrage charges,

transporting to the
radiographing, bridgeready
complete site, erecting, magneticfurnishing
for use including particle inspection and
and applying
the field paint including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work, save furnishing and fabrication, and
except as provided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4.

4. Lump Sum

When the Bill of Quantities calls for lump sum price for “Structural
Steel, furnished, fabricated and erected”, the Item will be paid for at the
contract lump sum price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing, fabricating and erecting material and for all work herein
before prescribed in connection therewith, including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work,
except as provided in Subsections 403.5.2, 403.5.3 and 403.5.4.

The estimate of the mass of structural steel shown on the Plans is

approximate only and no guarantee is made that it is the correct mass
to be furnished. No adjustment in the contract price will be made if the

dividing the contract lump sum amount by the estimate of mass

shown on the Plans. The adjusted contract lump sum payment
shall be the contract lump sum plus or minus the value of the steel
involved in the change, and no additional compensation shall be
made on account of said change.

b. Full-size members which are tested in accordance with the

Specifications when such tests are required by the Contract, shall be
paid for at the same rate as for comparable members in the
structure. Members which fail to meet the Contract requirements,
and members rejected as a result of test shall not be paid for.

403.5.2 Material Considered as Structural Steel

For the purpose of Subsection 403.5.1 and unless otherwise shown on the
Plans, castings, forgings, special alloy steels and steel plates, wrought iron, and
structural shapes of expansion joints and pier protection shall be considered as
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 209/437
structural steel except that when quantities and unit price for certain alloy steels,
 forgings, castings or other specific categories of metal are called for in the Bill of
Quantities, the mass of such selected material, determined as provided above,
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
shall be paid for at the respective contract unit price per kilogram for “Structural
Steel (Alloy steel, forgings, castings, and/or other category), furnished and

fabricated, andnamed
fabricated” as erected” or Bill
in the “Structural Steel (Subsection 403.4.1), furnished and
of Quantities.

403.5.3 Other Items

The quantities of all other Contract Items which enter into the completed
and accepted structure shall be paid for at the contract unit prices for the several
Pay Items as prescribed for the Items involved.

403.5.4 Payment as Reinforcing Steel

When the Bill of Quantities does not contain a pay item for structural steel,
the quantities of metal drains, scuppers, conduits, ducts and structural shapes for
expansion joints and pier protection, measured as provided above will be paid for
as Reinforcing Steel under Item 404.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

403 (4) Structural Steel,

furnished, fabricated kilogram
403 (5) Structural Steel erected kilogram
403 (6) Structural Steel erected kilogram
403 (7) Structural Steel,
furnished, fabricated kilogram
and erected

Where separate payment is to be made for certain metals or for certain

particular components, other than under the general provision for structural steel,
designation of those particular cases shall be inserted in the spaces provided in
the pay names for Item 403 (2), 403 (4) or 403 (6), as the case may be.

ITEM 404 – REINFORCING STEEL

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 210/437

404.1 Description
 This Item shall consist of furnishing, bending, fabricating and placing of
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
steel reinforcement of the type, size, shape and grade required in accordance with
this Specification and in conformity with the requirements shown on the Plans or
as directed by the Engineer.
404.2 Material Requirements

Reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of item 710, Reinforcing

Steel and Wire Rope.

4.4.3 Construction Requirements

404.3.1 Order Lists

Before materials are ordered, all order lists and bending diagrams shall be
furnished by the Contractor, for approval of the Engineer. The approval of order
lists and bending diagrams by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor
of responsibility for the correctness of such lists and diagrams. Any expense
incident to the revisions of materials furnished in accordance with such lists and
diagrams to make them comply with the Plans shall be borne by the Contractor.

404.3.2 Protection of Material

cause for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross sectional area and
tensile properties of a hand wire brushed specimen meets the physical
requirements for the size and grade of steel specified.

404.3.3 Bending

All reinforcing bars requiring bending shall be cold-bent to the shapes

shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer. Bars shall be bent around a
circular pin having the following diameters (D) in relation to the diameter of the bar
(d):

Nominal diameter, d, mm Pin diameter (D)

10 to 20 6d
25 to 28 8d
32 and greater 10d

Bends and hooks in stirrups or ties may be bent to the diameter of the
principal bar enclosed therein.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 211/437
 404.3.4 Placing and Fastening

5/7/2018
All steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the position shown on
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the Plans or required by the Engineer and firmly held there during the placing and

setting ofisthe
spacing concrete.
less Bars shall
than 300mm be tied
in each at all intersections
directions, except
in which case, where
alternate
intersections shall be tied. Ties shall be fastened on the inside.

Distance from the forms shall be maintained by means of stays, blocks,

ties, hangers, or other approved supports, so that it does not vary from the
position indicated on the Plans by more than 6mm. Blocks for holding
reinforcement from contact with the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of
approved shapes and dimensions. Layers of bars shall be separated by precast
mortar blocks or by other equally suitable devices. The use of pebbles, pieces of
broken stone or brick, metal pipe and wooden blocks shall not be permitted.
Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or required by the Engineer, the minimum
distance between bars shall be 40mm. Reinforcement in any member shall be
placed and then inspected and approved by the Engineer before the placing of
concrete begins. Concrete placed in violation of this provision may be rejected
and removal may be required. If fabric reinforcement is shipped in rolls, it shall be
straightened before being placed. Bundled bars shall be tied together at not more
than 1.8m intervals.

Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, bars shall be lapped a minimum

distance of:

Splice Type Grade 40 Grade 60 But not less

min. lap min. lap than
Tension 24 bar dia 36 bar dia 300 mm
Compression 20 bar dia 24 bar dia 300 mm

In lapped splices, the bars shall be placed in contact and wired together.
Lapped splices will not be permitted at locations where the concrete section is
insufficient to provide minimum clear distance of one and one-third the maximum
size of coarse aggregate between the splice and the nearest adjacent bar.
Welding of reinforcing steel shall be done only if detailed on the Plans or if
authorized by the Engineer in writing. Spiral reinforcement shall be spliced by
lapping at least one and a half turns or by butt welding unless otherwise shown on
the Plans.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 212/437
404.3.6 Lapping of Bar Mat
 Sheets of mesh or bar mat reinforcement shall overlap each other
5/7/2018 sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and shall be securely fastened at the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

ends and edges. The overlap shall not be less than one mesh in width.

404.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity of reinforcing steel to be paid for will be the final quantity
placed and accepted in the completed structure.

No allowance will be made for tie-wires, separators, wire chairs and other
material used in fastening the reinforcing steel in place. If bars are substituted
upon the Contractor’s request and approved by the Engineer and as a result
thereof more steel is used than specified, only the mass specified shall be
measured for payment.

No measurement or payment will be made for splices added by the

Contractor unless directed or approved by the Engineer.

When there is no item for reinforcing steel in the Bill of Quantities, costs will
be considered as incidental to the other items in the Bill of Quantities.

404.5 Basis of Payment

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

404 Reinforcing Steel Kilogram

ITEM 405 – STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

405.1 Description

405.1.1 Scope

This Item shall consist of furnishing, bending, placing and finishing concrete
in all structures except pavements in accordance with this Specification and
conforming to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on the Plans. Concrete
shall consist of a mixture of Portland Cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,
admixture when specified, and water mixed in the proportions specified or
approved by the Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 213/437
 405.1.2 Classes and Uses of Concrete
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Five classes of concrete are provided for in this Item, namely: A, B, C, P

and Seal. Each class shall be used in that part of the structure as called for on
the Plans.

The classes of concrete will generally be used as follows:

Class A – All superstructures and heavily reinforced substructures. The

important parts of the structure included are slabs, beams, girders, columns, arch
ribs, box culverts, reinforced abutments, retaining walls, and reinforced footings.

Class B – Footings, pedestals, massive pier shafts, pipe bedding, and

gravity walls, unreinforced or with only a small amount of reinforcement.

Class C – Thin reinforced sections, railings, precast R.C. piles and cribbing
and for filler in steel grid floors.

Class P – Prestressed concrete structures and members.

Seal – Concrete deposited in water.

405.2.2 Fine Aggregate

It shall conform to all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.2.

405.2.3 Coarse Aggregate

It shall conform all the requirements of Subsection 311.2.3 except that

gradation shall conform to Table 405.1.
Table 405.1 – Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing
Standard Alternate Class Class Class Class Class
Mm US Standard A B C P Seal

63 2-1/2” 100
50 2” 100 95 – 100
37.5
25 1-1/2”
1” 95 –- 100 35 –- 70 100 95100
– 100
19.0 ¾” 35 – 70 - 100 95 – 100 -
12.5 ½” - 10 – 30 90 – 100 - 25 – 60
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 214/437
9.5 3/8” 10 – 30 - 40 – 70 20 – 55 -
4.75 No.4 0-5 0-5 0 – 15* 0 – 10* 0 – 10*
5/7/2018 * The measured cement content shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 2 mass
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

percent of the design cement content.

405.2.4 Water

It shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.4

405.2.5 Reinforcing Steel

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire
Rope.

405.2.6 Admixtures

Admixtures shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.7

405.2.7 Curing Materials

Curing materials shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 311.2.8.

405.2.8 Expansion Joint Materials

405.2.9 Elastomeric Compression Joint Seals

These shall conform to AASHTO M 220.

405.2.10 Elastomeric Bearing Pads

These shall conform to AASHTO M 251 or Item 412 – Elastomeric Bearing

Pads.

405.2.11 Storage of Cement and Aggregates

Storage of cement and aggregates shall conform to all the requirements of

Subsection 311.2.10.

405.3 Sampling and Testing of Structural Concrete

As work progresses, at least one (1) sample consisting of three (3)
concrete cylinder test specimens, 150 x 300mm (6 x 12 inches), shall be taken
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 215/437

from each seventy five (75) cubic meters of each class of concrete or fraction
 thereof placed each day.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Compliance with the requirements of this Section shall be determined in

accordance with the following standard methods of AASHTO:

Sampling of fresh concrete T 141

Weight per cubic metre and air content (gravi-
Metric) of concrete T 121
Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregates T 27
Slump of Portland Cement Concrete T 119
Specific gravity and absorption of fine aggregate T 84

Tests for strength shall be made in accordance with the following:

Making and curing concrete compressive and

flexural tests specimens in the field T 23
Compressive strength of molded concrete
Cylinders T 22

405.4 Production Requirements

405.4.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete

designed or approved by the Engineer. A change in the source of materials

during the progress of work may necessitate a new mix design.

The strength requirements for each class of concrete shall be as specified

in Table 405.2.

Table 405.2 - Composition and Strength of Concrete for Use in Structures

Minimum Maximum Consistency Designated Minimum

Class Cement Water/ Range in Size of Coarse Compressive
Of Content Cement Slump Aggregate Strength of
3
Concre Per m Ratio 150x300mm
te Square Opening Concrete
kg kg/kg mm (inch) Std. mm Cylinder
(bag**) Specimen at
28 days,
2
MN/m (psi)

A 360 0.53 50 – 100 37.5 – 4.75 20.7

(9 bags) (2 – 4) (1-1/2” – No. 4) (3000)
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 216/437
B 320 0.58 50 – 100 50 – 4.75 16.5
(8 bags) (2 – 4) (2” – No. 4) (2400)
5/7/2018
C 380 0.55 50 – 100 12.5 – 4.75 20.7
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

(9.5 bags) (2 – 4) (1/2” – No. 4) (3000)

P 440 0.49 100 max. 19.0 – 4.75 37.7

(11 bags) (4 max.) (3/4” – No. 4) (5000)

Seal 380 0.58 100 – 200 25 – 4.75 20.7

(9.5 bags) (4 - 8) (1” – No. 4) (3000)

* The measured cement content shall be within plus or minus 2 mass

percent of the design cement content.
** Based on 40 kg/bag

405.4.2 Consistency

Concrete shall have a consistency such that it will be workable in the

required position. It shall be of such a consistency that it will flow around
reinforcing steel but individual particles of the coarse aggregate when isolated
shall show a coating of mortar containing its proportionate amount of sand. The
consistency of concrete shall be gauged by the ability of the equipment to properly
place it and not by the difficulty in mixing and transporting. The quantity of mixing

1. Portland Cement

Either sacked or bulk cement may be used. No fraction of a sack of

cement shall be used in a batch of concrete unless the cement is
weighed. All bulk cement shall be weighed on an approved weighing
device. The bulk cement weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and
vented to preclude dusting operation. The discharge chute shall not be
suspended from the weighing hopper and shall be so arranged that
cement will neither be lodged in it nor leak from it.

Accuracy of batching shall be within plus (+) or minus (-) 1 mass

percent.

2. Water

Water ofmay
accuracy be measured
measuring either
the water shall by
be volume or by of
within a range weight.
error of The
not
more than 1 percent.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 217/437

3. Aggregates
 Stockpiling of aggregates shall be in accordance with Subsection
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
311.2.10. All aggregates whether produced or handled by hydraulic
methods or washed, shall be stockpiled or binned for draining for at
least 12 hours prior to batching. Rail shipment requiring more than12
hours will be accepted as adequate binning only if the car bodies permit
free drainage. If the aggregates contain high or non-uniform moisture
content, storage or stockpile period in excess of 12 hours may be
required by the Engineer.

Batching shall be conducted as to result in a 2 mass percent

maximum tolerance for the required materials.

4. Bins and Scales

The batching plant shall include separate bins for bulk cement, fine
aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate, a weighing hopper,
and scales capable of determining accurately the mass of each
component of the batch.

Scales shall be accurate to one-half (0.5) percent throughout the

range used.

such contact. Sacked cement may be transported on top of the

aggregates.

Batches shall be delivered to the mixer separate and intact. Each

batch shall be dumped cleanly into the mixer without loss, and, when
more than one batch is carried on the truck, without spilling of material
from one batch compartment into another.

6. Admixtures

The Contractor shall follow an approved procedure for adding the

specified amount of admixture to each batch and will be responsible for
its uniform operation during the progress of the work. He shall provide
separate scales for the admixtures which are to be proportioned by
weight, and accurate measures for those to be proportioned by volume.

Admixtures
minus three shall be measured into the mixer with an accuracy of plus or
(3) percent.

The use of Calcium Chloride as an admixture will not be permitted.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 218/437
 405.4.4 Mixing and Delivery

5/7/2018
Concrete may be mixed at the site of construction, at a central point or by a
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

combination of central point and truck mixing or by a combination of central point

mixing and truck agitating. Mixing and delivery of concrete shall be in accordance
with the appropriate requirements of AASHTO M 157 except as modified in
the following paragraphs of this section, for truck mixing or a combination of
central point and truck mixing or truck agitating. Delivery of concrete shall be
regulated so that placing is at a continuous rate unless delayed by the placing
operations. The intervals between delivery of batches shall not be so great as to
allow the concrete inplace to harden partially, and in no case shall such an interval
exceed 30 minutes.

In exceptional cases and when volumetric measurements are authorized,

for small project requiring less than 75 cu.m. per day of pouring, the weight
proportions shall be converted to equivalent volumetric proportions. In such
cases, suitable allowance shall be made for variations in the moisture condition of
the aggregates, including the bulking effect in the fine aggregate. Batching and
mixing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 685, Section 6 through 9.

Concrete mixing, by chute is allowed provided that a weighing scales for

determining the batch weight will be used.

spillage of concrete takes place. The batch shall be so charge into the drum that
a portion of the water shall enter in advance of the cement and aggregates. The
flow of water shall be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the
first 15 seconds of the mixing period. Mixing time shall be measured from the
time all materials, except water, are in the drum. Mixing time shall not be less
than 60 seconds for mixers having a capacity of 1.5m 3 or less. For mixers having
a capacity greater than 1.5m3, the mixing time shall not be less than 90 seconds.
If timing starts, the instant the skip reaches its maximum raised position, 4
seconds shall be added to the specified mixing time. Mixing time ends when the
discharge chute opens.

The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed as shown on the

manufacturer’s name plate on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than the
specified time shall be discarded and disposed off by the Contractor at his own
expenses.

The timing device on stationary mixers shall be equipped with a bell or

other suitable warning device adjusted to give a clearly audible signal each time
the lock is released. In case of failure of the timing device, the Contractor will be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 219/437
permitted to continue operations while it is being repaired, provided he furnishes
an approved timepiece equipped with minute and second hands. If the timing
 an approved timepiece equipped with minute and second hands. If the timing
device is not placed in good working order within 24 hours, further use of the
5/7/2018
mixer will be prohibited until repairs are made. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Retempering concrete will not be permitted. Admixtures for increasing the

workability, for retarding the set, or for accelerating the set or improving the
pumping characteristics of the concrete will be permitted only when specifically
provided for in the Contract, or authorized in writing by the Engineer.

1. Mixing Concrete: General

Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed in a mixer of an approved size

and type that will insure a uniform distribution of the materials
throughout the mass.

All concrete shall be mixed in mechanically operated mixers. Mixing

plant and equipment for transporting and placing concrete shall be
arranged with an ample auxiliary installation to provide a minimum
supply of concrete in case of breakdown of machinery or in case the
normal supply of concrete is disrupted. The auxiliary supply of concrete
shall be sufficient to complete the casting of a section up to a
construction joint that will meet the approval of the Engineer.

Concrete mixers shall be equipped with adequate water storage and

a device of accurately measuring and automatically controlling the
amount of water used.

Materials shall be measured by weighing. The apparatus provided

for weighing the aggregates and cement shall be suitably designed and
constructed for this purpose. The accuracy of all weighing devices
except that for water shall be such that successive quantities can be
measured to within one percent of the desired amounts. The water
measuring device shall be accurate to plus or minus 0.5 mass percent.
All measuring devices shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Scales and measuring devices shall be tested at the expense of the
Contractor as frequently as the Engineer may deem necessary to insure
their accuracy.

Weighing
movement equipment
of other shall
operating be insulated
equipment against
in the plant. vibration
When or
the entire
plant is running, the scale reading at cut-off shall not vary from the
weight designated by the Engineer more than one mass percent for
cement, 1-1/2 mass percent for any size of aggregate, or one (1) mass
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 220/437

percent for the total aggregate in any batch.

5/7/2018 2. Mixing Concrete at Site DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Concrete mixers may be of the revolving drum or the revolving blade

type and the mixing drum or blades shall be operated uniformly at the
mixing speed recommended by the manufacturer. The pick-up and
throw-over blades of mixers shall be restored or replaced when any part
or section is worn 20mm or more below the original height of the
manufacturer’s design. Mixers and agitators which have an
accumulation of hard concrete or mortar shall not be used.

When bulk cement is used and volume of the batch is 0.5m 3 or

more, the scale and weigh hopper for Portland Cement shall be
separate and distinct from the aggregate hopper or hoppers. The
discharge mechanism of the bulk cement weigh hopper shall be
interlocked against opening before the full amount of cement is in the
hopper. The discharging mechanism shall also be interlocked against
opening when the amount of cement in the hopper is underweight by
more than one (1) mass percent or overweight by more than 3 mass
percent of the amount specified.

Cement shall be batched and charged into the mixer so that it will
not result in loss of cement due to the effect of wind, or in accumulation
of cement on surface of conveyors or hoppers, or in other conditions
which reduce or vary the required quantity of cement in the concrete
mixture.

The entire content of a batch mixer shall be removed from the drum
before materials for a succeeding batch are placed therein. The
materials composing a batch except water shall be deposited
simultaneously into the mixer.

All concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than 1-1/2
minutes after all materials, including water, are in the mixer. During the
period of mixing, the mixer shall operate at the speed for which it has

been designed.
Mixers shall be operated with an automatic timing device that can be
locked by the Engineer. The time device and discharge mechanics
shall be so interlocked that during normal operation no part of the batch
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 221/437

will be charged until the specified mixing time has elapsed.

5/7/2018 The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer shall contain
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

a sufficient excess of cement, sand, and water to coat inside of the

drum without reducing the required mortar content of the mix. When
mixing is to cease for a period of one hour or more, the mixer shall be
thoroughly cleaned.

3. Mixing Concrete at Central Plant

Mixing at central plant shall conform to the requirements for mixing

at the site.

4. Mixing Concrete in Truck

Truck mixers, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, shall be

of the revolving drum type, water-tight, and so constructed that the
concrete can be mixed to insure a uniform distribution of materials
throughout the mass. All solid materials for the concrete shall be
accurately measured and charged into the drum at the proportioning
plant.
equippedExcept
with a as subsequently
device provided,
by which the theof truck
quantity water mixer
addedshall be
can be

directed be continued for not less than 100 revolutions after all
ingredients, including water, are in the drum. The mixing speed shall
not be less than 4 rpm, nor more than 6 rpm.

Mixing shall begin within 30 minutes after the cement has been
added either to the water or aggregate, but when cement is charged
into a mixer drum containing water or surface wet aggregate and when
o
the temperature is above 32 C, this limit shall be reduced to 15 minutes.
The limitation in time between the introduction of the cement to the
aggregate and the beginning of the mixing may be waived when, in the
judgement of the Engineer, the aggregate is sufficiently free from
moisture, so that there will be no harmful effects on the cement.

When a truck mixer is used for transportation, the mixing time

specified in Subsection 405.4.4 (3) at a stationary mixer may be

reducedtime
mixing to 30 seconds
in the and the
truck mixer mixing
shall be ascompleted
specified in
foratruck
truckmixing.
mixer. The

5. Transporting Mixed Concrete

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 222/437

Mixed concrete may only be transported to the delivery point in truck

 agitators or truck mixers operating at the speed designated by the
5/7/2018
manufacturers of the equipment as agitating speed, or in non-agitating
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

hauling equipment, provided the consistency and workability of the

mixed concrete upon discharge at the delivery point is suitable point for
adequate placement and consolidation in place.

Truck agitators shall be loaded not to exceed the manufacturer’s

guaranteed capacity. They shall maintain the mixed concrete in a
thoroughly mixed and uniform mass during hauling.

No additional mixing water shall be incorporated into the concrete

during hauling or after arrival at the delivery point.
The rate of discharge of mixed concrete from truck mixers or
agitators shall be controlled by the speed of rotation of the drum in the
discharge direction with the discharge gate fully open.

When a truck mixer or agitator is used for transporting concrete to

the delivery point, discharge shall be completed within one hour, or
before
after the250 revolutions
introduction of the
of the drumtoor
cement theblades, whichever
aggregates. Undercomes first,
conditions

delivery of concrete during concreting operations shall be such as to

provide for the proper handling, placing and finishing of the concrete.
The rate shall be such that the interval between batches shall not
exceed 20 minutes. The methods of delivering and handling the
concrete shall be such as will facilitate placing of the minimum handling.

405.5 Method of Measurement

The quantity of structural concrete to be paid for will be the final quantity
placed and accepted in the completed structure. No deduction will be made for
the volume occupied by pipe less than 100mm (4 inches) in diameter or by
reinforcing steel, anchors, conduits, weep holes or expansion joint materials.

405.6 Basis of Payment

The
paid for at accepted quantities,
the contract measured
unit price as of
for each prescribed
the Pay in Section
Item listed405.5,
belowshall
that be
is
included in the Bill of Quantities.

Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, placing and

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 223/437

finishing concrete including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary
 to complete the work prescribed in the item.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement

Number
405 (1) Structural Concrete, Class A Cubic Meter
405 (2) Structural Concrete, Class B Cubic Meter
405 (3) Structural Concrete, Class C Cubic Meter
405 (4) Structural Concrete, Class P Cubic Meter
405 (5) Seal Concrete Cubic Meter

ITEM 406 – PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

406.1 Description

This Item shall consist of prestressed concrete structures and the

406.2 Material Requirements

406.2.1 Concrete and Grout

The materials for concrete and grout shall conform to Item 405, Structural
Concrete. The concrete shall be Class P as shown in Table 405.2, unless
otherwise shown on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions. The
proportions of the grout will be as set out in Subsection 406.3.11, Bonding Steel.

406.2.2 Prestressing Reinforcing Steel

It shall conform to Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope.

406.2.3 Prestressing Steel

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire
Rope.

All prestressing steel shall be protected against physical damage and rust
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 224/437

or other results of corrosion at all times from manufacture to grouting.

 Prestressing steel that has sustained physical damage at any time shall be
rejected.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

406.2.4 Packaging, Storing and Shipping

Prestressing steel shall be packaged in containers or other shipping forms

for the protection of the steel against physical damage and corrosion during
shipping and storage. A corrosion inhibitor which prevents rust or other results of
corrosion shall be placed in the package or form, or when permitted by the
Engineer, may be applied directly to the steel. The corrosion inhibitor shall have
no deleterious effect on the steel or concrete or bond strength of concrete to steel.
Packaging or forms damaged from any cause shall be immediately replaced or
restored to original condition.

This shipping package or form shall be clearly marked with a statement that
the package contains high-strength prestressing steel and the care to be used in
handling, and the type, kind and amount of corrosion inhibitor used, including the
date when placed, safety orders and instructions for use.

406.2.5 Elastomeric Bearing Pads

406.2.7 Enclosures

Duct enclosures for prestressing steel shall be galvanized ferrous metal or

of a type approved by the Engineer, mortartight and accurately placed at the
locations shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer. Transition couplings
connecting said ducts to anchoring devices need not be galvanized.

406.2.8 Sampling and Testing

All wire, strand, anchorage assemblies or bars to be shipped to the site
shall be assigned a lot number and tagged for identification purposes.

All samples submitted shall be representative of the lot to be furnished and

in the case of wire or strand, shall be taken from the same master roll.

All of the materials specified for testing shall be furnished free of cost and
shall be delivered in time for tests to be made well in advance of anticipated time
of use.

The Contractor shall furnish for testing the following samples selected from
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 225/437

each lot, if ordered by the Engineer. The selection of samples will be made at the
 manufacturer s plant by the Engineer or his representative.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
1. For pretensioning work-samples at least 2 m long shall be furnished of
each size of wire or strand proposed.

2. For post-tensioning work-samples of the following lengths shall be

furnished of each size of wire proposed.

a. For wire requiring heading, 2 m.

b. For wires not requiring heading, sufficient length to make up one
parallel-lay cable of 1.50 m long consisting of the same number
of wires as the cable to be furnished.
c. For strand to be furnished with fittings, 1.50 m between near
ends of fittings.
d. For bars to be furnished with thread ends and nuts, 1.5 m
between threads at ends.

3. Anchorage assemblies – If anchorage assemblies are not attached to

reinforcement samples, two (2) anchorage assemblies shall be

furnished,
used. completed with distribution plates of each size and type to be

406.3 Construction Requirements

406.3.1 General

Prestressed concrete structural members shall be constructed in

accordance with the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete and
Reinforcing Steel shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of Item
404, Reinforcing Steel, subject to the modifications and amendments contained
herein.

406.3.2 Prestressing Method

The method of prestressing to be used shall be optional with the Contractor

subject to all requirements hereinafter specified.

The Contractor, prior to casting any members to be prestressed, shall

submit to the Engineer for approval complete details of the methods, materials
and equipment he proposes to use in the prestressing operations. Such details
shall outline the method and sequence of stressing, complete specifications and
details of the prestressing, steel and anchoring devices proposed for use,
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 226/437
anchoring stresses, type of enclosures and all other data pertaining to the
 prestressing operations, including the proposed arrangement of the prestressing
units in the members, pressure grouting materials and equipment.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

406.3.3 Prestressing Equipment

Hydraulic jacks used to stress tendons shall be equipped with either a

pressure gauge or a load cell for determining the jacking stress. The pressure
gauge, if used, shall have an accurate reading dial at least 154 mm (6 inches) in
diameter and each jack and its gauge shall be calibrated as a unit with the
cylinder extension in the approximate position that it will be at final jacking force,
and shall be accompanied by a certified calibration chart. The load cell, if used,
shall be calibrated and shall be provided with an indicator by means of which the
prestressing force in the tendon may be determined. The range of the load cell
shall be such that the lower ten (10) percent of the manufacturer’s rated capacity
will not be used in determining the jacking stress.

Safety measures shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent accidents due

to possible breaking of the prestressing steel or the slipping of the grips during the
prestressing process.

406.3.4 Casting Yard

406.3.6 Placing Steel

Steel units shall be accurately placed at the position shown on the Plans
and firmly held during the placing and setting of the concrete.

Ducts may be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams.

Galvanizing of the welded
strength to maintain steel will
their correct not be and
alignment required.
shape Ducts
during shall have
placing sufficient
of concrete.
Joints between sections of ducts shall be positive metallic connections which do
not result in angle changes at the joints. Waterproof tape shall be used at the
connections.

All ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or other

suitable connections for the injection of grout after prestressing.

Ducts for prestressing steel shall be securely fastened in place to prevent

movement.

After installation in the forms, the end of ducts shall at all times be covered
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 227/437
as necessary to prevent the entry of water of debris.
 All ducts for continuous structures shall be vented over each intermediate
5/7/2018
support, and at additional locations as shown on the Plans. Vents shall be 12.7
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

mm (1/2 inch) minimum diameter standard pipe. Connections to ducts shall be

made with metallic structural fasteners. The vents shall be mortar tight, taped as
necessary, and shall provide means for injection of grout through the vents and for
sealing the vents. Ends of vents shall be removed 25.4 mm (1 inch) below the
roadway surface after grouting has been completed.

Distances from the forms shall be maintained by stays, blocks, ties,

hangers or other approved supports. Blocks for holding units from contact with
the forms shall be precast mortar blocks of approved shape and dimensions.
Layers of units shall be separated by mortar blocks or other equally suitable
devices. Wooden blocks shall not be left in the concrete.

When acceptable prestressing steel for post-tensioning is installed in ducts

after completion of concrete curing, and if stressing and grouting are completed
within ten (10) calendar days after the installation of the prestressing steel, rust
which may form during said ten (10) days will not be caused for rejection of the

steel. Prestressing
within ten steel,
(10) calendar installed,
days, shall betensioned
subject toand grouted
all the in this manner,
requirements all
in this Item

Suitable horizontal and vertical spacers shall be provided, if required, to

hold the wires in place in true position in the enclosures.

406.3.7 Pretensioning

The prestressing elements shall be accurately held in position and stressed

by jacks. A record shall be kept of the jacking force and the elongations produced
thereby. Severalspace
time. Sufficient units shall
may be be cast in one continuous
left between line to
ends of units andpermit
stressed at one
access for
cutting after the concrete has attained the required strength. No bond stress shall
be transferred to the concrete, nor end anchorages released until the concrete
has attained a compressive strength, as shown by cylinder tests, of at least 28
MPa unless otherwise specified. The elements shall be cut or released in such an
order that lateral eccentricity or prestress will be a minimum.

406.3.8 Placing Concrete

Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until the Engineer has
inspected the placing of the reinforcement, enclosures, anchorages and
prestressing steel and given his approval thereof. The concrete shall be vibrated
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 228/437
with care and in such a manner as to avoid displacement of reinforcement,
conduits, or wires.
5/7/2018 Prior to placing concrete, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

that all ducts are unobstructed.

406.3.9 Curing

Steam curing process may be used as an alternative to water curing. The

casting bed for any unit cured with steam shall be completely enclosed by a
suitable type of housing, tightly constructed so as to prevent the escape of steam
and simultaneously exclude outside atmosphere. Two to four hours after placing
concrete and after the concrete has undergone initial set, the first application of
steam or radiant heat shall be made unless retarders are used, in which case the
waiting period before application of the steam or radiant heat shall be increased to
from four to six hours.

During the waiting period, the temperature within the curing chamber shall
not be less than 10.0oC (50oF) and live steam or radiant heat may be used to
maintain the curing chamber at the proper minimum temperature. The steam

shall be atfor100
moisture percent
proper relativeofhumidity
hydration to prevent
the cement. loss ofofmoisture
Application andshall
the steam to provide
not be

1. Curing with Low Pressure Steam

Application of live steam shall not be directed on the concrete forms

as to cause localized high temperatures.

2. Curing with Radiant Heat

Radiant
hot water, heat
or by may be
electric appliedelements.
heating by means Radiant
of pipes circulating
heat curingsteam,
shall hot
be oil or
done
under a suitable enclosure to contain the heat and moisture loss shall be
minimized by covering all exposed concrete surfaces with plastic sheeting or by
applying an approved liquid membrane curing compound to all exposed concrete
surfaces. Top surface of concrete members to be used in composite construction
shall be clear of residue of the membrane curing compound so as not to reduce
bond below design limits.

If the Contractor proposes to cure by any other special method, the

method and its details shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

406.3.10 Post-tensioning
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 229/437

Tensioning of the prestressing reinforcement shall not be commenced until

 tests on concrete cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and cured under
5/7/2018 the same conditions, indicate that the concrete of the particular member to be
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

prestressed has attained compressive strength of at least 28 MPa unless

otherwise specified.

After all concrete has attained the required strength, the prestressing
reinforcement shall be stressed by means of jacks to the desired tension and the
stress transferred to the end anchorage.

Cast-in-place concrete shall not be post-tensioned until at least ten (10)

days after the last concrete has been placed in the member to be the post-
tensioned and until the compressive strength of said placed concrete has reached
the strength specified for the concrete at the time of stressing.

All side forms for girders shall be removed before post-tensioning. The
falsework under the bottom slab supporting the superstructure shall not be
released until a minimum of 48 hours have elapsed after grouting of the post-
tension tendons nor until all other conditions of the Specifications have been met.

The supporting falsework

superrestructure will be freeshall beoffconstructed
to lift in such
the falsework a manner
and shorten thatpost-
during the

the jack and the minimum tension, shall be determined in accordance with Article
1.6.7 of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

Suitable shims or other approved devices shall be used to insure that the
specified anchor set loss is attained.

Prestressing tendons in continuous post-tensioned members shall be

tensioned bysimultaneously.
not be done jacking at each end of the tendon. Such jacking of both ends need

A record shall be kept of gage pressure and elongation at all times and
submitted to the Engineer for his approval.

406.3.11 Bonding Steel

Prestressing steel shall be bonded to the concrete by filling the void space
between the duct and the tendon with grout
.
Grout shall consist of Portland Cement, water and an expansive admixture
approved by the Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 230/437

Water shall be potable.

5/7/2018 No admixture containing chlorides or nitrates shall be used.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Water shall first be added to the mixer followed by cement and admixture.

The grout shall be mixed in mechanical mixing equipment of a type that will
produce uniform and thoroughly mixed grout. The water content shall be not more
than 19 litres (5 gallons) per sack of cement. Retempering of grout will not be
permitted. Grout shall be continuously agitated until it is pumped.

Grouting equipment shall be capable of grouting at a pressure of at least

0.6894 MPa (100 psi).

Grouting equipment shall be furnished with a pressure gauge having a full-

scale reading of not more than 2.07 MPa (300 psi).

Standby flushing equipment capable of developing a pumping pressure of

1.72 MPa (250 psi) and of sufficient capacity to flush out any partially grouted

ducts shall be provided.

of withstanding the pumping pressures. Valves and caps shall not be removed or
opened until the grout has set.

Post-tensioned steel shall be bonded to the concrete. All prestressing steel

to be bonded to the concrete shall be free of dirt, loose rust, grease or other
deleterious substances.

Immediately
be blown after completion
out with compressed of air
oil free thetoconcrete pour,
the extent the metal
necessary conduit
to break upshall
and
remove any mortar in the conduit before it hardens. Approximately 24 hours after
the concrete pour, the metal conduits shall be flushed out with water and then
blown out with compressed oil free air.

Prior to placing forms for roadway slabs of box girder structures, the
Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all ducts are
unobstructed and if the prestressing reinforcement has been placed, that the steel
is free and unbonded in the duct.

After the tendons have been stressed to the required tension, each conduit
encasing the prestressing steel shall be blown out with compressed oil free air.
The conduit shall then be completely filled from the low end with grout under
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 231/437

pressure. Grout shall be pumped through the duct and continuously wasted at the
 outlet until no visible slugs of water or air are ejected and the efflux time of ejected
5/7/2018
grout is not less than 11 seconds. All vents and openings shall then be closed
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

and the grouting pressure at the injection end shall be raised to a minimum of
0.6894 MPa (100 psi) and held for a minimum of 10 seconds.

If aluminum powder is used to expand the grout, it shall be added as

follows:

From 2 to 4 grams of the unpolished variety (about 1 to 2 teaspoons) shall

be added for each sack of cement used in the grout. The exact amount of
aluminum powder will be designated by the Engineer. The dosage per batch of
grout shall be carefully weighed. A number of weighings may be made in the
laboratory and doses placed in glass vials for convenient use in the mix. The
aluminum powder shall be blended with pumicite or other inert powder in the
proportion of one (1) part powder to fifty (50) parts pumicite (or other inert powder)
by weight. The blend shall be thoroughly mixed with the cement. The amount of
the blend used should vary from 120 g (4-1/2 ounces) per sack of cement for
concrete having a temperature of 21.1 oC to 190 g (7 ounces) for a temperature of
o

4.44 C after
Batches all ingredients
of grout are within
shall be placed added,45the batch after
minutes shallmixing.
be mixed for 3 minutes.

406.3.13 Handling

Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast

prestressed concrete mortar members. Precast girders and slabs shall be
transported in an upright position and the points of support and directions of the
reactions with respect to the member shall be approximately the same during
transportation and storage as when the members are in their final position. If the

Contractor deems
position, it shall be itdone
expedient to transport
at his own ornotifying
risk after store precast units in of
the Engineer other
his than this
intention
to do so.

Prestressed concrete girders shall not be shipped until tests on concrete

cylinders, manufactured of the same concrete and cured under the same
conditions as the girders, indicate that the concrete of the particular girder has
attained a compressive strength equal to the specified design compressive
strength of the concrete in the girder and has attained a minimum age of 14 days.

406.3.14 Composite Slab Construction

The manufacturing tolerances for pre-cast members shall not exceed those
given for length, cross-section and straightness on the Plans, as specified in the
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 232/437

Contract or as approved by the Engineer. In addition, where beams are laid side
 by side in a deck:
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

1. The difference on soffit level between adjacent units before the in-situ
concrete is placed shall not exceed 5 mm for units up to 10 mm for
longer units.
2. The width of the deck soffit shall be within ±25 mm.
3. In adjacent span, the continuity of the outside beams shall be
maintained.
4. The width of gap between individual beams shall not exceed twice the
nominal gap.
5. The alignment of transverse holes shall permit the reinforcement or
prestressing cables to be placed without distortion.

406.4 Method of Measurement

406.4.1 Structural Members

The quantity to be measured for payment will be the actual number of

precast prestressed concrete structural members, except piling, of the several
types and sizes, installed in place, completed and accepted. Each member will

406.4.2 Other Items

The quantities of other Contract items which enter into the completed and
accepted structure will be measured for payment in the manner prescribed for the
several items involved.

406.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 406.4 shall be

paid for at the contract unit price for each of the particular item listed below that is
included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in
this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement

Number
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 233/437

406 (1) Prestressed Structural Concrete

 Members (Identification) Each
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

406 (2) Prestressed Concrete Lump Sum

ITEM 407– CONCRETE STRUCTURES

407.1 Description

This Item shall consist of the general description of the materials,

equipment, workmanship and construction requirements of concrete structures
and the concrete portions of composite structures conforming to the alignment,
grades, design, dimensions and details shown on the Plans and in accordance
with the Specifications for piles, reinforcing steel, structural steel, structural
concrete and other items which constitute the completed structure. The class of
concrete to be used in the structure or part of the structure shall be as specified in

Item 405, Structural Concrete.

2. Reinforcing Steel

Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements in Item 404, Reinforcing

Steel.

3. Structural Steel

Structural
materials steelMetal
in Item 403, shallStructures.
conform to the requirements of corresponding

4. Bridge Bearing (Elastomeric Bearing Pad)

Elastomeric bearing pads shall conform to Item 412, Elastomeric Bearing

Pads.

5. Paints

Paints shall conform to the requirements in Item 411, Paint.

6. Waterproofing and Dampproofing

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 234/437
 Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or indicated in Special Provisions,
materials for waterproofing and dampproofing shall conform to the requirements of
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the following specifications:

a. AASHTO M 115 Asphalt for dampproofing and waterproofing.

b. AASHTO M 116 Primer for the use with Asphalt in dampproofing and
waterproofing.
c. AASHTO M 117 Woven cotton fabrics saturated with bituminous
substances for use in waterproofing.
d. AASHTO
proofing. M 118 Coal-Tar pitch for roofing, dampproofing and water-
e. AASHTO M 121 Creosote for priming coat with coal-tar pitch damp-
proofing and waterproofing.
f. AASHTO M 159 Woven burlap fabric saturated with bituminous
substances for use in waterproofing.
g. AASHTO M 166 Numbered cotton duck and array duck.
h. AASHTO M 239 Asphalt for use in waterproofing membrane
construction.

Unless otherwise shown on the Plans or in Special Provisions, materials for

expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of the following
specifications:

a. AASHTO M 33 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete.

b. AASHTO M 153 Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint

fillers for concrete paving and structural construction.

c. AASHTO M 173 Concrete joint sealer hot poured elastic type.

d. AASHTO M 213 Preformed expansion joint filler for concrete paving and
structural construction-non-extruding and resilient bituminous types.

e. AASHTO M 220 Preformed elastomeric compression joint seals for

concrete.

407.2.1 Proportioning and Strength of Structural Concrete

This shall be in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 235/437
407.2.2 Sampling and Testing
 This shall be in accordance with Item 405, Structural Concrete.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

407.3 Construction and Requirements

407.3.1 Handling and Placing Concrete: General

Concrete shall not be placed until forms and reinforcing steel have been
checked and approved by the Engineer.

If lean
to placing of concrete is required
reinforcing in the
steel bar, the Plan
lean or as directed
concrete by the
should Engineer
have prior
a minimum
compressive strength of 13.8 MPa (2,000 psi )..

In preparation for the placing of concrete all sawdust, chips and other
construction debris and extraneous matter shall be removed from inside the
formwork, struts, stays and braces, serving temporarily to hold the forms in correct
shape and alignment, pending the placing of concrete at their locations, shall be
removed when the concrete placing has reached an elevation rendering their
service unnecessary. These temporary members shall be entirely removed from

pipes for conveying concrete to the forms shall be permitted only on written
authorization of the Engineer. The Engineer shall reject the use of the equipment
for concrete transportation that will allow segregation, loss of fine materials, or in
any other way will have a deteriorating effect on the concrete quality.

Open troughs and chutes shall be of metal lined; where steep slopes are
required, the chutes shall be equipped with baffles or be in short lengths that

reverse the direction of movement to avoid segregation.

All chutes, troughs and pipes shall be kept clean and free from coatings of
hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water after each run. Water used
for flushing shall be discharged clear of the structure.

When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete more than
1.5 m, concrete shall be conveyed through sheet metal or approved pipes. As far
as practicable, the pipes shall be kept full of concrete during placing and their
lower end shall be kept buried in the newly placed concrete. After initial set of the
concrete, the forms shall not be jarred and no strain shall be placed on the ends of
projecting reinforcement bars.

The concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible to its final position and
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 236/437
the use of vibrators for moving of the mass of fresh concrete shall not be
permitted.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
407.3.1.1 Placing Concrete by Pneumatic Means
Pneumatic placing of concrete will be permitted only if specified in the
Special Provisions or authorized by the Engineer. The equipment shall be so
arranged that vibration will not damage freshly placed concrete.

Where concrete is conveyed and placed by pneumatic means, the

equipment shall be suitable in kind and adequate in capacity for the work. The
machine shall be located
shall be horizontal as close
or inclined as practicable
upwards from the to the work.The
machine. The dischargeend
discharge lines
of
the line shall not be more than 3 m from the point of deposit.

At the conclusion of placing the concrete, the entire equipment shall be

thoroughly cleaned.

407.3.1.2 Placing of Concrete by Pumping

The placing of concrete by pumping will be permitted only if specified or if

no contamination of the concrete or separation of the ingredients. After this

operation, the entire equipments shall be thoroughly cleaned.

407.3.1.3 Placing Concrete in Water

Concrete shall not be placed in water except with approval of the Engineer
and under his immediate supervision. In this case the method of placing shall be
hereinafter specified.

Concrete deposited in water shall be Class A concrete with a minimum

cement content of 400 kg/m3 of concrete. The slump of the concrete shall be
maintained between 10 and 20 cm. To prevent segregation, concrete shall be
carefully placed in a compact mass, in its final position, by means of a tremie, a
bottom-dump bucket, or other approved means, and shall not be disturbed after
being placed.

A tremie shall consist of a tube having a diameter of not less than 250 mm
constructed in sections having flanged couplings fitted with gaskets with a hopper
at the top. The tremie shall be supported so as to permit free movement of the
discharge and over the entire top surface of the work and so as to permit rapid
lowering when necessary to retard or stop the flow of concrete. The discharge
end shall be closed at the start of work so as to prevent water entering the tube
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 237/437

and shall be completely submerged in concrete at all times; the tremie tube shall
 be kept full to the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper,
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
the flow of concrete shall be induced by lightly raising the discharge end, but
always keeping it in the placed concrete. The flow shall be continuous until the
work is completed.

When the concrete is placed with a bottom-dump bucket, the top of the
bucket shall be open. The bottom doors shall open freely downward and outward
when tripped. The buckets shall be completely filled and slowly lowered to avoid
backwash. It shall not be dumped until it rests on the surface upon which the

concrete is the
well above to be deposited and when discharged shall be withdrawn slowly until
concrete.

407.3.2 Compaction of Concrete

Concrete during and immediately after placing shall be thoroughly

compacted. The concrete in walls, beams, columns and the like shall be placed in
horizontal layers not more than 30 cm thick except as hereinafter provided. When
less than a complete layer is placed in one operation, it shall be terminated in a
vertical bulkhead. Each layer shall be placed and compacted before the

affect a mass of concrete with a 3 cm slump over a radius of at least 50 cm. A

sufficient number of vibrator shall be provided to properly compact each batch
immediately after it is placed in the forms. Vibrators shall be manipulated so as to
thoroughly work the concrete around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures
and into the corners and angles of the forms and shall be applied at the point of
placing and in the area of freably placed concrete. The vibrators shall be inserted
into and withdrawn from the concrete slowly. The vibration shall be of sufficient
duration and intensity to compact the concrete thoroughly but shall not be
continued so as to cause segregation and at any one point to the extent that
localized areas of grout are formed. Application of vibrators shall be at points
uniformly spaced, and not farther apart than twice the radius over which the
vibration is visibly effective. Vibration shall not be applied directly or thru the
reinforcement to sections or layers of concrete that have hardened to the degree
that the concrete ceases to be plastic under vibration. It shall not be used to
make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause segregation,
and vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the forms of troughs or
chutes.

407.3.3 Casting Sections and Construction Joints

The concrete in each form shall be placed continuously. Placing of

concrete in any such form shall not be allowed to commence unless sufficiently
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 238/437

inspected and approved materials for the concrete is at hand, and labor and
 equipment are sufficient to complete the pour without interruption.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Joints in the concrete due to stopping work shall be avoided as much as

possible. Such joints, when necessary, shall be constructed to meet the approval
of the Engineer.

When the placing of concrete is temporarily discontinued, the concrete,

after becoming firm enough to retain its shape, shall be cleaned of laitance and
other objectionable material to a sufficient depth to expose sound concrete.

Where a “faster
top surface of a edge” might
wingwall, anbeinset
produced at a shall
formwork construction
be usedjoint, as in theansloped
to produce edge
thickness of not less than 15 cm in the succeeding layer. Work shall not be
discontinued within 50 cm of the top of any face, unless provision has been made
for a coping less than 50 cm thick, in which case if permitted by the Engineer, the
construction joint may be made at the underside of coping.

Immediately following the discontinuance of placing concrete, all

accumulations of mortar splashed upon the reinforcing steel and the surfaces of
forms shall be removed. Dried mortar chips and dust shall not be puddled into the

407.3.4 Casting Box Culverts

In general, the base slab of box culverts shall be placed and allowed to set
before the remainder of the culvert is constructed. In the construction of box
culverts the side walls and top slab may be constructed as a monolith.

If the concrete in the walls and top slab is placed in two separate
operations, special care shall be exercised in order to secure bonding in the
construction joint and appropriate keys shall be left in the sidewalls for anchoring
the top slab. Each wingwall shall be constructed, if possible, as a monolith.
Construction joints where unavoidable, shall be horizontal and so located that no
joints will be visible in the exposed face of the wingwall above the ground line.

Vertical construction joints shall be at right angles to the axis of the

culverts.

407.3.5 Casting Columns, Slabs and Girders

Concrete in columns shall be placed in one continuous operation, unless

otherwise directed. The concrete shall be allowed to set for at least 20 hours
before the caps are placed.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 239/437

Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, no concrete shall be placed in

 the superstructure until the column forms have been stripped sufficiently to
5/7/2018
determine the condition of the concrete in the column. The load of the super-
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

structure shall not be allowed to come upon the bents until they have been in
place at least 14 days, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

Concrete in slab spans shall be placed in one continuous operation for

each span unless otherwise provided.

Concrete in T-Beam or deck girder spans shall be placed in one continuous

operation unless otherwise

separate operations, each ofdirected. If it is permitted
the operations, to place thefirst,
shall be continuous: concrete
to the in
toptwo
of
the girder stems, and second, to completion. In the latter case, the bond between
stem and slab shall be secured by means of suitable shear keys which may be
formed by the use of timber blocks approximately 50 mm x 100 mm in cross-
section having a length of 100 mm less than the width of the girder stem. These
key blocks shall be placed along the girder stems as required, but the spacing
shall not be greater than 300 mm center to center. The blocks shall be beveled
and oiled in such a manner as to insure their ready removal, and they shall be
removed as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently to retain its shape. If the

The concrete in the webs and the top slab shall be placed in one
continuous operation unless otherwise specified. If it is permitted to place the
concrete in more than one operation, the requirements for T-beam shall apply.

407.3.6 Construction Joints

Construction joints shall be made only where shown on the Plans or called
for in the pouring schedule, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Shear
keys or reinforcement shall be used, unless otherwise specified, to transmit shear
or to bond the two sections together.

Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete which has

hardened, the forms shall be retightened. The surface of the hardened concrete
shall be roughened as required by the Engineer, in a manner that will not leave
loose particles of aggregate or damage concrete at the surface. It shall be
thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and laitance. When directed by the
Engineer, the surface of the hardened concrete which will be in contact with new
concrete shall be washed with water to this satisfaction, and to insure an excess
of mortar at the juncture of the hardened and the newly deposited concrete, the
cleaned and saturated surfaces, including vertical and inclined surfaces shall first
be thoroughly covered with a coating of mortar of the same proportion of sand and
cement as the class of concrete used against which the new concrete shall be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 240/437

placed before the grout or mortar has attained its initial set.
5/7/2018 The placing of concrete shall be carried continuously from joint to joint.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The face edges of all joints which are exposed to view shall be carefully finished
true to line and elevation.

407.3.7 Concrete Surface Finishing

Surface finishing shall be classified as follows:

Class 1,
Class 2, Ordinary Finish
Rubbed Finish
Class 3, Floated Finish

All concrete shall be given Class 1, Ordinary Finish and additionally any
further finish as specified.

Unless otherwise specified, the following surfaces shall be given a Class 2,

Rubbed Finish.

below low water elevation or 50 cm below finished ground level when such ground
level is above the water surface. Wingwalls shall be finished from the top to 50
cm below the finished slope lines on the outside face and shall be finished on top
and for a depth of 20 cm below the top on the back sides.

Unless otherwise specified, the surface of the traveled way shall be Class
3, Floated Finish.

Class 1, Concrete Ordinary Finish

Immediately following the removal of forms, all fins and irregular protection
shall be removed from all surface except from those which are not to be exposed
or are not to be waterproofed. On all surfaces the cavities produced by form ties
and all other holes, honeycomb spots, broken corners or edges and other defects
shall be thoroughly cleaned, and after having been kept saturated with water for a
period of not less than three hours shall be carefully pointed and made true with a
mortar of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions used in the grade of
the concrete being finished. Mortar used in pointing shall not be more than one
hour old. The mortar patches shall be cured as specified under Subsection
407.3.8. All construction and expansion joints in the completed work shall be left
carefully tooled and free of all mortar and concrete. The joint filler shall be left
exposed for its full length with a clean and true edges.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 241/437
 The resulting surface shall be true and uniform. All repaired surfaces, the
5/7/2018 appearance of which is not satisfactory to the Engineer, shall be “rubbed” as
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
specified below.

Class 2, Concrete Rubbed Finish

After removal of forms, the rubbing of concrete shall be started as soon as

its condition will permit. Immediately before starting this work, the concrete shall
be kept thoroughly saturated with water for a minimum period of three hours.

Sufficient
used in thetime shall of
pointing have elapsed
road before
holes and the wetting
defects down set.
to thoroughly to allow the mortar
Surfaces to be
finished shall be rubbed with a minimum coarse carborundum stone using a small
amount of mortar on each face. The mortar shall be composed of cement and
fine sand mixed in the proportions used in the concrete being finished. Rubbing
shall be continued until all form marks, protections and irregularities have been
removed, all voids have been filled, and a uniform surface has been obtained.
The face produced by this rubbing shall be left in place at this time.

After all concrete above the surface being created has been cast, the final

Class 3, Concrete Floated Finish

After the concrete is compacted as specified in Subsection 407.3.2,

Compaction of Concrete, the surface shall be carefully struck off with a strike
board to conform to the cross-section and grade shown on the Plans. Proper
allowance shall be made for camber if required. The strike board may be
operated longitudinally or transversely and shall be moved forward with a
combined longitudinal and transverse motion, the manipulation being such that
neither is raised from the side forms during the process. A slight excess of
concrete shall be kept in front of the cutting edge at all times.

After striking off and consolidating as specified above, the surface shall be
made uniform by longitudinal or transverse floating or both. Longitudinal floating
will be required except in places where this method is not feasible.

The longitudinal float, operated from foot bridges, shall be worked with a
sawing motion while held in a floating position parallel to the road centerline and
passing gradually from one side of the pavement to the other. The float shall then
be moved forward one-half of each length and the above operation repeated.
Machine floating which produces an equivalent result may be substituted for the
above manual method.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 242/437

The transverse float shall be operated across the pavement by starting at

 the edge and slowly moving to the center and back again to the edge. The float
5/7/2018 shall then be moved forward one-half of each length and the above operation
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
repeated. Care shall be taken to preserve the crown and cross-section of the
pavement.

After the longitudinal floating has been completed and the excess water
removed, but while the concrete is still plastic, the slab surface shall be tested for
trueness with a straight-edge. For the purpose, the Contractor shall furnish and
use an accurate 3 m straight-edge swing handless 1 m longer than one half the

width of the slab.

The straight-edge shall be held in successive positions parallel to the road
centerline and in contact with the surface and the whole area gone over from one
side of the slab to the other as necessary advancement along the deck shall be in
successive stages of not more than one-half the length of the straight-edge. Any
depression found shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck
off, consolidated and refinished. The straight-edge testing and refloating shall
continue until the entire surface is found to be free from observable departure
from the straight-edge and the slabs has the required grade and contour, until

pockets or rough spots such as may be caused by accidental disturbing, during

the final brooming of particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the surface.

Concrete Surface Finish for Sidewalk.

After the concrete has been deposited in place, it shall be compacted and
the surface shall be struck off by means of strike board and floated with a wooden
or cork float. An edging tool shall be used on all edges and at all expansion joints.
The surface shall not vary more than 3 mm under a 3 m straight-edge. The
surface shall have a granular or matted texture which will not slick when wet.

407.3.8 Curing Concrete

All newly placed concrete shall be cured in accordance with this

Specification, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The curing method shall
be one or more of the following:

1. Water Method

The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of

water for a minimum period of 7 days after the concrete has been
placed.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 243/437
 The entire surface of the concrete shall be kept dump by applying
water with an atomizing nozzle. Cotton mats, rugs, carpets, or earth or
5/7/2018
sand blankets may be used to retain the moisture. At the expiration of
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the curing period the concrete surface shall be cleared of the curing
medium.

2. Curing Compound

Surfaces exposed to the air may be cured by the application of an

impervious membrane if approved by the Engineer.

The membrane forming compound used shall be practically
colorless liquid. The use of any membrane-forming compound that will
alter the natural color of the concrete or impart a slippery surface to any
wearing surface shall be prohibited. The compound shall be applied
with a pressure spray in such a manner as to cover the entire concrete
surface with a uniform film and shall be of such character that it will
harden within 30 minutes after application. The amount of compound
applied shall be ample to seal the surface of the concrete thoroughly.

surface, application of water with an atomizing nozzle as specified

under “Water Method”, shall be started immediately and shall be
continued until the application of the compound is resumed or started,
however, the compound shall not be applied over any resulting free
standing water. Should the film of compound be damaged from any
cause before the expiration of 7 days after the concrete is placed in the
case of structures, the damaged portion shall be repaired immediately
with additional compound.

Curing compound shall not be diluted or altered in any manner after

manufacture. At the time of use, the compound shall be in a thoroughly
mixed condition. If the compound has not been used within 120 days
after the date of manufacture, the Engineer may require additional
testing before the use to determine compliance to requirements.

An anti-setting agent or a combination of anti-setting agents shall be

incorporated in the curing compound to prevent caking.

The curing compound shall be packaged in clean barrels or steel

containers or shall be supplied from a suitable storage tank located on
the Site. Storage tank shall have a permanent system designed to
completely redisperse any settled material without introducing air or any
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 244/437
other foreign substance. Containers shall be well-sealed with ring seals
and lug type crimp lids. The linings of the containers shall be of a
 and lug type crimp lids. The linings of the containers shall be of a
character that will resist the solvent of the curing compound. Each
5/7/2018
container shall be labeled with a manufacturer’s name, specification
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

number, batch number, capacity and date of manufacture, and shall

have label warning concerning flammability. The label shall also warn
that the curing compound shall be well-stirred before use. When the
curing compound is shipped in tanks or tank trunks, a shipping invoice
shall accompany each load. The invoice shall contain the same
information as that required herein for container labels.

Curing compound may be sampled by the Engineer at the source of

supply and on the Site.

3. Waterproof Membrane Method

The exposed finished surfaces of concrete shall be sprayed with

water, using a nozzle that so atomizes the flow that a mist and not a
spray is formed until the concrete has set, after which a curing
membrane of waterproof paper or plastic sheeting shall be placed. The

All joints in the sheets shall be securely cemented together in such a

manner as to provide a waterproof joint. The joint seams shall have a
minimum lap of 100 mm.

The sheets shall be securely weighed down by placing a bank of

earth on the edges of the sheets or by other means satisfactory to the
Engineer.

Should any portion of the sheets be broken or damaged within 72

hours after being placed, the broken or damaged portions shall be
immediately repaired with new sheets properly cemented into place.

Sections of membrane which have lost their waterproof qualities or

have been damaged to such an extent as to render them unfit for
curing, the concrete shall not be used.

4. Forms-in-Place Method

Formed surfaces of concrete may be cured by retaining the form-in-

place. The forms shall remain in place for a minimum period of 7 days
after the concrete has been placed, except that for members over 50
cm in least dimensions, the forms shall remain in place for a minimum
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 245/437

period of 5 days. Wooden forms shall be kept wet by watering during

5/7/2018
the curing period. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

5. Curing Cast-In-Situ Concrete

All newly placed concrete for cast-in-situ structures, other than

highway bridge deck, shall be cured by the water method, the forms-in-
place method, or as permitted herein, by the curing compound method,
all in accordance with the requirements of Subsection, 407.3.8 Curing
Concrete.

The curing compound method may be used on concrete surfaces

which are to be buried under ground and surfaces where only Ordinary
Surface Finish is to be applied and on which a uniform color is not
required and which will not be visible from public view.

The top surface of highway bridge decks shall be cured by either the
curing compound method or the water method. The curing compound
shall be applied progressively during the deck finishing operations. The

6. Curing Pre-Cast Concrete (except piles)

Pre-cast concrete members shall be cured for not less than 7 days
by the water method or by steam curing. Steam curing for pre-cast
members shall conform to the following provisions:

a. After placement of the concrete, members shall be held for a

minimum 4-hour pre-steaming period.

b. To prevent moisture loss on exposed surfaces during the pre-

steaming period, members shall be covered immediately after
casting or the exposed surface shall be kept wet by fog spray or wet
blankets.

c. Enclosures for steam curing shall allow free circulation of steam

about the member and shall be constructed to contain the live steam
with a minimum moisture loss. The use of tarpaulins or similar
flexible covers will be permitted, provided they are kept in good
condition and secured in such a manner to prevent the loss of steam
and moisture.

d. Steam at jets shall be low pressure and in a saturated condition.

Steam jets shall not impinge directly on the concrete, test cylinders,
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 246/437

or forms. During application of the steam, the temperature rise

 o
within the enclosure shall not exceed 20 C per hour. Theo curing
5/7/2018 temperature throughout the enclosure shall not exceed 65 C and
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

shall be maintained at a constant level for a sufficient time

necessary to develop the required compressive strength. Control
cylinders shall be covered to prevent moisture loss and shall be
placed in a location where temperature of the enclosure will be the
same as that of the concrete.

e. Temperature recording devices that will provide an accurate

continuous permanent record of the curing temperature shall be
provided. A minimum of one temperature recording device per 50 m
of continuous bed length will be required for checking temperature.

f. Curing of pre-cast concrete will be considered completed after the

termination of the steam curing cycle.

7. Curing Pre-cast Concrete Piles

407.3.9 Falsework Design and Drawings

Detailed working drawings and supporting calculations of the false work

shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Engineer. No falsework construction
shall start until the Engineer has reviewed and approved the design. The
Contractor shall provide sufficient time for the Engineer to complete this review.
Such time shall be proportionate to the complexity of the falsework design and in
no case be less than two weeks.

The Contractor may review the falsework drawings at any time provided
sufficient time is allowed for the Engineer’s review before construction is started
on the revised portion.

Assumptions used in design of the falsework shall include but not be limited
to the following:

1. The entire superstructure cross-section, except for the railing, shall

be considered to be placed at one time, except when in the opinion
of the Engineer, a portion of the load is carried by members
previously cast and having attained a specified strength.
2. The loading used on timber piles shall not exceed the bearing value
for the pile and shall in no case exceed 20 tonne per pile.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 247/437

3. Soil bearing values and soil condition (wet and dry) shall be
 designated by be
footings shall thedesigned
Contractortoon the falsework
carry the loads drawings. Falsework
imposed upon them
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

without exceeding estimated soil bearing values or allowable

settlements.
4. The maximum loadings and deflections used on jacks, brackets,
columns and other manufactured devices shall not exceed the
manufacture’s recommendations. If requested by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall furnish catalogue or other data verifying these
recommendations.
5. If the concrete is to be prestressed, the falsework shall be designed
to support any increased or readjusted loads caused by the
prestressing forces.
6. Joints supporting slabs and overhangs shall be considered as
falsework and designed as such.

For the construction of falsework over and adjacent to roadways where

falsework openings are required for maintaining traffic, the Contractor shall
provide any additional features for the work needed to insure that the falsework

b. Adequate bracing shall be used during all stages of falsework

construction and removal over or adjacent to public traffic.

c. Falsework members shall be at least 300 mm clear of temporary

protective railing members.

The falsework drawings shall include a superstructure placing diagram

showing proposed concrete placing sequence and construction joint locations,
except that where a schedule for placing concrete is shown on the Contract Plans,
no deviation will be permitted there from unless approved in writing by the
Engineer.

The falsework drawings shall show pedestrian openings which are required
through the falsework.

Anticipated total settlements of falsework and forms shall be indicated by

the Contractor on the falsework drawings. These should include falsework footing
settlements over 20 mm will not be allowed unless otherwise permitted by the
Engineer. Deck slab forms between girders shall be constructed with no
allowance for settlement relative to the girders.

Detailed calculations by the Contractor showing the stresses deflections,

and camber necessary to compensate for said deflections in all load supporting
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 248/437

members shall be supplied.

5/7/2018
After approving the Contractor’s falsework deflection camber, the Engineer
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

will furnish to the Contractor the amounts of camber necessary to compensate for
vertical alignment or anticipated structure deflection, if these are not shown on the
drawings. The total camber used in constructing falsework shall be the sum of
the aforementioned cambers.

407.3.10 Falsework Construction

The falsework shall be constructed to conform to the falsework drawings.

The materials used in the falsework construction shall be of the quantity and
quality necessary to withstand the stresses imposed. The workmanship used in
falsework shall be of such quality that the falsework will support the loads imposed
on it without excessive settlement or take-up beyond that shown on the falsework
drawings.

When falsework is supported on piles, the piles shall be driven to a bearing

value equal to the total calculated pile loading as shown on the falsework

The Contractor shall provide tell-tales attached to the soffit forms easily
readable and in enough systematically-placed locations to determine the total
settlement of the entire portion of the structure where concrete is being placed.

Should unanticipated events occur, including settlements that deviate more

than ±20 mm from those indicated on the falsework drawings, which in the opinion
of the Engineer would prevent obtaining a structure conforming to the requirement
of the Specification, the placing of concrete shall be discontinued until corrective
measures satisfactory to the Engineer are provided. In the event satisfactory
measures are not provided prior to initial set of the concrete in the affected area,
the placing of concrete shall be discontinued at a location determined by the
Engineer. All unacceptable concrete shall be removed.

407.3.11 Removing Falsework

Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or permitted by the Engineer,

falsework supporting any span of a supported bridge shall not be released before
14 days after the last concrete, excluding concrete above the bridge deck, has
been placed. Falsework supporting any span of a continuous or rigid frame bridge
shall not be released before 14 days after the last concrete excluding concrete
above the bridge deck, has been placed in that span and in the adjacent portions
of each adjoining span for a length equal to at least half the length of the span
where falsework is to be released.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 249/437
 Falsework
shall not supporting
be released deck
until 7 days overhangs
after and deckhas
the deck concrete slabs
beenbetween
placed. girders
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

In addition to the above requirements, no falsework for bridges shall be

released until the supported concrete has attained a compressive strength of at
least 80% of the required 28-day strength. Falsework for cast-in place
prestressed portion of structure shall not be released until after the prestressing
steel has been tensioned.

All falsework materials shall be completely removed. Falsework piling shall

be removed at least 50 cm below the surface of the original ground or stream bed.
When falsework piling is driven within the limits of ditch or channel excavation
areas, the falsework piling within such areas shall be removed to at least 50 cm
below the bottom and side slopes of said excavated areas.

All debris and refuse resulting from work shall be removed and the site left
in a neat and presentable condition.

407.3.13 Formwork Construction

Concrete forms shall be mortar-tight, true to the dimensions, lines and

grades of the structure and with the sufficient strength, rigidity, shape and surface
smoothness as to leave the finished works true to the dimensions shown on the
Plans or required by the Engineer and with the surface finish as specified.

Formwork and shutters are to be constructed in accordance with the

approved Plans.
The inside surfaces of forms shall be cleaned of all dirt, mortar and foreign
material. Forms which will later be removed shall be thoroughly coated with form
oil prior to use. The form oil shall be of commercial quality form oil or other
approved coating which will permit the ready release of the forms and will not
discolor the concrete.

Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms until all work in connection
with constructing the forms has been completed, all materials required for the unit
to be poured, and the Engineer has inspected and approved said forms and
materials. Such work shall include the removal of all dirt, chips, sawdust and
other foreign material from the forms.

The rate of depositing concrete in forms shall be such to prevent bulging of

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 250/437

the forms or form panels in excess of the deflections permitted by the

 Specification.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Forms for all concrete surfaces which will not be completely enclosed or
hidden below the permanent ground surface shall conform to the requirements
herein for forms for exposed surfaces. Interior surfaces of underground drainage
structures shall be completely enclosed surfaces.

Formwork for concrete place under water shall be watertight. When lumber
is used, this shall be planed, tongued and grooved.

Forms for exposed concrete surface shall be designed and constructed so

that the formed surface of the concrete does not undulate excessively in any
direction between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form fasteners, or wales.
Undulations exceeding either 2 mm or 1/270 of the center to center distance
between studs, joists, form stiffeners, form fasteners, or wales will be considered
to be excessive. Should any form of forming system, even though previously
approved for use, produce a concrete surface with excessive undulations, its use
shall be discontinued until modifications satisfactory to the Engineer have been

Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of form materials of even

thickness and width and with uniform texture. The materials shall have sharp
edges and be mortar-tight.

Forms for exposed surfaces shall be constructed with triangular fillets at

least 20 mm wide attached so as to prevent mortar runs and to produce smooth
straight chamfers at all sharp edges of the concrete.

Form fasteners consisting of form bolts, clamps or other devices shall be

used as necessary to prevent spreading of the forms during concrete placement.
The use of ties consisting of twisted wire loops to hold forms in position will not be
permitted.

Anchor devices may be cast into the concrete for later use in supporting
forms or for lifting precast members. The use of driven types of anchorage for
fastening forms of form supports to concrete will not be permitted.

407.3.14 Removal of Forms and Falsework

Forms and falsework shall not be removed without the consent of the
Engineer. The Engineer’s consent shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility
for the safety of the work. Blocks and bracing shall be removed at the time the
forms are removed and in no case shall any portion of the wood forms be left in
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 251/437
the concrete.
 Falsework removal for continuous or cantilevered structures shall be as
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
directed by the Engineer or shall be such that the structure is gradually subjected
to its working stress.

When concrete strength tests are used for removal of forms and supports,
such removal should not begin until the concrete has attained the percentage of
the specified design strength shown in the table below.

Minimum Time Minimum Percentage

Design Strength
Centering under girders,
beams frames or arches 14 days 80%
Floor slabs 14 days 70%
Walls 1 day 70%
Columns 2 days 70%
Sides of beams and all
other vertical surfaces 1 day 70%

Falsework under all spans of continuous structures shall be completely

released before concrete is placed in railings and parapets. In order to determine
the condition of column concrete, forms shall be removed from columns before
releasing supports from beneath beams and girders.

Forms and falsework shall not be released from under concrete without first
determining if the concrete has gained adequate strength without regard to the
time element. In the absence of strength determination, the forms and falsework
are to remain in place until removal is permitted by the Engineer.

The forms for footings constructed within cofferdams or cribs may be left in
place when, in the opinion of the Engineer, their removal would endanger the
safety of the cofferdam or crib, and when the forms so left intact will not be
exposed to view in the finished structure. All other forms shall be removed
whether above or below the ground line or water level.

All forms shall be removed from the cells of concrete box girders in which
utilities are present and all formwork except that necessary to support the deck
slab shall be removed from the remaining cells of the box girder.

To facilitate finishing, forms used on ornamental work, railing, parapets and

exposed vertical surfaces shall be removed in not less than 12 nor more than 48
hours, depending upon weather conditions. In order to determine the condition of
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 252/437
concrete in columns, forms shall always be removed from them before the
 removal of shoring from beneath beams and girders.
5/7/2018
Falsework and centering for spandrel-filled arches not be struck until filling
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

at the back of abutments has been placed up to the spring line. Falsework
supporting the deck of rigid frame structure shall not be removed until fills have
been placed back to the vertical legs.

407.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity of structural steel, structural concrete, reinforcing steel or other

Contract Pay Items shall constitute the completed and accepted structure which
shall be measured for payment in the manner prescribed in the several items
involved.

407.5 Basis of Payment

The quantities measured as provided in Section 407.4, Method of

Measurement shall be paid for at the contract price for the several pay items

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit

of Measurement
405 (1) Concrete Class A, C & P Cubic Meter
405 (2) Concrete Post/Baluster Each
Railings Linear Meter
405 (3) Parapet Walls Cubic Meter
400 Piling Linear Meter
103 Structure Excavation Cubic Meter
601 Sidewalk Concrete Square Meter or
Cubic Meter
404 Reinforcing Steel Bars Kilogram
407 (1) Lean Concrete Cubic Meter

When more than one item is specified, means of identification shall be

inserted in parenthesis immediately after the Pay Item and letter suffixes shall be
included within the parenthesis of the Pay Item Number.

ITEM 408– STEEL BRIDGES

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 253/437
408.1 Description
 This Item shall consist of the construction of steel structure conforming to
5/7/2018
the lines, grades, dimensions and designs shown on the Plans and in accordance
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

with the Specifications for piling, concrete metal reinforcement, structural steel
and other items which constitute the completed structure.

408.2 Materials

All materials shall conform to the detailed requirements specified for the
component parts of the completed structure. Where special materials are
required, they shall be shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.

408.3 Construction Methods

408.3.1 Organization and Equipment

During the progress of the work the Contractor shall have a competent
foreman or superintendent experienced in steel erection in personal charge of

carrying out the work in full accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
Erection diagrams shall be approved by the Director, Bureau of Design.

408.3.2 Handling and Storing Materials

Steel and timber shall be placed on skids above the ground and shall be
kept clean. The underlying ground shall be kept free from vegetation and properly
drained. Girders and beams shall be placed upright and shored. Long members,
such as columns and chords, shall be supported on skids placed close enough
together to prevent injury by deflection. The Contractor shall be responsible for
the loss of any material, which has been paid for by the Bureau, while it is in his
care, or for any damage, resulting from his work. The loading, transporting,
unloading and piling of structural material shall be so conducted that the metal
will be kept free from injury from rough handling.

408.3.3 Erection

The Contractor shall furnish and place all falsework, erect all metal work,
remove the temporary construction, and do all work required to complete the
structure as covered by the Contract, including the removal of the old structure or
structures if so stipulated, all in accordance with the Plans and these
Specifications.

If the substructure and superstructure are built under separate contracts,

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 254/437
 the Department
elevations will provide
and properly theand
finished, substructure, constructed
will establish to elevation
the lines and correct lines and
required
5/7/2018 for setting the steel. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

If the fabrication and erection of the superstructure are done under

separate contract, the Department will furnish detail plans for the bridge or bridges
to be erected, including shop details, camber diagrams, erection diagrams, list of
field rivets and bolts, and copy of shipping statements showing a list of parts and
their weights.

The Contractor shall provide all tools, machinery, and appliances including
drift pins and fitting up bolts, necessary for the expeditious handling of the work.

The falsework shall be properly designed, substantially built and

maintained for the loads which will come upon it. The Contractor, shall prepare
and submit to the Engineer for approval plans for falsework or for changes in
existing structure necessary for maintaining traffic. Approval of the Contractor’s
plans shall not be considered as relieving him of any responsibility

place, until the tension chord splices are fully riveted and all other truss
connection pinned and bolted. Rivets in splices of butts joints of compression
members and rivets in railings shall not be driven until the span is swung. Splices
and filled connections shall have one-half of the holes filled with bolts and
cylindrical erection pin (half bolts and half pins) before riveting. Splices and
connections carrying traffic during erection shall have three-fourths of the holes so
filled. Fitting up bolts shall be of the same nominal diameter as the rivets and
cylindrical erection pins shall be 0.75 mm (1/32 inch) larger.

408.3.4 Welding

Where so indicated on the Plans, structural members shall be joined by

welding. The welds shall be of the size and type indicated and shall be made by
competent operators. Shop welding shall conform in all details to the Standard
Specifications for Welded Highway and Railway Bridges of the American Welding
Society. Field welding shall conform to the requirement of Item 409, Welded
Structural Steel.
408.3.5 Bent Material

The straightening of plates, angles, and other shapes shall be done by

methods not likely to produce fractures or other injury. The metal shall not be
heated. Following the straightening of a bend or buckle, the surface shall be
carefully inspected for evidence of fracture. Sharpkinks and bends may be cause
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 255/437
 for the rejection of the material.
5/7/2018 408.3.6 Alignment DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Before beginning the field riveting, the structural steel shall be adjusted to
correct grade and alignment and elevation of panel points (end of floor beams)
properly regulated. For truss spans a slight excess camber will be permitted while
the bottom chords are being riveted.

408.3.7 Field Riveting

Pneumatic hammers shall be used for field riveting. Cup-faced dollies,

fitting the head closely, shall be used to insure good bearing. Connections shall
be secured and accurately fitted up before the rivets are driven. Drifting shall be
only such as to draw the parts into position and not sufficient to enlarge the holes
or distort the metal. Unfair holes shall be reamed or drilled. Rivets shall be
heated uniformly to light cherry-red color and shall be driven while hot. They shall
not be overheated or burned Rivet heads shall be full and symmetrical

408.3.8 Bolted Connections

In bolted connections, the nut shall be drawn up tight and set by center
punching the threads of the bolt at the face of the nut.

408.3.9 Pin Connections

Pilot and driving nuts shall be used in driving pins. Pins shall be so driven
that the members will take full bearing on them. Pin nuts shall be screwed up tight
and threads burred at the face of the nut with a center punch.

408.3.10 Misfits and Shop Errors

The connection of minor misfits involving non-harmful amounts of reaming,

cutting and chipping will be considered a legitimate part of the erection. However,
any error in the shop fabrication or deformation resulting from handling and
transportation which prevents the proper assembling and fitting up of parts by the
moderate use of drift pins or a moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping
and cutting shall be reported immediately to the Engineer, and his approval of the
method of correction obtained. If the Contract provides for completed fabrication
and erection, the Contractor shall be responsible for all misfits, errors and injuries
and shall make the necessary correction and replacements. If the Contract is for
erection only, the inspector, with the cooperation of the Contractor shall keep a
correct record of labor and materials and be used in correction of misfits, errors
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 256/437
 and injuries,
within 30 daysnot
ofdue to actions
itemized bill forofthe
theapproval
Contractor, and
of the the Contractor shall render
Engineer.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

408.3.11 Placing Anchor Bolts

Anchor bolts shall be placed as provided under Item 407, Concrete

Structures or as shown on the Plans.

408.3.12 Setting Shoes and Bearing

Shoes and bearing plates shall not be placed on bridge seat bearing areas
that are improperly finished or that are deformed or irregular. They shall be set
level in exact position and elevation and shall have full even bearing. Unless
otherwise specified, the shoes and bearing plates shall be set by the following
methods:

a. The bridge seat bearing area shall be heavily coated with lead paint and
then covered with three layers of 340 2 to 369 8 g (12 to 14 ounces)

least 96 hours, adequate provision being made to keep the grout well
moistened during this period. The grout shall consist of one part
Portland Cement to one part fine-grained sand.

The location of the anchor bolts in relation to the slotted holes in the
expansion shoes correspond to the temperature at the time of erection. The nuts
on the anchor bolts at the expansion end of spans shall be adjusted to permit the
free movement of span. Anchor bolt nuts shall be set by center punching the
threads of the bolts at the face of the nut.

408.3.13 Painting

Unless otherwise specified, metal work shall be given two shop coats of red
lead paint and two field coats of paint as specified under Item 411, Paint.

408.3.14 Placing Concrete

On steel spans, the concrete floor shall not be placed until the span has
been swung or released from the falsework.

The concrete shall be placed symmetrically on the span beginning at the

center and working simultaneously towards each end or beginning at the ends
and working simultaneously towards the center. In either case, the concrete shall
be placed continuously between construction joints designated on the Plans or
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 257/437
 approved in writing by the Engineer.
5/7/2018
Concrete shall be cured specified under Item 407, Concrete Structures.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

408.3.15 Timber Floors

Timber floors of the species and grade indicated on the plans shall be built
as specified under Timber Structures, Item 402.

408.3.16 Field Inspection

All materials and work of erection shall be subject to the inspection of the
Engineer, who shall be given all facilities required.

Materials and workmanship not previously inspected will not inspected after
its delivery to the site of the work. Any materials inspected and accepted prior to
delivery on the work shall be subject to rejection if found defective after delivery.

408.5 Basis of Payment

The quantities, measured as prescribed above, shall be paid for at the

contract until price for the several Pay Items which price and payments shall be
full compensation for furnishing, preparing, fabricating, transporting, placing and
erecting all structural steel and all other materials for the complete structure; for all
shop work, painting and field work; for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the item. Such payment shall constitute full payment for
the completed structure ready for use, and no allowance shall be made for
cofferdam construction, falsework, or other erection expenses as provided under
Subsection 408.3.10.

ITEM 409 – WELDED STRUCTURAL STEEL

409.1 Description

This work shall consist of the joining of structural steel members with welds
of the type, dimensions, and design shown on the Plans and in accordance with
the Specifications.

It is the intent of this Specification to provide for work of a quality

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 258/437

comparable to that required under the Standard Specifications for Welded

 Highway and Railway Bridges of the American Welding Society. In case of
dispute or for situations not adequately provided for in this Specification, those
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
designated Standard Specifications shall be considered as the final authority and
shall govern except as amended by the Special Provisions.

Welding of Structural Steel shall be done only when shown on the Plans or
authorized in writing by the Engineer.

409.2 Materials Requirements

Steel base metal to be welded shall be open-hearth or electric furnace

steel conforming to AASHTO M 183.

All arc-welding electrodes shall conform to the requirements of American

Welding Society Specifications. Electrodes shall be of classification numbers
E7016, E7018 or E7028 as required for the positions, type of current and polarity,
and other conditions of intended use and to conform to any special requirements

409.3 Construction Requirements

409.3.1 Equipment

409.3.1.1 General

All items of equipment for welding and gas cutting shall be so designed and
manufactured and in such condition as to enable qualified welders to follow the
procedures and attain the results prescribed in this Specification.

409.3.1.2 Arc-Welding Equipment

Welding generators and transformers shall be designed expressly for

welding. They shall be capable of delivering steady currents adjustable through a
range ample for the work requirements. They shall respond automatically and
quickly to changes in power requirements due to variations in arc length and shall
deliver full current promptly on striking an arc.
Welding cable shall have sufficient conductivity to avoid overheating and
inadequate current at the arc and shall be effectively insulated against welding
circuit voltage. Earth or ground connections and circuits shall be secured and
adequate to carry the welding currents.

Electrode holders shall grip the electrode firmly and with good electrical
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 259/437

contact.
 Approved automatic welding heads may be used, with suitable auxiliary
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
handling equipment to provide automatic instead of manual control of electrode
and welding arc.

409.3.1.3 Gas-Cutting Equipment

Torches and tips shall be of proper size and type of the work at hand.
Suitable regulators shall afford the welder complete control over the pressure and
rate of flow of each gas.

409.3.1.4 Protective Equipment

All personnel protective equipment shall conform to the American Standard

Association Code for such equipment.

The Contractor shall enforce the use of approved accessories necessary

409.3.2 Welding

409.3.2.1 General

Welding shall be performed by the metal-arc process, using the electrodes

specified with either direct or alternating current.

Surfaces to be welded shall be smooth, uniform and free from fins, tears,
and other defects which would adversely affect the quality of the weld. Edges of
material shall be trimmed by machining, chipping, grinding, or machine gas-cutting
to produce a satisfactory welding edge wherever such edge is thicker than: 13 mm
for sheared edge of material; 16 mm for toes of angles or rolled shapes (other
than wide flange sections); 25 mm for universal mill plate or edges of flange
sections.

The width of root face used, shall be not more than 1.5 mm for parts less
than 10 mm in thickness nor more than 3 mm for parts 10 mm or more in
thickness.

Butt welds shall be proportioned so that their surface contours will lie in
gradual transition curves. For butt welded joints between base metal parts of
unequal thickness, a transition shall be provided on a slope or level not greater
than 1 in 2.5 to join the offset surfaces. This transition may be provided by sloping
the surface of the weld metal or by bevelling the thicker part or by combination of
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 260/437
these two methods.
 Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease or
5/7/2018
other material that will prevent proper welding. Mill scale that withstands vigorous
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

wire brushing or a light film of drying oil or rust inhibitive coating may remain.
Surfaces within 50 mm of any weld location shall be free of any paint or other
material that would prevent proper welding or produce objectionable fumes while
welding.

No operation or actual welding or gas-cutting shall be performed on a

member while it is carrying live load stress or while subject to shock and vibration
and from moving loads. Welding and gas-cutting shall cease in advance of the
application of such loads.

409.3.2.2 Welders

All welding shall be done by approved competent and experienced and fully
qualified welders

Preparation of edges by gas-cutting shall, wherever practicable, be done by

machine gas-cutting. Machine gas-cutting edges shall be substantially as smooth
and regular as those produced by edge planning and shall be left free of slag.
Manual gas cutting shall be permitted only where machine gas-cutting is not
practicable and with the approval of the Engineer. The edge resulting from
manual gas-cutting shall be inspected and smoothed with special care. All re-
entrant corners shall be filleted to a radius at least 19 mm. The cut lines shall not
extend beyond the fillet and all cutting shall follow closely the line prescribed.
409.3.2.4 Assembly

The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be brought into a close contact
as practicable, and no event shall be separated more than 5 mm. If the
separation is 1.5 mm or greater, the leg of the fillet weld shall be increased by the
amount of separation. The separation between faying surfaces of lap joints and of
butt
whichjoints
are landing on a
not sealed bybacking structure shall
welds throughout theirnot exceed
length shall1.5
bemm. The fit close
sufficiently of joints
to
exclude water after painting. Where irregularities in rolled shape or plates, after
straightening, do not permit contact within the above limits, the procedure
necessary to bring the material within these limits shall be subject to the approval
of the Engineer.

Cutting parts to be joined by butt welds shall be carefully aligned. Where

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 261/437
the parts are effectively restrained against bending due to eccentricity or
alignment, a maximum offset of 10 percent of the thickness or the thinner part
 joined, but in no case more than 3 mm, may be permitted as a departure from the
5/7/2018
theoretical alignment. In connecting alignment in such cases, the parts shall not
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

be drawn into a greater slope than two degrees (1 in 30). Measurement of offset
shall be between centerline of parts unless otherwise shown on the Plans.

When parts abutting edge to edge differ in thickness, the joint shall be of
such form that the slope of either surface through the transition zone does not
exceed 1 in 2.5, the thicker part being bevelled, if necessary.

Members to be welded shall be brought into correct alignment and held in

position by bolts, clamps, wedges, guy lines, struts, other suitable devices or tack
welds until welding has been completed. The use of jigs and fixtures is
recommended where practicable. Such fastening devices as may be used shall
be adequate to insure safety.

Plug and slot welds may be used to transmit shear in a lap joint or to

The length of the slot for a slot weld not exceed ten times the thickness of
the weld. The width of the slot shall not be less than the thickness of the part
containing it plus 8 mm nor shall it be greater than 2.25 times the thickness of the
weld.

The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the corners rounded
to a radius not less than the thickness of the part containing it, except those ends
which extend to the edge of the part.
The minimum spacing of lines of slot welds in a direction transverse to their
length shall be 4 times the width of the slot. The minimum center to center
spacing in a longitudinal direction on any line shall be 2 times the length of the
slot.

The thickness of plug or slot welds in material 16 mm or less in thickness

shall be equal
thickness, to be
it shall theat thickness of the
least one-half thematerial.
thickness In
of material overbut
the material 16not
mm in
less
than 16 mm.

Tack welds, located where the final welds will later be made, shall be
subject to the same quality requirements as the final weld. Tack welds shall be as
small as practicable and where encountered in the final welding, shall be cleaned
and fused thoroughly with the final weld. Defective, cracked or broken tack welds
shall be removed before final welding.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 262/437
 Members or component parts of structures shall be assembled and
5/7/2018 matchmarked prior to erection to insure accurate assembly and adjustment of
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

position on final erection. Painted assembly marks shall be removed from any
surface to be welded.

409.3.2.5 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage Stresses

In assembling and joining parts of a structure or a built-up member and in

welding reinforcing parts to existing members, the procedure and sequence of
welding shall be such as will avoid distortion and minimize shrinkage stresses.

As far as practicable, long parallel lines of welding on a part or member

shall be executed concurrently, and all welds shall be deposited in a sequence
that will balance the applied heat of welding on various sides as much as possible
while the welding progresses.

Where part or member is to be welded on both ends into a rigid structure or

assembly, the connection at which the greatest shrinkage will occur in the
direction of the length of the part or member, shall be made while the part or
member is free to move in the direction of the shrinkage; and the connection
involving the least shrinkage shall be made last.

A weld designed to sustain tensile stress shall be made in such a way that
their welding is being performed at any point, all parts that would offer restraint
against shrinkage can shrink, deform or move enough to preclude serious
shrinkage stresses.

In welding of built-up members of heavy sections, particularly those T or H-

shapes where the flanges are considerably heavier than the stems or webs, and
in any case where the component parts are 38 mm or greater in thickness, special
care shall be exercised during welding to avoid weld cracking. In the welding of
members of such shall
welding operation heavybe section, thenot
equal, and temperature ofoC.
less than 55 contiguous areasthe
If necessary, about a
lighter
parts shall be heated while the weld is cooling, to keep the temperature of
contiguous parts substantially equal.

In the fabrication of cover-plated beams and built-up members, all shop

splices in each component part shall be made before such component part is
welded to other parts of the member.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 263/437

In making all butt-welded splices in rolled shapes and in making butt-

 welded field splices in built-up sections (such as in H or I-sections) the sequence
5/7/2018 and procedure of welding shall be such as to take into account unequal amounts
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

of expansion or contraction in the parts being welded. The procedure and

sequence shall be such that while the weld and the heated base metal are
contracting at any point, any part of the member that would furnish restraint
against such contraction can move or shrink enough to prevent the shrinkage of
the heated metal from producing harmful internal stresses. The procedure and
sequence that is used for making such splices shall be planned in advance in full
detail and submitted to the Engineer and shall be subject to his approval.

The ends of all butt welds in flanges of beams and girders shall be made
with extension bars regardless of the thickness of such flanges.

Welding shall not be done when surfaces are wet from condensation or rain
which is falling on the surfaces to be welded; nor during periods of high winds
unless the welding operator and the work are properly protected

Arc lengths and electrical potential and current shall be suited to the
thickness of material, type of groove and other circumstances attendant to the
work.

The maximum size of electrode permitted shall be 5 mm with the following

exceptions:

1. The maximum size for flat position welding of all passes except the root
pass shall be 8 mm.
2. The maximum size for horizontal fillet welds shall be 6 mm.

The electrode for the single pass fillet weld and for the root passes of all
multiple layer welds in all cases shall be of the proper size to insure thorough
fusion and penetration with freedom from slag inclusions.

A singleparallel
up of several layer of the weld
beads, shallmetal, whether
not exceed 3 mmdeposited-in oneexcept
in thickness pass or made
that the
bead at the root may be 6 mm in thickness if the position of welding and the
viscosity of the weld metal permit control of the latter so that it does not over flow
upon unfused base metal.

The maximum size of fillet weld which may be made in one pass shall be 8
mm except that for vertical welds made upward the maximum size made in one
pass shall be 13 mm.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 264/437
 In vertical welding the first root pass shall be formed from the bottom
5/7/2018
upward. Succeeding passes may be formed by any technique that will fulfill the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

requirements of the Specification and Plans.

The electrode manipulation during welding shall insure that:

1. Complete fusion between the base metal and the deposited weld metal
is obtained.

2. The melted base metal is replaced by weld metal so that no undercut

remains along the edges of the finished weld.

3. The molten weld metal floats all slag, oxide and gases to the surface
behind the advancing arc.

Each time the arc is started either to begin a weld or to continue partly

Before welding over previously deposited metal, the slag shall be removed
and the weld and adjacent base metal shall be brushed clean. This requirement
shall apply not only to cratered areas but also when welding is resumed after any
interruption. It shall not, however, restrict the making of plug and slot welds, in
accordance with the following paragraphs.

In making plug welds the following techniques shall be used:

1. For flat welds, the arc shall be carried around the root of the joint and
then weaved along a spiral path to the center of the hole, fusing and
depositing a layer of weld metal in the root and bottom of the joint. The
arc shall then be carried to the periphery of the hole, and the procedure
repeated, fusing and depositing successive layers to fill the hole to the
depth required. The slag covering the weld metal shall be kept molten,
or nearly so, until the weld is finished. If the arc is broken, except briefly
for changing electrodes, the slag must be allowed to cool and shall be

completely removed before restarting the weld.

2. For vertical welds, the arc shall be started at the root of the joint, at the
lower side of the hole and carried upward on the zigzag path, depositing
a layer about 5 mm thick on the exposed face at the thinner plate and
fused to it and to the side of the hole. After cleaning the slag from the
weld, other layers shall be similarly deposited to fill the hole to the
required depth.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 265/437

3. For overhead welds, the procedure shall be the same as for flat welds
 except that the slag shall be allowed to cool and shall be completely
5/7/2018
removed after depositing each successive layer until the hole is filled to
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the required depth.

Slot welds shall be made with a technique similar to that specified above
for plug welds, except that if the length of the slot exceeds three times the width,
or if the slot extends to the edges of the part of the technique specified above for
making plug welds shall be followed for the type of flat position welds.

409.3.2.7 Details of Welds

The following tabulation shows that the relation between weld size and the
maximum thickness of material on which various sizes of fillet welds may be used:

Size of Fillet Weld Maximum Thickness of Part

5 mm 13 mm

The maximum size of fillet weld that may be used along the edge of
material 6 mm or more in thickness shall be 1.5 mm less than the thickness of the
material.

The minimum effective length of fillet weld shall be four times its size and in
no case less than 38 mm.

Fillet welds terminating at the corners of parts or members shall, wherever

practicable, be turned continuously full size around the corners for a distance not
less than twice the nominal size of the weld.

Intermittent fillet welds, preferably, shall not be used. They shall be

permitted only where the required weld area is less than that of a continuous fillet
weld of the minimum size. If used on main members, they shall be chain
intermittent welds. In all other cases, chain intermittent welding is preferable to
staggered intermittent welding.

Spacing of intermittent fillet welds shall be measured between the center of

the weld segments. The spacing shall conform to the following requirements
unless calculated stresses between the parts require closer spacing:

1. At the end of members, there shall preferably be continuous longitudinal

fillet welds at least as long as the width of the element or member being
connected.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 266/437

2. The clear spacing in the direction of stress of stitch welds that connect
 plates to other plates or to shapes shall not exceed:
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
a. For compression members ….10 times the thickness of the thinner
part but not more than 300 mm.
b. For tension members ….. 14 times the thickness of the thinner part
but not more than 300 mm.
The spacing transverse to the direction of stress shall not exceed
24 times the thickness of the thinner part connected.

3. For members composed of two or more rolled shapes in contact with

one another, the longitudinal spacing of stitch welds shall not exceed
600 mm.

Fillet welds in holes or slots may be used to transmit shear in lap joints or
to prevent the buckling or separation of lapped parts. The fillet welds in a hole or
slot may overlap

design requirements shall not be a cause for rejection, but in case excess weld
metal involves serious malformation, such work shall be rejected.

All fillet welds shall be of acceptable types. All fillet welds that carry
reversed stresses running in a direction perpendicular to their longitudinal axis
shall be of the concave type or the 0-gee type when the fillet weld is flushed with
the edge of a member. When one of these types is specifically indicated on the
Plans for a weld, it shall be of that type.

Butt welds shall preferably be made with a slight reinforcement, except as

may be otherwise provided, and shall have no defects. The height of
reinforcement shall be not more than 3 mm.

All butt welds, except produced with aid of backing material, shall have the
root of the initial layer chipped out or otherwise cleaned to sound metal and
welded in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. Butt welds

made with
have the themetal
weld use of a backing
thoroughly of the
fused withsame materials
the backing as the base metal shall
materials.

Ends of butt welds shall be extended past the edges of the parts joined by
means of extension bars providing a similar joint preparation and having a width
not less than the thickness of the thicker part jointed; or for material 19 mm or less
in thickness, the ends of the welds shall be chipped or cut down to solid metal and
side welds applied to fill out the ends to the same reinforcement as the face of the
welds. Extension bars shall be removed upon completion and cooling of the weld
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 267/437

and the ends of the weld made smooth and flush with the edges of the abutting
 parts.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
409.3.2.8 Quality of Welds

Weld metal shall be solid throughout except that very small gas pockets
and small inclusions of oxide or slag may be accepted if well dispersed and if
none exceeds 1.5 mm in greatest dimension, and if the sum of the greatest
dimensions of2 all such defects of weld metal area does not exceed 15 mm in an
area of 10 cm .

There shall be complete fusion between the weld metal and the base metal
and between successive passes throughout the joint.

Welds shall be free from overlap and the base metal free from
undercutting. All craters shall be filled to the full cross-section of the welds.

1. Removal of part or all of the welds shall be affected by chipping,

grinding or gas-gouging.

2. Defective or unsound welds shall be corrected either by removing and

replacing the welds, or as follows:

a. Excessive convexity – Reduce to size by removal of excess weld

metal.
b. Shrinkage crack in base metal, craters and excessive porosity –
Remove defective portion of base and weld metal down to sound
metal and deposit additional weld metal.
c. Undercutting, undersize and excessive concavity – Clean and
deposit additional weld metal.
d. Overlapping and lack of fusion – Remove and replace the defective
length of weld.
e. Slag inclusion – Remove those parts of the weld containing slag and

fill with weld

f. Removal metal.
of adjacent base metal during welding – Clean and form
full size by depositing additional weld metal.

3. Where corrections require the depositing of additional weld metal, the

electrode used shall be smaller than the electrode used in making the
original weld.

4. A cracked weld shall be removed throughout its length, unless by the

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 268/437
use of acid etching, magnetic inspection or other equally positive
 means, the extent of the crack can be ascertained to be limited, in
which case sound metal 50 mm or more beyond each end of the crack
5/7/2018
need not be removed. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

5. In removing defective parts of a weld, the gas-gouging, chipping or

grinding shall not extend into the base metal any substantial amount
beyond the depth of the web penetration unless cracks or other defects
exist in the base metal.

6. Where the work performed subsequent to the making of a deficient weld

has rendered the weld inaccessible or has caused new conditions which
would make the correction of the deficiency dangerous or ineffectual,
the original condition shall be restored by renewal of welds or members,
or both before making the necessary corrections, or else the deficiency
shall be compensated by additional work according to a revised design
d b th E i

409.3.2.10 Stress Relieving

Peening to reduce residual stress of multi-layer welds may be used only if

authorized and ordered by the Engineer. Care shall be exercised to prevent
overpeening which may cause overlapping, scaling, flecking or excessive cold
working of weld and base metal.

409.3.2.11 Cleaning and Protective Coatings

Painting shall not be done until the work has been accepted and shall be in
accordance with the Specification. The surface to be painted shall be cleaned of
spatter, rust, loose scale, oil and dirt. Slag shall be cleaned from all welds.

Welds that are to be galvanized shall be treated to remove every particle of

slag.

409.3.2.12 Identification
The operator shall place his identification mark with crayon, or paint, near
the welds made by him.

409.3.2.13 Inspection

On completion of the welding work, inspection shall be carried out by an

Inspector appointed by the Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 269/437

The size and contour of welds shall be measured with suitable gauges.
 The size and contour of welds shall be measured with suitable gauges.
The inspector shall identify with a distinguishing mark all welds that he has
5/7/2018
inspected and accepted. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The Contractor shall remove and replace, or correct as instructed, all welds
found defective or deficient. He shall also replace all methods found to produce
inferior results, with methods which will produce satisfactory work.

In the event that fault welding or the removal for rewelding of faulty welding
shall damage the base metal, the Contractor shall remove and replace the
damaged material.

409.4 Measurement and Payment

Unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions, welded structural steel

t t h ll tb d d id f t l b t th t th f h ll

ITEM 410 – TREATED AND UNTREATED TIMBER

410.1 Description

This Item shall consist of structural timber of the specie and size called for
on the Plans, either treated or untreated as called for in the Proposal. It shall
include the furnishing of the timber, the framing, erecting, furnishing of hardware
and the furnishing of paint and paintings if paint is called for on the Plans or in the
Special Provisions.
410.2 Material Requirements

410.2.1 Timber

Timber shall be the specie specified on the Plans. Unless otherwise noted
on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, only the best grade shall be used. It

shall be free
any defect from will
which loose knots,
impair its splits,
strengthworm holes decay,
or render warp,
it unfit for ring separation,
its intended use. Anyor
specie specified on the Plans may be used for untreated timber and if that specie
is not available, a specie of equivalent strength and durability may be used if
authorized by the Engineer. If the timber is to be treated, only those species shall
be used which are known to possess properties which make them favorable to
treatment.

410.2.2 Paint
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 270/437

When painting of timber is required, the paint shall conform to the

 requirements of Item 411, Paint.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

410.2.3 Hardware

Hardware shall conform to the requirements of Item 402, Timber

Structures.

410.2.4 Preservatives

The preservatives shall be creosote oil or creosote petroleum oil blend as

called for on the Plans or by the Special Provisions, and shall conform to the
Standard Specifications for Pressure Treatment of Timber Products, ASTM D-
1760.

Wh ti b i i t d d f i th t t l il bl d

process. The process shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 133, preservatives

and pressure treatment process for timber, but with such changes in
temperatures, pressures, duration of treatment and other factors affecting the final
treatment that experience has shown to be necessary in the treatment of
structural timbers sawn from woods native to the Philippines. The treatment shall
be so regulated that the curing process will not induce excessive checking.

The minimum penetration of the preservative into the surface of the timber
shall be 20 mm. The minimum retention of the preservative per cubic metre of
timber shall be as follows:

For general use, 192 kg by empty cell process

For marine use, 320 kg by full cell process

The Engineer shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the date that
the treating process will be performed in order that the untreated timber, the

treatment shall
Engineer process, andthe
inspect thetimber
finished
priortreatment timber
to treatment may all beconformance
to determine inspected. with
The
those Specifications and suitability of conditions for treatment. He shall be
permitted free access to the plant in order that temperatures, pressures and
quantities and type of treatment materials used may be observed. Samples of the
creosote or creosote petroleum oil mixture shall be furnished as required for tests.

After completion of the treatment, the timber shall be checked to determine

penetration of treatment, amount of checking quantity of free preservative
remaining on the timber and will check any other visual evidence that the
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 271/437

treatment has been performed in a satisfactory manner. The penetration of

 treatment shall be determined by boring a sufficient number of well-distributed
5/7/2018 holes to determine the average penetration. All such holes shall be plugged with
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

plugs approximately 1.6 mm larger in diameter that the bit used in boring the
holes.

If the penetration of preservative is less than the required amount, the

entire charge, or such parts thereof as are determined by the Inspector to be
unsatisfactory, may be retreated. If after retreatment the penetration is still
insufficient, the treated pieces shall be rejected.

Any excessive checking caused by the treating process shall be cause for
rejection of the pieces in which the excessive checking occurs.

The treating plant shall be equipped with adequate thermometers and

th t th b t l t ll d d

the nominal dimension of the timber even though the actual dimensions may be
scant. The measurement of timber shall include only such timber as a part of the
completed and accepted work and will not include any timber required for a
falsework, bracing or other timber required in the erection.

410.4 Basis of Payment

The quantities, determined as provided in Section 410.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for
Timber or Untreated Timber as called for in the Proposal, which price and
payment shall constitute full compensate for furnishing all timber, for preservative
treating when required, and for the delivery, framing, erecting, painting if required,
and for the furnishing of all labor, hardware, tools, equipment and incidentals
necessary to complete the Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

410 (1) Timber Cubic Meter
410 (2) Treated Timber Cubic Meter

ITEM 411 – PAINT

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 272/437

411.1 Description
5/7/2018 This Item shall consist of furnishing and applying all paint materials
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

including vehicles, pigments, pastes, driers, thinners and mixed paints for steel
and wooden structures; sampling testing and packing; preparation of the surface
and application of paint to structures.

411.2 Materials Requirements

411.2.1 General

Paint, except aluminum paint, shall consist of pigments of the required

fineness and composition ground to the desired consistency in linseed oil in a
suitable grinding machine, to which shall be added additional oil, thinner and drier
as required.

1. The paint shall show no excessive settling and shall easily redisperse
with a paddle to a smooth, homogeneous state. The paint shall show
no curdling, livering, caking or color separation and shall be free from
lumps and skins.

2. The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good leveling

properties and shall show no running or sagging when applied to a
smooth vertical surface.

3. The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish, free from roughness grit,
unevenness and other imperfections.

4. The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in a ¾ filled tightly closed
container.

411.2.2 The paint shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications indicated
as follows:

Ready Mixed Red Lead AASHTO M 72 and PNS

Paint Type I, II, III & IV
Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 69 and PNS
Type I & II
White & Tinted Ready
Mixed Paint AASHTO M 70
Foliage Green Bridge
Paint
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 AASHTO M 67 273/437

Black Paint for Bridges

 And Timber Structures AASHTO M 68
5/7/2018
Basic Lead-Silico-Chromate DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Ready Mixed Primer AASHTO M 229

Ready Mixed Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 260 and PNS

411.2.3 Drier

This Specification covers both straight oil drier (material free from resins
and gums), and Japan drier (material containing varnish gums). The drier shall be
composed of lead manganese or cobalt or a mixture of any of these elements,
combined with a suitable fatty oil, with or without resins or gums, and mineral
spirits or turpentine, or a mixture of these solvents. The drier shall conform to the
following requirements:

1 A F f di d d d

4. Drying – It shall mix with pure raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1
volume of drier to 19 volume of oil without curdling and the resulting
mixture when flowed on glass shall dry in not more than 18 hours.

5. Color – When mixed with pure, raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1
volume of drier to 8 volume of oil, the resulting mixture shall be darker
than a solution of 6 grams of Potassium Dichromate in 13 cc of pure
Sulfuric Acid (sp.gr. 1.84).

411.3 Construction Requirements

411.3.1 Proportion of Mixing

It is the intent of this Specification to provide a paint of proper brushing

consistency, which will not run, steak or sag and which will have satisfactory
drying qualities.

411.3.2 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats On Structural Steel

The paint shall be mixed in the proportion of 240 grams of aluminum

powder or paste per liter of vehicle of long oil spar varnish. This makes a paint
containing 21 percent pigment and 79 percent vehicle. The weighed amount of
powder or paste shall be placed in a suitable mixing container and the measured
volume of vehicle poured over it. The paste or powder shall be incorporated in the
paint by vigorous stirring with a paddle. The powder or paste will readily disperse
in the vehicle. Before removing any paint from the container, the paint shall be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 274/437

thoroughly stirred to insure a uniform mixture, and the paint shall be suitably
 stirred during use. The paint shall be mixed on the job and only enough for one
5/7/2018
day’s use shall be mixed at one time. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

When two field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the first coat shall be
tinted with lampblack paste or Prussian blue paste in the quantity of 24 grams/liter
of paint. The exact quantity used shall be sufficient to give a contrast in color
which can be readily distinguished. When three field coats of aluminum paint are
specified, the second coat shall be tinted.

411.3.3 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber

The paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum Paint for Structural
Steel except that the proportions shall be 270 grams of aluminum powder or paste
to one litre of vehicle.

vehicle, the name and address of the manufacturers, and the stencil of the
authorized inspecting agency. Any package or container not so marked will not
be accepted for use.

411.3.5 Sampling and Testing

Method of sampling shall be as follows:

1. obtained
One 20-litre can
for 100 sample
cans of the in originalmaterial
delivered unopened container
or 10% shall be
fraction thereof.

2. One 4-litre can sample in original unopened container shall be obtained

for every 100 cans or fraction thereof of the delivered material.

Methods of testing will be in accordance with the applicable AASHTO or

ASTM Methods.

411.3.6 Painting

411.3.6.1

The painting of structure shall include the proper preparation of the surface;
the application, protection and drying of the paint coatings, the protection of the
pedestrians, vehicular or other traffic upon or underneath the structures, the
protection of all parts of the structure (both superstructure and substructure)
against disfigurement by spatters, splashes and smirches of paint or of paint
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 275/437

materials; and the supplying of all tools, tackle, scaffolding labor, paint and
 materials necessary for the entire work.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Paint shall not be applied during rain, storms or when the air is misty, or
when, in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are otherwise unsatisfactory for
the work. Paint shall not be applied upon damp surfaces or upon metal which has
absorbed heat sufficient to cause the paint to blister and produce a pervious paint
film.
No wide flat brush shall be used. All brushes preferably shall be either
round or oval but if flat brushes are used, they shall not exceed 100 mm in width.

The paint when applied shall be so manipulated as to produce a uniform

even coating in close contact with the surface being painted, and shall be worked
into all corners and crevices.

When a paint gun is used, the equipment used shall be of an approved

type and shall have provision for agitation of paint in the spray container. In the
case of aluminum paint, the pressure used shall be only that necessary to secure
adequate atomization. If in the opinion of the Engineer unsatisfactory results are
obtained from the use of a spray gun, its use shall be discontinued and the
painting completed by the use of brushes.

411.3.6.2 Painting Structural Steel

Surfaces of metals to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust, loose

mill, scale, dirt, oil or grease, and other foreign substances. Unless cleaning is to
be done by sandblasting, all weld areas, before cleaning is begun, shall be
neutralized with a proper chemical, after which they shall be thoroughly rinsed
with water. Cleaning may be by any of the following three methods:

1. Hand Cleaning

The removal of rust, scale and dirt shall be done by the use of metal
brushes, scrapers, chisels, hammers or other effective means. Oil and
grease shall be removed by the use of gasoline or benzene. Bristle or
wood fiber brushes shall be used for removing loose dust.

2. Sandblasting

Sandblasting shall remove all scale and other substances down to

the base metal. Special attention shall be given to the cleaning of
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 276/437
corners and re-entrant angels. Before painting, sand adhering to the
 steel in corners and elsewhere shall be removed. The cleaning shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to any painting. The material shall be
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
painted before the rust forms and not later than 2 hours after cleaning.

3. Flame Cleaning

Oil and grease shall be removed by washing with suitable solvent.

Excess solvent shall be wiped from the work before proceeding with
subsequent operation. The surface to be painted shall be cleaned and
dehydrated (freed of occluded moisture) by the passage of
oxyacetylene flames which have an oxygen to acetylene of at least one.
The inner cones of these flames shall have a ratio length to port
diameter of at least 8 and shall not be more than 4 mm center to center.
The oxyacetylene flames shall be traversed over the surface of the steel

free materials and foreign particles. Compressed air shall not be used
for this operation. Paint shall be applied promptly after the steel has
been cleaned and while the temperature of the steel is still above that of
the surrounding atmosphere, so that there will be no recondensation of
moisture on the cleaned surfaces.

4. Shop Painting of Structural Steel

When all
accepted, fabrication
all surfaces notwork is completed
painted and hasshall
before assembling beenbetentatively
given two
coats of Red Lead Shop Paint conforming to the requirements of this
Specification. (The inside of top chords for trusses and laced members
or inaccessible parts, except contact surfaces, may be painted before
assembling). Shipping pieces shall not be located for shipment until
thoroughly dry. No painting shall be done after loading the materials on
transport vehicles.

Erection marks for field identifications of members shall be painted

upon previously painted surfaces.

With the exception of abutting joints and base plates, machine-

finished surface shall be coated, as soon as practicable after
acceptance with a hot mixture of white lead and tallow before removal
from the shop. The composition used for coating machine-finished
surface shall be mixed in the following proportions:
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 277/437
Pure Tallow 1,915 grams
 Pure White Lead 958 grams
Pure Linseed Oil 1.0 liter
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

5. Field Painting of Structural Steel

When the erection work is complete including riveting and

straightening of bent metal; all adhering rust, scale, dirt, grease or other
foreign material shall be removed as specified under cleaning of
surfaces.

As soon as the Engineer has examined and approved all field rivets,
the heads of such rivets and field bolts, all welds and any surfaces from
which the shop coat of paint has become worn off or has otherwise
become defective, shall be cleaned and thoroughly covered with one

The following provisions shall apply to the application of all field

coats. To secure a maximum coating on edges of plates or shapes,
rivet heads and other parts subjected to special wear and attack, these
parts shall first be stripped, followed immediately by the general painting
of the whole surface, including the edges and rivet heads.

The application of the final coats shall be deferred until adjoining

concrete work has

have damaged that been
paint, placed and finished.
the surface If concreting
shall be recleaned and operations
repainted.

411.3.6.3 Painting and Timber Structures

Timber structures shown on the Plans to be painted, shall be given two

coats of the specified materials, which shall be thoroughly brushed in. Additional
coats shall be required when so specified on the Plans. All surfaces shall be
thoroughly dry before painting, and each coat shall be allowed to stand for three
or four days, or until thoroughly dry before applying the succeeding coat.

Timber which required painting must be seasoned timber surfaced on 4

sides. It shall be either untreated or salt-treated timber as specified on the Plans.

The entire surface of all untreated timber that is to be painted, shall be

given a priming coat immediately after the material is delivered to the project. All
contact surfaces shall receive the second coat paint.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 278/437
Special care shall be taken during construction and handling so that the
pieces to be painted do not come in contact, except when required, with the
 creosoted materials and that no oil is brushed on the same during construction
5/7/2018 operations. The Contractor shall be required to pile such pieces separately from
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the creosoted materials and keep them from contact with same until ready for
erection.

Creosoted materials such as guardrails and guide posts which are to be

painted, shall be painted with aluminum paint as specified above.

411.3.6.4 Painting Galvanized Surface

For the purpose of conditioning the surface of galvanized surfaces to be

painted, the painting shall be deferred as long as possible in order that the surface
may weather.

2. The surfaces, when dry, may then be painted as described.

411.3.6.5 Repainting Existing Structures

When called for on the Plans or in the Special Provisions, existing

structures shall be given the number and kind of coats of field paint as stipulated.
The surface to be repainted shall be cleaned as specified under Subsection

411.3.6.2,
loose paint Painting
shall beStructural
removed Steel, with thechipping,
by scraping, added provisions
or brushingthat as
all may
dead be
or
necessary. Timber railings, name plates, planking and other interfering parts shall
be removed before cleaning is begun and shall be replaced after the painting has
been completed and the last coat has thoroughly dried. The application of the
coat shall be as specified under Subsection 411.3.6.2, (5), Field Painting of
Structural Steel.

411.4 Measurement and Payment

Painting shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof
shall be considered as included in the contract unit price of the items where called
for.

ITEM 412 – ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 279/437

412.1 Description
5/7/2018 412.1.1 Scope DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

This Item shall consist of the requirement for elastomeric bearing pads
whose main function is to transfer loads or accommodate relative movement
between a bridge superstructure and its supporting structure, or both while
avoiding damaging strain and additional tension. Elastomeric bearings shall
include unreinforced pads (consisting of elastomer only) and reinforced bearings
with steel laminates.

412.1.2 General Requirements

All bearings shall be designed in accordance with specifications contained

c. Steel-Laminated Elastomeric Bearing without External Load Plates

d. Steel-Laminated Elastomeric Bearing with External Load Plate(s)

A laminated bearing pad is required when the thickness of the plain pad is
more than 31.75 mm and the compressive strain is more than 15%.

412.2 Material Requirements

The elastomer for the manufacture of the bearing is furnished in two types
as follows:

1. Type CR-Chloroprene Rubber

2. Type NR-Natural Rubber

The elastomer compound used in the construction of a bearing shall

contain only either natural rubber or a chloroprene rubber as the raw polymer. No
reclaimed rubber shall be used.

Steel laminates used for reinforcement shall be made from rolled mild steel
conforming to ASTM A 36, A 570 or equivalent, unless otherwise specified by the
Engineer. The laminates shall have a minimum nominal thickness of 20 gage.

412.2.1 Physical Requirements

A. The elastomer compound shall meet the minimum requirement of Table

1.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 280/437

B. Dimensions and Permissible Variations

5/7/2018 All elastomeric layers, for example, plain bearing pads, laminates, and
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

covers, shall be of uniform thickness unless otherwise specified in the contract or

purchase order.

All internal steel laminates shall be of uniform thickness. When specified in

the contract or purchase order, the thickness of the outer steel laminates may
differ if not adjacent to an external load plate.

The minimum thickness of internal steel laminates shall be 1.5 mm or 0.060

in (16 gage) when the greater of the length or width of a rectangular bearing or
diameter of a circular bearing is less than 450 mm or 18 in. In all other cases, the
minimum thickness shall be 2 mm or 0.075 inch (14 gage).

Table 1 – Quality Control Properties of Elastomer

Natural Rubber Chloroprene
(NR) Rubber (CR)
Grade (Durometer)
Physical Properties:
A. Before Aging
Tensile Strength, MPa (D412) 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5
(min.) (min.) (min.) (min.)
Elongation, % (D412) 400 300 350 300
(min.) (min.) (min.) (min.)
Durometer Hardness, Shore Pts. 60±5 70±5 60±5 70±5
(D2240)
Tear Resistance, N/mm (D624) 31.5 31.5 31.5 31.5
(min.) (min.) (min.) (min.)
Compression Set , % (D395) 25 25 35 35

Method B, Temperature, oC (max.)

70 (max.)
70 (max.)
100 (max.)
100
B. After Aging
Temperature of the Test, oC 70 70 100 100
Aging Time, Hours 168 168 70 70
Tensile Strength, % (D573) -25 -25 -15 -15
(max.) (max.) (max.) (max.)
Elongation, % -25 -25 -40 -40

Durometer Hardness, Shore Pts. (max.)

+10 (max.)
+10 (max.)
+15 (max.)
+15
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 281/437
(max.) (max.) (max.) (max.)
 Other Properties:
Ozone Resistance (D1149)
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Partial Pressure, MPa 25 25 100 100
Duration, Hours 48 48 100 100
Tested at 20% strain 37.7 oC ±1 oC No No
Mounting procedure D518 - - cracks cracks
Procedure A
Brittleness D2137, low temp.
Brittleness at -40 oC Pass Pass Pass Pass
Shear Modulus
Nominal Hardness Shear
Modulus at 23 oC, MPa 0.85- 1.13- 0.85- 1.13-
1.1 1.84 1.1 1.84

Table 2 – Tolerances
Mm
Overall vertical dimensions
Design thickness 32 mm (1 ¼ in) or less -0, +3
Design thickness over 32 mm (1 ¼) -0, +6
Overall horizontal dimensions
914 mm (36 in) and less -0, +6

Over 914 mm
Thickness (36 in) layers of
of individual ±20 percent -0, +12
of design value but
elastomer (laminated bearing only) at no more than ±3 mm (1/8 in)
any point within the bearing
Variation from a plane parallel to the
theoretical surface: (as determined by
measurements at the edge of the
bearings)
Top Slope relative to the bottom of
no more than 0.005 radian
Sides 6
Position of exposed connection members 3
Edge cover of embedded laminated -0, +3
connection members
Size of holes, slots or inserts ±3
Position of holes, slots, or inserts ±3

412.3 Construction Requirements

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 282/437
 412.3.1 Handling, Transport, Storage and Installation
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

During handling, transport, storage, and installation, bearings shall be kept

clean and protected from mechanical damage, heat, contaminants and other
deleterious effects.

Bearings shall be placed on surfaces that are plane to within 1.6 mm and
unless the bearings are placed in opposing pairs, horizontal to within 0.01 radians.

Any lack of parallelism between the top of bearing and the underside of the
girder that exceeds 0.01 radians shall be corrected either grinding of the surface,
grout pack bearing seats or modification of the bearing such that the intended
bearing placement is as originally designed with the least amount of bearing

Dismantling at the site shall not be done unless absolutely necessary for
inspecting or installation.

412.3.2 Sampling

Sampling, testing and acceptance consideration will be made on a lot

basis. A lot shall be further defined as the smallest number of bearings as

determined by the following criteria:

a. A lot shall not exceed a single contract or project quantity.
b. A lot shall not exceed 50 bearings.
c. A lot shall consist of those bearings of the same type regardless of load
capacity.

For acceptance purposes, bearing from within the lot shall be selected at
random as samples for inspection and testing.

A minimum of three bearings shall be taken from the lot for testing. If the
number of bearings in the lot exceeds 50 then for each additional 50 or part
thereof, one additional bearing shall be taken for testing.

412.3.3 Acceptance Requirements

1. If lack of elastomer to steel bond is indicated, the bearing shall be

rejected.
2. If laminate placement faults are observed which results in elastomer
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 283/437

layer thickness that exceed the tolerances in Table 2, the bearing shall be
 rejected.
3. If there are at least three separate surface cracks which are each at
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
least 2 mm wide and 2 mm deep. The bearing shall be rejected.
4. Record the median compressive stiffness (K) of the bearing of median
stiffness.The compressive stiffness of each bearing tested shall not differ form (K)
by more 5. than
For 10%.
each bearing that fails to meet the requirements in (1), two
additional bearings maybe sampled and shall meet the requirements in (1) or
the lot shall be rejected.
6. If the lot is not rejected, the bearing of median stiffness (K) shall be
subjected to the elastomeric material tests in (2).

412.4 Method of Measurement

412.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 412.4, shall be
paid for at the contract unit price for Elastomeric Bearing Pads which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials,
including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

412 Elastomeric Bearing Pads Each

ITEM 413 - PREFORMED SPONGE RUBBER AND CORK EXPANSION JOINT

FILLERS FOR CONCRETE PAVING AND STRUCTURAL
CONSTRUCTION

Preformed sponge rubber and cork expansion joint fillers for concrete
paving and structural construction shall conform to the applicable requirements of
AASHTO M 153.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 284/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 285/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

PART G – DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES

ITEM 500 – PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS

500.1 Description

This item shall consist of the construction or reconstruction of pipe culverts

and storm drains, hereinafter referred to as “conduit” in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or
as established by the Engineer.

500.2 Material Requirements

Material shall meet the requirements specified in the following

specifications:

Zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron or steel

culverts and underdrains AASHTO M 36

Cast iron culvert pipe AASHTO M 64

Concrete sewer, storm drain and culvert pipe AASHTO M 86

Reinforced
sewerconcrete
pipe culvert, storm drain and AASHTO M 170
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 286/437

Bituminous coated corrugated metal culvert pipe

 Bituminous coated corrugated metal culvert pipe
and pipe arches AASHTO M 190
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Reinforced concrete arch culvert, storm drain

and sewer pipe AASHTO M 206

Reinforced concrete elliptical culvert, storm drain

and sewer pipe AASHTO M 207

Asbestos cement pipe for culverts and storm drains AASHTO M 217

Joint Mortar – Joint mortar for concrete pipes shall consist of 1 part, by
volume of Portland Cement and two (2) parts of approved sand with water as

Oakum – Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipes shall be made from
hemp (Cannavis Sativa) line or Benares Sunn fiber or from a combination of
these fibers. The oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished and practically
free from lumps, dirt and extraneous matter.

Hot poured joint sealing compound AASHTO M 173

Bedding material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 500.3.2,

Bedding.

Backfill material shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 500.3.6,

Backfilling.

When the location of manufacturing plants allow, the plants will be

inspected periodically for compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and

material samples
materials will be obtained
quality requirements. for shall
This laboratory
be thetesting
basis for
forcompliance
acceptancewith
of
manufacturing lots as to quality.

Prior to and during incorporation of materials in the work, these materials

will be subjected to the latest inspection and approval of the Engineer.

500.3 Construction Requirements

500.3.1 Trenches Excavation

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 287/437

Trenches shall be excavated in accordance with the requirement of Item

 103, Structure Excavation, to a width sufficient to allow for proper jointing of the
5/7/2018
conduit and thorough compaction of the bedding and backfill materials under and
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

around the conduit. Where feasible, trench wall shall be vertical.

The completed trench bottom shall be firm for its full length and width.
Where required, in the case of crop drains, the trench shall have a longitudinal
camber of the magnitude specified.

When so specified on the Plans, the excavation for conduits placed in

embankment fill, shall be made after the embankment has been completed to the
specified or directed height above the designed grade of the conduit.

Class B bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not

less than 30 percent of the vertical outside diameter of the conduit. The minimum
thickness of bedding material beneath the pipe shall be 100 mm. The bedding
material shall be sand or selected sandy soil all of which passes a 9.5 mm sieve
and not more than 10 percent of which passes a 0.075 mm sieve. The layer of
the bedding material shall be shaped to fit the conduit for at least 15 percent of
its total height. Recesses in the trench bottom shall be shaped to accommodate
the bell when bell and spigot type conduit is used.

Class C bedding shall consist of bedding the conduit to a depth of not

less than 10 percent of its total height. The foundation surface, completed in
accordance with Item 103, Structure Excavation, shall be shaped to fit the
conduit and shall have recesses shaped to receive the bells, if any.

For flexible pipe, the bed shall be roughly shaped and a bedding
blanket of sand or fine granular material as specified above shall be provided as
follows:

Pipe Corrugation Depth Minimum Bedding Depth

10 mm 25 mm
25 mm 50 mm
50 mm 75 mm

For large diameter structural plate pipes the shaped bed need not
exceed the width of bottom plate.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 288/437
 500.3.3 Laying Conduit
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The conduit laying shall begin at the downstream end of the conduit line.
The lower segment of the conduit shall be in contact with the shaped bedding
throughout its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid conduits and outside
circumferential laps of flexible conduits shall be placed facing upstream. Flexible
conduit shall be placed with longitudinal laps or seams at the sides.

Paved or partially-lined conduit shall be laid such that the longitudinal

center line of the paved segment coincides with the flow line. Elliptical and
elliptically reinforced conduits shall be placed with the major axis within 5
degrees of a vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the conduit.

Joints shall be made with (a) Portland Cement mortar, (b) Portland
Cement grout, (c) rubber gaskets, (d) oakum and mortar, (e) oakum and joint
compound, (f) plastic sealing compound, or by a combination of these types, or
any other type, as may be specified. Mortar joints shall be made with an excess
of mortar to form a continuous bead around the outside of the conduit and
finished smooth on the inside. For grouted joints, molds or runners shall be used
to retain the poured grout. Rubber ring gaskets shall be installed so as to form a
flexible water-tight seal. Where oakum is used, the joint shall be called with this
material and then sealed with the specified material.

When Portland Cement mixtures are used, the completed joints shall be
protected against rapid drying by any suitable covering material.

Flexible conduits shall be firmly joined by coupling bands.

Conduits shall be inspected before any backfill is placed. Any pipe found
to be out of alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be taken up and relaid or
replaced.

500.3.5 Field Strutting

When required by the Plans, vertical diameter of round flexible conduit

shall be increased 5 percent by shop elongation or by means of jacks applied
after the entire
backfilling. line of conduit
The vertical hasshall
elongation beenbeinstalled on the
maintained by bending
means ofbut before
sills and
struts or by horizontal ties shall be used on paved invert pipe.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 289/437
 Ties and struts shall be 300 mm in place until the embankment is
5/7/2018 completed and compacted, unless otherwise shown on the Plans.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

These construction specifications shall also apply in the case of relaid

conduits. In addition, all conduits salvaged for relaying shall be cleaned of all
foreign materials prior to reinstallation.

500.3.6 Backfilling

Materials for backfilling on each side of the conduit for the full trench width
and to an elevation of 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall be fine, readily
compactible soil or granular material selected from excavation or from a source

When the top of the conduit is flushed with or below the top of the trench,
backfill material shall be placed at or near optimum moisture content and
compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm (compacted) on both sides to an
elevation 300 mm above the top of the conduit. Care shall be exercised to
thoroughly compact the backfill under the haunches of the conduit. The backfill
shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the conduit for the full required
length. Except where negative projecting embankment-type installation is
specified, the backfill material shall be placed and compacted for the full depth of
the trench.

When the top of the conduit is above the top of the trench, backfill shall be
placed at or near optimum moisture content and compacted in layers not
exceeding 300 mm (compacted) and shall be brought up evenly on both sides of
the conduit for its full length to an elevation 300 mm above the top of the conduit.
The width of the backfill on each side of the conduit for the portion above the top
of the trench shall be equal to twice the diameter of the conduit or 3.5 m,
whichever is less. The backfill material used in the trench section and the portion
above the top of the trench for a distance on each side of the conduit equal to the
horizontal inside diameter and to 300 mm above the top of the conduit shall
conform to the requirements for backfill materials in this Subsection. The
remainder of the backfill shall consist of materials from excavation and borrow
that is suitable for embankment construction.

Compaction
achieved to the density
by use of mechanical specified
tampers or byinrolling.
Item 104, Embankment, shall be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 290/437

All conduits after being bedded and backfill as specified in this Subsection
 shall be protected by one metre cover of fill before heavy equipment is permitted
5/7/2018
to cross during construction of the roadway. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

500.3.7 Imperfect Trench

Under this method, for rigid conduit, the embankment shall be completed
as described in Subsection 500.3.6, Backfilling, to a height above the conduit
equal to the vertical outside diameter of the conduit plus 300 mm. A trench equal
in width to the outside horizontal diameter of the conduit and to the length shown
on the plans or as directed by the Engineer shall then be excavated to within 300
mm of the top of the conduit, trench walls being as nearly vertical as possible.
The trench shall be loosely filled with highly compressible soil. Construction of

Each section will be measured by the number of units installed.

Branch connection and elbows will be included in the length measurement
for conduit, or they may be measured by the number of units installed.

Class B bedding material placed and approved shall be measured by the

cubic metre in place.

When the Bid Schedule contains an estimated quantity for “Furnishing and
Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert”, the quantity to be paid for will be the
number of cubic metre complete in place and accepted, measured in final
position between limits as follows:

1. Measurement shall include backfill material in the trench up to

the top of the original ground line but will not include any material
placed outside of vertical planes 450 mm up outside of and
parallel to the inside wall of pipe at its widest horizontal
dimension.

2. When the original ground line is less than 300 mm above the top
of the pipe, the measurement will also include the placing of all
backfill materials, above the original ground line adjacent to the
pipe for a height of 300 mm above the top of pipe and for a

distance
horizontalon each side
dimension of the
of the pipe not greater than the widest
pipe.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 291/437

3. The measurement shall include the placing of backfill material in

 all trenches of the imperfect trench method. Materials re-
5/7/2018
excavated for imperfect trench construction will be measured for
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

payment under Item 103, Structure Excavation.

500.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities of conduit, determined as provided in Section
500.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per
linear meter for the conduit of the types and sizes specified complete in place.
End sections and, when so specified, branch connections and elbows, shall be
paid for at the contract unit price per piece for the kind and size specified
complete in place.

When the Bid Schedule does not contain as estimated quantity for
“Furnishing and Placing Backfill Material, Pipe Culvert” payment for placing
backfill material around pipe culverts will be considered as included in the
payment for excavation of the backfill material.

Payment will be made under:

Payment Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

500 (1) Pipe Culverts, - mm Linear Meter

Class -

500 (2) Storm Drain, - mm Linear Meter

Class -

ITEM 501- UNDERDRAINS

501.1 Description

This item shall consist of constructing underdrains, using pipe and

granular filter
material in materials,with
accordance underdrain pipe outlets,
this Specification andand blind drainsclose
in reasonably using granular
conformity
with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 292/437
 501.2 Material Requirements
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Material shall meet the requirements specified in the following

specifications:

Zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron or steel

Culverts and underdrains AASHTO M 36

Extra strength and standard strength clay pipe

and perforated clay pipe AASHTO M 65

Perforated concrete pipe AASHTO M 175

Granular Backfill Filter Material – Granular backfill filter material shall be

permeable and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 6, except that
soundness tests will not be required and minor variation in grading and content of
deleterious substances may be approved by the Engineer.

When the location of manufacturing plants allows, the plants will be

inspected periodically by compliance with specified manufacturing methods, and
material sample will be obtained for laboratory testing for compliance with
material quality requirements. This shall be the basis for acceptance of
manufacturing lots as to quality.

All material shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to condition

at the latest practicable time.

501.3 Construction Requirements

501.3.1 Pipe Installation

Trenches shall be excavated to the dimensions and grades required by

the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. A minimum of 150 mm bedding layer of
granular backfill material shall be placed and compacted at the bottom of the
trench for its full width and length.

Subdrainage pipe of the type and size specified shall be embedded firmly
in the bedding material.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 293/437
 Perforated pipe shall normally, be placed with the perforations down and
the pipe sections shall be joined securely with the appropriate coupling fittings or
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
bands.

Non-perforated pipe shall be laid with the bell end upgrade and with open
joints wrapped with suitable material to permit entry of water, or unwrapped as
may be specified. Upgrade end sections of all subdrainage pipe installations shall
be closed with suitable plugs to prevent entry of soil materials.

After the pipe installation has been inspected and approved, granular
backfill material shall be placed to a height of 300 mm above the top of pipe.
Care shall be taken not to displace the pipe or the covering at open joints. The

501.3.2 Underdrain Outlets

Trenches for underdrain outlets shall be excavated to the width and depth
shown on the Plans or as otherwise directed. Pipes shall be laid in the trench
with all ends firmly joined by the applicable methods and means. After inspection
and approval of the pipe installation, the trench shall be backfilled in accordance
with Item 103, Structure Excavation.

501.3.3 Blind Drain

Trenches for blind drains shall be excavated to the width and depth shown
on the Plans. The trench shall be filled with granular backfill material to the depth
required by the Plans. Any remaining upper portion of trench shall be filled with
either granular or impervious material in accordance with Item 103, Structure
Excavation.

501.4 Method of Measurement

Underdrains and outlets shall be measured by the linear meter for pipe of
the type and size specified. Blind drains shall be measured by the linear meter
including all excavation and backfill materials required.

Granular backfill filter material, when specified in the Contract as a pay

item shall be measured

Cross-sectional in place
measurements willbynotthe cubic the
exceed meter, completed and
net dimensions accepted.
shown on the
Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 294/437
 Excavation for underdrain pipe will be measured and paid for as provided
in Item 103, Structure Excavation.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

501.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities determined as provided in Section 501.4, Method

of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit prices.

Payment will be made under:

Payment Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

ITEM 502 – MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS

502.1 Description

This item shall consist of the construction, reconstruction or adjustment of

manholes, inlets and catch basins in accordance with this Specification and in
reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or as
established by the Engineer.

502.2 Material Requirements

Concrete for these structures shall meet the requirements of Item 405,
Structural Concrete. Other materials shall meet the following specifications:

Corrugated Metal Units – The units shall conform to Plan dimensions and
the metal to AASHTO M 36. Bituminous coating, when specified, shall conform to
ASTM D 1187, Asphalt-base Emulsion for use as Protective Coating for Metal.

Sewer and manhole brick

(Made from clay or shale) AASHTO M 91

Building brick (Solid masonry units made

from clay or shale) AASHTO M 114

Joint Mortar- Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joints mortar shall
be composed of one part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by
volume to which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to 10 percent
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 295/437

of the cement by weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of
 of the cement by weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of
Item 405, Structural Concrete.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Frames, Gratings, Covers and Ladder Rungs – Metal units shall conform
to the plan dimensions and to the following specification requirements for the
designated materials.

Metal gratings and covers which are to rest on frames shall bear on them
evenly. They shall be assembled before shipment and so marked that the same
pieces may be reassembled readily in the same position when installed.
Inaccuracy of bearings shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. A frame
and a grating or cover to be used with it shall constitute one pair.

units and shall be separate casting poured from the same material as the casting
they represent.

Gray iron casting AASHTO M 105

Mild to medium-strength carbon steel castings

for general application AASHTO M 103

Structural steel AASHTO M 183

Galvanizing, where specified for these units,

shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 111

Reinforcing Steel AASHTO M 31

Pre-cast Concrete Units – These units shall be cast in substantial

permanent steel forms. Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 20.682 MPa (3000 psi). The pre-cast units shall be
cured in accordance with AASHTO M 171. Water absorption of individual cores
taken from such units shall not exceed 7 percent. Additional reinforcement shall
be provided as necessary to provide for handling of the pre-cast units.

A sufficient number of cylinders shall be cast from the concrete for each

unit permitforcompression
cylinders each test. Iftests at 7, 14 requirement
the strength and 28 days,isand
mettoatallow
7 or for
14 at leastthe
days, 3
units shall be certified for use 14 days from the date of casting. If the strength is
not met at 28 days, all units made from that batch or load will be rejected.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 296/437
 Cracks in units, honeycombed or patched areas in excess of 2,000 square
5/7/2018
millimeters, excessive water absorption and failure to meet strength requirements
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

shall be the causes for rejection. Pre-cast reinforced concrete manhole risers and
tops shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 199.
The plants will be inspected periodically for compliance with specified
manufacturing methods, and material samples will be obtained for laboratory
testing for compliance with material quality requirements. This may be the basis
for acceptance of manufacturing lots as the quality.

All materials shall be subjected to inspection for acceptance as to

Metal frames shall be set in full mortar bed. Pipe sections shall be flushed
on the inside of the structure wall and projected outside sufficiently for proper
connection with next pipe section. Masonry shall fit neatly and tightly around the
pipe.

When grade adjustment or existing structures is specified, the frames,

covers and gratings shall be removed and the walls reconstructed as required.
The cleaned frames shall be reset at the required elevation. Upon completion,
each structure shall be cleaned of any accumulation of silt, debris, or foreign
matter of any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation until final
acceptance of the work.

Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 103,

Structure Excavation.

502.4 Method of Measurement

Standard manholes, inlets and catch basins, both new and reconstructed
as applicable, will be measured by the unit. Any additional concrete, reinforcing
steel, or masonry required for authorized increases in heights of structures paid
of under this Item and in excess of the standard height shown on the Plans will

be measuredSteel,
Reinforcing and paid for under Item
as applicable. 405, Structural
Structures noted on Concrete
the Plansand
as Item 404,
“junction
boxes” will be measured for payment as manholes.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 297/437

The number of concrete covers, pairs of metal frames and gratings, and
 pairs of metal frames and covers will be measured as acceptably completed.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The number of existing manholes, inlets and catch basins adjusted as

directed will be measured as acceptably completed.

502.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Section 502.4, Method

of Measurement of the Pay Items in the Bill of Quantities will be paid for at the
contract unit prices, which shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

502 (1) Manholes Each

502 (2) Inlets, type Each

502 (3) Catch basins Each

502 (4) Concrete covers Each

502 (5) Metal frames and gratings, type Pair

502 (6) Metal frames and covers Pair

502 (7) Adjusting manholes Each

502 (8) Adjusting inlets Each

502 (9) Adjusting catch basin Each

ITEM 503 – DRAINAGE STEEL GRATING WITH FRAME

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 298/437
5/7/2018 503.1 Description DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

This item shall consist of furnishing all materials, tools, and equipment
including labor required in undertaking the proper application of steel grating with
frame as shown on the plans and in accordance with this specification.

503.2 Classes and Uses of Road Grates and Frames

Classes of grates that are commonly use in drainage work are sump,
trench and box.

Trench grates shall be used to collect surface rainwater run off from areas
that cannot be graded to direct flow into a single pit.

Box grates or road drainage shall be used to transfer road surface storm
water into an underground drainage system. Normally used in conjunction with
kerb entry, the addition of the grate significantly increases the hydraulic capacity
of the inlet, particularly on steep slopes.

503.3 Strength Classifications and the Loading Conditions for Sump,

Trench and Box grates

Class A – Test Load 10kN

For locations trafficked only by pedestrians, wheelchairs and cyclists –

inaccessible to motor vehicles by virtue of barriers, narrow passages or
stepped or unpaved approaches.

Class B – Test Load 80kN

For locations normally trafficked by pedestrians and slow moving

passenger cars or light agricultural tractors. These locations include areas
accessible to infrequent slow moving heavy trucks. Typical locations
include footpaths, ground level and multistoried car parks, suburban
driveways and back yards.

Class C – Test Load 150kN

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 299/437

For locations trafficked by slow moving fully laden trucks such as

 pedestrians, malls and industrial or commercial areas.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Class D – Test Load 210kN

For locations trafficked by fast moving fully laden trucks and forklifts with
wheel loads to 5.0T. This includes all public roads from residential to
freeway.

Class E, F or G – Test Load 400kN, 600kN or 900kN

For locations subject to vehicles such as large forklifts, earthmoving or

503.4 Materials Requirement

503.4.1 Steel Grating

The steel grating shall be made of fabricated mild steel provided with hot
dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/AASHTO M 232 for superior
corrosion protection. Steel grating shall be machine-made grating comprised of
steel flat bars standing on edge equispaced from each other. To prevent them
from falling over and to provide restraint in buckling, a twisted cross rod (6mm) is
forge-welded1 into the top of the flat bars.

503.4.2 Steel Frame

The steel frame clear openings of drainage grates shall be 15mm larger
than nominal sizes of industry standard sized pits. These pits increase in size in
increments of 150mm. This shall be done to allow frames to be placed over
standard panel formwork and cast in while pouring the pit walls, to speeds up
installation and ensure the frame is fully embedded in the concrete.

503.4.3 Drainage Grate Sizes

The drainage grates shall be identified by their internal clear opening

dimensions of the frame. For square and rectangular grates, the normal
convention shall be the width x length. Metal units shall conform to the approved
plan dimensions and specifications requirement for the designated materials.

Grates shall consist of 25mm to 65mm x 3mm, 4.5mm or 5mm thick flat
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 300/437

bars with length of not more than 6.1m spaced at 30mm o.c. with 6mm twisted
 rod spaced at 100mm o.c.. Angular frame (L 75mm x 75mm x 9mm thick) shall
5/7/2018
be coated with hot dipped galvanized for superior corrosion protection finish and
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

extended life. If required, I-Beam support shall be provided in the grates in

accordance
ASTM A 153with
or itsthe approved AASHTO
equivalents plan. It shall also conform to the requirements of
M 232.

503.4.4 The metal unit shall conform to ASTM A 36 / AASHTO M 183.

Dimension
Tolerances: Thickness = ± 0.20mm
Width = ± 0.80mm

503.4.5 Joint Mortar

Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, joint mortar shall be composed
of one part Portland Cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume to which
hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to 10 percent of the cement
by weight. All materials for mortar shall meet the requirements of Item 405,
Structural Concrete. Structural concrete used shall attain a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 20.682 MPa (3000 psi).

503.5 Construction Requirements

Concrete construction shall conform to the requirements for Item 405,

Structural Concrete.

Metal gratings which are to rest on frames shall bear on them evenly.
They shall be assembled before shipment and so marked that the same pieces
may be reassembled readily in the same position when installed. Inaccuracy of
bearings shall be corrected by machining, if necessary. The steel grating and its
corresponding frame shall constitute one pair.

When grade adjustment or existing drainage grates is specified, the

frames and steel gratings shall be removed and the walls shall be reconstructed
as required. The cleaned frames shall be reset at the required elevation. Upon
completion, each drainage grates shall be cleaned of any accumulations of silt,
debris, or foreign matter of any kind and shall be kept clear of such accumulation
until final acceptance of the work.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 301/437

Excavation and backfill shall be done in accordance with Item 102,

 Excavation.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

503.6 Acceptance Requirement

A sufficient number of cylinders for concrete construction shall be cast

from the concrete for each unit for compression tests at 7, 14 and 28 days, and
to allow for at least 3 cylinders for each test. If the strength requirement is met at
7 or 14 days, the units shall be certified for use 14 days from the date of casting.
If the strength is not met at 28 days, all units made from that batch or load will be
rejected.

opportunity to check for compliance prior to or during incorporation of materials

into the work.

503.7 Method of Measurement

The quantity to be measured and paid for will be the number of pairs of
metal frames and gratings completed and accepted. Concrete and reinforcing
steel (AASHTO M 31) will be measured and paid for under Item 405, Structural
Concrete and Item 404, Reinforcing Steel, respectively.
Excavation and backfill will be measured and paid for as provided in Item
102, Excavation.

503.8 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities, determined as provided in Section 503.7, Method

of Measurement of the Pay Items in the Bill of Quantities will be paid for at the
contract unit prices, which shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and
placing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary
to complete the item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No. Description Unit Of Measurement

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 302/437

503 Metal frames and grating Set

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

ITEM 504 - CLEANING AND RECONDITIONING EXISTING DRAINAGE

STRUCTURES

504.1 Description

This item shall consist of cleaning and reconditioning existing pipes and
appurtenant structures in reasonably close conformity with this Specification and

504.3 Construction Requirements

Pipe Removed and Cleaned – The pipe shall be carefully removed and
cleaned of foreign material both within the barrel and at the jointed ends.

Pipe Cleaned in Place – All foreign materials within the barrel shall be
removed and disposed off by methods which will prevent damage to the pipe.

If approved by the Engineer, all or part of the pipe designated to be

cleaned in place may be removed, cleaned, and relaid in accordance with the
applicable Items. In such cases, the Contractor shall furnish all materials required
to replace damaged pipes and joints, perform all excavation and backfill, and re-
lay the pipe, all at the contract bid price for this Item.

Re-laying or Stockpiling Salvaged Pipe - Relaying of pipe selected by the

Engineer to be removed and cleaned shall be done as shown on the Plans, in
accordance with the appropriate Item for the kind of pipe involved. The
Contractor shall furnish all jointing materials and shall replace the pipe broken by
him, in sufficient lengths to complete the designated length to be relaid without
added compensation. Salvaged pipe to be stockpiled shall be placed as shown
on the Plans and as directed by the Engineer. No pipe which has sustained
structural damage shall be placed in stockpiles. The Contractor shall dispose off
such damaged pipes at an approved locations.

Reconditioning Drainage Structures – Structures such as manholes, inlets,

and the likes, designated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer to be
reconditioned shall have all debris removed, leaks repaired, missing or broken
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 303/437
metalwork replaced, and each structure left in operating condition.
 504.4 Method of Measurement
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Measurement
removed, will be made
re-laid or stockpile by the linear
as designated in meter
the Billofofpipe acceptably
Quantities, cleaned,
irrespective
of the kind or size involved.

Pipe removed, cleaned, and re-laid will be measured in their final position.

Pipe removed, cleaned, and stockpiled will be measured by totaling the

nominal laying lengths of all pipe units acceptably removed, cleaned, and placed

504.5 Basis of Payment

The quantities as provided in Section 504.4, Method of Measurement,
shall be paid for at the contract price bid per unit of measurement for each of
the Pay Items listed below that appear in the Bid Schedule, which price and
payment shall be full compensation for the work of this item except excavation
and backfill which is paid for under Item 103, Structure Excavation.

Excavation and backfill necessary for pipe removal operations shall be

done as part of the work of this Item.

The Contractor shall remove and replace without added compensation

any pipe damaged by this operations and which cannot be acceptably repaired in
place.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

504 (1) Removing, cleaning, stockpiling

Salvaged culvert pipe Linear Meter

504 (2) Removing, cleaning, and re-laying

Salvaged culvert pipe Linear Meter

504 (3) Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 304/437
504 (4) Reconditioning drainage structures Each
 If more than one type of drainage structure is described for an Item in the
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Bid Schedule, letter suffixes shall be added to the item Number differentiate
between such structures.
If no Pay Item from the list above appears in Bid Schedule, the pipe
removed will be considered as included in the work of Item 101, Removal of
Structures and Obstructions.

constructed in accordance
dimensions shown with this Specification and to the lines and grades and
on the Plans.

505.2 Material Requirements

505.2.1 Stones

Stones for riprap shall consist of rock as nearly as rectangular in section

as is practical, except that riprap of Class A may consist of round natural stones.
The stones shall be sound, tough, durable, dense, resistant to the action of air
and water, and suitable in all respects for the purpose intended.

Stones for riprap shall be one of the following classes as shown on the
Plans or determined by the Engineer.

Class A - Stones ranging from a minimum of 15kg to a

maximum of 25kg with at least 50 percent of the
stones weighing more than 20kg

Class B - Stones ranging from minimum of 30kg to a

maximum of 70kg with at least 50 percent of the
stones weighing more than 50kg

Class C - Stones ranging from minimum of 60kg to a

maximum of 100kg with at least 50 percent of the
stones weighing more than 80kg

Class D -
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
Stones ranging from minimum of 100kg to a 305/437

maximum of 200kg with at least 50 percent of the

 stones weighing more than 150kg
5/7/2018
Sound pieces of broken concrete obtained from the removal of bridges,
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

culverts
the and other structures may be substituted for stone with the approval of
Engineer.

505.2.2 Filter Materials

When required, the riprap shall be placed on a filter layer to prevent fine
embankment materials to be washed out through the voids of the face stones.
The grading of the filter material shall be as specified on the Plans, or in the

505.2.3 Mortar
Mortar for grouted riprap shall consist of sand, cement and water
conforming to the requirements given under Item 405, Structural Concrete, mixed
in the proportion of one part cement to three parts sand by volume, and sufficient
water to obtain the required consistency.

The horizontal and vertical contact surface between stones shall be

embedded by cement mortar having a minimum thickness of 20 mm. Sufficient
mortar shall be used to completely fill all voids leaving the face of the stones
exposed.

505.3 Construction Requirements

505.3.1 Excavation

The bed for riprap shall be excavated to the required depths and properly
compacted, trimmed and shaped.

The riprap shall be founded in a toe trench dug below the depth of scour
as shown on the Plans or as ordered by the Engineer. The toe trench shall be
filled with stone of the same class as that specified for the riprap, unless
otherwise specified.

505.3.2 Placing

Stones placed below the water line shall be distributed so that the
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 306/437

minimum thickness of the riprap is not less than that specified.

5/7/2018 Stones above the water line shall be placed by hand or individually by
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

machines. They
into the slope andshall be laid
against thewith close, broken
adjoining stones. joints
Each and shall
stone bebe
shall firmly
laid bedded
with its
longest axis perpendicular to the slope in close contact with each adjacent stone.
The riprap shall be thoroughly rammed into place as construction progresses and
the finished surface shall present an even, tight surface. Interstices between
stones shall be filled with small broken fragments firmly rammed into place.

Unless otherwise provided, riprap shall have the following minimum

The
than 100 surface
mm at anyofpoint.
riprap shall not vary from the theoretical surface by more

505.3.3 Grouting

When grouted riprap is specified, stones shall be placed by hand, or

individually by machine as specified for riprap placed above the water line. The
spaces between the stones shall then be filled with cement mortar throughout the
thickness of the riprap as specified in Subsection 504.2.3, mortar. Sufficient
mortar shall be used to completely fill all voids, except that the face surface of the
stones shall be left exposed.

Grout shall be placed from bottom to top of the surface swept with a stiff
broom. After grouting is completed, the surface shall be cured as specified in
Item 405, Structural Concrete for a period of at least three days.

The stones shall also be laid in a manner that the vertical and horizontal
alignments of the exposed face shall, as possible be maintained in a straight line.

505.3.4 Weepholes

All walls and abutments shall be provided with weepholes. Unless

otherwise shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the weepholes shall
be placed horizontally at the lowest points where free outlets for water can be
obtained and shall be spaced at not more than 2 m center to center in a
staggered manner . The length of the weepholes shall not be less than the
thickness of the walls of the abutment and shall be at least 50 mm diameter PVC
or other pipe materials accepted by the Engineer. Weepholes must be provided
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 307/437

with filter bags as specified in special provision or as directed by the Engineer,

 and shall be incidental to Pay Item 505.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

505.4 Method of Measurement

The quantities to be measured for payment shall be the number of cubic

meters of riprap or grouted riprap, as the case may be, including stones placed in
the toe trench laid in position and accepted.

Filter layer of granular material, when required, shall be measured

505.5 Basis of Payment

The quantities measured as provided under Subsection 505.4 shall be
paid for at the contract unit price, respectively, for each of the Pay Items listed
below and shown in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for excavation and preparation of the bed, for furnishing and
placing all materials including backfill and all additional fill to bring the riprap bed
up to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the plans, and all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item .
Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

505 (1) Riprap, Class A Cubic Meter

505 (2) Riprap, Class B Cubic Meter

505 (3) Riprap, Class C Cubic Meter

505 (4) Riprap, Class D Cubic Meter

505 (5) Grouted Riprap, Class A Cubic Meter

505 (6) Grouted Riprap, Class B Cubic Meter

505 (7) Grouted Riprap, Class C Cubic Meter

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 308/437

505 (8) Grouted Riprap, Class D Cubic Meter

5/7/2018 505 (9) Filter layer of granular material Cubic Meter
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

ITEM 506 – STONE MASONRY

506.2 Material Requirements

506.2.1 Stone

The stone shall be clean, hard, and durable and shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval. Adobe stone shall not be used unless otherwise specified.

Sizes and Shapes – Unless other sizes are shown on the Plans, stones
have a thickness of not less than 150 mm, and widths of not less than one and
one-half times their respective thickness, and lengths of not less than one and
one half times their respective widths. Each stone shall be of good shape and be
free of depressions and projections that might weaken or prevent it from being
properly bedded.

Dressing – The stone shall be dressed to remove any thin or weak

portions. Face stones shall be dressed to provide bed and joint lines that do not
vary more than 20 mm from the true lines and to ensure the meeting of bed and
joint lines without the rounding of corners of the stones in excess of 30 mm in
radius. Bed surfaces of the face stones shall be approximately normal to the
face of the stones for about 80 mm and from this point may depart from a normal
plane not to exceed 50 mm in 300 mm.

Finish for Exposed Faces – Face stones shall be pitched to the line along
the beds and joints. The maximum projection of rock faces beyond the pitch lines
shall not be more than 50 mm.

506.2.2 Mortar
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 309/437

Cement, fine aggregate, and water shall conform to the respective

 requirements for those materials as specified under Item 405, Structural
5/7/2018
Concrete, except as to the grading of fine aggregate which shall all pass the 2.36
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

mm (No. 8) sieve, not less than 15 nor more than 40 percent shall pass the 0.3
mm (No. 50 ) sieve, and not more than 10 percent shall pass the 0.15 mm
(No.100) sieve.

The mortar for the masonry shall be composed of one part of Portland
Cement and two parts of fine aggregate by volume and sufficient water to make
the mortar of such consistency that it can be handled easily and spread with a
trowel. Mortar shall be mixed only in those quantities required for immediate use.

506.3 Construction Requirement

506.3.1 Selection and Placing

When the masonry is to be placed on a prepared foundation bed, the bed

shall be firm and normal to, or in steps normal to, the face of the wall, and shall
have been approved by the Engineer before any stone is placed.

Care shall be taken to prevent the bunching of small stone or stones of the
same size. Large stones shall be used in the corners.

All stones shall be cleaned thoroughly and wetted immediately before

being set, and the bed which is to receive them shall be cleaned and moistened
before the mortar is spread. They shall be laid with their longest faces horizontal
in full beds of mortar, and the joints shall be flushed with mortar.

The exposed faces of individual stones shall be parallel to the faces of the
walls in which the stones are set.

The stones shall be so handled as not to jar displace the stones already
set. Suitable equipment shall be provided for setting stones larger than those that
can be handled by two men. The rolling or turning of stones on the walls will not
be permitted. If a stone is loosened after the mortar has taken initial set, it shall
be removed, the mortar cleaned off, and the stone relaid with fresh mortar.

506.3.2 Bed and Joints

Beds for face stones may vary from 20 mm to 50 mm in thickness. They

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 310/437

shall not extend an unbroken line through more than 5 stones. Joints may vary
 from 20 mm to 50 mm in thickness. They shall not extend in an unbroken line
5/7/2018
through more than two stones. They may be at angles with the vertical from 0 0 to
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
450. Face stone shall bond at least 150 mm longitudinally and 50 mm vertically.
At no place shall corners of four stones be adjacent to each other.

Cross beds for vertical faced walls shall be level, and for battered walls
may vary from level to normal to the batter line of the face of the wall.

506.3.3 Headers

506.3.4 Backing.
Backing shall be built mostly of large stones as shown in the approved
Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The individual stones composing the
backing and hearting shall be well bonded with the stones in the face wall and
with each other. All openings and interstices in the backing shall be filled
completely with mortar or with spalls surrounded completely by mortar.

506.3.5 Pointing
Both bed and vertical joints shall be finished as shown on the Plans or as
directed by the Engineer. The mortar in joints on top of surface of masonry shall
be crowned slightly at the center of the masonry to provide drainage.

506.3.6 Coping

Copings, if called for, shall be finished as shown on the Plans. Where

copings are not called for, the top of the wall shall be finished with stones wide
enough to cover the top of the wall from 450 mm to 1000 mm in length, and of
random heights, with a minimum height of 150 mm. Stone shall be laid in such a
manner that the top course is an integral part of the wall. The tops of top course
of stone shall be pitched to line, in both vertical and horizontal planes.

506.3.7 Weepholes

It shall conform to the requirements of Item 504, Riprap and Grouted

Riprap under Subsection 504.3.4, Weepholes.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 311/437
506.3.8 Cleaning Exposed Faces
 Immediately after being laid, and while the mortar is fresh, all face stones
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
shall be thoroughly cleaned of mortar stains and shall be kept clean until the
work is completed.

506.3.9 Curing

In hot or dry weather, the masonry shall be satisfactory protected from the
sun and shall be kept wet for a period of at least three days after completion.

the Engineer.
openings Nothan
of less deductions shallmeter
one square be made for weepholes, drain pipes or other
in area.

506.5 Basis of Payment

The quantity of masonry, determined as provided in Section 506.4,

Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic
meter for Stone Masonry, which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing and placing all materials, including mortar for masonry, for all
necessary excavations, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

506 Stone Masonry Cubic Meter

ITEM 507 – RUBBLE CONCRETE

507.1 Description

This item shall consist of the construction of rubble concrete in

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 312/437
accordance with this specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, slopes
 and dimensions shown in the Plans or established by the Engineer.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

507.2 Material Requirements

507.2.1 Stone

The stone shall be cleaned, hard, and durable and shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval. Adobe stone shall not be used unless otherwise specified.
Stones to be used shall be more than 0.015 cubic metre in volume and not less
than 75 percent of the total volume of rock embankment and shall consist of

507.3 Construction Requirements

507.3.1 Preparation of Foundation Bed

The foundation bed shall be excavated to the lines and grades as shown
in the plans as directed by the Engineer, and shall be thoroughly compacted in
accordance with Item 104.3.3.

507.3.2 Falsework and Formwork Construction

Falsework/formwork shall be constructed so as to withstand the stresses
imposed.

Formwork used shall be constructed with sufficient strength, rigidity and

shape as to leave the finished works true to the dimensions shown on the Plans
and with the surface finished as specified.

The inside surface of the forms shall be cleaned of all dirt, water and
foreign materials. Forms shall be thoroughly coated with form oil prior to use. The
form oil shall be commercial quality form oil or other approved coating which will
permit the ready release of forms and will not discolor the concrete.

507.3.3 Placing

One layer of concrete Class “B” shall be placed at the prepared bed prior
to placing of stones. Clearance between stones shall not be less than 2-1/2
inches or the maximum size of concrete aggregate for Class “B”.

Concrete Class “B” shall be placed after each layer of stone and shall be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 313/437

thoroughly consolidated by means of a vibrator inserted in each layer of

 concrete. In no case shall the vibrator be operated longer than 10 seconds in any
5/7/2018
location. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

After removal of forms, any cavities, voids and honeycomb spots shall be
filled up with mortar composed of one part cement and two parts sand.

All debris and refuse resulting from work shall be removed and the site
left in a neat and presentable condition.

507.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of rubble
concrete complete in place and accepted. In computing the quantity of payment
the dimension used shall be those shown on the plans or ordered in writing by
the Engineer. No reduction shall be made for weepholes.

507.5 Basis of Payment

The quantity of rubble concrete determined as provided in the preceding
section 507.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price
per cubic meter for rubble concrete, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for the preparation of the bed, furnishing, necessary excavations,
falsework, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

507 Rubble Concrete Cubic Meter

ITEM 508 – HAND-LAID ROCK EMBANKMENT

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 314/437
 508.1 Description
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

This Item shall consist of hand-laid rock embankment, as designated in

the Bid Schedule, constructed in accordance with this Specification and in
conformity with the lines and grades shown on the Plans or established by the
Engineer.

508.2 Material Requirements

volume. Stones
used. Adobe obtained
stone from
shall not be excavation performed
used, unless otherwiseunder this contract may be
specified.

508.3 Construction Requirements

Sufficient excavation shall be made to expose a foundation bed that is

satisfactory to the Engineer. The stones shall be founded on this bed and laid to
the lines and dimensions required.

Stones shall be laid flat and securely placed with broken joint lines. The
larger stones shall generally be located in the lower part of the structure and
voids shall be eliminated to the extent possible. Spalls smaller than the minimum
stone size specified in Section 506.2, Material Requirements, shall be used to
check the larger stones solidly in position and to substantially fill voids between
the major stones as laid in the embankment. The exposed face of the rock mass
shall be reasonably uniform, with no projections of more than 150 mm, beyond
the neat lines shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Backfill adjacent to the hand-laid rock embankment shall be filled entirely
with acceptable material coming from excavation items and compacted.

508.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity to be paid for will be the number of cubic meter of hand-laid
rock embankment measured in place, completed and accepted.

508.5 Basis of Payment

The quantity determined, as provided in Section 508.4, Method of

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 315/437

Measurement , will be paid for at the contract price per cubic meter for Hand-
 Laid Rock Embankment, which price and payment shall constitute full
5/7/2018 compensation for furnishing, selecting, and transporting stones, for placing
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

stones by hand, for backfilling, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the Item including foundation excavation.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

ITEM 509 – SHEET PILES

509.1 Description

This shall consist of furnishing, driving and cutting off of sheet piling
covered by this Specification.

509.2 Material Requirements

509.2.1 Timber Sheet Piles

The timber, unless otherwise definitely noted on the Plans or in the

Special Provisions, may consist of any species which will satisfactorily stand
driving. It shall be sawn or hewn with square corners and shall be free from worm
holes, loose knots, wing shakes, decay or unsound portions or other defects
which might impair its strength or tightness.

509.2.2 Concrete Sheet Piles

Concrete, reinforcement, and manufacture of concrete sheet piles shall

conform to the requirements of Item 400, Piling, Subsection 400.2.3, Concrete
Piles.

509.2.3 Steel Sheet Piles

Steel sheet piles shall be of the type, weight and Section Modulus
indicated on the Plans or Special Provisions, and shall conform to the
requirement of Item 400, Piling, Subsection 400.2.7, Sheet Piles, Painting shall
conform to the requirements for Item 411, Paint, Subsection 411.6.2, Painting
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 316/437

Structural Steel.
5/7/2018 509.3 Construction Requirements DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Sheet piles shall be driven to elevation shown on the Plans or as

directed by the Engineer. Where impractical to drive to plan elevation due to
subsurface conditions, the driving of piles may be stopped at a higher elevation
with the written permission of the Engineer. However, before granting such
permission, the Engineer shall ascertain that the Contractor has adequate
equipment for the required driving and that the piles can be driven to the plan

509.4 Method of Measurement

Sheet piling will be measured by the linear meter of sheet piling as shown
on the Plans or as directed in writing by the Engineer, complete in place and
accepted. However, measurement of piling which has been delivered to plan
length and cannot be driven according to plan or directed elevation because of
subsurface condition shall be measured as if driven to that elevations.

509.5 Basis of Payment

Payment of steel piles as determined in Section 509.4, Method of
Measurement, shall be made at the contract unit price per linear meter. Such
payment shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor,
equipment, tools, paint, bolts, wales and incidentals necessary to complete the
Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

509 (a) Sheet Piles (Timber) Linear Meter

509 (b) Sheet Piles (Steel) Linear Meter

509 (c) Sheet Piles (Concrete) Linear Meter

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 317/437

 ITEM 510 – CONCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

510.1 Description

This Item shall consist of the furnishing and placing of concrete slope
protection including all necessary excavation, a bed course and reinforced
concrete to the required thickness and extent to protect slopes against erosion.
Construction details shall be as shown on the Plans.

510.2.2 Formwork

Formwork, where necessary, shall be as specified in Item 407, Concrete

Structures.

510.2.3 Steel Reinforcement

Steel reinforcement shall be as specified in Item 404, Reinforcing Steel.

510.2.4 Concrete

Concrete shall be Class B as specified in Item 405, Structural Concrete,

unless otherwise specified or required by the Engineer.

510.3 Construction Requirements

510.3.1 Excavation

The ground shall be excavated where necessary in accordance with the

dimensions, lines and grades shown on the Plans.

510.3.2 Bed Course

Where shown on the Plans or ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor

shall provide and lay a bed course, to the depth required, and as specified in
Item 200, Aggregate Subbase Course, compacted at least 100 percent of the
maximum dry density as determined by AASHTO T 180, Method D.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 318/437

510.3.3 Concrete
5/7/2018
The Contractor shall provide and place concrete in accordance with the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete, to the required depths in the

positions and to the grades and elevations shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise
specified, the concrete slabs shall not be greater than 4m by 4m and shall have
between slabs, plain vertical straight joints with no joint filler or sealer.

The toe of the concrete slope protection shall be constructed and

protected a shown on the Plans.

510.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity of granular material in the bed course to be paid for shall be
measured by the cubic meter in-place and accepted as shown on the Plans.

The quantity of concrete to be paid for shall be measured by the cubic

meter in-place and accepted as shown on the Plans.

510.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted quantities as provided in Section 510.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price according to the Pay
Item in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for the necessary excavation, for all labor, equipment, tools, all
materials including formwork and reinforcing steel, and incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.
Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

510 (1) Bed Course Cubic meter in-place

Granular Material

510 (2) Concrete Cubic meter in-place

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 319/437

5/7/2018
ITEM 511 – GABIONS AND MATTRESSES DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

511.1 Description

This Item shall consist of furnishing, forming wire mesh baskets, and
placing rocks installed at the locations designated, in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, dimensions, and
arrangements shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.

sizes, uniformly partitioned into internal cells, interconnected with other similar
units, and filled with stones at the project site to form flexible, permeable,
monolithic structures such as retaining walls, sea walls, channel linings,
revetments and weirs for erosion control. The lengths shall be multiples of 2, 3
or 4 times the width of the gabion and heights shall be 0.50 m to 1.00 m or as
shown on the plans. The horizontal width shall not be less than one meter.
Gabion furnished shall be of uniform width.

The width,
more than 5% fromheight
the and length
ordered of prior
size the gabion as manufactured shall not differ
to filling.

Mattresses are double twisted wire mesh container uniformly partitioned

into internal cells with relatively small height in relation to other dimensions,
having smaller mesh openings than the mesh used for gabions. Mattresses are
generally used for riverbank protection and channel linings. The length shall be
3.00 m to 6.00 m, the width shall be 2.00 m and the height shall be 0.17 m, 0.23
m or 0.30 m or as shown on the Plans.
The width and length of the revet mattress as manufactured shall not differ
more than 5%, and the height shall not differ more than 10% from the ordered
size prior to filling.

511.2.2 Wire

The wire used in the manufactured of double-twisted mesh for use in

gabions and mattresses shall conform to the specifications as shown below as
appropriate for the style ordered.

511.2.2.1 Style 1 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from zinc-coated

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 320/437

steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 641, Class 3 coating,

 soft temper.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

511.2.2.2 Style 2 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from Zn-5A1-MM-

coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 856/A 856 M,
Class 3 coating, soft temper.

511.2.2.3 Style 3 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from the same type
of metallic-coated steel wire as style 1 with an additional PVC coating
extruded into the metallic-coated steel wire. The PVC coating shall

4. Hardness, shore “D” between 50 & D 2240

60
5. Brittleness Temp, max 9 C (150F) or
0
D 746
lower temp.
6. Resistance to Abrasion, % 12% D 1242
weight loss, max.

The PVC coating shall not show cracks or breaks after the wires are

twisted in the fabrication of the mesh.

511.2.2.4 Style 4 double-twisted mesh shall be manufactured from aluminum-
coated steel wire conforming to Specification ASTM A 809, soft
temper.

511.2.3 Lacing Wire and Stiffener

Lacing wire and stiffeners shall be made of wire having the same
coating material as the double-twisted wire mesh conforming to
Specification ASTM A 641, A 856/A 856 M or A 809 with a tensile
strength in accordance with subsection 509.2.7.

511.2.4 Fasteners made from zinc-coated steel wire, zinc - 5% aluminum

mischmetal alloy-coated steel wire and aluminum-coated steel shall
conform to specification A 764, Type A, B, or C, Table 2 or Table 3.

511.2.5 Gabion and mattresses shall be manufactured with all components

mechanically connected at the production facility with the exception of
the mattresses lid which is produced separately from the base. All
gabions and mattresses shall be supplied in the collapsed form, either
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 321/437
folded and bundled or rolled, for shipping.
 511.2.6 Dimensions
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The minimum size of the galvanized and PVC coated wire to be used in
the fabrication of the gabion and mattresses shall be as follows:

Diameter, mm
Gabion Mattresses
Metallic PVC Metallic PVC

The nominal and the minimum thickness of PVC coating shall be

0.50 mm and 0.38 mm, respectively.

511.2.7 Mechanical Properties

Tensile Strength – The tensile strength of Zinc-coated wire used in the

fabrication of gabion and mattresses when tested in accordance with Test
Methods ASTM A 370, shall be as follows:

Strength, max, Mpa

Gabion Mattresses
Body Wire 485 515
Selvedge or Perimeter Wire 485 485
Tying and Connecting Wire 515 515

511.2.8 Weight of Coating

The minimum weight of zinc per unit area of uncoated wire surface shall
be in accordance with ASTM A 975 or as follows:

Wire Diameter, mm Class 3 or A Coating, g/m2, ASTM A 641

Over 1.90 to 2.30 220
Over 2.30 to 2.70 230
Over 2.70 to 3.10 240
Over 3.10 to 3.50 260
Over 3.50 to 3.90 270

511.2. 9 Rock Fill

Rock used in the gabions and mattresses shall consist of hard, durable
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 322/437

rock pieces that will not deteriorate when submerged in water or exposed to
 severe weather conditions. Rock pieces shall be generally uniformly graded in
5/7/2018
sizes ranging from 100 mm to 200 mm. Filled gabions shall have a minimum
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

density of 1,400 kg/m3. Voids shall be evenly distributed.

No rock size shall exceed 2/3 the mattress depth and at least 85% by
weight of the stone shall have a size greater than 80 mm. No stones shall be
able to pass through the mesh.

511.3 Construction Requirements

511.3.1 Fabrication

1. Gabions and mattresses shall be in the form of rectangular baskets of

the required dimensions and shall be manufactured from wire as
specified in Subsection 509.2.2. Gabions shall be made of steel wire
double twisted forming a uniform hexagonal mesh type 8 x 10 having

a nominal
made mesh
of steel wireopenings of 83 forming
double twisted by 114 amm. Mattresses
uniform shall
hexagonal meshbe
type 6 x 8 having a nominal mesh openings of 64 by 83 mm.
Tolerances on the hexagonal, double-twisted wire mesh opening shall
not exceed 10% on the nominal dimension D values, 64 mm for
mattresses and 83 mm for gabions. The edges shall be formed into a
securely connected selvedge adequate to prevent raveling.

Individual basket ties and connections shall be made by using a

quantity of wire not less than 8% of the weight of each basket.

2. When the gabion length exceeds its width, it shall have securely tied
diaphragms connected at all edges to form individual cells of equal
length and width.

Gabions shall be fabricated in such a manner that the sides, ends,

lids and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into
rectangular baskets of the specified sizes. Gabions shall be of single
unit construction, base, lids, ends and sides shall be either woven into
a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base
section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility
at the point of connection is at least equal to that of the mesh.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 323/437
 The gabion shall be equally divided by diaphragms, placed at not
5/7/2018
more than 1.0 m intervals, and of the same mesh and gauge as the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

body of the gabions, into cells the length of which does not exceed
the horizontal width. The gabion shall be furnished with the necessary
diaphragms secured in proper position on the base in such a manner
that no additional tying at this junction will be necessary.

3. Four cross-connecting wires shall be provided in each cell having a

Selvedge wire used through all the edges (perimeter wire) shall not
be less than 3.80 mm diameter and shall meet the same
specifications as the wire mesh.

511.3.2 Assembly and Construction:

1. Gabions shall be installed in a workmanlike manner. The gabions

shall be placed on a smooth foundation. Final line and grade shall be

approved by the Engineer.

Each gabion unit shall be assembled by binding together all vertical
edges with wire ties on approximately 152 mm (6 inches) spacing or
by a continuous piece of connecting wire stitched around the vertical
edges with a coil every 102 mm ( 4 inches). Empty gabion units shall
be set to line and grade as shown on the Plans or as described by
the Engineer. Wire ties or connecting wires shall be used to join the
units together in the same manner as described above for
assembling. Internal tie wires shall be uniformly spaced and securely
fastened in each cell of the structure.

A standard fence stretcher, chain fall, or iron rod may be used to

stretch the wire baskets and hold alignment.

2. When possible the subgrade of the mattress and gabion shall be

properly compacted to a depth of 150 mm. The Contractor shall
consider the cost of subgrade preparation in the unit prices. Filter
fabric as beds of gabions and mattresses forming the structure shall
be suitably leveled and shall be securely connected along the
complete length of all contact edges by means of the above specified
tying and connecting wire.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 324/437
 3. Before the filling material is placed, the gabions and mattresses shall
5/7/2018
be carefully selected for uniformity of size, and the pieces shall be
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

handplaced to provide a neat appearance as approved by the

Engineer.

The gabions shall be filled with stone carefully placed by hand or

machine to assure alignment and avoid bulges with a minimum voids.
Alternate placing of rock and connection wires shall be performed

4. The cells in any row shall be filled in stage so that local deformation
may be avoided. That is at no time shall the cell be filled to a depth
exceeding 30 cm more than the adjoining cell.

5. Filter fabric shall be placed between earth surface and gabion or

mattress structures. Filter fabric shall be rolled out into a flat non-
rutted surface free from sharp objects, weighing down the edges.

Construction equipment
Jointing is normally shall by
affected notoverlapping
be allowed not
into less
unprotected
than 300fabric.
mm,
but it is preferable to joint by sewing or industrial stapling. Joint edges
should be facing downwards to avoid protruding through the surface
material.

511.4 Method of Measurement

The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meter of

gabions and mattresses and the area of filter cloth completed and accepted.

511.5 Basis of Payment

Quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the

appropriate contract unit price per unit of measurement for the Pay Item shown
in the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation
for all necessary excavation, subgrade preparation, for furnishing, placing wire
baskets and fill materials and for all labor, equipment accessories, tools, and
incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 325/437

Payment will be made under:

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

511 (1) Gabions Cubic Meter

511 (2) Mattresses Cubic Meter
511 (3) Filter Cloth Square Meter

PART H – MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES

ITEM 600 – CURB AND GUTTER

600.1 Description

This Item shall consist of the construction of curb and gutter either Precast or
Cast in place, made of concrete in accordance with this Specification at the

location,
the Plansand in required
or as conformity
by with the lines, grades, dimensions and design, shown on
the Engineer.

600.2 Material Requirements

600.2.1 Material for Bed Course

Bed course materials as shown on the Plans shall consist of cinders, sand,
slag,
all thegravel, crushed
particles stone,
will pass or other
through 12.5 approved porous
mm (1/2 inch) material of such grading that
sieve.

600.2.2 Concrete

Concrete shall be of the class indicated on the Plans and shall conform to the
requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete.

600.2.3 Expansion Joint Filler

Expansion joint filler shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 153/
Item 705.

600.2.4 Cement Mortar

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 326/437
 Cement mortar shall consist of one part of Portland cement and two parts of
5/7/2018 fine aggregates with water added as necessary to obtain the required consistency.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of preparation.

600.2.5 Bonding Compound

Where bonding compound is used, it shall conform to AASHTO M 200.

Bed course material shall be placed and compacted to form a bed of the
required thickness as shown on the Plans.

600.3.2 Cast in Place Curb and Gutter

600.3.2.1 Placing

Forms shall conform to the requirements of Item 407, Concrete Structures.

Metal forms shall be of an approved section.

Forms to hold the concrete shall be built and set-in-place as described in Item
407, Concrete Structures. Forms for at least 50 m of curb and gutter shall be in-
place and checked for alignment and grade before concrete is placed. Curbs and
gutters constructed on curves shall have forms of either wood or metal and they
shall be accurately shaped to the curvature shown on the Plans.

Mixing, ofplacing,
requirements finishing
Item 405, and Concrete,
Structural curing of asconcrete
modifiedshall conform
by the to the
requirements
below.

The concrete shall be placed in the forms in layers of 100 or 125 mm each,
and to the depth required. It shall be tamped and spaded until mortar entirely covers
the top and surfaces of the forms. The top of the concrete shall be finished to a
smooth and even surface and the edges rounded to the radii shown on the Plans.
Before the concrete is given the final finishing, the surface of the gutter shall be
tested with a 3-m straight-edge and any irregularities of more than 10 mm in 3 m
shall be corrected.

The curb and gutter shall be constructed in uniform sections of not more than
50 m in length except where shorter sections are required to coincide with the
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 327/437

location of weakened planes or contraction joints of the concrete pavement, or for

 closures, but no section shall be less than 2 m long. The sections shall be
5/7/2018 separated by sheet templates set perpendicular to the face and top of the curb and
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

gutter. The templates shall be approximately 5 mm in thickness and of the same

width as that of the curb and/or gutter and not less than 50 mm deeper than the
depth of the curb and/or gutter. Templates shall be set carefully and held firmly
during the placing of the concrete and shall remain in place until the concrete has
set sufficiently to hold its shape but shall be removed while the forms are still in
place. A preformed joint filler approved by the Engineer may be used in lieu of the

The form shall be removed within 24 hours after the concrete has been
placed. Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of Portland
Cement and two parts of fine aggregate. Plastering shall not be permitted and all
rejected portions shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. The
exposed surface shall be finished while the concrete is still fresh by rubbing the
surfaces with a wetted soft brick or wood until they are smooth. The surfaces shall
be wetted thoroughly, either by dipping the brick or wood in water, or by throwing
water on the surfaces with a brush. After the concrete has been rubbed smooth
using water, it shall then be rubbed with a thin grout containing one part of Portland
Cement and one part of fine aggregates. Rubbing with grout shall continue until
uniform color is produced. When completed, the concrete shall be covered with
suitable material and kept moist for a period of 3 days, or a membrane-forming
material may be applied as provided in Item 405, Structural Concrete. The concrete
shall be suitably protected from the weather until thoroughly hardened.

After the concrete has set sufficiently, the spaces on the back of the curb
which were excavated
with suitable for placing
material which thetamped
shall be curb shall be refilled
in layers of notto the than
more required
150 elevation
mm until
consolidated.

600.3.3 Precast Curb and Gutter

600.3.3.1 Placing

The precast concrete curb and gutter shall be set in 20mm of cement mortar
as specified in Subsection 600.2.4 to the line level and grade as shown on the
approved Plans.

The precast curb shall not be more than 20cm in width at the top portion and
not be more than 25cm at the base. The precast curb and gutter shall be 1.0 m in
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 328/437

length and shall be put side by side consecutively with joint in between.
5/7/2018
Joints between consecutive curb and gutter shall be filled with cement mortar
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
to the full section of the curb and gutter. Expansion joints shall be formed at
intervals shown on the Plans. Where a curb and gutter is placed next to a concrete
pavement, expansion joints in the curb and gutter shall be located opposite
expansion joints in the pavement.

Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar containing one part of Portland

rubbed with a thin grout containing one part of Portland Cement and one part of fine
aggregate. Rubbing with grout shall continue until uniform color is produced.

600.3.3.2 Handling Precast Curb and Gutter

1. In preparation for the handling of precast curb and gutter, all fabricated curb
and gutter of one (1) meter in length shall be provided or inserted with 2-1ӯ
PVC pipes for fitting at their required locations. The PVC pipes shall be
placed 25 mm from both edge during the fresh concrete is in plastic state.

2. Precast curb and gutter shall be lifted on upright position and not at the points
of support and shall be the same during transporting and storage.

3. Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast curb and
gutter to avoid cracking.

4. No precast
in the formscurb
with and gutter shall
the required timebestipulated
used thatprior
doestonot reach its final position
installation.

5. Precast curb and gutter shall be transferred to the construction site. Fresh
curb and gutter shall not be placed against in-situ concrete which has been in
a position for more than 30 minutes.

6. Precast curb and gutter may only be transported to the delivery point in truck
agitators or truck mixer operating at the speed designated by the
manufacturer of the equipment, provided that the consistency and workability
of the mix concrete upon discharge at the delivery point is suitable for
adequate placement.

600.4 Method of Measurement

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 329/437
 The length of curb and gutter to be paid for shall be the number of linear
5/7/2018
meters of curb and gutter (cast in place) or the number of pieces of precast curb and
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
gutter of the required dimensions shown on the Plans measured along its front face
in-place, completed and accepted. No deductions shall be made for flattening of
curbs at entrances and no additional allowances shall be made for curbs and gutters
constructed on curves.

600.5 Basis of Payment

gutter, backfilling, dumping and disposal of surplus materials, and for all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

600
600 (1)
(2) Concrete
Concrete Curb
Gutter(Cast
(Castininplace)
place) Linear
Linear Meter
Meter
600 (3) Curb and Gutter (Cast in place) Linear Meter
600 (4) Concrete Curb (Precast) Piece
600 (5) Concrete Gutter (Precast) Piece
600 (6) Curb & Gutter (Precast) Piece

ITEM 601 – SIDEWALK

601.1 Description

This Item shall consist of the construction of asphalt or Portland Cement

concrete sidewalk in accordance with this Specification and to the lines, grades,
levels and dimensions shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

601.2 Material Requirements

601.2.1 Portland Cement Concrete

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 330/437
 The cement concrete shall be Class A as specified in Item 405, Structural
5/7/2018
Concrete. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

601.2.2 Asphalt

Asphaltic material shall be as specified in Item 308, Bituminous Plant-Mix

Surface Course, Cold-Laid, or Item 310, Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, Hot-
Laid.

601.2.4 Forms

Forms shall be of wood or metal as approved by the Engineer and shall

extend to the full depth of the concrete. All forms shall be straight, free from warps
and of adequate strength to resist distortion.

601.2.5 Bed Course Material

Bed course material consists of cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone or
other approved permeable granular material of such grading that all particles shall
pass a 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) sieve.

601.2.6 Asphaltic Prime Coat

Prime coat shall be cut-back asphalt conforming to the requirements of Item

301, Bituminous Prime Coat.

601.3 Construction Requirements

601.3.1 Asphalt Sidewalk

Excavation shall be made to the depth and width required that will permit the
installation and bracing of the forms. The foundation shall be shaped and
compacted to a firm and even surface conforming to the section shown on the Plans.
All materials from soft areas shall be removed and replaced with suitable materials.
The bed course shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 100 mm to the
depths, lines and levels shown on the Plans.

The prepared bed course material shall receive an application of prime coat in
accordance with the requirements of Item 301, Bituminous Prime Coat.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 331/437
 The asphalt mixture shall be placed on the previously primed and prepared
5/7/2018
bed only when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the bed is sufficiently dry and weather
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

conditions are suitable. The mixture shall be placed in one or more layers of uniform
thickness to the total depth shown on the Plans. Each layer shall be smoothed by
raking or screeding and shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling with a hand
operated roller of a type satisfactory to the Engineer. After compaction, the
surfacing shall be of the thickness and section shown on the Plans and shall be

All forms shall be staked securely in position at the correct line and level.
Preformed joint filler shall be set in position shown on the Plans before placing of the
concrete is started. The top of the joint filler shall be placed 5 mm below the top
surface of the finished sidewalk.

The mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete shall be as specified in

Item 405, Structural Concrete. The Portland Cement concrete shall be placed to the
total depth shown on the plans.

The surface shall be cut through to a depth of 10 mm with a trowel at intervals

of 1 m or, were required, in straight lines perpendicular to the edge of sidewalk. The
surface shall then be brushed. The edges of the sidewalk and the transverse cuts
shall be shaped with a suitable tool so formed as to round the edges to a radius of
15 mm

601.4 Method of Measurement

The area to be paid for shall be the number of square meters of sidewalk
measured, completed in-place and accepted.

601.5 Basis of Payment

The quantity as determined in Subsection 601.4, Method of Measurement,

shall be paid for all the contract unit price per square meter for Sidewalk which price
and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing and placing all
materials for asphalt sidewalk, concrete sidewalk, expansion joint material, for
excavating and compacting the foundation bed, for furnishing and placing cinders,
gravel or other permeable bed course material, for prime coat material, for forms,
and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 332/437
 Payment will be made under:
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

601 Sidewalk Square Meter

ITEM 602 – MONUMENTS, MARKERS AND GUIDE POSTS

602.1 Description

This Item shall consist of right-of-way monuments, maintenance marker

posts, kilometer posts and/or guide posts, furnished and installed in accordance with
this Specification at the locations, and in conformity with the sizes, dimensions and
design, shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

602.2 Material Requirements

Concrete shall be the class designated on the Plans and shall be composed
of materials conforming to the requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete.

Steel. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Item 404, Reinforcing

Timber shall be of the species and grade shown on the Plans. Treated
timber, if required, shall conform to the requirements of Item 410, Treated and
Untreated Timber.

The metal material shall conform to the requirements shown on the Plans, or
as stipulated in the Special Provisions.
Paints, if required, shall conform to the requirements shown on the Plans, or
as stipulated in the Special Provisions.

Warning reflectors, if required, shall conform to the requirements shown on

the Plans, or as stipulated in the Special Provisions.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 333/437
5/7/2018 602.3 Construction Requirements DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Construction or fabrication and installation of monuments and posts shall be

as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions and shall include the attaching of
warning reflectors and the painting of posts, if required. Each monument and post
shall be set accurately at the required location and elevation and in such manner as

602.4 Method of Measurement

The quantities to be paid for shall be the actual number of right-of-way

monuments, maintenance marker posts, kilometer posts and/or guide posts
furnished, placed and accepted.

602.5 Basis of Payment

The quantities determined as provided in Subsection 602.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement
respectively, for each of the particular Pay Item listed below and as shown in the Bid
Schedule, which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing
and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement\

602 (1) Right-of-Way monuments Each

602 (2) Maintenance marker posts Each
600 (3) Kilometer posts Each
600 (4) Guide posts Each
(When more than one design is specified for any of the pay items, their
respective dimensions, material types or other means of identification shall be
inserted in parenthesis immediately after the name of the pay item, and letter
suffixes shall be included within the parenthesis of the pay item numbers)
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 334/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

ITEM 603 – GUARDRAIL

603.1 Description

603.2 Material Requirements

Materials for the desired type of guardrail shall meet the requirements
specified in the following specifications:

1. Wire rope or wire cable AASHTO M 30

2. Chain link fabric AASHTO M 181
3. Metal beam rail AASHTO M 180
4. Timber rail, unless otherwise indicated in the Plans or Special Provisions,
any of the following first group Philippine Timber shall be used: Ipil,
Molave, Tindalo or Yacal. Only one specie of timber shall be used in the
construction of any one continuous length of guardrail.

Timber guardrail shall be well-seasoned, straight and free of injurious defects.

They shall be dressed and of sufficient length so that joints shall be on the rail posts.

shall beGuardrail Hardware.

of the type specified,Offset brackets
or as shown on of
thethe resilient
Plans, and and
shallnon-resilient types
meet the strength
requirements specified.

Splices and end connections shall be of the type and design specified or as
shown on the Plans, and shall be of such strength as to develop the full design
strength of the rail elements.

Unless otherwise specified, all fittings, bolts, washers and other accessories
shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111 or
ASTM A 153, whichever may apply. All galvanizing shall be done after fabrication.

Guardrail Post. Posts shall be of either wood, steel, or concrete, as may be

specified. Only one kind of post shall be used for any one continuous guardrail.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 335/437

Wood post shall be fabricated from an approved or specified timber specie

 and shall be of the quality, diameter or section and length as specified, or as shown
5/7/2018
on the Plans. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Steel post shall be of the section and length as specified, or as shown on the
Plans. They shall be of a copper bearing steel when so specified. Steel shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified. The posts
shall be galvanized or shop painted as may be specified.

Concrete deadmen for end anchorages shall be as specified, or as shown on

the Plans. Concrete and reinforcement shall conform to the requirements as stated
above the precast reinforced concrete posts.

Paints for steel and wood shall be specified and conform to the requirements
specified in Item 411, Paint.

603.3 Construction Requirements

603.3.1 Posts

Posts shall be set vertically in the position shown on the Plans and, where
embedded in a concrete foundation block, shall remain undisturbed for a minimum of
48 hours. The space around the post shall be backfilled to the ground line with
approved material in layers not exceeding 100 mm and each layer shall be
moistened and thoroughly compacted.

603.3.2 Rail Elements

Rail elements shall be erected in a manner resulting in a smooth continuous

installation. All bolts, except adjustment bolts, shall be drawn tight. Bolts shall be of
sufficient length to extend beyond the nuts at least 5 mm but not more than 10 mm.

Where painting of railing components is specified, any damage to the shop

coat
primerofprior
painttoshall bepainting.
further correctedAny
by surface
an application of antoapproved
inaccessible rust-inhibitive
painting after erection
shall be given the specified number of coats of paint uniformly applied by thorough
brushing using an approved pressure spray.

Galvanized surfaces which have been abraded so that the base material is
exposed, threaded portions of all fittings and fasteners and cut ends of bolts shall be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 336/437

protected in a manner as may be specified or directed.

5/7/2018
The surfaces and sawed edges of untreated or salt-treated guardrail shall be
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

painted with three coats of white paint to within 200 mm of the ground line. The first
200 mm of posts above the ground shall be painted with two coats of black paint.
Painting shall be done only when the timber is dry and clean. Each coat of paint
shall be thoroughly dry before the next coat is applied. Paint shall be applied in
heavy coats, completely covering every part of the surface and shall be worked well

shall be thoroughly dry before the second is applied. Stain shall not be applied in
damp weather.

For beam type guardrails, metal works not galvanized shall be given one
shop coat of red lead, zinc chromate paint or an approved fast-drying rust-inhibitive
primer and two field coats of white or aluminum paint. Untreated wood posts shall
be given three coats of paints of the color indicated on the Plans, or as specified.
Painting shall conform to the requirements of Item 411, Paint.

603.4 Method of Measurement

Guardrail shall be measured by linear meter from center to center of end

posts, except where end connections are made on masonry or steel structures, in
which case measurement will be to the face of such structures.

shown End anchorages

in Bid Schedule. and
If noterminal sections
pay item will be measured
for anchorages as sections
or terminal units of each kind
appear in
the Bid Schedule, measurement therefore shall be included in the linear meter
measurement for completed guardrail.

603.5 Basis of Payment

The accepted
of Measurement, quantities
shall be paid of
forguardrail, determined
at the contract in Subsection
unit price per linear603.4,
meter Method
for the
type specified, complete in place, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item. When so specified, end
anchorages and terminal sections will be paid for at the contract unit price for each
of the kind specified and completed in place.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 337/437
 Payment will be made under:
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

603 (1) Guardrail (Wire rope or Wire cable) Linear Meter

ITEM 604 – FENCING

604.1 Description

This Item shall consist of furnishing and constructing posts and barbed wire or
chain link fences in accordance with the details, and at the locations, shown on the
Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

604.2 Material Requirements

604.2.1 Barbed Wire

Barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 121, Class I. The
barbed wire shall consist of 2 strands of 12.5 gauge wire, twisted with 2 points, 14

gauge barbs spaced 100 mm apart.

604.2.2 Chain Link Fence Fabric

Chain link fence fabric shall be fabricated from 10 gauge galvanized wire
conforming to AASHTO M 181 and shall be of the type shown on the Plans. Before
ordering the chain link fence fabric, the Contractor shall submit a sample of the
material to the Engineer for testing and for approval.

604.2.3 Concrete Post

Concrete posts shall be made of Class A concrete in accordance with Item

405, Structural Concrete. The posts shall be cast to a tapered section 3 m long, or
to the length shown on the detailed Plans, and shall have a smooth surface finish.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 338/437
604.2.4 Steel Post
 Steel posts shall be of the sections and length as specified or as shown on
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
the Plans. The posts shall be copper bearing steel and shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M 183 for the grade specified.

604.2.5 Steel Reinforcement

604.3 Construction Requirements

The Contractor shall perform such clearing and grubbing as may be

necessary to construct the fence to the required grade and alignment. Fence
shall generally follow the contour of the ground. Grading shall be performed where
necessary to provide a neat appearance.

Gates shall be constructed as shown on the Plans

604.3.1 Erection Post

The post shall be erected vertically in position inside the formwork of the
foundation block prior to the placing of concrete and shall be adequately supported
by bracing to prevent movement of the post during the placing and setting of the
concrete. The posts shall be erected to the height and location shown on the Plans,
or as ordered by the Engineer.

604.3.2 Installation of Chain Link Fence fabric

The chain link fence fabric shall be set to line and elevation and pulled taut
between each post before spot welding, or other method of fixing, is carried out.
Where splicing of the fence fabric is necessary, or at joints, the lapping of the chain
link fence fabric shall be for a minimum of 100 mm and shall occur only at the post.
No horizontal splicing will be permitted. The fence fabric shall be fixed to the posts
as shown
and/or on the Plans.
construction shall be Any surface
restored protective layer damaged during welding
properly.

604.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meter measured
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 339/437
center to center of posts, of fencing erected in place and accepted.
5/7/2018
604.5 Basis of Payment DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The quantity, as determined in Subsection 604.4, Method of Measurement,

shall be paid for at the contract price per unit of measurement respectively for each
of the particular items listed below and as shown in the Bid Schedule, which price

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

604 (1) Fencing (Barbed wire) Linear Meter

604 (2) Fencing (Chain Link
Fence Fabric) Linear Meter
604 (3) Fencing (Posts) Each
604 (4) Fencing (Gates) Each

ITEM 605 – ROAD SIGN

605.1 Description

This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing road signs in

accordance with this Specification and to the details shown on the Plans, or as
required by the Engineer.

The road signs shall comply in all respects with the “Philippine International
Road Signs Manual” published by the Department of Public Works and Highways,
Manila. The categories of road signs are designated in the Manual, namely, danger
warning signs, regulatory signs and informative signs, or guide signs. These are
referred to in the Contract as warning signs and informatory signs, respectively.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 340/437
Road signs shall be classified as standard or non-standard. Standard signs
 consist of all warning signs, regulatory signs and informatory signs with the
exception of direction signs, place identification signs and the line. Non-standard
5/7/2018
signs consist of all informatory signs which are not classified as standard signs.
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The size of warning and regulatory signs is the length of the side of triangular
signs (measured from the points of intersection of the extension of the edges), the
horizontal width of octagonal signs and the diameter of circular signs.

605.2.2 Reflective Sheeting

The reflective sheeting used on the road signs shall consist of spherical lens
elements embedded within a transparent plastic having a smooth, flat surface with a
protected precoat adhesive which shall be pressure sensitive for manual
application, or tack free heat activated for mechanical vacuum-heat application.

The minimum reflective brightness values of the reflective sheeting as

compared to a magnesium oxide (MgO) shall be as given in Table 605.1. The
brightness of the reflective sheeting totally wet by rain, shall be not less than 90% of
the given values.

Table 605.1 – Reflective Brightness of Traffic Signs Surfaces

Color Angle of Angle of Minimum Reflective

Incidence Divergence Brightness Value
Compared with MgO
Red -40 0.50 15
200 0.50 10
500 0.50 3
White -40 0.50 75
200 0.50 70
500 0.50 70
0 0
Yellow -4 0.50 35
200 0.5 35
500 0.50 10
Blue -40 0.50 6
200 0.50 4.5
500 0.50 0.5
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 341/437
The reflective sheeting shall be sufficiently flexible to permit application and
 adhesion to a moderately embossed surface. It shall show no damage when bent
900 over a 50 mm diameter mandrel.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The sheeting shall be solvent-resistant so as to be capable of withstanding

cleaning with petrol, diesel fuel, mineral spirits, turpentine methanol.

The sheeting shall show no cracking or reduction in reflectivity after being

The reflective material shall be weather-resistant and, following cleaning in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, shall show no discoloration,
cracking, blistering, peeling or any dimensional change.

Samples of reflective sheeting shall be submitted to the Engineer for

approval.

605.2.3 Posts and Frames

Wide flange posts and frames shall be fabricated from structural steel
conforming to ASTM A 283 Grade D. In lieu of wide flange steel posts, the
Contractor may use tubular steel posts conforming to ASTM A 501. All posts shall
be thoroughly cleaned, free from grease, scale and rust and shall be given one coat
of rust-inhibiting priming paint and two coats of gray paint in accordance with Item
411, Paint.

605.2.4 Nuts and Bolts

Nuts, bolts, washers and other metal parts shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO M 111.

605.2.5 Concrete Foundation Blocks

The concrete for the foundation blocks shall be Class A in accordance with

Item 405, Structural Concrete and shall be of the size shown on the Plans.

605.3 Construction Requirements

605.3.1 Excavation and Backfilling

Holes shall be excavated to the required depth to the bottom of the concrete
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 342/437
 foundation as shown on the Plans.
5/7/2018 Backfilling shall be carried out by using suitable material approved by the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Engineer and shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 150 mm in depth. Surplus
excavated material shall be disposed of by the Contractor as directed by the
Engineer.

605.3.3 Sign Panel Installation

Sign panels shall be installed in accordance with the details shown on the
Plans. Any chipping or bending of the sign panels shall be considered as sufficient
cause to require replacement of the panels at the Contractor’s expense.

The exposed portion of the fastening hardware on the face of the signs shall
be painted with enamels matching the background color.

All newly erected traffic road signs shall be covered until ordered removed by
the Engineer.

605.4 Method of Measurement

The quantities of standard reflective warning and regulatory road signs shall
be the number of such signs of the size specified, including the necessary posts and
supports erected and accepted.

The quantities for standard reflective informatory signs and non-standard

reflective informatory signs shall be the number of such, including the necessary
posts and supports, erected and accepted.

605.5 Basis of Payment

The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 605.4, Method of
Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for the Pay Items shown in
the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing
and installing road signs, for excavation, backfilling and construction of foundation
blocks, and all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
Item.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 343/437
 Payment will be made under:
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

ITEM 606 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

606.1 Description

This item shall consist of placing markings on the finished pavement. The
work shall include the furnishing of premixed reflectorized traffic paint or reflectorized
pavement marking paint conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 248,
whichever is called for in the Contract, sampling and packing, preparing the surface,
and applying the paint to the pavement surface, all in accordance with this
Specification.

The paint shall be applied to the size, shape and location of the markings
shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

606.2 Premixed Reflectorized Traffic Paints

Premixed reflectorized traffic paint is a paint in which the glass beads are
mixed in the paint during the process of manufacture, so that upon application and
drying, the paint line is capable of retroreflection of the light beams.

Premixed reflectorized traffic paints which are available in both white and
yellow are paints that provide reflective marking for concrete, bituminous, bricks or
stone surface of highways, bridges, tunnels, streets, parking lots and airports.

606.2.1 Classification

Premixed reflectorized traffic paint shall be classified according to the

following types based on the vehicles used:

Type I – Alkyd
Type II – Chlorinated Rubber Alkyd
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 344/437
5/7/2018
606.2.2 Material Requirements DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The paint shall consist of pigments, vehicles and glass beads so combined as
to produce a paint that will conform to the following requirements.

e. Resistance to Water – The dried paint film shall not show blistering, peeling,
wrinkling and discoloration when immersed in water for 18 hours.
f. The paint shall also conform to the physical properties specified in Table 1.

Table 1 – Physical Properties

Properties Type I and Type II

Minimum Maximum
Specific Gravity 1.5 -
Drying Time, No Pick Up,
Minutes - 40
Consistency (Kreb Units) at 20 C 65 95

g. Premixed reflectorized traffic paint composition shall conform to the

requirements given in Table 2.

Table 2 – Composition Requirements
Requirements
Paint Composition
Type I Type II
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum
Total Dry Solids, percent
By weight 60 - 60 -
Titanium Dioxide, Rutile
Percent by weight 16.0 - -
16.0
Medium Chrome Yellow,
Percent by weight 12.0 - -
12.0
Extenders, percent by wt.,
White
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
13.0 - 13.0 345/437

Yellow - 17.0 - 17.0

 Non-volatile Content
5/7/2018
(based on the vehicle) DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

percent by weight 40 - 41 -
Glass Beads, percent by
Weight 31.0 35.0 35.0
31 0

Beads Diameter: The percentage of beads that will pass through the US
Standard Sieves shall be as follows:
Sieve No. (um) Mass Percent Passing

70 (212 – um) – 0.850 100

80 (186 – um) – 0.600 85-100
140 (106 – um) – 0.300 15-55
230 ( 63 – um) – 0.150 0-10

Index of Refraction: The index of refraction of the beads shall be

within the range of 1.50 to 1.60 when tested
by the liquid immersion method at 29oC.

Appearance: The glass beads shall be transparent, colorless and

the sum of particles that are fused, plane, angular
and colored and contains bubble shall not exceed
20 percent

606.2.3 Construction Requirements

The painting of lane markers and traffic strips shall include the cleaning of
the pavement surfaces, the application, protection and drying of the paint coatings,
the protection of pedestrians, vehicular or other traffic, the protection of all parts of

thesmirches
or road structure andor
of paints itsof
appurtenances against
paint materials, disfigurement
and the byall
supplying of spatters, splashes
tools, labor and
traffic paint necessary for the entire work.

The paint shall not be applied during rain or wet weather or when the air is
misty, or when in the opinion of the Engineer, conditions are unfavorable for the
work. Paint shall not be applied upon damp pavement surfaces, or upon pavement
which has absorbed heat sufficient to cause the paint to blister and produce a
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 346/437

porous film of paint.

 The application of paint shall preferably be carried out by a machine specially
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
made for this purpose but where brushes are used, only round or oval brushes not
exceeding 100 mm in width will be permitted. The paint shall be so applied as to
produce a uniform, even coating in close contact with the surface being painted.
2

606.2.4 Sampling

The paint shall be sampled in accordance with PNS 484/ISO 1512 or other
Philippine Standard Method of Sampling Paints and Varnishes.

606.2.5 Test Methods

The paints shall be tested in accordance with the methods specified in PNS
461 or other Philippine Standard Method of Tests for Paints and Varnishes.

606.2.6 Packing, Packaging and Marking

The paints shall be packed, packaged and marked in accordance with PNS
140.

606.3 Method of Measurement

The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for shall either be the length as
shown on the Plans of painted traffic line of the stated width or the area as shown on
the plans of symbols, lettering, hatchings, and the like, completed and accepted.
Separate items shall be provided for premixed reflectorized traffic paint and
reflectorized thermoplastic pavement markings.

606.4 Basis of Payment

The quantities measured as determined in Section 606.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price for the Pay
Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, sampling and packing, for the
preparation of the surface, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 347/437

necessary to complete the Item.

 Payment will be made under:
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

ITEM 607 – REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT STUDS

607.1 Description

This Item shall consist of furnishing and installing reflective pavement studs
on the surface of the pavement in accordance with this Specification and at the
locations shown on the Plans, or as required by the Engineer.

607.2 Material Requirements

607.2.1 Reflective Studs

Reflective studs shall be either the “Flush Surface” or “Raised Profile” type
having the following characteristics.
The “Flush Surface” reflector shall be the short base type having a maximum
base area of 180 mm x 140 mm. The base shall be formed in cast-iron with
adequate webbing to insure a firm key to the road when installed. The pad shall be
highly resilient and durable rubber reinforced with canvass and shall have a design
life of at least 5 years. The pad shall be so designed as to produce a self-wiping
action of the reflectors when depressed. The reflectors shall be made of impact and
abrasion-resisting glass and shall be hermetically sealed into a copper socket.

The “Raised Profile” reflectors shall consist of an acrylic plastic shell filled

with
of a an adherent
shallow epoxyofcompound
frustrum a pyramid molded from
with base methyl methacyclate
dimensions into100
approximately the shape
mm x
100 mm and thickness of not more than 20 mm. The shell shall contain two
prismatic reflectors each inclined at an angle of 30o to the horizontal and having an
area not less than 20 cm2. The reflectors shall attain the following standards for
their photometric and physical properties:

a) The reflectors shall have the minimum specific intensity values

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 348/437

expressed as candle power per foot-candle of illumination at the

 reflector on a plane perpendicular to the incident light shown in Table
607.1.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Table 607.1 – Raised Profile Pavement Studs:

Photometric Properties

Each reflector for testing shall be located with the center of the reflecting face
at a diameter of 1.5 m from a uniformly bright light source having an effective
diameter of 5 mm. The width of the photocell shall be 1.2 mm and shall be shielded
from stray light. The distance from the centers of the light source and photocell shall
be 5 mm. Failure of more than 4% of the reflective faces shall be a cause for
rejection of the complete batch.

The reflectors shall support a vertical load or kgf(10kN) when tested in the
following manner. A reflector shall be centered horizontally over the open end of a
vertically positioned hollow metal cylinders, 75 mm internal diameter, 25 mm high
and wall thickness of 6 mm. The load shall be applied to the top of the reflector
through a 6 mm diameter by a 6 mm high metal plug centered on top of the reflector.
Failure shall constitute either breakage or significant deformation of the marker at
any load less than 1000 kgf.

607.2.2 Adhesive

When “Raised Profile” type reflectors are specified, an approved two-part

epoxy adhesive shall be used.

607.2.3 Cement Mortar

Cement mortar shall consist of 1 part of Portland Cement to 2 parts of fine

aggregate with water added as necessary to obtain the required consistency.

607.3 Construction Requirements

607.3.1 Flush Surface Type

The stud shall be installed into the pavement in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions but shall also comply with the following requirements.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 349/437

Cavities in the pavement shall be clearly cut to the dimensions of the

 pavement stud and shall allow a clearance of 10 mm around the stud base. The
5/7/2018
longitudinal centerline axis of the cavity shall be the same as that required for the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

pavement stud when laid to the correct line and direction.

The walls of the cavity shall be splayed back at the angle of approximately
o

The depth of the activity shall be such that when the stud base and reflectors
have been installed the elevation of the floor of the lens socket shall not be greater
than 2.0 mm or less than 1.0 mm above the pavement surface.

When the studs are installed into a cement concrete pavement, the stud shall
be grouted into position with asphalt concrete containing fine aggregate only or with
a cement mortar as described in Subsection 607.2.3 above.

607.3.2 Raised Profile Type

The pavement studs shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

instructions.

607.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity of reflectorized pavement studs to be paid for shall be the

number of reflectorized pavement studs of either the flush surface type or the raised
profile type, whichever is called for in the Contract, installed complete and accepted.

607.5 Basis of Payment

The quantities measured as described in Subsection 607.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price of the Pay Items shown in
the Bid Schedule, which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing
and placing all materials, excavating cavities, preparation of surfaces, applying
adhesive and mortar and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete the Item.

Payment will be made under:

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 350/437

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

607 (1) Reflectorized Pavement Stud Each

(Flush Type)

ITEM 608 – TOPSOIL

608.1 Description

This Item shall consist of topsoil furnished, transported and spread, or topsoil
removed from designated areas, hauled and spread, in accordance with this
Specification at the location shown on the Plans or as required by the Engineer.

608.2 Material Requirements

Topsoil furnished shall consist of fertile friable soil of loamy character without
admixture of undesirable subsoil, refuse or foreign materials. It shall be obtained
from well-drained arable land and shall be reasonably free from roots, hard clay,
coarse gravel, stones larger than 50 mm in size, coarse sand, noxious seeds, sticks,
brush, litter and other deleterious substances. Topsoil shall be capable of sustaining
healthy plant life and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Topsoil shall contain not less than five (5) percent organic matter as
determined by loss or ignition of samples oven-dried to constant weight.

608.3 Construction Requirements

608.3.1 Sources of Material

Topsoil shall be obtained as specified in Item 102, Excavation, or from other

approved sources. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least five days before
he intends to start topsoil stripping operations. After inspection and approval by the
Engineer and prior to stripping any topsoil, the Contractor shall remove noxious
weeds and tall grass, brush roots and stones larger than 50 mm in diameter.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 351/437

608.3.2 Placing
5/7/2018 The topsoil shall be evenly spread on the areas and to the line and level
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

shown on the Plans and compacted with a light roller to a depth of not less than 100
mm. Spreading shall not be done when the ground topsoil is excessively wet, or
otherwise in a condition detrimental to such work. The roadway surfaces shall be

608.4 Method of Measurement

The quantities to be paid for shall be the number of cubic meters of Topsoil
removed, furnished and hauled complete in place and accepted.

608.5 Basis of Payment

The quantities, as determined in Subsection 608.4, Method of Measurement,

shall be paid for at the contract unit price respectively, for each of the particular Pay
Items listed below that is shown on the Bid Schedule, which price and payment shall
be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement

608(1) Furnishing and Placing Topsoil Cubic Meter

608(2) Placing Topsoil Cubic Meter

ITEM 609 - SPRIGGING

609.1 Description

This Item shall consist of planting sprigs of living grass plants in accordance
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 352/437

with this Specification at locations shown on the Plans or as required by the

Engineer.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

609.2 Material Requirements

609.2.1 Sprigs

609.2.2 Fertilizers

Fertilizers shall be standard commercial fertilizers supplied separately or in

mixture containing the percentages of total nitrogen, available phosphoric acid and
water-soluble potash. They shall be furnished in standard containers with name,
weight and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked. The fertilizers may be
supplied in the following form:

1. A dry, free-flowing fertilizer soluble in water, suitable for application by a

common fertilizer spreader.
2. A finely ground fertilizer, soluble in water suitable for application by
power sprayer.
3. A granular or pellet form suitable for application by blower equipment.

609.2.3 Ground Limestone

Ground limestone shall contain not less than 85 percent of calcium and
magnesium carbonates and shall be of such fineness that 100 percent shall pass
through a 2.00 mm sieve and not less than 35 percent through a 0.150 mm sieve.
Granulated slag may be substituted in lieu of ground limestone subject to the
approval of the Engineer of an adjusted application rate that will provide the
equivalent total neutralizing power of the specified limestone.

609.2.4 Topsoil

Topsoil shall perform to the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil.

609.2.5 Mulch Material

Mulch material shall be hay, straw or other local non-toxic material.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 353/437

609.3 Construction Requirements
 609.3.1 Harvesting Sprigs
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 5 days before sprigs are to
be harvested and the source shall be approved by the Engineer before harvesting
begins.

Not more than 24 hours shall elapse between harvesting and planting sprigs,
except that when
time extension mayweather or other
be granted, uncontrollable
provided the sprigs condition interrupts
are still moist the work,
and viable. a
Sprigs
that have heated in stockpiles, permitted to dry out or otherwise seriously damaged
during harvesting or delivery shall be rejected and be disposed off as directed.

609.3.2 Advance Preparation and Cleanup

After grading of areas has been completed and before applying fertilizer and
ground limestone, areas to be sprigged shall be raked or otherwise cleared of stone
larger than 50 mm in diameter, sticks, stumps and other debris which might interfere
with sprigging, growth of grasses or subsequent maintenance of grass-covered
areas. If any damage by erosion or other causes has occurred after grading of
areas and before beginning the application of fertilizer and ground limestone, the
Contractor shall repair such damage. This may include filling gullies, smoothing
irregularities and repairing other incidental damage.

609.3.3 Topsoiling

If topsoiling is shown on the Plans, it shall be done in accordance with the

requirements of Item 608, Topsoil.

609.3.4 Applying Fertilizer and Ground Limestone

Following advance preparation and cleanup, fertilizer shall be uniformly

spread at the rate indicated on the Plans. If use of ground limestone is required, it
shall be spread at the rate shown on the Plans. These materials shall be
incorporated into the soil to a depth of not less than 50 mm by disking, raking or
other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Stones larger than 50 mm in diameter,
large clods, roots and other litter brought to the surface by this operation shall be
removed.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 354/437

On steep
effectively slopes where
by mechanical fertilizer and
equipment, theyground
may belimestone
appliedcannot be incorporated
with power sprayers,
 blower equipment or other approved method and need not be incorporated into the
5/7/2018
soil. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

609.3.5 Planting Sprigs

1. Broadcast Sprigging – Sprigs shall be broadcast by hand or by suitable

equipment in a not
between sprigs uniform layer 150
to exceed overmm.
the prepared
The sprigssurface withbespacing
shall then forced
into the soil to a depth of 50 mm to 100 mm with a straight spade or
similar tool, or with a disk harrow or other equipment set to cover the
sprigs to the required depth.

2. Row Sprigging – Furrows shall be opened along the approximate

contour of slopes at the spacing and depth indicated on the Plans.
Sprigs shall be placed without delay in continuous row in the open
furrow with successive sprigs touching and shall be covered
immediately.

3. Spot Sprigging – Spot sprigging shall be performed as specified under

row sprigging, except that, instead of planting in continuous rows,
groups of four sprigs or more shall be spaced 450 mm apart in the
rows.

609.3.6 Mulching and Compacting

After planting or sprigs has been completed and prior to compacting, the
surface shall be cleared of stones larger than 50 mm in diameter, large clods, roots
and other litter brought to the surface during sprigging.

If mulching of sprigged areas is shown on the Plans, the sprigged area shall
be covered with mulch in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 609.2.5,
Mulch Material, within 24 hours from the time sprigging has been completed,
weather and soil conditions permitting.

If mulching is not shown on the Plans, the sprigged area shall be compacted
within 24 hours from the time sprigging has been completed, weather and soil
conditions permitting, by cultipackers, rollers or other satisfactory equipment

operated
is in suchatcondition
right angles
thattoit the slopes.upCompaction
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281

is picked shall not nor

by the equipment, be done
shall when the soil
clay soils be
355/437
 compacted if so directed by the Engineer.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
609.3.7 Maintenance of Sprigged Areas

The Contractor shall protect sprigged areas against traffic by warning signs or

609.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity of sprigging to be paid for shall be the number of units of 100
square meters, measured on the ground surface, completed and accepted.

609.5 Basis of Payment

The quantity, determined as provided in Subsection 609.4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for the Pay Item listed below, which price and payment
shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, for any required
mulching of sprigged areas and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Section except topsoiling which
shall be paid for as provided in Item 608, Topsoil.

Pay Item will be made under:

Pay item No. Description Unit of Measurement

609 Sprigging 100 Square Meter

ITEM 610 – SODDING

610.1 Description

slopes,This Itemorshall consist of furnishing and laying of live sod on ditch

the shoulders,
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 356/437

ditches, other locations as designated, construction of sod checks or

 similar appurtenances, as shown on the Plans or as ordered and laid out in the field
by the Engineer, all in accordance with this Specification.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

610.2 Material Requirements

The sod shall be cut into uniform squares approximately 300 mm x 300 mm,
but not larger than is convenient for handling and transporting.
The thickness of the sod shall be uniform as possible approximately 40 mm or
more depending on the nature of the sod, so that practically all of the dense root
system of the grasses will be retained, but exposed, in the sod strip and that the sod
can be handled without undue tearing or breaking.

In the event the sod to be cut is in a dry condition as to cause scrumbling or

breaking during cutting operations, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall apply
water in sufficient quantities at least 12 hours before cutting to provide a well-
moistened condition of the sod to the depth to which it is to be cut. Sods shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer.

610.3 Construction Requirements

610.3.1 Preparation of the Earth Bed

The area to be sodded shall be constructed to the required cross-section and

contour, and the tops and bottoms of the slopes shall be rounded as shown in the
typical roadway sections.

The areas to be sodded shall be free from stones, roots or other undesirable
foreign materials.

The soil on the area to be sodded shall be loosened and brought to a

reasonably fine texture to a depth of not less than 30 mm by means of equipment on
hand methods adapted for the purpose.

610.3.2 Placing the Sod

Thedepth,
earth bed upon which the sod is tomoist,
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
loosened if not naturally sufficiently be placed shallsod
and the be moistened to the
shall be placed 357/437

thereon within 24 hours after the same has been cut.

 thereon within 24 hours after the same has been cut.
5/7/2018
Unless otherwise required, the sod on slopes shall be laid on horizontal strips
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

beginning at the bottom of the slope and working upwards. When placing sod in
ditches, or in the construction of sod ditch checks or similar appurtenances, the

As the sod is being laid it shall be lightly tamped with suitable wooden or
metal tampers sufficiently to set or press the sod into the underlying soil.
At points where it is anticipated that water may flow over a sodded area, the
upper edges of the sod strips shall be turned into the soil to be below the adjacent
area and a layer of earth place over this juncture and thoroughly compacted. At the
limits of sodded areas, the end strips shall be turned in and treated similarly.

610.3.3 Staking the Sod

On all slopes steeper than one vertical to four horizontal, sod shall be pegged
with stakes 200-300 mm in length, spaced as required by the nature of the soil and
steepness of slope. Stakes shall be driven into the sod at right angles to the slope
until flush with the bottom of the grass blades.

610.3.4 Top Dressing

After staking has been completed, the surface shall be cleared of loose sod,
excess soil or other foreign material, whereupon a thin layer of topsoil shall be
scattered over the sod as a top dressing and the areas shall then be thoroughly
moistened by sprinkling with water.

610.3.5 Watering

The Contractor shall regularly water and maintain sodded areas in a

satisfactory condition for the duration of the Contract and until final acceptance of
the work by the Engineer.

610.4 Method of Measurement

Sodding shall be measured by the square meter and the quantity to be

measured for payment

sod has been shall
placed in be the actual
accordance withnumber
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 of square meters
this Specification of area
and within theon which
limits of 358/437

construction as designated on the Plans or as ordered by the Engineer.

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

610.5 Basis of Payment

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

610 Sodding Square Meter

ITEM 611 – TREE PLANTING

611.1 Description

This Item shall consist of furnishing and planting deciduous shade, flowering
trees and evergreen trees less than 150 mm in diameter on the areas and in the
arrangements indicated on the Plans or as indicated by the Engineer, including the
digging and preparation of pocket holes, furnishing and placing the necessary
topsoil, mulch, water, fertilizer and other incidentals necessary to complete the Item.

611.2 Material Requirements

611.2.1 Topsoil

Topsoil shall conform to the requirements of Item 608, Topsoil.

611.2.2 Mulching

Mulching material shall consist of approved wood chips, ground or crushed

corn cobs, wood shavings, sawdust or peat moss. Wood chips shall be combination

of wood slivers with ground wood or sawdust.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 359/437

Bracing stakes for plants shall be 50 mm x 50 mm of rough wood free from

 unsound loose knots, rot, cross grain and sapwood or other defects that may impair
5/7/2018
its strength. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Anchor stakes shall be of the same quality as bracing stakes and of the size

The wire to be used in bracing trees 7.5 mm or less in diameter shall be 3 mm

(No. 11) galvanized
galvanized steel wiresteel
shallwire
be and for All
used. trees over
wires 75 mm
shall in diameter,
be new and free40 mmbends
from (No. 9)
or
kinks.

611.2.3 Trees

All trees furnished under this Item shall be 150 mm or less in diameter and
shall be true to name and type and shall follow standard names of trees in
accordance with the Bureau of Forestry Standards as adopted by the Department of
Public Works and Highways.
When specified in the Provisions, certain varieties of plants will be furnished by
the government.

The Contractor shall submit complete and detailed information concerning the
sources of supply for each item of plant materials before planting operations.

All existing laws and regulations requiring inspection for plant diseases and
infections shall be complied with and each delivery shall be accompanied by
necessary certificates of clearance to be presented to the Engineer.

Plants furnished by the Contractor shall be healthy, shapely and well-rooted

and roots shall show no evidence of having been restricted or deformed at any time.
Plants shall be well-grown and free from insect pest and disease.

Root condition of plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will be

determined by the removal of earth from the roots of not less than two plants nor
more than two (2) percent of total number of plants of each specie or variety except
when container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than two
plants of each specie or variety from each source will be inspected by the Engineer.
In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Government
reserves the right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective
samples. Any plant rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will
be considered as samples and will not be paid for.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 360/437
5/7/2018 611.3 Construction Methods DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

611.3.1 Balling of Plants and Trees

location. These plants shall be hauled by the ball only and not by the plant itself.

The
be a slightest
cause forindication
rejection of
of manufactured
such plants. earth balls or hauling of the plants itself will

611.3.2 Digging Plants

All plants, nursery-grown or collected, shall be dug with care and skill
immediately before shipping and avoiding all possible injury to the plants, loss or
damage of the roots, particular attention being given to fibrous roots in this respect.
After the plants are dug, their roots shall not be permitted to dry out. They shall not
be exposed to hot temperatures. All plants shall be dug in dormant state and shall
be so held until planted.

611.3.3 Temporary Storage and Plant Spray

After delivery and inspection, the plants shall be sprayed with an approved
anti-desiccant prior to planting, heeling-in or storing, except in the case of collected
stock which shall not be heeled-in or stored, but shall be sprayed with anti-desiccant
immediately and planted within 36 hours after digging.

The spray shall cover both upper and lower surfaces of the branches and
foilage to the point of run-off. Spray nozzles shall be the type to produce a fine
mist.

Spraying shall be included for payment in the pertinent planting item.

Following spray treatment with anti-desiccant, all plants which cannot be planted
promptly shall be heeled-in in a trench, spread and the roots covered with moist soil.
If plants are not to be stored for a period longer than 10 days, they may be placed in
an approved well-ventilated, cool and moist storage shed and the roots completely
covered with moist straw. All plants heeled-in or stored shall be properly maintained
by the Contractor until planted. In the event heeled-in plant material must be held
over for a longer period, such heeled-in material shall be lifted and replanted in a
satisfactory manner in nursery rows.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 361/437

The ball of soil and roots of balled and burlapped plants, if not immediately
 planted after delivery and inspection, shall be adequately protected by topsoil
5/7/2018 covering until removed for planting in a manner appropriate to the conditions and
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

satisfactory to the Engineer.

611.3.4 Layout of Planting

Before digging pocket holes or beds, the Contractor shall lay out, by suitable
staking, the location of all pocket holes and beds. The layout of planting shall be
approved by the Engineer.

611.3.5 Roots and Top Pruning

The ends of all broken and damaged roots, 6 mm diameter or larger, shall be
pruned with a clean cut removing no more than the injured portion. All plants shall
be pruned to balance the top with the root system keeping the natural shape of the
species. All dead woods shall be removed. All cuts and wounds, 12 mm or over in
diameter, shall be painted with tree wound dressing immediately after the pruning.

611.3.6 Pocket Holes

Pocket holes shall be dug at the locations shown on the Plans or as directed
by Engineer. The holes shall be dug to the depth and cross-section specified and
should be of sufficient size to provide for not less than 150 mm of top soil backfill
beneath and around the root system. The holes shall be dug with the sides vertical.
Surplus excavation from the bed and pocket holes shall be disposed off as directed
by the Engineer.

611.3.7 Backfill

The pocket holes shall be backfilled with topsoil as each plant is set. The
topsoil shall be well-tamped by the worker’s feet, rods or other approved tamping
devices as it is shovelled into the holes. The backfill in holes on slopes shall be
built-up on the lower side to catch and hold water. During planting the topsoil
surrounding the plant be slightly depressed to hold water.

611.3.8 Planting

The plants to be planted shall be the specie, variety and size specified. The
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 362/437

operation of the actual planting shall not be performed at any time when the soil is
 not in a friable or workable condition. The Engineer shall also approve the location
5/7/2018
of each individual plant taking into consideration its size and shape, in order that the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

best possible arrangement will result.

topsoil shall be settled in and about the plant roots by application of water but at no

time shall tampingthat

of a consistency or would
furtherpermit
topsoilits
backfill
beingbe made while
compacted this wet topsoil
or puddled backfillAll
by so doing. is
compaction shall be such that no plant will settle lower than the depth above
specified. No air pocket shall be left around the root of any plants.

After filling halfway on the earth ball, the burlap shall be loosened and the top
half cut off and removed after which the balance of the pocket hole shall be
backfilled and tamped.

After planting and prior to mulching, fertilizers shall be applied evenly over
the top of the backfilled area. Care shall be used so that the fertilizer does not get
into contact with the stem, trunk, branches or leaves of the plants.

611.3.8.1 Tree Planting along National Road

The trees to be used for this purpose shall be the varieties the root systems of
which grow downward rather than sideward to avoid situations where the roots
spread sideward and consequently destroy the road and sidewalk slabs.

Trees shall be planted in a neat row, within the road right-of-way (ROW) and
as close as possible to the ROW limit, with sufficient allowance so that the trees
when fully grown will not encroach on the adjoining property or touch electric and
other overhead utility lines. The center-to-center spacing between trees shall be 10-
20 metres (m). For road sections with a generally north-south alignment, the trees
on one side of the road shall be staggered vis-à-vis the trees on the other side of the
road. This arrangement will help to ensure that enough sunlight will fall on the road
and thus help to keep the road dry even during the rainy season.

For roads without curbs, the trees shall be planted with a minimum clear
distance of 0.60 m beyond the edge of the shoulder, but in no case less than 3.0 m
from the edge of the pavement. For roads with curbs, particularly in urban areas,
the trees shall be planted with a minimum setback of 1.00 m beyond the face of the
curb.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 363/437
 Where there are longitudinal drainage canals, the trees shall be planted on
5/7/2018
the outer side of such canals. On the roadway curves and intersections, the
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

pertinent design standards on sight distance shall be observed.

with the provision of subsection 611.3.10 (Watching and Maintenance). The

maintenance of trees
road maintenance shall beand
program faithfully
shall undertaken
be includedasinanthe
integral parttherefore
reports of the regular
as a
regular work item under Activity No. 209 of the Highway Maintenance Activity
Standards.

The tree planting shall be undertaken not only along national roads
programmed for construction or improvement, but also along existing national roads
especially those outside developed urban areas where there are no trees or only a
few trees have been planted. For such existing roads, the required tree planting
shall be undertaken by the District Engineering Office concerned. The tree planting
shall be undertaken in both contractual projects and projects by administration.

611.3.9 Mulching

Within 24 hours after planting, mulching material shall be spread to cover the
plant hole and the area 150 mm outside the periphery of the plant hole. The depth
and application for wood chips shall be a minimum of 150 mm. For ground or
crushed corn cobs, sawdust or peat moss the minimum depth shall be 100 mm.

611.3.10 Watering and Maintenance

All plants shall be watered during the planting operations, subject to direction
and approval of the Engineer. From time to time during the life of the Contract,
sufficient water shall be applied so that not only will the topsoil backfill about each
plant be kept moist, but also for moisture to extend into the surrounding soil.

The Contractor shall, during the life of the Contract, properly care for all plants
furnished, planted or stored, performing such watering, weeding, cultivating or other
ordinary maintenance work as shall be necessary to keep the stock in a live and
healthy condition. Plants which have died back into the crown or beyond a normal
pruning line shall be replaced by the Contract at no additional expense to the
Government.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 364/437

611.3.11 Bracing
 All deciduous and evergreen trees shall be braced immediately after planting.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Deciduous trees from 1.20 m to 1.80 m in height shall have one vertical support
stake. Deciduous trees from 1.80 m to 2.50 m in height shall have two vertical

100 mm of the trunk at one-half of the height of the tree. If two are required, they

shall
for be driven on opposite sides of the tree with the stake tops on opposite sides
fastening.

All trees, deciduous or evergreen over two and one-half meters shall be
braced by the tripod method as directed by the Engineer.

611.3.12 Dead Trees

Before
that have diedcompletion
back into and
the final
crownacceptance of the
or beyond the project,
normal all trees not
pruning linehealthy or
shall be
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense with trees of the specified species or
variety, size and quality and meeting the Specification.

611.4 Method of Measurement

The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of trees of each specie or
variety called for in the Plans furnished, planted and accepted with the necessary
mulch, topsoil, water, fertilizer and other incidentals to complete the Item.

611.5 Basis of Payment

The quantities as determined in Subsection 611.4, Method of Measurement,

shall be paid for at the contract unit price each of the trees of each specie or variety
furnished, planted and accepted which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing all labor, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the Item.

Payment will be made under:

Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 365/437
 611 (1) Trees (Furnishing and
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Transpplanting) Each

ITEM 612 – REFLECTIVE

FORM) THERMOPLASTIC STRIPPING MATERIALS ( SOLID

612.1 Description

This standard specifies the requirement for reflectorized thermoplastic

pavement striping material conforming to AASHTO M 249 that is applied to the road
surface
beads atina arate
molten
of notstate by mechanical
less than 350 g/L of means with having
glass beads surfaceaapplication
size range of glass
of drop-
in type and will produce an adherent reflectorized stripe of specified thickness and
width capable of resisting deformation by traffic.

612.2 Materials Requirements

1. Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement Material shall be homogeneously

composed of pigment, filler, resins and glass reflectorizing spheres.

The thermoplastic material shall be available to both white and yellow.

2. Glass Beads (Pre-Mix) shall be uncoated and shall comply with the
following requirements:

Refractive Index, min. - 1.50

Spheres, Percent, min. - 90

Gradation:
Sieve Mass Percent Passing
mm
0.850 100
0.600 75-95
0.425 -
0.300 15-35
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
0.180 - 366/437

0.150 0-5
 0.150 05
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

612.3 General Requirements

Table 612.1 – Composition Requirements

Component White Yellow
Binder, min. 18.0 18.0
Glass Beads:
min. 30 30
max. 40 40
Titanium
Dioxide, min. 10.0
Chrome Yellow,
Medium, min. 10.0
Calcium Carbonate
And Inert Fillers,
Max. 42.0 42.0

612.3.2 Qualitative

The material shall conform to the qualitative requirements as specified in

Table 612.2.

Table 612.2 – Qualitative Requirements

Property Requirements
White Yellow
Specific Gravity, max. 2.15
Drying Time, minutes, max. 10.0
Bond Strength to Portland
Cement Concrete after
heating for four (4) hours
±5 min. @ 218oC, MPa, max. 1.24
Cracking Resistance @ low

temp.
four (4)after heating
hours for@ 218
±5 min.
o
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 367/437
±2 C. No cracks
 Impact Resistance after
heating for four (4) hours
5/7/2018
±5 min. @ 218 ±2oC and DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

forming test specimens,

612.4 Application Properties

The material shall readily extrude at a temperature of 211 ± 7 oC, from

approved equipment to produce a line 3.2 to 4.8 mm thick which shall be continuous
and uniform in shape having clear and sharp dimensions.

The material shall not exude fumes which are toxic, obnoxious or injurious to
persons or property when heated during applications.

The application of additional glass beads by drop-in methods shall be at a

rate of not less than 350 g/L of glass beads having a size range for drop-in type. The
typical size range of spheres of drop-in type paints is as follows.

Passing 850 um (#20) sieve and

retained on 250 um (#60) sieve, % 80 – 100

a) Preparation of Road Surface – the materials should be applied only on the

surface which is clean and dry. It shall not be laid into loose detritus, mud or
similar extraneous matter, or over an old paint markings, or over an old
thermoplastic marking which is faulty. In the case of smooth, polished surface
stones such as smooth concrete, old asphalt surfacing with smooth polished surface
stones and/or where the method of application of the manufacturer of the
thermoplastic materials shall be recommended, and with the approval of the
Engineer.

b) Preparation of Thermoplastic Materials – The materials shall be melted in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction in a heater fitted with a mechanical
stirrer to give a smooth consistency to the thermoplastic and such the local
overheating shall be avoided. The temperature of the mass shall be within the range
specified by the manufacturer and shall on no account be allowed to exceed the
maximum temperature stated by the manufacturer. The molten material shall be
used as expeditiously as possible and for thermoplastics which have natural resin
binders or otherwise sensitive to prolong heating the materials shall not be
maintained in a molden condition for more than 4 hours.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 368/437
 c) Laying – Center lines, lane lines and edges lines shall be applied by
5/7/2018 approved mechanical means and shall be laid in regular alignment. Other markings
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

may be applied by hand – screed, hand propelled machine or by self-propelled

be laid to thickness of not less than 1.5 mm unless authorized by the Engineer. In
all cases the surface produced shall be uniform and appreciably free from bubbles
and steaks. Where the Contractor Documents require or the Engineer direct that
ballotini shall be applied to the surface of the markings, these shall be applied
uniformly to the surface of hot thermoplastic immediately after laying such that the
quality of ballotini firmly embedded and retained in the surface after completion
complies with the requirements of Sub-section 606.2.2, Material Requirements.

Road markings of a repetitive nature, other center lines, lane lines, etc., shall
unless
the sizeotherwise directed
and spacing by the Engineer
requirements shown onbethe
setPlans.
out with stencils which comply with

d) Re-use of Thermoplastic Materials – At the end of day’s as much as

possible the material remaining in the heater and/or laying apparatus shall be
removed. This may be broken and used again provided that the maximum heating
temperature has not been exceeded and that the total time during which it is a
molden condition does not exceed the requirements of Sub-section 606.2.3,
Construction Requirements.
612.4.1 Defective Materials or Workmanship

Materials which are defective or have been applied in an unsatisfactory

manner or to incorrect dimensions or in a wrong location shall be removed, the road
pavement shall be made good and materials replaced, reconstructed and/or
properly located, all at the Contractor’s expenses and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

612.4.2 Protection of the Traffic

The Contractor shall protect pedestrians, vehicles and other traffic adjacent to
the working area against damage or disfigurement by construction equipment, tools
and materials or by spatters, splashes and smirches or paint or other construction
materials and during the course of the work, provide and maintain adequate signs
and signals for the warning and guidance of traffic.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 369/437

612.5 Sampling
5/7/2018 A minimum weight of 10 kg. of Reflectorized Thermoplastic paint shall be
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

taken for every 100 bags or fraction thereof.

612.7 Packing and Marking

The material shall be packaged in a suitable containers to which it will not

adhere during shipment and storage. The blocks of cast thermoplastic material
shall be approximately 300 x 915 by 51 mm and shall weigh approximately 23 kg.
Each container label shall designate the color, manufacturer’s name, batch number
and date of manufacture. Each batch manufactured shall have its own separate
number. The label shall warn the user that the material shall be heated to 211 ±
o
7 C during application.

612.8 Method of Measurement

The quantity of pavement markings to be paid for shall be the area as shown
on the Plans of painted traffic line of the stated width and the area as shown on the
plans of symbols, lettering, hatching and the like, completed and accepted.

The quantity shown in the Bill of Quantities represents the approximate

quantity in square meter of pavement markings, with width as shown applied at the
centerline of the road pavements to which may be increased or decreased
depending on the Engineer’s decision whether to require additional markings or
delete parts of it. Other markings representing symbols, lettering, hatching and
others in locations where they maybe required by the Engineer shall, likewise, be
implemented by the Contractor using reflectorized thermoplastic pavement
markings as approved and directed.

612.9 Basis of Payment

The quantities measured as determined in Subsection 612.8, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the appropriate contract unit price for the Pay
Items shown in the Bid Schedule which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, sampling and packing, for the
preparation of the surface, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 370/437

necessary to complete the Item.

5/7/2018 Payment will be made under: DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 371/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

PART I – MATERIALS DETAILS

ITEM 700 – HYDRAULIC CEMENT

700.1 Portland Cement and Masonry Cement

Cement shall conform to the requirements of the following cited Specifications

for the type specified or permitted.

Type Specifications
Portland Cement AASHTO M 85 (ASTM C 150)
Blended Hydraulic Cements AASHTO M 240 (ASTM C 595)
Masonry Cement AASHTO M 150-74 (ASTM C 91)

When Types IV and V (AASHTO M 85), P and PA (AASHTO M 150) cements

are used, proper recognition shall be given to the effects of slower strength gain on
concrete proportioning and construction practices. Types S and SA cements will be
permitted only when blended with Portland Cement in proportions approved by the
Engineer.

Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the product of only one mill of
any one brand and type of Portland Cement shall be used on the project.

The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and protecting the
cement against dampness. Cement which, for any reason, has become partially set
or which contains lumps of caked cement will be rejected. Cement salvaged from
discarded or used bags shall not be used.

ITEM 701 – CONSTRUCTION LIME (HYDRATED)

701.1 General
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 372/437

Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements of PHILSA I-1-68 or ASTM C

 207-76 and shall be of the following type :
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Type N - Normal hydrated lime for masonry purposes.

Type NA and SA are air-entrained hydrated limes that are suitable for use in
any of the above uses where air-entrainment are desired.
Type S and SA hydrated lime develop high, early plasticity and higher water
retentivity and by a limitation on their unhydrated oxide content.

It is the intent of this Specification to use either the Type N or S for soil
stabilization and as filler requirement to bituminous plant mixtures. It is expected to
provide pavements with greater resistance to the detrimental effects of water,
especially flooding during the rainy season.

701.2 Chemical Requirements

Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall conform to the following

standard chemical requirements.

Percentage

Calcium and Magnesium oxides

(Non-volatile basis), min. % 60
Carbon dioxide (as received basis), max. %
If sample is taken at the place of manufacture 5
If sample is taken at any other place 7
Unhydrated oxides (as received basis) for Type S and
SA, max. % 8

701.3 Physical Requirements

Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall conform to the following

standard physical requirements:

a. Percentage Residue

The residue retained on a 0.600 mm (No. 30) sieve shall not be more
than 0.57% and not more than 15% on a 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 373/437

b. Plasticity
5/7/2018
The putty made from Type S, special hydrate, or type SA, special air-
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

entraining hydrate, shall have plasticity figure of not less than 200 when

hydrate or from putty made from the hydrate which has been soaked for a
period of 16 to 24 hours.

701.4 Grading Requirement

Hydrated lime for construction purposes shall conform to the following grading
requirements:

Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

Standard
0.850 mm Alternate US20)
(No. Standard 100
0.075 (No. 200) 85 – 100

701.5 Sampling

Samples of construction lime shall be taken at the place of manufacture or at

the destination as agreed upon by the parties concerned. If the samples are taken
elsewhere than at the place of manufacture, such samples shall be taken within 24
hours of the receipt of the material.

Sampling shall be conducted as expeditiously as possible to avoid undue

exposure of the material to the air. Samples shall not be taken from broken
packages.

At least one percent of the package shall be sampled but in no case shall less
than five packages be sampled. Individual packages shall be taken from various
parts of the unit being sampled. Each package so taken shall be opened and not
less than 0.5 kg shall be taken by means of a sampling tube that takes a core of the
material of not less than 2.5 cm in diameter and that is of sufficient length to permit
the taking of the sample from the top to the bottom of the mass being sampled. The
material removed shall be thoroughly mixed and quartered. Triplicate samples of
not less than 2.5 kg each shall be taken and sealed in properly labelled, air-tight,
moisture proof containers.

701.5.1 Sample for Chemical Analysis

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 374/437

The sample as received at the laboratory shall be thoroughly mixed,

 quartered, and a representative sample taken and crushed to pass a 0.150 mm (No.
5/7/2018
100) sieve for analysis. The remaining uncrushed portion shall be resealed for
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

further possible tests.

701.7 Packing

Lime and limestone products may be shipped in bulk or in containers agreed

upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser. The most common units for hydrated
lime are paper bags holding 23 kg (50 lbs.), 11.5 kg (25 lbs.), 4.5 kg (10 lbs.) or 2.3
kg (5 lbs.).

ITEM 702 – BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

702.1 Asphalt Cements

Asphalt cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 226.

702.2 Liquid Asphalts

Liquid asphalt shall conform to the requirements of the following

specifications:

Rapid Curing Liquid Asphalts - AASHTO M 81

Medium Curing Liquid Asphalts - AASHTO M 82

702.3 Emulsified Asphalts

Emulsified asphalts shall conform to the requirements of the following

specifications:

Emulsified Asphalt (Anionic) - AASHTO M 140

(ASTM D 977)
Emulsified Asphalt (Cationic) - AASHTO M 208

702.4 Acceptance Procedures for Bituminous Materials

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 375/437
 702.4.1 General
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Bituminous materials will be accepted at the source of shipment subject to the

be loaded and certify that it was clean and free of contaminating material
and loaded.

c. The Contractor shall furnish with each shipment two copies of the delivery
ticket. The delivery tickets shall contain the following information:

Consignees ________________ Destination _________________

Project Number _____________ Date ______________________
Grade ____________________ Loading Temp. ______________
Net Liters __________________ Specific Gravity ______________
0 0

At 15.5 C (60 F)
Net Weight _______________________________________________
Identification No. (Truck, Car, Tank, etc.) ________________________

d. The Contractor or the supplier as his agent, shall deliver to the Engineer
or his representative a certification signed by an authorized representative
of the supplier to cover the quality and quantity of material and the
condition of container for each shipment. The certification shall be
essentially in the following form and may be stamped, written or printed
on the delivery tickets.

“This is to certify that this shipment of _______________ (tonnes/litres) or

______________ of asphalt meets all Contract Specification requirements of the
DPWH, and the shipping container was clean and free from contaminating material
when loaded.

Producer ________________________
Signed __________________________

Failure to sign the certification will be a cause to withhold use of the material
until it can be sampled, tested and approved.

702.4.2 Quality Control Reviews

Quality control reviews will be conducted by the Government, or an authorized

representative at the point of production, at frequencies prescribed by the DPWH, to
determine the reliability of the producer’s certifications.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 376/437

If this review indicates that the certifications are not reliable, the acceptance of
 bituminous materials by certification will be discontinued and the contents of each
shipping container will be sampled at point of delivery, tested and accepted prior to
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
incorporation into the work. This procedure will be followed until the engineering

Acceptance samples of bituminous materials shall be obtained in accordance

with AASHTO T 40, Sampling Bituminous Materials, at the applicable point of
acceptance as defined herein:
a. Bituminous materials used in direct application on the road. Acceptance
samples shall be obtained under the supervision of the Engineer from the
conveyances containing the bituminous material at the point of delivery.
Single samples shall be taken of each separate tank load of bituminous
material delivered, at the time of discharge, into distributors or other
conveyances on the project.

b. Bituminous materials initially discharged into storage tanks on the project.

Acceptance samples shall be obtained from the line between the storage
tank and the distributor of the bituminous mixing plant after each delivery.
A single acceptance sample shall be taken after sufficient period of
circulation of such bituminous material has taken place to insure samples
representative of the total materials then in the storage tank.

As soon after sampling as practicable, the acceptance sample shall be

delivered by the Engineer to the nearest authorized laboratory for tests to
determine compliance.

702.4.4 Requirements for Bituminous Materials containing Anti-stripping

Additives

a. All the foregoing requirements of Item 702 shall apply for the type of
bituminous material involved.

b. Additionally, the Contractor or the supplier as his agent, shall furnish the
Engineer or his representative along with and the time of delivery of the
initial shipment of fortified bituminous material to the project, and thereafter
with the subsequent shipments when ordered by the Engineer, 1 litre (1
quart) sealed sample of the bituminous material taken at the time of
loading at the refinery and prior to introduction of the additive, along with a
separate 0.5 litre (1 pint) sample of the anti-stripping additive involved.

702.5 Application Temperatures

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 377/437
 Bituminous materials for the several application indicated in the Specifications
shall be applied within the temperature ranges indicated in Table 702.1.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

RT 10-11-12 79 – 121 79 – 121

RTCB 5-6 . . . . 30 15.5 – 48.9 15.5 – 48.9
MC . . . . . . . . . 30 21 – 62.8 15.5 – 40.5
RC-MC . . . . . . 70 40.5 – 85 32 – 68
RC-MC . . . . . . 250 60 – 107 51.7 – 93
RC-MC . . . . . . 800 79 – 129 71 – 107
RC-MC . . . . . . 3000 106.7 – 143 93 – 126.7
All Emulsions 10 – 71 10 – 71
Asphalt Cement As required to achieve
(All Grades) 204 Max. viscosity of 75 – 150

seconds
KinematictoViscosity
achieve aof
150-300 mm2 /s (150-
300) centi-stokes

Table 702.1 shall apply unless temperatures ranges applicable to specific lots
of material delivered to the job are supplied by the producer.

702.6 Material for Dampproofing and Waterproofing Concrete and Masonry

Surfaces

Material shall conform to the requirements of the following specifications:

a. Primer for use with asphalt AASHTO M 116

b. Primer for use with tar AASHTO M 121

(ASTM D 43)
Or

It may be a liquid water-gas tar conforming to the following

requirements:

Specific gravity, 250/250C 1.030 – 1.100

Specific viscosity at 400C
(Engler), not more than 3.0
0
Total distillate,
not more than mass percent 300 , 50.0
Bitumen (soluble in carbon disulphide),
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 378/437
not less than 98.0 percent
 Water not more than 2.0 percent

5/7/2018
c. Tar for mop or seal coats: DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Rubberized tar (heated to free flowing but

0 0
not to exceed 121 C (250 F) ASTM D 2993
d. Asphalt for mop coat AASHTO M 115

e. Waterproofing fabric ASSHTO M 117

(ASTM D 1668)

Fabric shall be waterproofed with tar or asphalt in agreement with

the material specified for prime and mop coats.

f. Mortar materials shall conform to Section 705.5 except that the
mortar shall be uniformly mixed to spreading consistency in the
proportion of 1 part Portland Cement to 3 parts fine aggregate.

g. Asphalt plank AASHTO M 46

(ASTM D 517)

Unless otherwise shown on the plans, planks shall be 30 mm thick

and may be from 150 to 300 mm in width but all pieces for one
structure shall be of the same width except such “closers” as may be
necessary. The lengths shall be such as to permit the laying of the
planks to the best advantage on the surface to be covered but shall
not be less than 0.9 nor more than 2.5 m.

h. Asphalt roll roofing ASTM D 224,

65 pound grade
702.7 Membrane Material for Waterproofing Bridge Decks

Bridge deck waterproofing membrane shall be mesh-reinforced self-sealing

rubberized asphalt preformed membrane and shall have the following properties:

Thickness 1.65 mm (655 mils)

-11
Permeance-Perms
Kg/Pa.s.m2 57.213 x 10 (0.10) ASTM
MethodEB96
(grains/sq.ft./hr./in.Hg)
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 379/437

Tensile strength 344.5 kPa (50 lb/in) ASTM D 882

 modified for
5/7/2018 25.4 mm
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Primer and mastic shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be

compatible with the membrane.

702.8 Tars

Tars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 52.

702.9 Dust Oils

Dust oils and clarified dust oil shall conform to the following requirements:

General ASTM Dust Oil Clarified

Requirements METHOD Light Medium Heavy Dust Oil
Flash Point, 0C D 1310 51.6 51.6 51.6 93.3
(Open tag.), min.
Viscosity at 380C D 2170 40-70 90-135 145-200 20-100
(1000F)
Kinematic, CS
Water, % D 95 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
maximum
Asphaltenes % *D2006 3.0-6.0 4.0-7.0 5.0-8.0 0-5.0
Saturates % *D2006 25 25 25 10
minimum
Distillation
Total Distillate to **D402 35 30 30 5
2880C (550 F),
Max. %
Test on residue from Distillation to 2880C (5500F)
Viscosity at D 2170 75-250 200-630 540-1500 20-150
o
100 T, Kinematic,
CS
Solubility in ***2042 97.0 97.0 97.0 97.0
Trichloroethylene,
% Min.

* As modified in procedure as “Test Method for Determination of Asphaltene and

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 380/437

Saturate Content of Dust Oils” by Materials Testing Laboratory, Region I,

 USDA Forest Service, Missoula, MT dated November 1970. Copies of the
procedure are available from the Regional Materials Engineer, Region I, USDA
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Forest Service Missoula MT 598011

ITEM 703 – AGGREGATES

703.1 Fine Aggregate for Concrete and Incidentals

703.1.1 Concrete

Fine Aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M

6, with no deleterious substances in excess of the following percentages:

Clay lumps 3.0

Coal and lignite 1.0
Material passing 0.075 mm sieve 4.0
Other substances – as shown in the Special Provisions

Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special Provisions, shall

meet the pertinent requirements of AASHTO M 195.

703.1.2 Granular backfill filter material for underdrains and filler for paved
waterways shall be permeable and shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 6,
except that soundness tests will not be required and minor variations in grading and
content of deleterious substances may be approved by the Engineer.

703.1.3 Aggregate for minor concrete structures shall be clean, durable,

uniformly graded sand and gravel, crushed slag or crushed stone, 100 percent of
which will pass a 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches) sieve and containing not more than 5
percent passing the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve.

703.2 Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete

Coarse aggregate for concrete shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 80.

Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special Provisions, shall

conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 195, for the grading specified.

703.3 Aggregate for Portland Cement Treated and Stabilized Base Course
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 381/437

The crushed and uncrushed granular material shall consist of hard durable
 stones and rocks of accepted quality, free from an excess of flat, elongated, soft or
5/7/2018 disintegrated pieces or other objectionable matter. The method used in obtaining
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

703.4 Aggregate for Untreated Subbase, Base or Surface Courses

stone, Aggregate shall

crushed slag or consist
crushedoforhard, durable
natural particles
gravel. or fragments
Materials of up
that break crushed
when
alternately wetted and dried shall not be used.

Coarse aggregate is the material retained on the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve and
shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 50 for subbase and not more than
45 for Base and Surface Courses as determine by AASHTO Method T 96.

Fine aggregate is the material passing the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve and shall
consist of natural or crushed sand and fine mineral particles. The fraction passing
the 0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be greater than 0.66 (two-thirds) of the
fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve. For base courses, the fraction
passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit not greater than 25 and
a plasticity index not greater than 6, while for subbase course, the liquid limit shall
not be greater than 35 plasticity index not greater than 12.

For surface courses, the fraction passing the 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall
have a liquid limit not greater than 35 and a plasticity index not less than 4 or greater
than 9.

All materials shall be free from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay.

When crushed aggregate is specified, not less than 50 mass percent of the
particles retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least one fractured
face.

Gradation of each designated size of aggregate shall be obtained by crushing,

screening and blending processes as may be necessary.

Materials otherwise meeting the requirements of this Section will be

acceptable whenever such materials produce a compacted course meeting
applicable density requirements as specified in Subsections 200.3.3, 201.3.3,
202.3.3 and 203.3.6.

703.5 Aggregate for Bituminous Concrete

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 382/437

703.5.1 Coarse Aggregate

5/7/2018
Coarse aggregate retained on the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve shall be crushed
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

meet the gradation required under the composition of mixture for the specific type
under contract. Only one kind shall be used on the project except by permission of
the Engineer.
703.5.2 Fine Aggregate

Fine aggregate passing the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve shall consist of natural
sand, stone, stone screenings or slag screenings or a combination thereof and
unless otherwise stipulated shall conform to the quality requirements of AASHTO M
29 (ASTM D 1073). Fine aggregate shall be of such gradation that when combined
with other required aggregate fractions in proper proportion, the resultant mixture will
meet the gradation required under the composition of mixture for the specific type
under contract.

703.5.3 Open-Graded Asphalt Concrete Friction Course

Aggregate shall conform to Subsections 703.5.1 and 703.5.2 above and the
following requirements. Relatively pure carbonate aggregates or any aggregates
known to polish shall not be used for the coarse aggregate fraction (material retained
on the 2.36 mm (No. 8) sieve. In addition, the coarse aggregate fraction shall have
at least 75 mass percent of weight of particles with at least two fractured faces and
90 mass percent with one or more fractured faces, except that lightweight
aggregates need not meet this requirement. The abrasion loss (AASHTO T 96)
shall not exceed 40 mass percent.

703.5.4 Lightweight Aggregate (except slag)

Lightweight aggregate (except slag), if required or permitted by a Special

Provisions, shall be manufactured by the rotary kiln process. The material shall
consist of angular-fragments uniform in density and reasonably free from flat,
elongated or other deleterious substances. The material shall show an abrasion
loss of less than 45 mass percent when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 96.
The dry mass per cubic metre shall not exceed 1080 kg (67 pcf). After testing
through five cycles of the magnesium sulfate soundness test, the loss shall not
exceed ten (10) mass percent.

703.6 Aggregate for Bituminous Plant Mix Surfacing

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 383/437

Aggregate shall be uniformly graded from coarse to fine. Target values for
 the intermediate sieve sizes shall be established within the limits shown in Table
5/7/2018
703.1. DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Table 703.1
Range of Gradation Target Values

Sieve Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO

Designation, mm T 11 and T 27, exclusive of mineral filler
Range
25 (1 inch) 100
19 (3/4 inch) 100
4.75 (No. 4) 50 – 60
2.36 (No. 8) 38 – 48
0.075 (No. 200) 3–7
The minimum for Sand Equivalent is 35

No intermediate sizes of aggregate shall be removed for other purposes

without written consent of the Engineer.

If crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass percent of the material
retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be particles having at least one fractured
face.

That portion of the composite material passing a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall
have a sand equivalent of not less than 35, as determined by AASHTO T 176,
Alternate Method No. 2.

The aggregate shall show a durability index not less than 35 (coarse and fine)
as determined by AASHTO T 210.

The material shall be free of clay balls and adherent films of clay or other
matter that would prevent thorough coating with the bituminous material.

703.7 Aggregate for Hot Plant-Mix Bituminous Pavement

The provisions of Subsections 703.5.1, 703.5.2 and 703.5.3 shall apply. The
several aggregate fraction for the mixture shall be sized, graded and combined in
such proportions
requirements that703.2
of Table the resulting composite
as specified blend meets one of the grading
in the Schedule.

The gradings to be used will be shown in the Special Provisions, adjusted to

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 384/437

reflect variations in aggregate densities.

5/7/2018
The ranges apply to aggregates with bulk specific gravity values that are
DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

703.8.1 Aggregate for Pavement

The in
combined several
such aggregate fractions
proportions for the
that the mixture
resulting shall be sized,
composite blendsgraded
meet and
the
respective grading requirements of Table 703.3 adjusted to reflect variation in
aggregate densities.

703.8.2 Aggregate for Top Dressing

The material for the top dressing shall consist of dry sand, stone screenings
or slag screenings so graded that at least 95 mass percent shall pass the 4.75 mm
(No. 4) sieve and not more than 40 percent shall pass the 0.300 mm (No. 50) sieve.

Table 703.2
Gradation Ranges – Hot Plant Mix Bituminous Pavements
(Mass percent passing square sieves, AASHTO T 11 and T 27)

Sieve GRADING
Designation, A B C D E F G
mm
37.5 (1-1/2 inch) 100 - - - - - -
25 ( 1 inch) 95-100 100 100 - - - -
19 (3/4 inch) 75-95 95-100 95-100 100 - 100 -
12.5 (1/2 inch) - 68-86 68-86 95-100 100 - 100
9.5 (3/8 inch) 54-75 56-78 56-78 74-92 95-100 - 95-100
4.75 (No. 4) 36-58 38-60 38-60 48-70 75-90 45-65 30-50
2.36 (No. 8) 25-45 27-47 27-47 33-53 62-82 33-53 5-15
1.18 (No. 16) - 18-37 18-37 22-40 38-58 - -
0.600 (No. 30) 11-28 11-28 13-28 15-30 22-42 - -
0.300 (No. 50) - 6-20 9-20 10-20 11-28 10-20 -
0.075 (No. 200) 0-8 0-8 4-8 4-9 2-10 3-8 2-5

703.9 Aggregate for Road Mix Bituminous Pavement

Aggregates for road mix bituminous pavement construction shall be crushed

stone, crushed slag, or crushed or natural gravel which meet the quality
requirements of AASHTO M 62-74 or M 63-74 for the specified gradation, except
that the sodium sulfate soundness loss shall not exceed 12 mass percent.
When crushed gravel is used, at least 50 mass percent of the particles
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 385/437

retained on the 2.00 mm (No. 10) sieve shall have at least one fractured face.
 Gradation shall conform to Grading F of Table 703.2.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

gravel. Only one type of aggregate shall be used on the project unless alternative
types are approved. Aggregates shall meet the quality requirements of AASHTO M

78-74.
When tested in accordance with AASHTO T 182, (ASTM D 1664) aggregate
shall have a retained bituminous film above 95 mass percent.

Aggregates which do not meet this requirement may be used for bituminous
surface treatments and seal coats provided a water resistant film.

Lightweight aggregate, if required or permitted by the Special Provisions, shall

meet the pertinent requirements of Subsection 703.5.4.

When crushed gravel is used, not less than 50 mass percent of the particles
retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have at least one fractured face.
Aggregates shall meet the gradation requirements called for in the Bid Schedule.

Table 703.3

Gradation Requirements – Cold Plant Mix Bituminous Pavement

(Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27)

Sieve Designation Bottom Wearing

(Binder) (Surface)
Standard, mm Alternate US Standard Course Course
37.5 1-1/2” 100 -
25 1” 85 – 100 -
19 ¾” 40 – 70 100
12.5 ½” 10 – 35 95 – 100
4.75 No. 4 4 – 16 15 – 40
2.36 No. 8 0–5 10 – 25
0.600 No. 30 - 4 – 13
0.300 No. 50 - 0-5

Table 703.4
Gradation Requirements for Cover Coats
(Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27)

Sieve
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 Grading designation with corresponding size 386/437

Designation No. from AASHTO M 43 (ASTM D 448) modified

 Std. mm Alt US Std A (No.5) B (No.6) C (No.7) D (No.8) E (No.9) F (No.10)
37.5 1-1/2” 100 - - - - -
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

703.11 Blotter

AASHTOAggregate for blotter

M 43 (ASTM material
D 448), shallmm
size 2.00 conform to theThe
(No. 10). gradation requirements
aggregate of
shall be free
from vegetable or other deleterious materials.

Table 703.5
Gradation Requirements for Bituminous Surface Treatments
(Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 27)

Sieve Grading designation with corresponding size

Designation No. from AASHTO M 43 (ASTM D 448) modified
Std. mm Alt US Std A (No.5) B (No.6) C (No.7) D (No.8) E (No.9) F (No.10)
37.5 1-1/2” 100 - - - - -
25 1” 90-100 100 - - - -
19 ¾” 20-25 90-100 100 - - -
12.5 ½” 0-10 20-55 90-100 100 - -
9.5 3/8” 0-5 0-15 40-70 85-100 100 100
4.75 No. 4 - 0-5 0-15 10-30 85-100 85-100

2.36
0.150 No. 100
No. 8 -- -- 0-5
- 0-10
- 10-40
- 60-100
0-10

Table 703.6

Gradation Requirements for Bituminous Preservative Treatment

Sieve Mass percent passing square mesh

Designation Sieves, AASHTO T 27
Standard mm Alternate US Standard Grading A Grading B
19 ¾” - 100
9.5 3/8” 100 -
4.75 No. 4 45 – 80 45 – 80
2.36 No. 8 28 – 64 28 – 64
0.075 No. 200 0 – 12 0 - 12

703.12 Bed Course Material

Bed course material for sidewalks, paved waterways and curbing shall consist
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 387/437

of cinders, sand, slag, gravel, crushed stone or other approved material of such
 gradation that all particles will pass through a sieve having 37.5 mm (1-1/2 inches)
5/7/2018
i g DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

703.13 Sheathing Material

Sheathing material shall conform to either (a) or (b) below:

a. Sound, durable particles of gravel, slag or crushed stone meeting the
following gradation:

Sieve Mass percent passing

75 mm (3”) 100
4.75 mm (No. 4) 0 – 10
0.075 mm (No. 200) 0–2

b. Clean noncementitious sand meeting the requirements of Subsection

703.1.2.

703.14 Aggregates for Subgrade Modification

The material shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of slag,

stone or gravel, screened or crushed to the required size and grading. The material
shall be visually free from vegetable matter and lumps or balls of clay and shall meet
the requirements for one of the gradings given in Table 703.7 whichever is called for
in the Bid Schedule.

That portion of the material passing a 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a
plasticity index of not over 6, as determined by AASHTO T 90.

Table 703.7

Grading Requirements – Aggregates for Subgrade Modification

Sieve Mass percent passing square mesh

Designation sieves using AASHTO T 27
Standard mm Alternate US Standard
75 3” 100 - -
37.5 1-1/2” - 100 -

25
4.75 1” 4
No. 30 –- 70 30 –- 70 40100
– 80
0.075 No. 200 0 - 15 0 - 15 5 – 20
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 388/437
Crushed slag shall consist of clean, tough, durable pieces of blast furnace
slag, reasonably uniform in density and quality and reasonably free from glassy
 pieces.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

That portion of the material passing a 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a
plasticity index of not over 6, as determined by AASHTO T 90.

The material shall be visually free from vegetable matter or lumps or balls of
clay and shall meet the requirements for one of the gradings given in Table 703.8 as
called for in the Bid Schedule.

Table 703.8

Gradation Requirements for Aggregates for Salt Stabilized Base Course

Sieve Mass percent passing square mesh
Designation sieves, AASHTO T 11 and T 27
Standard, mm Alternate US Standard Grading A Grading B
75 3” - -
50 2” - 100
37.5 1-1/2” - 70 – 100
25 1” 100 -
19 ¾” 70 – 100 50 – 80
9.5 3/8” 50 – 80 40 – 70
4.75 No. 4 35 – 45 30 – 60
2.00 No. 10 25 – 50 20 – 50
0.425 No. 40 15 – 30 10 – 30
0.075 No. 200 7 - 15 7 – 15

* Gradation varies with top size of material and should be based on size of largest
material used. For instance, if largest size is 50 mm (2 inches), gradation should
be under heading B; if 25 mm (1 inch), under A.

703.16 Aggregates for Emulsified Asphalt Treated Base Course

Aggregate shall consist of coarse aggregate of crushed gravel, crushed slag

or crushed stone, composed of hard, durable particles or fragments and a filler of
finely crushed stone, sand, slag or other finely divided mineral matter. The portion
of the material retained on a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be known as coarse
aggregate and that portion passing a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be known as fine

aggregate. The material shall meet one of the grading requirements of Table 703.9.
Table 703.9
Grading Requirements for Aggregates for Emulsified Asphalt Treated Base
(Mass percent passing square mesh sieves, AASHTO T 11 & T 27)
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 389/437

Sieve Designation
 Standard mm Alternate US Standard Grading A Grading B Grading C
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

If crushed gravel is used, not less than 65 mass percent of the coarse
aggregate particles retained on a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall be particles having at

least one fractured face.

Coarse aggregate shall have a percent of wear of not more than 35 at 500
revolution, as determined by AASHTO T 96.

The aggregate shall show a durability factor not less than 35 (coarse and fine)
as determined by AASHTO T 210 (Production of Plastic Fines in Aggregates).

The material shall be free of clay balls and adherent films of clay or other
matter that would prevent thorough coating with bituminous material.

ITEM 703A – MINERAL FILLER

703A.1 Description
Mineral filler shall consist of finely divided mineral matter such as rock dust,
slag dust, hydrated lime, hydraulic cement, fly ash or other suitable mineral matter.
It shall be free from organic impurities and at the time of use, shall be sufficiently dry
to flow freely and shall be essentially free from agglomerations.

703A.2 General Requirements

703A.2.1 Filler material for bituminous bases or pavements shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M 17, Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving
Mixtures.

703A.2.2 Physical Requirements

Mineral filler shall be graded within the following limits:

Sieve Maximum Perfect Passing

0.600 mm (No. 30) 100
0.300 mm (No. 50)
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 95 – 100 390/437

0.075 mm (No. 200) 70 – 100

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

703A.3 Methods of Sampling

703A.3.1 Materials in Bulk

Sampling from bins, piles or cars – A sampling tube that takes a core not less
than 25 mm (1 inch) in diameter may be used to obtain sample portions from one or
more location as required to obtain a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb). Sample

portions may be taken from holes dug into the material at 5 or more locations to
provide a field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb).

Sampling from conveyors – Sample portions shall be taken at regular intervals

during the time of movement of the materials in the unit being sampled to provide a
field sample of at least 5 kg (10 lb).

703A.3.2 Materials in Packages

From the unit to be sampled, select at least one percent of the packages at
random for sampling, but in no case shall fewer than 5 packages be selected. Take
a sample portion from a hole dug into the top of each package selected for sampling.
A sampling tube may be used that takes a core not less than 25 mm (1 inch)
diameter. Insert the tube into the package to substantially sample the entire length
of the package. Combine the sample portions taken to obtain a field sample of at
least 5 kg (10 lb).

703A.4 Shipping Samples

Mineral filler shall be shipped in a clean, moisture-proof container and

packaged securely to prevent the loss of material during handling. Reduce the field
sample to a minimum size of 2.5 kg (5 lb) to submit for testing, using the method of
quartering.

703A.5 Methods of Test

The properties enumerated in this Specification shall be determined in

accordance with the following AASHTO Method of Test:

Gradation
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 T 37 391/437

Plasticity Index T 90
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

ITEM 704 – MASONRY UNITS

704.1 Clay or Shale Brick

Brick shall conform to the requirements of one of the following specifications:

Sewer Brick -
AASHTO M 91, Grade SM
Sewer Brick -
ASTM C 32, Grade SM
Building Brick -
AASHTO M 114, Grade SW, or ASTM C 62,
Grade SW
The grade will be shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.

704.2 Concrete Brick

Concrete brick shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 55, Grade A.

704.3 Concrete Masonry Blocks

Concrete masonry blocks may be rectangular or segmented and, when
specified, shall have ends shaped to provide interlock at vertical joints.

Solid blocks shall conform with the requirements of ASTM C 139 or ASTM C
145, grade as specified. Hollow blocks shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
C 90, grade as specified.

Dimensions and tolerances shall be as individually specified on the Plans.

ITEM 705 – JOINT MATERIALS

705.1 Joint Fillers

Poured filler for joints shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 173.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 392/437

Preformed fillers for joints shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 33

 (ASTM D 994), AASHTO M 153, AASHTO M 213, AASHTO M 220, as specified,
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

705.2 Joint Mortar

Pipesand
approved joint with
mortarwater
shall as
consist of one to
necessary partobtain
Portland
the Cement
requiredand two parts
consistency.
Portland Cement and sand shall conform respectively to Section 700.1 and 703.1. If
shown in the Special Provisions, air entrainment conforming to Section 708.2 shall
be provided. Mortar shall be used within 30 minutes after its preparation.

705.3 Rubber Gaskets

Ring gaskets for rigid pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M
198. Continuous flat gaskets for flexible metal pipe shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM D 1056 with grade SCE 41 used for bands with projections or
flat bands and grade SCE 43 for corrugated bands. Gaskets thickness for bands
with projections or flat bands shall be 12.5 mm (1/2 inch) greater than the nominal
depth of the corrugation and shall be 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) for corrugated bands.

705.4 Oakum
Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipe shall be made from hemp (Cannabis
Sativa) line, or Benares Sunn fiber, or from a combination of these fibers. The
oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished and practically free from lumps, dirt
and extraneous matter.

705.5 Mortar for Masonry Beds and Joints

705.5.1 Composition

Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, masonry mortar shall be composed

of one part Portland Cement or air-entraining Portland Cement and two parts fine
aggregate by volume to which hydrated lime has been added in an amount equal to
ten (10) mass percent of the cement. In lieu of air-entraining cement, Portland
Cement may be used with an air-entraining admixture in accordance with the
applicable provisions of Item 405.

For masonry walls not exceeding 1.8 m (6 feet) in height, a mortar composed
of one part masonry cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume maybe
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 393/437

substituted for the above mixture of Portland Cement, lime and fine aggregate. For
 other construction, masonry cement may be used if and as shown on the Plans.
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Masonry cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 150 – 74

(ASTM C 91).

Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 45 (ASTM C

144).

Hydrated lime shall meet the requirements for Residue, Popping and Pitting,
and Water retention shown for Type N lime in Section 701.3 (ASTM C 207).

Water shall conform to the requirements of Item 714, Water.

Air-entraining agents shall conform to the requirements of Section 708.2

AASHTO M 154 (ASTM C 260).

705.6 Copper Water Stops or Flashings

Sheet copper for water stops of flashings shall meet the requirements of
AASHTO M 138 (ASTM B 152) for Type ETP, light cold-rolled, soft anneal, unless
otherwise specified in the Special Provisions.

705.7 Rubber Water Stops

Rubber water stops may be molded or extruded and have a uniform cross-
section, free from porosity or other defects, conforming to the nominal dimensions
shown on the Plans. An equivalent standard shape may be furnished, if approved

by the Engineer.
The water stop may be compounded from natural rubber, synthetic rubber or
a blend of the two, together with other compatible materials which will produce a
finished water stop meeting the requirements of Table 705.1. No reclaimed material
shall be used. The Contractor shall furnish a certificate from the producer to show
the general compositions of the material and values for the designated properties.
The Contractors shall also furnish samples, in length adequate for making
designated tests, as ordered by the Engineer.

705.8 Plastic Water Stops

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 394/437
Plastic water stops shall be fabricated with a uniform cross-section, free from
 porosity or other defects, to the nominal dimensions shown on the Plans. An

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

samples, in lengths adequate for making designated tests, as ordered by the

Engineer.

Table 705.1

Required Properties and Test Methods-Finished Rubber Water Stop

Property Federal Test Method Requirement

Standard No. 601
Hardness (by shore
durometer) 3021 60 – 70
Compression set 3311 Maximum 30 percent
Tensile strength 4111 Minimum 17.23 MPa
(2,500 psi)
Elongation at Breaking ASTM D 412 Minimum 450 percent
Tensile stress at 300 Minimum 6.20 MPa
percent elongation 4131 (900 psi)
Water absorption by Minimum 5 percent
mass 6631
Tensile strength after 7111 Minimum 80 percent
aging original

Table 705.2

Required Properties and Test Methods-Finished Plastic Water Stop

ASTM
Property Method Requirements
Tensile strength D 638 Minimum 9.646 MPa
(1,400 psi)
Elongation at breaking D 638 Minimum 260 percent
Hardness (shore) D 2240 60 – 75
Specific gravity (Federal test Method No. Maximum – 0.02 from

Resistance to alkali 406-5011)

D 543 manufacturer’s
Maximum value
weight
change:
- 0.10 percent to + 0.25
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
percent 395/437

Water absorption (48 hrs) D 570

 Cold bending (1) No cracking
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

1
The cold bend test will be made by subjecting a 25 x 150 x 3 mm (1 x 6 x
1/8 inch) strip of plastic water stop to a temperature of –28.8 0C (-200F) for 2
hours. The strip will immediately thereafter be bent 180 degrees around a rod
of 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) diameter by applying sufficient force to hold the sample in
intimate contact with the rod. The sample will then be examined for evidence
of cracking. At least three individual samples from each lot will be tested and
the result reported.

705.9 Hot Poured Pipe-Joint Sealing Compound

It shall meet the requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-169 for the type
and class specified.

705.10 Pipe-Joint Packing Compound

Packaging compounds for use with sealing compounds specified in Section

705.9 shall be of appropriate sizes and shall meet the requirements of Federal
Specification HH-P-117.

705.11 Preformed Plastic Sealing Compound

For concrete pipe joints, it shall meet the requirements of Federal

Specification SS-S-210.

ITEM 706 – CONCRETE, CLAY, PLASTIC AND FIBER PIPE

706.1 Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 86 (ASTM C 14)

for the specified diameters and strength classes.

706.2 Reinforced Concrete Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 170 or AASHTO M

242 (ASTM C 655) for specified diameters and strength classes.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 396/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

706.3 Perforated Concrete Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 175 for the
specified diameters and strength classes.

706.4 Drain Tile

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 178 or M 179

(ASTM C 4) for the specified material, diameters and quality classes.

706.5 Porous Concrete Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 176 (ASTM C 654)
for the specified diameters.

706.6 Vitrified Clay Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipe

Designs for fully lined or half lined pipes of the specified strength classes shall
be submitted by the manufacturer for approval. The application requirements of
AASHTO M 170 and AASHTO M 65 shall govern. Liner or liner elements, shall be
clay of first quality, sound, thoroughly and perfectly burned without warps, cracks or
other imperfections and fully and smoothly salt glazed.

706.7 Perforated Vitrified Clay Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 65, for pipe with
full circular cross-section, for the specified diameters and strength class. When

specified,
and the bell feature.
self-centering shall have integral spacer lugs to provide for an annular opening
706.8 Vitrified Clay Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 706.7 for the specified
diameters and strength classes for circular, unperforated or perforated pipe as
shown on the Plans.

706.9 Cradle Invert Clay Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 65.

706.10 Asbestos Cement Pipe

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 397/437

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 217 (ASTM C 428)
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 177 ASTM D 1861
or D 1862.

706.13 Perforated Bituminized Fiber Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Sections 706.12 for the
specified diameters. Unless otherwise specified, either Type I or Type II Couplings
may be furnished.

706.14 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 206 (ASTM C

506).

706.15 Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Strom Drain and Sewer Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 207 (ASTM C

507).

706.16 Reinforced Concrete D-load Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 242 (ASTM C

655).

706.17 Plastic and Polyethylene Corrugated Drainage Pipe or Tubing

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 252.

706.18 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains
and Sewers

These sections shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 259.

706.19 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 2751.

706.20 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Composite Sewer Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 264 (ASTM D

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 398/437

2680).
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

ITEM 707 – METAL PIPE

707.1 Cast Iron Pipe

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 64 or ASTM A 716

for the specified diameters and strength classes. Unless otherwise specified, either
smooth, corrugated or ribbed pipe may be furnished. Pipe of diameter in excess of
1.2 m (48 inches) shall conform to ANSI Standard for Cast Iron Pit Cast Pipe for
specified diameter and strength class.

707.2 Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches

707.2.1 Riveted Pipe and Pipe Arches

The conduit shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218

for the specified dimensions and thicknesses.

707.2.2 Welded Pipe and Pipe Arches

Corrugated steel pipe and pipe arches fabricated by resistance spot welding
shall comply with the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218.

707.2.3 Helical Pipe

Unperforated helically corrugated pipes shall conform to sizes shown on the

Plans and with the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218.

707.2.4 Special sections, such as elbows and fabricated flared and sections,
shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218.
Coupling bands shall conform to AASHTO M 36 and M 218, except that use
of bands with projections (dimple bands) will be limited to end sections and to pipe
laid on grades under 10 percent.

Bands of special design that engage factory reformed ends of corrugated pipe
may be used.

Steel sheets of the required compositions may be furnished with commercially

produced corrugation dimensions other than those specified in AASHTO M 36 and M
246, if shown on the Plans or approved by the Engineer.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 399/437

707.3 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe and Pipe Arches
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

the type specified. Flared end sections shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 243 for the coating specified.

The Engineer may waive the imperviousness test for coated pipe if no
separation of coating from metal is observed.

When asbestos bonded bituminous coating is specified, these requirements

shall equally apply and in addition, the special process of embedding asbestos fiber
in the molten metallic bonding medium shall be used to bond the bituminous coating.
Asbestos-bonded corrugated metal pipe shall be fabricated in accordance with
AASHTO M 36 using asbestos-bonded sheets shall be coated with a layer of
asbestos fibers pressed into the molten zinc bonding medium. Immediately after the
metallic bond has solidified, the asbestos fibers shall be thoroughly impregnated with
a bituminous saturant. The finished sheets shall be uniformly coated and free from
blisters. After fabrication, the culvert sections shall be treated as specified for either
Type A, B or C, as called for in the Bid Schedule, in accordance with AASHTO M
190. Coupling bonds shall be fully coated with bituminous material conforming to
the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 190, Type A. The use of bands with
projections (dimple bands) will be limited to end sections and to pipe laid on grades
under 10 percent.
707.4 Corrugated Iron or Steel Pipe for Underdrains

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218 for
the specified diameters and types. Galvanized metal part-circle pipe may be used if
permitted by the Special Provisions and shown in the Bid Schedule.

707.5 Bituminous Coated Iron Steel Pipe for Underdrains

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 36 and M 218 and
shall be coated with bituminous material to meet the requirements of AASHTO M
190, Type A coating, except that the minimum coating thickness shall be 0.75 mm
(0.03 inch). Coupling bands shall be fully coated. The specified minimum diameter
of perforations shall apply after coating. The Engineer may waive the
imperviousness test if no separation of coating from the metal is observed.

707.6 Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Culvert Pipe

This shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 196 and M 197.

707.7 Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Pipe for Underdrains

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 400/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

707.9 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Pipe Underdrain

This pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.6 and shall be
coated with bituminous material conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M 190,
type of coating as specified.

707.10 Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches

These conduits and bolts and nuts for connecting plates shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M 167.

707.11 Full Bituminous Coated Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches

These conduits shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.10 and shall
be coated with bituminous material conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M
243, type coating as specified.

707.12 Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe Arches and Arches

These conduits and the bolts and nuts for connecting plates shall conform to
the requirements of AASHTO M 219.

707.13 Full Bituminous Coated Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe
Arches and Arches

These conduits shall conform to the requirements of Section 707.12 and shall
be coated with bituminous materials conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M

190, type of coating as specified.

707.14 Precoated, Galvanized Steel Culverts and Underdrains

These conduits shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 245 and M

246.

707.15 Slotted Pipe

Slotted pipe shall be the angle slot pipe or the grate slot type. The type of
slotted pipe to be installed shall be at the option of the Contractor.

Slot angles for the angle slot drain shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
S 36.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 401/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

conform to the provisions in ASTM A 501. Said bolts, nuts and spacers shall be
galvanized in accordance with the provisions of AASHTO M 111.

ITEM 708 – CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE

708.1 Description

This Item specifies the classification, sampling, testing, packing and marking
of concrete admixtures. It also specifies the physical requirements for concrete with
each type of chemical admixtures.

Admixtures - A material, other than water, aggregates and hydraulic cement

(including blended cement) that is used as an ingredient of
concrete and is added to the batch in controlled amounts
immediately before or during mixing to produce some desired
modification to the properties of the concrete.
708.2 Types of Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

The concrete chemical admixture shall be classified as follows and shall

conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 194.

a. Type A – Accelerating Admixtures

An admixture that accelerates the time of setting and early strength

development of concrete.

b. Type B – Retarding Admixtures

An admixture that delays the time of setting of concrete.

c. Type C – Water-reducing Admixtures

An admixture that reduces the quantity of mixing water required to

produce concrete of a given consistency.

d. Type D – Water-reducing High Range, Admixtures

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 402/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

f. Type F – Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixtures

An admixture that decreases the quantity of mixing water required

to produce concrete of a given consistency and delays the time of setting
of concrete.

g. Type G – Water-Reducing, High Range, and Retarding Admixtures

An admixture that decreases the quantity of mixing water required

to produce concrete of a given consistency of 12 percent or greater and
delays the time of setting of concrete.

708.3 Air-Entraining Admixtures

Air-entraining admixtures shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M

154 (ASTM C 260).

708.4 Physical Requirements

The concrete in which each of the types of chemical admixtures are used
shall conform to the physical requirements given in Table 1.

Table 1 – Physical Requirements of Chemical Admixtures for ConcreteA

B B
PHYSICAL Type A Type B Type C Type D Type E Type F Type G
PROPERTY
Water Content,
percent of 95 - - 95 95 88 88
control, maximum

Time of setting,
allowable
deviation from
control, hour

Initial Minimum - 1.0 later 1.0 1.0 later 1.0 - 1.0 later
earlier earlier
Maximum 1.0 3.5 later 3.5 3.5 later 3.5 1.0 3.5 later
earlier earlier earlier earlier
nor 1.5 nor 1.5
later
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 later 403/437

Final : Minimum - - 10 - 10 - -
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

1 day - - - - - 140 125

3 days 110 90 125 110 125 125 125
7 days 110 90 100 110 110 115 115
28 days 110 90 100 110 110 110 110
6 months 100 90 90 100 100 100 100
1 year 100 90 90 100 100 100 100
Flexural Strength,
percent of
control,
C
minimum:
3 days 100 90 110 100 110 110 110
7 days 100 90 100 100 100 100 100
28 days 100 90 90 100 100 100 100
Length Change,
maximum
shrinkage
(Alternative
D
requirements)
Percent of control 135 135 135 135 135 135 135
Increase over 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010 0.010
Control
Relative durability 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
factor minimum

A
The values in the table include allowance for normal variation in test results. The
objects of the 90% compressive strength for Type B admixture is to require a
level of performance comparable to that of the reference concrete.
B
It is recommended that whenever practicable, tests may be made using cement,
pozzolan, aggregates, air-entraining admixture, and the mix proportions and
batching sequence when used in non-air-entraining and air-entrained concrete
because the specific effects produced by chemical admixtures may vary with the
properties and proportion of the other ingredients of the concrete. For instance,
types “F” and “G” admixtures may exhibit such higher water reduction in concrete
mixtures having higher cement factors than 307 + -3 kg/m3. Mixtures having a
high range water reduction generally display a higher rate of slump loss. When
high range admixtures are used to impart increased workability (15 cm to 20 cm
slump), the effect may be of limited duration, reverting to the original slump in 30
to 60 min depending on factors normally affecting rate of slump loss.
C
The compressive and flexural strength of the concrete containing the admixture
under test at any test age shall be not less 90% of that attained at any previous
test age. The objective of this limit is to require that the compressive or flexural
strength of the concrete containing the admixture under test shall not decrease
with age.
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 404/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

When the admixture is to be used in Prestressed concrete, the chloride

content of the admixture shall be stated and whether or not chloride has been added
during its manufacture.

708.5 Sampling

708.5.1 The chemical admixtures for concrete shall be sampled either by grab or
composite sampling. A grab sample is one obtained in a single operation.
A composite sample is one obtained by combining three or more grab
samples.

708.5.2 Liquid Admixtures

708.5.2.1 The grab samples taken for quality tests shall represent a unit
shipment or a single production lot. Each grab sample shall have a
volume of at least 0.5L (1 pint), a minimum of 3 grab samples shall be
taken.

708.5.2.2 Liquid admixtures

sampling. shall beshall
Grab samples agitated thoroughly
be taken immediately
from different priorand
locations to
thoroughly mixed to form the composite sample and the resultant
mixture sampled to provide for at least 4 litres for complete set.

708.5.2.3 Admixtures in bulk storage tanks shall be sampled equally from the
upper, intermediate and lower levels by means of drain cocks in the
sides of the tanks or a weighed sampling bottle fitted with a stopper
that can be removed after the bottle is lowered to the proper depth.

708.5.3 Non-liquid Admixtures

708.5.3.1 The grab samples taken shall represent not more than 2 Mg (2 tons) of
admixture and shall have a mass of at least 1 kg (2 lb). A minimum of
four grab samples shall be taken.

708.5.3.2 Composite samples shall be prepared by thoroughly mixing the grab

samples selected and the resultant mixture sampled to provide at least
2.3 kg (5 lb) for complete test.

708.6 Testing

Procedures for Proportioning of Concrete Mixtures, Tests and Properties of

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 405/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

708.7 Packing

The liquid admixtures shall be packed in 4, 20 or 200 litre containers made of

steel, plastic or other suitable packing materials. These containers shall be properly
sealed.

The non-liquid admixtures or concrete shall be packed in 25-kilogram

containers made of steel, plastic, or other suitable packing materials. These
containers shall be properly sealed.

708.8 Marking

Each container shall be marked with the following information:

a. Name, form and type of the product;

b. Net mass or volume;
c. Name and address of manufacturer and recognized trademark, if any;
d. Manufacturer’s batch number and date of manufacture
e. Made in the Philippines and,
f. Required handling procedures

ITEM 709 – PAINTS

709.1 Description

This Item covers all paint materials including Vehicles, Pigment, Pastes,
Driers, Thinners and Mixed Paints for steel and wooden structures.

709.2 Material Requirements

709.2.1 General

Paint, except, aluminum paint, shall consist of pigments of the required

fineness and composition ground to the desired consistency in linseed oil in a
suitable grinding machine, to which shall be added additional oil, thinner and drier as
required.

Aluminum paint shall consist of aluminum bronze powder or paste of the

required fineness and composition to which shall be added the specified amount of
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 406/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

curdling, livering, caking or color separation and shall be free from lumps
and skins.
b. The paint as received shall brush easily, possess good levelling properties
and shall show no running or sagging when applied to a smooth vertical
surfaces.
c. The paint shall dry to a smooth uniform finish free from roughness grit,
uneveness and other imperfections.
d. The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in three quarters filled closed
container.
e. The paint shall show no thickening, curdling, gelling or hard caking after
six (6) months storage in full, tightly covered container at a temperature of
0 0
21 C (70 F).
709.2.2 The paint shall conform to the requirements of the indicated specifications
as follows:
Red Lead Ready-Mixed Paint AASHTO M 72
Type I, II, III and IV
Aluminum Paint AASHTO M 69 Type I and II
White & Tinted Ready-Mixed Paint AASHTO M 70

Foliage Green
Black Paint for Bridge
BridgesPaint
and Timber AASHTO M 67
Structures AASHTO M 68
Basic Lead Silicon Chromate, Ready-
Mixed Primer AASHTO M 229

709.2.3 The constituents parts of the paint shall meet the following specifications:

Red Lead (97% Pb 3O4) ASTM D 83

Iron Oxide (85% Fe2O3) ASTM D 84
Aluminum Powder and Paste ASTM D 962
Magnesium Silicate ASTM D 605
Mica Pigment ASTM D 607
Titanium Dioxide ASTM D 476
Chrome Yellow ASTM D 211
Calcium Carbonate ASTM D 1199
Basic Lead-Silicon Chromate ASTM D 1638
Basic Carbonate White Lead ASTM D 81
Zinc Oxide ASTM D 79
Chrome Oxide Green ASTM D 263
Carbon Black ASTM D 561
Lampblack ASTM D 209
Prussian Blue
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 ASTM D 261 407/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

709.2.4 Drier

These specifications cover both straight oil drier (material free from resins and
“gums”), and Japan drier (material containing varnish “gums”). The drier shall be
composed of lead manganese, or cobalt, or a mixture of any of these elements,
combined with a suitable fatty oil, with or without resins of “gums” and mineral spirits
of turpentine, or a mixture of these solvents. The drier shall conform to the following
requirements:

a. Appearance – Free from sediment and suspended matter.

b. Flash Point – (Tag close cup) not less than 30 0C (860F).
c. Elasticity – The drier when flowed on metal and baked for 2 hours at
1000C (2120F) shall have an elastic film.
d. Drying – It shall mix with pure raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1 volume
of drier to 19 volumes of oil without curdling, and the resulting mixture
when flowed on glass shall dry in not more than 18 hours.
d. Color – When mixed with pure, raw linseed oil in the proportion of 1
volume of drier to 8 volumes of oil, the resulting mixture shall be darker
than a solution of 6 g of potassium dichromate in 13 cc of pure sulfuric

acid (sp. gr. 1.84).

709.3 Proportion for Mixing

It is the intent of these Specifications to provide a paint of proper brushing

consistency, which will not run, streak or sag and which will have satisfactory drying
qualities.

709.3.1 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Structural Steel

The paint shall be mixed in the proportion of 0.242 kg of aluminum powder of

paste per litre of vehicle of long oil spar varnish (2 lb/gal) producing a paint
containing 21 mass percent pigment and 79 percent vehicle. The weighed amount
of powder or paste shall be placed in a suitable mixing container and the measured
volume of vehicle then poured over it. The paste or powder shall be incorporated in
the paint by vigorous stirring with a paddle. The powder or paste will readily
disperse in the vehicle. Before removing any paint from the container, the paint
shall be thoroughly stirred to insure a uniform mixture and the paint shall be suitably
stirred during the use. The amount of paint enough for one day’s use only shall be
mixed at one time.

When two field coats of aluminum paint are specified, the first coat shall be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 408/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

709.3.2 Aluminum Paint, Field Coats on Creosoted Timber

This paint shall be mixed as specified for Aluminum Paint for Structural Steel
except that the proportions shall be 0.272 kg of aluminum powder or paste per litre of
vehicle (2-1/2 lb/gal).

Other paint composition may be used when and as stipulated in the Special
Provisions.

709.4 Containers and Markings

All paints shall be shipped in strong, substantial containers plainly marked

with mass, color and volume in litres of the paint content, a true statement of the
percentage composition of the pigment, the proportions of the pigment to vehicle, the
name and address of the manufacturers and the stencil of the authorized inspecting
agency. Any package or container not so marked will not be accepted for use under
this Specification.

ITEM 710 – REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE

710.1 Reinforcing Steel

Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of the following

Specifications:

Deformed Billet-Steel Bars AASHTO M 31 (ASTM A 615)

for Concrete Reinforcement

Deformed Steel Wire AASHTO M 225 (ASTM A 496)

for Concrete Reinforcement

Welded Steel Wire Fabric AASHTO M 55 (ASTM A 185)

for Concrete Reinforcement

Cold-Drawn Steel Wire AASHTO M 32 (ASTM A 82)

for Concrete Reinforcement

Fabricated Steel Bar or Rod Mats AASHTO M 54 (ASTM A 184)

for Concrete Reinforcement
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 409/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Bar reinforcement for concrete structures, except No. 2 bars shall be

deformed in accordance with AASHTO M 42, M 31 and M 53 for Nos. 3 through 11.

Dowel and tie bars shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 31 or

AASHTO M 42 except that rail steel shall not be used for tie bars that are to be bent
and restraightened during construction. Tie bars shall be deformed bars. Dowel
bars shall be plain round bars. They shall be free from burring or other deformation
restricting slippage in the concrete. Before delivery to the site of the work, a
minimum of one half (1/2) the length of each dowel bar shall be painted with one
coat of approved lead or tar paint.

The sleeves for dowel bars shall be metal of an approved design to cover 50
mm (2 inches), plus or minus 6.3 mm of the dowel, with a closed end, and with a
suitable stop to hold the end of the sleeve at least 25 mm (1 inch) from the end of the
dowel bar. Sleeves shall be of such design that they do not collapse during
construction.

Plastic coated dowel bar conforming to AASHTO M 254 may be used.

710.2 Wire Rope or Wire Cable

The wire rope or wire cable shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M
30 for the specified diameter and strength class.

710.3 Prestressing Reinforcing Steel

Prestressing reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of the

following Specifications:

High-tensile wire AASHTO M 204 (ASTM A 421)

High-tensile wire strand or rope AASHTO M 203 (ASTM A 416)

High-tensile alloy bars as follows:

High-tensile-strength alloy bars shall be cold stretched to a minimum of 895.7

MPa (30,000 psi). The resultant physical properties shall be as follows:

Minimum ultimate tensile

strength
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281
1000 MPa (145,000 psi) followed by 410/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Minimum modulus of elasticity 25,000,000

Minimum elongation in 20 bar

diameters after rupture 4 percent

Diameters tolerance +0.762 mm – 0.254 mm

(+0.03”-0.01”)

If shown on the Plans, type 270 k strand shall be used, conforming to

AASHTO M 203.

ITEM 711 – FENCE AND GUARDRAIL

711.1 Barbed Wire

Galvanized barbed wire of the coating class specified shall conform to the

requirements of ASTM A 121.

Aluminum coated barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A
585, with Type I (Aluminum Coated) or Type II (Aluminum Alloy) barbs at the option
of the manufacturer.

711.2 Woven Wire

Galvanized woven wire fence of the coating class specified shall conform to
the requirements of ASTM A 116. Aluminum coated woven wire fence shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM A 584.

711.3 Chain Link Fence

Chain link fabric and the required fittings and hardware shall conform to
AASHTO M 181, for the kind of metal, coating, size of wire and mesh specified.

Galvanized coiled spring steel tension wire shall be 7 (0.177 inch) gauge,
conforming to ASTM A 641 hard temper, with Class 3 coating unless otherwise
specified or shown on the drawings.

Aluminized coil spring steel tension wire shall also be 7 (0.177 inch) gauge,
hard temper, having a minimum coating mass of 0.12 kg/m 2 (0.40 oz/ft2) of
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 411/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

711.5 Timber Rail

The timber rail shall be cut from the specified grade of dry, well seasoned and
dressed timber stock of the species specified, which shall meet the applicable
requirements of AASHTO M 168.

Where preservative treatment is specified, this shall conform to the

requirements of Section 713.3.

Rustic rails shall be straight, sound and free of injurious defects and shall
have been cut from live trees not less than 30 days but not more than 1 year before
use. They shall have been stripped of bark before seasoning or shall have been
stored under water. Immediately before the logs are used in the work, all knots and
projections shall be trimmed and smooth and, if water cured, all barks shall be
peeled. Slight curvature of “wind” to give a pleasing appearance to the structure will
be permitted. Logs of only one specie shall be used in the construction of any one
continuous length of guardrail.

711.6 Fence Posts

Wood posts shall conform to the details and dimensions indicated on the
Plans. All wood posts shall be sound, seasoned wood, peeled and with ends cut
square or as indicated. The posts shall be straight and all knots trimmed flush with
surface. Where treated posts are called for, the kind and type of treatment shall
conform to that indicated on the Plans. When red cedar posts or bracing is
furnished, the requirements for peeling may be omitted.

All dimensions timber and lumber required for fences or gates shall be sound,
straight and reasonably free from knots, splits and shakes. It shall be of the species
and grades indicated on the Plans and shall be dressed and finished on four sides.

Concrete posts shall be made of concrete conforming to the specified

requirements of concrete, for the class specified, and shall contain steel
reinforcement as shown on the Plans, conforming to the requirements of Item 710,
Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope.

Steel posts for line-type fencing shall conform to ASTM A 702.

Steel posts shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 111 except
that tubular steel posts shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 120.
Fittings, hardware and other appurtenances not specifically covered by the Plans
and Specifications, shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 120 and shall be
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 412/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

711.7 Guardrail Post

Guardrail post shall conform to the applicable standards contained in

AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA “A Guide to Standardized Highway Barrier Rail Hardware”.

711.8 Guardrail Hardware

Guardrail hardware shall conform to the applicable standards contained in

AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA “A Guide to Standardized Highway Barrier Rail Hardware”.

711.9 Box Beam Rail

Steel box rail elements shall conform to the applicable standards contained in
AASHTO-AGC-ARTBA” Guide to Standardized Highway Barrier Rail Hardware”.

ITEM 712 – STRUCTURAL METAL

712.1 Structural Steels

712.1.1 General

Steel shall be furnished according to the following Specifications. Unless

otherwise specified, structural carbon rivet steel shall be furnished.

712.1.2 Structural Steel

a. Carbon Steel. Unless otherwise specified, structural carbon steel for

riveted, bolted or welded construction shall conform to Structural Steel,
AASHTO M 183.

b. Eyebars. Steel for eyebars shall be of a weldable grade. This grade

includes structural steel conforming to: Structural Steel, AASHTO M 183;
Highway Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi)
Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222 (ASTM
A 588 with Supplementary Requirement SI of AASHTO M 222 mandatory).

712.1.3 High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 413/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

712.1.4 High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel for Welding

It shall conform to:

a. High-Strength Low Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality,

Grade 50, AASHTO M 223 (ASTM A 572 with supplementary
requirements S2 of AASHTO M 223 mandatory).

b. High-Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel with 344.5 MPa (50,000 psi)
Minimum Yield Point to 100 mm (4 inches) thick, AASHTO M 222 (ASTM
A 588 in Supplementary Requirement S1 of AASHTO M 222 mandatory).

712.1.5 High-Strength Structural Steel for Riveted or Bolted Construction

It shall conform to:

a. High-Strength Low Alloy Columbium – Vanadium Steel of Structural

Quality, and AASHTO M 223.

b. High-Strength
Minimum Yield Low
PointAlloy Structural
to 100mm Steelthick,
(4 inches) with AASHTO
344.5 MPa (50,000 psi)
M 222.

712.1.6 High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate

It shall conform to:

a. High-Yield Strength, Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, suitable

for welding, ASTM A 514.

b. High-Strength Alloy Steel Plates, Quenched and Tempered for pressure

vessels, ASTM A 517.
c. Quenched and tempered alloy steel structural shapes and seamless
mechanical tubing meeting all the mechanical and chemical requirements
of A 514/A 517 steel, except that the specified maximum tensile strength
may be 964.6 MPa (140,000 psi) for structural shapes and 999.05 MPa
(145,000 psi) for seamless mechanical tubing shall be considered as A
514/A 517 steel.
712.1.7 Structural Rivet Steel

It shall conform to Steel Structural Rivets AASHTO M 228, Grade I (ASTM A

502, Grade I).
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 414/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

712.1.9 High-Strength Bolts

Bolts, nuts circular washers shall conform to High-Strength Bolts for Structural
Steel Joints, including Suitable Nuts and Plain Hardened Washer, AASHTO M 164
(ASTM A 325).

High-strength bolts for structural steel joints including suitable nuts and plain
hardened washers shall conform to either AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) or
AASHTO M 253. When M 164 type 3 bolts are specified, they along with suitable
nuts and washers shall have an atmospheric corrosion resistance approximately two
times that of carbon steel with copper.

Bolts and nuts manufactured to AASHTO M 164 (ASTM A 325) are identified
by proper marking as specified on the top of the bolt heads and on one face of the
nuts for three different types.

Bolts manufactured to AASHTO M 253 shall be identified by marking on the

top of the head with the symbol A 490 and the nuts shall be marked on one face with
the legend “2H” or “DH”.

Bolt and nut dimensions shall conform to the dimensions shown in Table
712.1 and to the requirements for Heavy Hexagon Structural Bolts and for Heavy
Semi-Finished Hexagon Nuts given in ANSI Standard B 18.2.1 and B 18.2.2,
respectively.

Circular washers shall be flat and smooth and their nominal dimensions shall
conform to the dimensions given in Table 712.2 except that for lock pin and collar
fasteners, flat washers need not be used, unless slotted or oversized holes are
specified.

Bevelled washers for American Standard Beams and Channels or other

sloping faces shall be required and shall be square or rectangular, shall taper in
thickness, and shall conform to the dimensions given in Table 712.2.

When necessary, washer may be clipped on one side to a point not closer
than 0.875 (7/8) of the bolt diameter from the center of the washer.

Other fasteners or fasteners assemblies which meet the Materials,

Manufacturing, and Chemical Composition requirements of AASHTO M 164 (ASTM
A 325) or AASHTO M 253 and which meet the Mechanical Property requirements of
the same specification in full-size tests and which have body diameter and bearing
areas under the head and nut, or other equivalent, not less than those provided by a
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 415/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Subject to the approval of the Engineer, high strength steel lock-pin and collar
fasteners may be used as an alternate for high strength bolts or rivets as shown on
the Plans. The shank and head of the high strength steel lock-pin and collar
fasteners shall meet the requirements of the preceding paragraph. Each fasteners
shall provide a solid shank body of sufficient diameter to provide tensile and shear
strength equivalent to or greater than the bolt or rivet specified, shall have a cold
forged head on one end, of type and dimensions as approved by the Engineer, a
shank length suitable for material thickness fastened, locking grooved, break neck
groove and pull grooves (all annular grooves) on the opposite end. Each fasteners
shall provide a steel locking collar of proper size for shank diameter used which by
means of suitable installation tools, is cold swaged into the locking grooves forming a
head for the grooved end of the fastener after the pull groove section has been
removed. The steel locking collar shall be a standard product of an established
manufacturer of lock-pin and collar fasteners, as approved by the Engineer.

712.1.10 Copper Bearing Steels

When copper bearing steel is specified, the steel shall contain not less than
0.2 percent of copper.

712.2 Forgings

Steel forgings shall conform to the specifications for Steel Forgings, Carbon
and Alloy, for General Industrial Use, AASHTO M 102, (ASTM A 668, Classes C, D,
F & G).

712.3 Pins and Rollers

Pins and rollers more than 228.6 mm (9 inches) in diameter shall be annealed
carbon-steel forgings conforming to AASHTO M 102, Class C1.

Pins and rollers 228.6 mm (9 inches) or less in diameter shall be either

annealed carbon-steel forgings conforming to AASHTO M 102 (ASTM A 668), Class
C1 or cold finished carbon-steel shafting conforming to AASHTO M 169, grade 1016
to 1030 (ASTM A 108) inclusive, with a minimum Rockwell Scale B Hardness of 85.
Material not meeting the specifications for hardness maybe accepted provided it
develops a tensile strength of 482.3 MPa (70,000 psi) and a yield point of 248.04
MPa (36,000 psi).

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 416/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Table 712.1 – Nominal Bolt and Nut Dimensions

Heavy Hexagon Structural Heavy Semi-Finished
Bolts Hexagonal Nuts

Nominal Dimensions in mm (inches) Dimensions in mm (inches)

Bolt Size Width of Height Thread Width
(Diameter) Head Across of Length Across Height
mm (inch) Flats Head Flats
12 (1/2) 21 (7/8) 7 (5/16) 25 (1) 21 (7/8) 12 (31/64)
15 (5/8) 26 (1-1/16) 9 (25/64) 31 (1-1/4) 26 (1-1/6) 15 (39/64)
18 (3/4) 31 (1-1/4) 11 (15/32) 34 (1-3/8) 31 (1-1/4) 18 (47/64)
21 (7/8) 35 (1-7/16) 13 (35/64) 37 (1-1/2) 35 (1-7/16) 21 (55/64)
25 (1) 40 (1-5/8) 15 (39/64) 43 (1-3/4) 40 (1-5/8) 24 (63/64)
28 (1-1/8) 45 (1-13/16) 17 (11/16) 50 (2) 45 (1-13/16) 27 (1-7/64)
31 (1-1/4) 50 (2) 19 (25/32) 50 (2) 50 (2) 30 (1-7/32)
34 (1-3/8) 54 (2-3/16) 21 (27/32) 56 (2-1/4) 54 (2-3-16) 33 (1-11/32)
37 (1-1/2) 59 (2-3/8) 23 (15/16) 56 (2-1/4) 59 (2-3/8) 36 (1-15/32)

Table 712.2 – Nominal Washer Dimensionsa

Square or Rectangular Bevelled

Circular Washer Washers for American Standard Beams
and Channels
Bolt Size Nominal Nominal
Diameter Outside Diameter Thickness Minimum Mean Slope or
b
mm (inch) Diameter of Hole Minimum Maximum Side Thickness Taper in
mm (inch) Dimension Thickness
12 (1/2) 26 (1-1/16) 13 (17/32) 2 (0.177) 4 (0.177) 43 (1-3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
15 (5/8) 32 (1-5/16) 16 (21/32) 3 (0.122) 4 (0.177) 43 (1-3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
19 (3/4) 36 (1-15/32) 20 (13/16) 3 (0.122) 4 (0.177) 43 (1-3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
22 (7/8) 43 (1-3/4) 23 (15/16) 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 43 (1-3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
25 (1) 50 (2) 26 (1-1/16) 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 43 (1-3/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
28 (1-1/8) 56 (2-1/4) 31 (1-1/4) 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 43 (2-1/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
31
34 (1-1/4)
(1-3/8) 62
68 (2-1/2)
(2-3/4) 34
37 (1-3/8)
(1-1/2) 3
3 (0.136)
(0.136) 4
4 (0.177)
(0.177) 43
43 (2-1/4)
(2-1/4) 7
7 (5/16)
(5/16) 40
40 (1.6)
(1.6)
37 (1-1/2) 75 (3) 40 (1-5/8) 3 (0.136) 4 (0.177) 43 (2-1/4) 7 (5/16) 40 (1.6)
c
43 (1-3/4) 84 (3-3/8) 46 (1-7/8) 4(0.178) 7(0.28) - - -
50 (2) 93 (3-3/4) 53 (2-1/8) 4 (0.178) 7 (0.28) - - -
Over 50 2D-12 (1/2) D+3 (1/8) 6(0.24) 8 (0.34) - - -
to 100 (2
to 4) incl.

a
Dimensions in mm (inches)
b
May be exceeded by 6 mm (1/4 inch)
c
4 mm (3/16 in) nominal
d
6 mm (1/4 in) nominal

712.4 Castings
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 417/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

Gray Iron Castings – AASHTO M 105 Class No. 30 shall be furnished unless
otherwise specified. Iron castings shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions,
free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other defects in
position affecting their strength and value for the service intended. Casting shall be
boldly filleted at angles and the arises shall be sharp and perfect. All castings must
be sandblasted or otherwise effectively cleaned of seals and sand so as to present a
smooth, clean and uniform surface.

Malleable Castings – ASTM A 47. Grade No. 35018 shall be furnished

unless otherwise specified. The requirements for workmanship, finishing, and
cleaning shall be the same as above for gray iron castings.

712.5 Steel Grid Floors

All steel for grid floors shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 183 or
AASHTO M 222. Steel grid floors can be weathering steel, galvanized or painted.
Unless the floors are of weathering steel or galvanized, the material shall have a
minimum copper content of 0.2%.

Unless painting of floors is specified in the Special Provisions, open type

floors shall be galvanized.

712.6 Steel Pipe

It shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 53, ASTM A 120. AASHTO M

222 and ASTM A 618, as shown on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.

Standard weight pipe shall be furnished unless otherwise shown on the Plans
or in the Special Provisions.

712.7 Galvanized Metal

When galvanized structural steel shapes, plates, bars and their products are
specified, they shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO
M 111.

712.8 Sheet Lead

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 418/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

712.9 Welded Stud Shear Connectors

Shear connector studs shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 169

(ASTM A 108) for cold finished carbon steel bars and shafting, cold drawn bar,
Grades 1015, 1018 or 1020, either semi-skilled or fully-skilled. If flux retaining caps
are used, the steel for the caps shall be of a low carbon grade suitable for welding
and shall comply with ASTM A 109 for cold rolled carbon steel strip.

Tensile properties as determined by tests of bar stock after drawing or of

finished studs shall conform to the following requirements:

Tensile strength (minimum) 413.4 MPa (60,000 psi)

Yield strength* (minimum) 344.5 MPs (50,000 psi)
Elongation (minimum) 20 percent in 50 mm (2 in)
Reduction in area (minimum) 50 percent
* As determined by 0.2 percent offset method.

Tensile properties shall be determined in accordance with applicable sections

of ASTM A 370 for mechanical testing of steel products. Tensile tests of finished

studs shall similar

dimensions be made on studs
to those shown welded
in Tableto test plates using a test fixture with
712.3.

In fracture occurs outside the middle half of the gage length, the test shall be
repeated.

Finished studs shall be of uniform quality and conditions, free from injurious
laps, fins, seams, cracks, twists, bends or other injurious defects. Finish shall be
produced by cold drawing, cold rolling or machining.

The studs shall conform to the dimensions given in Table 712.3.

The Contractor shall furnish the manufacturer’s certification that the studs as
delivered are in accordance with the material requirements of this Item. Certified
copies of in-plant quality control test reports shall be furnished to the Engineer upon
request.
Table 712.3 – Welded Stud Shear Connector
Standard Dimensions and Tolerances mm (inches)

Shank Head
Diameter (c) Length* (L) Diameter (H) Thickness (T)
19.05 + 0.00 101.6 + 1.575 (+0.062) 31.75 + 0.40 9.53
(3/4) - 0 381 (4) – 3 175 (1-1/4) ± (1/64) (3/8) min
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 419/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

ITEM 713 – TREATED AND UNTREATED TIMBER

713.1 General Requirements

713.1.1 Timber

It shall be of the species specified on the Plans. Unless otherwise noted on

the Plans or in the Special Provisions only the best grade shall be used. It shall be
free from loose knots, splits, worn holes, decay, warp, ring separation or any defects
which will impair its strength or render it unfit for its intended use. Any specie
specified
available, on the Plans
a specie may be used
of equivalent for and
strength untreated timber
durability and used
maybe if thatif authorized
specie is not
by
the Engineer. If the timber is to be treated, only those species shall be used which
are known to posses properties which make them favorable to treatment.

713.1.2 Paints

When painting of timber is required, the paint shall conform to the

requirements of Item 709, Paints.

713.1.3 Preservatives

It shall be creosote oil or creosote-petroleum oil blend as called for on the

Plans or by the Special Provisions and shall conform to the Specification for timber
preservative of AASHTO M 133. When timber is intended for marine use, the
creosote petroleum oil blend shall not be used.

713.2 Untreated Structural Timber and Lumber

Structural timber, lumber and piling shall conform to the applicable

requirements of AASHTO M 168 or equivalent. No boxed heart pieces of Douglas
fir or redwood shall be used in outside stringers, floor beams, caps, posts, sills or
rail posts. Boxed heart pieces are defined as timber so sawed that any point in the
length of a sawed piece, the pith lies entirely inside the four faces.

Yard lumber shall be of the kinds and grade called for on the Plans. Round
poles and posts shall be of the kinds indicated on the Plans.

713.3 Treated Structural Timber and Lumber

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 420/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

ITEM 714 – WATER

714.1 Description

This Item covers criteria for acceptance of Questionable Water either natural
or wash water for use in concrete.

714.2 Requirements

The mixing water shall be clear and apparently clean. If it contains

quantities or substances that discolor it or make it smell or taste unusual or

objectionable,
concrete madeorwithcause
it (orsuspicion, it shall not
other information) be used
indicated unless
that service
it is not records
injurious of
to the
quality, shall be subject to the acceptance criteria as shown in Table 714.1 and
Table 714.2 or as designated by the purchaser.

When wash water is permitted, the producer will provide satisfactory proof or
data of non-detrimental effects if potentially reactive aggregates are to be used.
Use of wash water will be discontinued if undesirable reactions with admixtures or
aggregates occur.

Table 714.1
Acceptance Criteria For Questionable Water Supplies

Limits
Compressive strength, min. %
Control at 7 days 90
Time of Setting deviation from control from 1:00 earlier to 1:30 later
Time of Setting (Gillmore Test)
Initial No marked change
Final Set No marked change
Appearance Clear
Color Colorless
Odor Odorless
Total Solids 500 parts/million max.
PH value 4.5 to 8.5

Table 714.2
Chemical Limitation for Wash Water

Limits
Chemical Requirements, Minimum
http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 421/437
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

1. Prestressed Concrete 0.06 percent

2. Conventionally reinforced concrete
in a moist environment and exposed
to chloride 0.10 percent
3. Conventionally reinforced concrete
in a moist environment but not
exposed to chloride 0.15 percent
4. Above ground building construction
where the concrete will stay dry No limit for corrosion

Sulfate as SO4, ppm 3000

Alkalies as (Na
Total Solids,
2O + 0.658 K2O), ppm
ppm 600
50000
A
Wash water reused as mixing water in concrete may exceed the listed
concentrations of sulfate if it can be shown that the concentration calculated in
the total mixing water, including mixing water on the aggregate and other
sources, does not exceed that stated limits.

Water will be tested in accordance with, and shall meet the suggested
requirements of AASHTO T 26.

Water known to be of potable quality may be used without test.

ITEM 715 – GEOTEXTILES

715.1 Description

This Item covers geotextile fabrics for use in subsurface drainage, hydraulic
filter, erosion control, sediment control, pavement structures as a waterproofing and
stress relieving membrane, and as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of
dissimilar materials such as foundations and select fill materials.

715.2 Physical and Chemical Requirements

Fibers used in the manufacture of geotextiles, and the threads used in joining
geotextiles by sewing, shall consist of long-chain synthetic polymers, composed of
at least 85 percent by mass polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamids. They shall be
formed into a network such that the filaments or yarns rertain dimensional stability
relative to each other, including selvedges. These materials shall conform to the

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 422/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

715.4 Certification

715.4.1 Manufacturer’s Certificate

The manufacturer shall file with the purchaser a certificate stating the name
of the manufacturer, the chemical composition of the filaments or yarns, and other
pertinent information so as to fully describe the geotextile. The manufacturer shall
include in the certificate a guarantee stating that the geotextile that is furnished
meets the requirements of the specification. The certificate shall be attested to by
a person having legal authority to bind the company. Either mismarking or
misrepresentation by the manufacturer shall be reason to discontinue acceptance

under these
regarding thespecifications.
discontinuance ofNotice sent towill
acceptance thebemanufacturer bybe
considered to thenotice
purchaser
to all
wholesalers, jobbers, distributors, agents and other intermediaries handling the
manufacturer’s product.

715.5 Quality Control

The geotextile manufacturer is responsible for establishing and maintaining a

quality control program so as to assure compliance with the requirements of this
specification.

715.6 Shipment and Storage

715.6.1 During periods of shipment and storage, the fabric shall be protected
from direct sunlight, ultra-violet rays, temperatures greater than 60 0C (1400F), mud,
dust, and debris. To the extent possible, the fabric shall be maintained wrapped in
a heavy-duty protective covering. Each shipping document shall include a notation
certifying that the geotextile is in accordance with the manufacturer’s certificate and
guarantee previously filed with the purchaser.

715.6.2 Product Marking

Label the fabric and its container with the manufacturer’s name fabric type or
trade name, lot number and quantity.

715.7 Installation
715.7.1 Separation Geotextile

The geotextile shall be unrolled as smoothly as possible on the prepared

subgrade in the direction of construction traffic. Adjacent geotextile rolls shall be

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 423/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

715.7.2 Drainage Geotextile

In trenches, after placing the backfill material, the geotextile shall be folded
over the top of the filter material to produce a minimum overlap of 12 inches for
trenches greater than 12 inches wide. In trenches less than 12 inches in width, the
overlap shall be equal to the width of the trench. The geotextile shall then be
covered with the subsequent course. Successive sheets of geotextile shall be
overlapped a minimum of 12 inches in the direction of flow.

715.7.3 Erosion Control Geotextile

Theby
approved geotextile shall beThe
the Engineer. placed and anchored
geotextile on a smooth
shall be placed in suchgraded surface
a manner that
placement of the overlying materials will not excessively stretch or tear the fabric.
Anchoring of the terminal ends of the geotextile shall be accomplished through the
use of key trenches or aprons at the crest and toe of slope. In certain applications
to expedite construction, 18 inches long anchoring pins placed on 2 to 6 feet
centers depending on the slope of the covered area have been used successfully.

715.7.4 Paving Fabric

The fabric shall be placed into the asphalt sealant with minimum wrinkling
prior to the time the asphalt has cooled and lost tackiness. As directed by the
Engineer, wrinklers or folds in excess of 1 inch shall be slit and laid flat. Brooming
and/or pneumatic rolling will be required to maximize fabric contact with the
pavement surface. Overlap of fabric joints shall be sufficient to ensure full closure
of the joint, but should not exceed 6 inches. Transverse joints shall be lapped in
the direction of paving to prevent edge pickup by the paver. A second application
of asphalt sealant to fabric overlaps will be required if in the judgment of the
Engineer additional asphalt sealant is needed to ensure proper bonding of the
double fabric layer.

715.7.5 Geotextile Silt Fence

Fence construction shall be adequate to handle stress from sediment

loading. Geotextile at the bottom of the fence shall be buried a minimum of 6
inches in aand
backfilled trench
the so
soilthat no flow can
compacted overpass
the under the barrier.
geotextile. FenceThe trench
height shall
shall be be
as
specified by the Engineer but in no case shall exceed 36 inches above ground
surface. The geotextile shall be spliced together only at a support post with a
minimum 6 inches overlap.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 424/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

715.8 Method of Measurement

715.8.1 The geotextile shall be measured by the number of square meters from
the pavement lines shown on the plans, or from the pavement lines established in
writing by the Engineer.

715.8.2 Temporary silt fence will be measured in linear meter.

715.8.3 Removed sediment will be measured by the cubic meter.

715.8.4 Excavation, backfill, bedding, and cover material are separate pay items.

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 425/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 426/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 427/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om
Table 2 Construction Survivability Levels

Site Soil CBR Installation <1 1-2 >2

Equipment Ground Contract

Pressure (KPa) >345 <345 >345 <345 >345 <345

Cover Thickness (mm)1

(Compacted)

1022,3 NR NR H H M M
152 NR NR H M M M
305 NR H M M M M
457 H M M M M M

H = High
M = Medium
NR = Not recommended
1
Maximum aggregate size not to exceed one-half the compacted cover thickness
2
For low volume unpaved road (ADT<200 vehicles)
3
The 102 mm minimum cover is limited to existing road bases intended for use in
new construction

Table 3 Recommended Overlaps

Soil Strength Overlap Overlap

(CBR) Unsewn (mm) (mm)

Less than 1 - 229

1-2 965 203
2-3 762 76
3 and above 610 -

715.9 Basis of Payment

The quantities determined as provided above shall be paid for at the contract
price per unit of measurement, respectively, for each pay item listed below.

Payment shall be made under :

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 428/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 429/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 430/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 431/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 432/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 433/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 434/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 435/437

Table 1 – Physical Rtequirement1,.1A

 A P P L I C A T I O N
5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om 2
Subsurface Sediment Control Erosion Control Hydraulic Filter Separation
2
Drainage
Wire Self-
Property Unit Test Method Class Class Fence Supported Class Class Unpro- Protected Paving2,11 High Medium
A3 B4 Supported A9 B10 tected Surviva- Surviva-
bility bility
Level Level
Grab Tensile N ASTM D 4632 800 355 4002 4002 890 400 - - 355 1200/800 800/510
Length ASTM D 1682 785 353
Elongation Percent ASTM D 4632 - - - 50% 15 15 - - 50% @ 50 % 50 %
ASTM D 1682 Max. @ - - Break  50  50
200 N percent12 percent12
Seam Strength5 N ASTM D 4632 710 310 - - 800 355 - - - 1067/710 710/465
Puncture N ASTM D 4833 355 110 - - 355 175 - 445/335 310/175
Strength ASTM D 751-79 353 108 -

Burst Strength KPa ASTM D 3786 2000 900 - - 2220 965 - - -

ASTM D 751-79 2000 900 -
Trapezoid Tear N ASTM D 4533 220 110 - - 220 130 - 445/335 310/175
ASTM D 1117 216 108 -
Permeability6 (K) cm/sec ASTM D 4491 K K - - K K - - - K K
Fabric Fabric Fabric Fabric Fabric Fabric
     

K Soil K Soil K Soil K Soil K Soil K Soil

Apparent (US Std.) ASTM D 4751 Notes Notes .848 Max .848 Max Notes Notes - - - Notes Notes
Opening Size 7 & 7A 7 & 7A 7 & 7A 7 & 7A 7 & 7A 7 & 7A
(AOS)
Permitivity Sec.-1 ASTM D 4491 - - .012,8 .012,8 - - - - - - -
Ultraviolet (Percent ASTM D 4355 70 70 70 70 70 70 - - - 70 70
Degradation Retained @150 @150 @150 @150 @150 @150 @150 @150
Strength) h h h h h h h h
Asphalt L/m2 Appendix XI - - - - - - - - 0.9 - -
Retention
o
Melting Point C ASTM D 276 - - - - - - - - 150 - -

421

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 436/437

5/7/2018 DPW H Blue Book - slide pdf.c om

http://slide pdf.c om/re a de r/full/dpwh-blue -book-559a bba c 69281 437/437